Home

2711E-819, PanelBuilder 1400e Software for Windows User Manual

1. Key Character Key Character ALT 019 ALT 020 EN ALT 021 ALT 023 ALT 024 ALT 025 ALT 026 ALT 029 ALT 030 ALT 031 ALT 0128 ALT 0135 LI ALT 0129 ALT 0136 a ALT 0130 ALT 0137 ALT 0131 ALT 0138 Publication 2711E 819 J uly 1997 The Extended Character Set B 3
2. Key Character Key Character ALT 0226 L ALT 0233 ALT 0227 ALT 0234 ALT 0228 ALT 0235 ALT 0229 ALT 0236 ALT 0230 p ALT 0237 i ALT 0231 ALT 0238 ALT 0232 4 ALT 0239 imn ALT 0240 m ALT 0248 MEN ALT 0241 ALT 0249 EN Publication 2711E 819 J uly 1997 The Extended Character Set B 9 Key Character Key Character ALT 0242 ALT 0250 oO 41 ALT 0243 ALT 0251 ALT 0244 ALT 0252 ALT 0245 ALT
3. Key Character Key Character ALT 0171 ALT 0178 ALT 0172 l ALT 0179 ALT 0173 i ALT 0180 ALT 0174 ALT 0181 3 ALT 0175 ALT 0182 1 ALT 0176 ALT 0183 T ALT 0184 ALT 0191 ALT 0185 ALT 0192 L ALT 0186 ALT 0193 Publication 2711E 819 uly 1997 B 6 The Extended Character Set Key Character Key Character ALT 0187 ALT 0194 AL
4. Key Character Key Character NM ALT 0132 ALT 0139 ALT 0133 ALT 0140 ALT 0134 ALT 0141 ALT 0142 ALT 0143 H ROM il ALT 0144 ALT 0151 NN ALT 0145 L ALT 0152 ALT 0146 ALT 0153 n bi ALT 0147 ALT 0154 u Publication 2711E 819 J uly 1997 B 4 The Extended Character Set Key Character Key Character E NN ALT 0148 ALT 0155 NN ALT 0156 ALT 0163 uu ALT 0157 ALT 0164 n 4 ALT 0158 ALT 0165 H ALT 0159 ALT 0166 NN m ALT 0160 a ALT 0167 i ALT 0161 ALT 0168 ALT 0162 ALT 0169 ALT 0170 ALT 0177 Publication 2711E 819 J uly 1997 The Extended Character Set B 5
5. Meters Typa r Lacio iu Trencher Fipqunri Ue erred Transler Sintow mnga Specifying the Pass Through Network Type Remote I O Pass Through allows you to download the Remote I O application file without connecting the serial cable between the PanelView terminal and the development computer This means you don t have to bring the development computer from terminal to terminal to perform direct downloading You also don t have to switch the terminal to Configure mode See Chapter 15 Transferring Applications for more information about performing Remote I O Pass Throughs Defining Communications 5 5 To define the Pass Through network type 1 Choose the Network File Transfer tab in the Configure Communication Setup dialog box 2 In the Pass Through Network Type drop down list select the appropriate Pass Through ControlNet e DH Ethernet 1 nesdipurn Communication Setup DIL DD 888 fat Trarizisr Dnis 7 Specifying the PanelView Location Routing Address If you are going to download the application to the PanelView terminal using Remote I O Pass Through you should specify the station address of the programmable controller the Panel View terminal is attached to This address allows PanelBuilder to locate the Panel View te
6. 2 12 Understanding Addressing 2 12 Understanding Rack Assignments 2 13 Understanding Module Groups 2 14 Understanding Shared Racks 2 15 Understanding Full and Listen Only Access 2 16 Table of Contents toc iii Planning Rack Assignments 2 16 Discrete 1 0 Addresses 2 17 Block Transfer File 0 55 5 2 17 Determining Rack Size and Block Transfer File Requirements 2 18 Reducing PLC Addressing Requirements 2 18 Planning 0 55 5 2 19 Using Worksheets to Plan Addresses 2 19 The Remote I O Tags 2 21 Recording Object Information 2 21 Recording Tag and Expression Information 2 22 Recording the 55 2 27 The Discrete 1 0 Usage Worksheet 2 28 The Block Transfer File 1 0 Usage Worksheet 2 29 The Rack Assignments Worksheet 2 31 Recording the PLC Scanner Type 2 31 Selecting the 2 32 Assigning ROCKS 2 32 The Block Transfer File Worksheet 2 33 Assigning Pass Through
7. P 6 Conventions 05825555 e dunk wed paw d doa mw dw P 7 GONVENUONG sd c deus draco P 7 Mouse Conventions P 7 Selection Conventions P 7 Selection Conventions in Dialog Boxes P 8 Key eee ddd a 9 Command Conventions P 9 Before YOU BEJN 2s dai ex eds e e Ub cuo ERE RR P 10 Technical Support Services P 10 Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 toc ii Table of Contents Introduction to PanelBuilder Planning Applications Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Chapter 1 PanelBuilder Components 1 1 What Are You Building 1 2 Version Compatibility 1 2 Required Equipment 1 3 PanelBuilderSoftware 1 3 Panelbuilder Transfer Utility 1 3 PanelView Terminal 1 3 Transferring or Installing the 1 4 Programmable Controllers 1 5 Programmable Controller Software andLogic 1 6 D nupta 2554255 wd ace d CERO n d 1 6 Serial Upload Download Cable RS 232 1 6
8. 13 6 Working with the Information Chapter 14 Message Window About the Information Message Window 14 1 Using the Information Message Window in the Terminal 14 2 Configuring the Information Message Window 14 3 Transferring Applications Chapter 15 About Transferring Applications 15 1 Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Sample Worksheets The Extended Character Set Addressing Syntax Table of Contents toc xiii Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C PLC Addressing Syntax C 1 C 1 PLC 3 Data Table Sections C 2 PLC 3 Timers and Counters C 2 PLC 5 Data C 3 PLC 5 Binary Files Optional Syntax C 3 PLC 5 VO and Status 4 PLC 5 Timers Counters and Control Files 4 PLC 5 Enhanced 1 0 and Status Files C 5 PLC 5 Enhanced Binary Integer BCD ASCII Float and String Files C 5 PLC 5 Enhanced Binary Files Optional Syntax C 6 PLC 5 Enhanced Timer Counter Control SFC Status Message PID Block Transfer and Token Data Files C 6 SLC Addressing Syntax C 7 SLC 5 Enhanced 1 0 Files
9. This menu Or this toolbar Does this command icon Undo mi Undoes the most recent action or series of actions Redo Redoes actions that you undid using the Undo command Cut Cuts the selected block of cells records or columns Copy Copies the selected block of cells records or columns Paste Pastes the previously cut or copied block of cells records or columns into a screen area Duplicate Duplicates the selected record or block of records Delete Deletes the selected record or block of records Insert Inserts a blank record between existing records Fill Forward Copies identical data forward into the selected area Sort or Arranges the records alphabetically Sort Messages 8 numerically supported in the Node Rack and Block editors supported in the Rack and Block editors All editors Messages only Working with Editors 4 7 Using the Undo and Redo Commands Messages Only Before you begin creating or editing records you should know how to use the Undo and Redo commands Use these commands any time you create or edit a record and then decide that you want to reverse your actions The Sort command is the only operation you can t undo When you undo an operation and then change your mind you can reverse your action using the Redo command You can use the Redo command as many times as you used the Undo command When you move the pointer over the Undo or Redo
10. 6 10 Moving Through the Spreadsheet 6 10 Resizing Columns and ROWS 6 10 Adding Tag WEM 6 10 Duplicating a 6 11 Editing TS aai eoi a obs CORR RD Wadd ae 6 11 Renaming a Tag orden 6 11 Deleting avec hod sews rani cad 6 11 Working in Multiple Editors 6 12 Configuring Tag 6 13 Configuring an Analog Tag 6 13 Conngundga Digital Tag seid des RE 6 16 Configuring a S IU TAD tis 6 17 configuring a Block Tag Lacs Lese EX EP ESAE 6 18 Specifying a Data 50 duoc uoi EC 6 20 Device Data SOUICB 2 UAE EE CER 6 20 Remote l D Data SOUICB een E R 6 21 Relaxed 6 21 Specifying Device as the Data Source 6 21 Specifying Remote I O as the Data Source 6 23 Other Methods of Creating Tags 6 23 Creating Tags as Needed 6 23 Creating Expressions Table of Contents toc vii Using the Tag Usage 6 25 Filtering mer UT 6 26 Searching for Text
11. Click the arrow to open a drop down list Apglicoian Typa of options Press and silicaiean File underlined letter to select the option Press ALT and the down arrow J to open the drop down list Morse as and up Lnedigurn Communication Setup Click the pointer to select the desired tab Poire Leceion Pesutreg Addis Clickin the field and begin typing Inhibit Trencher Fipqunri Ue erred Transler ngad 7 To assign an address click an option to select it and then click Assign Tag Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Preface P 9 The following shortcut keys allow you to complete dialog boxes faster This key or key Does this combination TAB Moves the cursor to the next field option or command button SHIFT TAB Moves the cursor to the previous field option or command button ALttunderlined letter Selects an option Displays a drop down list SPACEBAR Turns check boxes on or off Key Conventions This key combination Means KEY1 KEY2 Press and hold the first key while you press the second key For example press CTRL A means press the cTRL key and while pressing it press the A key Then release both keys
12. 4 6 Using the Undo and Redo Commands Messages Only 4 7 Selecting Cells Rows and Columns 4 7 Cutting or Copying and Pasting Selections Messages Only 4 9 Copying and Pasting into Differently Sized Areas 4 9 Sorting Entries inthe Spreadsheet 4 10 Sorting Portions of the Spreadsheet 4 10 Duplicating ROWS v ace pice dvo HR RR 4 11 Filling Portions ofthe Spreadsheet Messages Only 4 11 Inserting a Row in the 5 4 12 Deleting Data Spreadsheet 4 12 Editing Selections Messages Only 4 12 Changing Column Width and Row Height 4 13 Defining Communications Table of Contents toc v Chapter 5 What Are Communications 5 1 Defining Communications for a Remote 1 0 Application 5 2 Communication Setup 5 2 Setting up Terminal Communications 5 3 Setting the Baud Rate 5 3 Setting Up Network File Transfers 5 4 Specifying the Pass Through Network Type 5 4 Specifying the PanelView Location Routing Address 5 5 Defining the Network File Transfer Controls 5 7 Assigning Device Type and Racks for the PanelView Terminal 5 8 Specifying
13. 2 34 Carrying Out Your Plan 2 34 Planning DH or ControlNet Communications 2 35 Using Worksheets to Plan Communications 2 35 The Communications 5 2 36 Defining Nodes 2 37 Recording Node Information 2 37 DHFAGOrESSINO Sus fes au eg rad uei ore dd evened es 2 38 DH 4 Networks Bridged by 1785 2 39 Multiple DH Networks Connected by a Pyramid Integrator 2 40 Defining Scan 55 5 2 42 Guidelines for Configuring Scan Classes 2 42 Recording Scan Class Information 2 43 Planning Addresses copa dace ee 2 43 Guidelines for Organizing Tags to Optimize DH Network Performance 2 43 Recording Object Information 2 45 Recording Tag and Expression Information 2 46 Recording the 55 2 50 Carmina YOUF 32e ces X us ex E Sd Y OR Rd 2 50 Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 toc iv Table of Contents Working with Applications Working with Editors Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Chapter 3 Creating New 3 1 Opening Applications 3 3
14. 11 5 Configuring Alarms Global Controls 11 6 Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Table of Contents toc xi Alarm Trigger Bit 11 6 Alarm Acknowledge to PLC 11 8 urn ete phased 11 9 Pici o1 TT 11 9 Acknowledge to PLC and Acknowledge Control 11 15 Remote Acknowledge 11 19 Silence Alarms I PLC es 11 22 PLC Controlled Silence Alarms 11 22 PLC Controlled 11 22 PLE Controlled Relay suu iienaa i RR ELA 11 23 Message IO PLC bane i bam ROS 11 24 11 24 Partial 11 26 No Handel E cet 11 27 Message Control 11 28 Message Handshake 11 28 About the Alarm Message Window 11 29 About Background Alarms 11 29 Using the Alarm Message Window in the Terminal 11 30 Single line Alarm Message 11 30 Multi line Alarm Message 11 31 Using Buttons in the Multi line Alarm Message Window 11 32 Alarm Message Panel 11 33 Configuri
15. C 7 SLC 5 Enhanced Status Files C 8 SLC 5 Enhanced Binary Integer Float ASCII and String Files C 8 SLC 5 Enhanced Binary Files Optional Syntax C 9 SLC 5 Enhanced Timer Counter and Control Files C 9 SLC 5 Enhanced Timer Counter and Control Files Bit Member Addressing Optional Syntax C 10 SLC 5 Enhanced Timer Counter and Control Files Bit Member Addressing by Bit Address Optional Syntax C 10 SLC 5 Enhanced Timer Counter and Control Files Analog Member Addressing Optional 11 Mnemonic Tables tuos aceto 12 TimerMnemonicS 12 Counter MnemonitS s rritim eee eee C 12 ControlMnemonicS ccc cece eee n C 12 PID Mnemonics C 13 Message Mnemonics C 14 Block Transfer Mnemonics C 14 Token Data Mnemonics C 15 SFC Status Mnemonics C 15 Remote 0 C 16 Discrete PLC Address C 16 Block Transfer Address C 17 Discrete SLC Address C 17 Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 toc xiv Table of Contents Troublesh
16. 9 8 Graphic IMAGES PTT 9 8 5 vote esas 9 8 Local Message Display 9 9 9 9 Push 20 244 dui 9 10 je tne Bins day tee pend 9 11 Screen Print Button 9 11 Screen Selectors 9 11 Scrolling LISt inci uc eee news dando a weed 9 11 Shapes Drawing Objects 9 12 Table of Contents toc ix vp f 9 12 p c T Tc 9 12 Time and 9 13 TENIS T 9 13 Working with Objects 9 13 Using the Toolbox and Color Palette 9 13 Selecting O od wa qvo 9 14 Selection Handles 9 15 Selection Methods 9 15 Beselechhg D Djeci ouibus ikuna Pee ERA as 9 18 ZOOMING In ad QUE b EE Pap OR cn 9 18 Using the Undo and Redo 9 19 Object Tools and Commands 9 20 Creating Dynamic and Static Objects 9 22 Creating 9 24 E
17. 8 7 Setting a New Screen Background 8 7 Assigning Security Access to Screens 8 8 Validating SCIGBITS ira bur ER See eee Os 8 9 Viewing the Tags Used ina Screen 8 10 Working OLD D TIS qnn uc rae rac dle eto ORT 8 11 Using the 1 3 css bud ors vite RP ORE Rn d 8 11 Using the Touch Cell Grid for PanelView 1200e Applications Astle 8 13 Displaying Function Keys Keypad Applications Only 8 14 Assigning the Application Startup 5 8 15 Chapter 9 Whatls an Object 9 1 Types of Objects 9 1 Dynamic and Static Objects 9 2 Display and Input Objects 9 2 About Retentive 9 3 Initial Tag Values and Initial State Values 9 3 Safety Considerations for Retentive 00 6 65 9 4 Retentive Objects and Tags 9 4 Objects Available in PanelBuilder 9 7 ASLUEDISDIBU sata ceresna Em da ed or ede Eo ed sra 9 7 9 7 Bar ep Ree DIE 9 7 uuu 2224 hears wack 9 7 Goto Conrigure Mode ys i send Ere
18. 6 28 Renaming Tag ssa a maada a a saws 6 30 Private and Shared Tag Databases 6 30 The Private Database 6 30 The Shared Database 6 31 Using Shared Tag Databases 6 32 Converting a Private Database to Shared 6 33 Selecting a Shared Database 6 34 Repairing a Shared Database 6 35 Tag Database Importend 6 35 CSV File Column Ordering 6 37 Creating New Tag Database 6 38 Chapter 7 What Are 55 0 5 _ 7 1 Types of Expressions saaa 7 2 How Expressions Work 7 2 Expression Data Types 7 3 Tag Data Types in Expressions 7 4 Expressi n 7 4 Types of Operations Expressions Can Perform 1 4 Order of Precedence 1 4 Other Expression Components 1 5 Local Variables i E ER bee 1 6 Evaluation of Local Variables 1 7 Expression MaX MUMS 7 8 Arithmetic 7 9 Comparison Operations
19. 211 1011 1 11 Tag DZD3 1 12 1 31 1 Tull SETUP amp TTZHTLINC 1109 Cail List Belectec Lonkzar Analog Tull JZETUPEZBZETIEG 212 Seip Carl List Selacrrr Ecarral Tag z 4 BEA Pull Zopeenss 3ETUPEFHZKTLIEO p196 Ba enrarg HAI Puno Done DICO 2 4 Pit Digitel Tull Teraana XETUTeZBZETLIEG 256 511 H zzantwry Indicate i biqimab Fuji Scrsenas l AETUPCFREHTIEG 286 oi Mawenrarg Hit Fush res Coney Digital Tall fCcrregns ZSETUT amp 4JHEHTLEG 296 2201 HAT Indicates Initially all tags used in the application or on the screen are listed in the Tag Usage Viewer If you assign tags to expressions those tags also are listed in the Tag Usage Viewer You can restrict the list of tags by applying a filter search for specific characters such as an address or tag name in the listing and print out the listing Filtering Data A filter is a way of screening the list of tags Only those tags that match the filter criteria will be viewed gt Note Filters remain in effect throughout other operations If you set a second filter you will be filtering only the filtered listing Similarly if you search or print you will search or print only the filtered list of tags The last filter applied is shown beneath the Filter In Column button In the example below the last filter applied is a filter string on
20. SHIFT4Click Press and hold the SHIFT key while you click an object with the pointer Command Conventions There are different ways to carry out commands in PanelBuilder 1400e Often you can execute the same command in three ways by choosing a menu command choosing an icon from the toolbar using a key combination For example use any of the following methods to open an application choose Open Application from the File menu choose from the toolbar press CTRL O Note Instructions in this manual do not always outline all three methods Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 10 Preface Before You Begin Technical Support Services Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 You need the following before you begin e a personal computer with at least 486 25 MHz microprocessor at least 8 MB Random Access Memory RAM for Windows 3 1 95 although 16 MB RAM is recommended for Windows 95 at least 32 MB RAM for Windows NT and a SVGA monitor with 256 colors recommended For users working with imported dxf files at least 16 MB RAM is required e If you want to resize graphic images in PanelBuilder set your display adapter to 65 536 colors Microsoft Windows 3 1 or later Windows 95 or Windows NT 4 0 operating system the applicable programmable controller documentation e Getting Started with PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows If you have questions about PanelB
21. Windows NT Choose the Performance tab from the System folder in the Control Panel Click Change and set the Virtual Memory swap file to the Recommended number under Total P aging File Size for All Drives Tag Usage Viewer reports the wrong number of tags in the database Validation of an application stops after the first 100 errors The Tag Usage Viewer reports the number of tags covered by the validation Correct the errors then re run the validation for accurate results Program is slow The computer is low on memory Close all other programs Ensure that the swap file is configured to be the optimal size for your computer The computer is low on resources Close all other programs If this doesn t work close down Windows and restart Some other program is taking up a lot of processor time Find the offending program and shut it down Unable to add or edit tags ina database Database is damaged or made with a pre release of the PanelBuilder software Use Import Export and save the existing tags to a PanelBuilder CSV format then use New Database to remove the old database and finally use Import E xport to recreate the existing tags Cannot add tags Database already has a total of 32 000 Device and Remote 1 0 tags Application file won t download or upload For information about upload download problems see the PanelView 1200e 1400e Transfer Util
22. 7 11 Consi ctOperatioiS scie cuo le ec et ecd 1 12 00 5 7 16 Expression Return Values 7 19 Expression Compilation and 7 20 Using the Expression Editor 1 21 About Expression Editor Window 1 21 Entering and Formatting Expressions 1 22 Checking Syntax 7 23 Saving Expressions 1 24 Assigning Write 5510 5 1 24 User Entry 7 24 Validating Expressions 7 27 More Expression Examples 7 28 Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 toc viii Table of Contents Creating Screens Creating Objects Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Chapter 8 Creating New Application Screen 8 1 Opening 5 5 8 3 Copying Application Screens within the Same Application 8 3 Copying Application Screen Contents into Another Application 8 4 Renaming Screens 8 5 Updating Screens 8 6 Closing Screens 8 7 Deleting Screens
23. Choose Application Size from the Tools menu After processing a message appears indicating the size of the application Application Size LX Application size 967 bytes Creating Application Application reports help you document and track the screens Reports objects tags expressions and messages You can print these reports or save them as ASCII text files Before you create an application report save the application file Then make the report selections To open the Report Selection dialog box 1 Open the application you want to document 2 Choose Reports from the Tools menu Selection Pera I PLC B deformetiun Misa sequ Wird E Terminal Setup E aam Bip urges E Tag Dambais Bt sepas Lei Iv Alum Lopni Messagen Seu E PLC IO Conrad ff Screens AB E 295 E Screen imaa E Object Summary E Fall tinciods Wallpaper Primor Adrimas mes Fieserenre WCE MGUTENIERG on Moi Graphic lnages POP Sige mad Weed Tag Count Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Working with Applications 3 13 Report On Options Because a full application report can be quite large you may want to document only certain features of the application Choose the application features you want to document in the Report Selection dialog box The options are described in the table below Note
24. Scan Classes A Racks Open the PLC Communications folder and choose Communication Setup or choose from the toolbar RIO Block Transfer Files Communication Sa m Lite epp Setting Up Terminal Communications In the Terminal Communications tab you can set the Panel View terminal network address For DH applications PanelBuilder 1400e only supports a baud rate of 57 6K Note If you want communicate on DH at 230K baud you must configure the baud rate from the Terminal Communications screen on the Panel View terminal after you have downloaded the application to the terminal See the PanelView 1000e 1200e and 1400e Operator Terminals User Manual for more information about configuring the Terminal Communications screen Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 ControlNet DH Defining Communications 5 17 Specifying the Network Type The Network Type input field displays the network type selected for the current application when you created it This refers to the network through which the terminal and the programmable controllers will communicate You can change this by selecting another type from the drop down list See Changing the Network Type on page 5 25 for details Setting the Terminal Network Address The Terminal Network Address lets you specify the Panel View terminal s DH or ControlNet address whe
25. Help Up Cursor Enabled Function Key Down Cursor Enabled Function Key Enter Function Key Control unassigned unassigned Selector Control Enter Key Control Enter Key Handshake unassigned Assign Tag Assign Expm Unassign Assigning Function Keys Keypad Applications Only Operators use the function keys on Panel View keypad terminals to control keypad applications Instead of pushing a button on the screen to carry out a command the operator pushes the function key that has been assigned to that button The best way to ensure that the operator presses the correct function key is to create a label for the button and then link the button to a function key For example if you want the operator to press F21 to go to the next screen create a Goto Screen button and position it on the screen next to F21 key Then create a label that says F21 and assign 21 to the button Tip To see which objects have been assigned function keys choose Reports from the application window s File menu and print a report on the screen using the Report Selection dialog box Use the View menu s Zoom Out feature to see the function key layout on the terminal Important Assign the same function key only once for each screen To assign a function key 1 Select a button or create a new button 2 Open the object s configuration dialog box using one of the methods descri
26. Tags Expression Alarm Control Expression 2 M lt 100 THEN 2 IF Alrm cntl gt 150 THEN 3 END IF END IF Current Line 1 6 Select All Clear Al Percent Full 4 Check Syntax GoTo OK Cancel Help Enter an expression Ctrl is cut Ctrl c is amp Ctrl v is paste Using Multiple Alarm Tags for Word Trigger Operation If multiple alarm tags or expressions are defined and more than one alarm is triggered at the same time the alarms are logged to the Alarm History file according to the order in which they were configured in the Alarm Messages dialog box However they will be stamped with the same time and date Any Word triggered alarm can be triggered by any of the alarm tags or expressions That is the same alarm can be triggered by different tags or expressions If the same alarm is triggered by multiple tags or expressions in the same PLC scan multiple instances of that alarm will be indicated Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 11 14 Configuring Alarms bd Assign Tag Assign Exprn Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Alarm Control Expressions x po Alam Control Expression d jh eni ooo 2 IF Alm cni lt 100 THENM 2WF Alm gt 150 3 Paste 8 Insert Row 8 9 Delete Row 10 Assign Exprn Assign Tag Cancel Help To assign tags o
27. octal e g 01 01 Discrete SLC 1 O ss ww bb Iis input is output ss is optional slot number ww is start word bb is optional bit offset All numbers decimal e g O 01 18 Notes Initial State Value Objects such as Multistate Push Buttons have a user configurable initial state whose value will supersede the tag s initial value when the application is first run This is called the tag s start value Tag Start Value The start value is the tag initial value or the object initial state value if one exists Recording Object Information For each object fill in the following information RefNo The object s unique identification number Usually you can start with 1 and increase by 1 for each object Start from 1 again for each screen so that adding an object to the first screen doesn t require that all other numbers change Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 2 22 Planning Applications Type The type of object such as Interlocked Push Button Some objects use several tags or expressions See online Help or the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Reference Manual or look at the PanelBuilder objects themselves to plan which tags or expressions to use for each object Use one line in the Remote I O Tags worksheet for each tag and use the Type column to describe the function of the additional tags Expressions are optionally used to read and manipulate the PLC output at the
28. Index 1 3 remote station address 5 6 with 1785 KA 2 39 5 6 5 18 with Pyramid Integrator 2 40 5 6 5 19 Buttons alarm history screen 11 51 acknowl alarm 11 51 alarm status 11 51 cursor up cursor down 11 51 exit 11 51 page up page down 11 51 print 11 51 silence alarms 11 51 alarm message window 1 32 acknowl alarm 11 32 alarm history 11 32 alarm status 11 32 cursor up down 11 32 exit 11 32 silence alarms 11 32 alarm status screen 11 45 alarm history 11 45 cursor up cursor down 11 45 display mode 11 45 exit 11 45 page up page down 11 45 print 11 45 reset Qty Time 11 45 silence alarms 11 45 auto repeat functions 12 8 Byte data type 2 24 2 48 Cable upload download 1 6 Changing block transfer file assignments 5 14 network type 5 25 5 26 5 30 rack assignments 5 14 Channel number 5 22 Checking syntax in expressions 7 23 Clarity and screen design 2 6 Closing applications 3 17 screens 8 7 Color palette using 9 13 Commands conventions P 9 Communication errors time before reporting 5 23 Communication Setup editor 5 2 5 15 Communications defined 5 1 Comparison operations in expressions Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 Index Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Compatibility version 1 2 Compilation of expressions 7 20 Components in expressions 7 5 7 21 maximum number of 7 8 Compressing applications 3 8 3 9 Configur
29. The first alarm displayed is the first in the current or subsequent pages with a quantity or accumulated time of greater than 0 The first alarm in the Past Alarms screen acts as an anchor to the screen of alarm messages When a new alarm an alarm that has not been active since the last reset is entered on the screen the alarms below the new entry shift downwards If a past alarm with a trigger value below the anchor alarm trigger value becomes active it will not be displayed Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 11 44 Configuring Alarms Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 Aure DETAN 2703806 Aim Trigger Dy acc Time On Meseaqe Last Reset 41 25 11 125098 ses SHEE About Alarm Quantity and Accumulated Time The Qty and Acc Time fields are calculated differently for bit triggered and word triggered alarms For bit triggered alarms the Quantity is the number of times the bit was switched from 0 to 1 and the Acc Time is the amount of time the bit was set as 1 For word triggered alarms the Quantity is the number of times the tag was set to the alarm s trigger value and the Acc Time is the amount of time the tag was set to the alarm s trigger value Because you cannot monitor multiple alarms with word triggered alarms unless you have one tag for each alarm the Acc Time is not necessarily the amount of time a particular alarm has been active it is the amount of
30. Type Select Type and choose Single line Multi line or Panel Location If you specified a Single line or Alarm Message Panel specify its location at the top or bottom of the screen Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Configuring Alarms 11 37 Number of Lines For a Multi line or Alarm Message Panel specify the number of lines The number of lines you choose determines the size of the window on the terminal For a Multi line Alarm Message Window Ifthe window will be using the Small font you can display from 1 to 20 lines 1 line per message in the Alarm Message Window Ifthe window will be using the Double High font you can display from 1 to 10 lines 1 line per message of alarms in the Alarm Message Window For an Alarm Message Panel Ifthe window will be using the Small or Double Wide font you can display from 1 to 6 lines in the Alarm Message Window 1 message only Ifthe window will be using the Double High or Large font you can display from 1 to 3 lines in the Alarm Message Window 1 message only Configure the Window Look as follows Font Type For this window type Choose one of these fonts Single line Small only Multi line Small or Double High Panel Small Double Wide Double High or Large Underline Click the checkbox to choose Yes if you want the alarm messages to be underlined Leave it unchecked to choose No Blink Click the checkbox to choose Yes if
31. log Database titled olz Eis Edd ywa CEBHE ag Homa ec j Ce 2 ron ot is S Dinan insrce Deus Chor C pan Rennie io xls Adames Search For Tag Type iala Source Aires il Fer Fal prese F1 4 Fill in the fields as outlined below Security This field is present to maintain compatibility with RS View databases You cannot enter anything in the Security field Description Type a description of this tag up to 128 characters long Number of Bits Enter a number from 1 to 1024 to define the length of the block For Remote I O tags discrete addresses can accommodate 128 bits 8 words at 16 bits word Use a block transfer file address for longer block lengths For Device tags the number of bits must correspond to the element in the address For example if the address is located at an integer data file element the length must be a multiple of 16 the bit length of an integer Initial Value Enter a 1 or 0 to initialize the entire block to 1 or 0 that is all bits 1 or all bits 0 When a tag is used with a PanelBuilder input object or function this initial value is written to the programmable controller when the application first executes 5 To fill in the fields for data source see Specifying a Data Source next Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998
32. 6 20 Defining Tags Specifying a Data Source Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 gt The data source determines where a tag s data comes from Tags defined for a Remote I O application must specify the Remote I O data source Tags defined for a DH or ControlNet application must specify the Device data source Note DDE and Memory data sources are only used by RS View For a Remote I O application a tag that is going to write to the programmable controller must address an input module in a rack that has Full access If it is only going to read from the programmable controller it can address an input or output module in a rack that has Full or Listen Only access For a DH or ControlNet application the ladder logic program in the programmable controller determines whether or not it is appropriate for the terminal to read from or write to the PLC Important For DH and ControlNet analog tags the entire PLC data file element assigned to the tag s address is used in determining the tag s value This is true regardless of the tag s data type For example a Byte data type assigned with the address N7 0 will still look at the entire 16 bits of the integer element even though the tag is interested only in the lower 8 bits PLC logic must ensure that the unused bits are 0 to prevent invalid or out of range data from being read from the address Device Data Source A tag with Device as its data source receives its da
33. ATTENTION Do not press multiple touch screen locations at the same time In the unlikely event that two or more touches occur simultaneously in the same horizontal or vertical line an input object located half way between the two touches could be activated This is inherent in the analog resistive touch screen technology used in Panel View 1000 terminals Appendix B The Extended Character Set You can use PanelBuilder to create characters not on your keyboard The following tables list the extended characters available in PanelBuilder Hold down the ALT key and type the specified number on the numeric keypad Key Character Key Character ALT 01 ALT 02 ALT 04 d ALT 05 L ALT 06 ALT 07 ALT 010 ALT 011 ALT 012 ALT 014 ALT 015 J ALT 016 ALT 017 ALT 018 Publication 2711 819 J uly 1997 B 2 The Extended Character Set
34. Important Updating your screen saves the screen only temporarily To save your changes permanently you must also save the application Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Rename Delete Closing Screens Deleting Screens Copy Setting a New Screen Background Color Screen New Ctrl N Ctrl F4 Screen Settings Screen Security Screen Validate F9 Screen Tag Usage Viewer F5 Creating Screens 8 7 When you have finished working in a screen you can close it To close a screen Choose Close from the Screen menu double click the screen s Control menu box or press CTRL F4 Any changes you made are updated automatically You can remove application screens from an application Note If you delete a screen that contains objects with defined initial state values the tag s initial value will be used However if an object with the defined initial state value in another screen has the same tag assigned its initial state value will be used To delete a screen 1 Open the Screens folder in the Application Window 2 Select the screen you want to delete 3 Choose Delete from Screen menu press the DELETE key on your keyboard or from the toolbar The Delete dialog box asks you to confirm that you want to delete the screen 4 Choose OK The screen is deleted from the application You can change the background color of the
35. Notes 1 The grid shows the location of the touch cells on a PanelView 1200e Touch Screen terminal PanelBuilder sizes buttons in multiples of touch cells The smallest size for a 1200e touch screen application input object is 64 x 40 pixels 2 You can use this worksheet to align buttons you draw on the screen to keypad terminal function keys To complete each PanelView 1200e screen worksheet 1 Draw all objects that will be displayed on each screen Most objects can be any size gt Note The smallest size for a PanelView 1200e touch object is 64 by 40 pixels PanelBuilder sizes 1200e touch objects only in multiples of touch cells 2 Make a note of the button labels on the worksheet This will help you remember where you are locating common objects such as GoTo Screen buttons and Exit buttons Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 2 10 Planning Applications Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Screen Worksheets for PanelView 1000e or 1400e Terminals Use these worksheets to plan application screens for Panel View 1000e or 1400e keypad and touch screen applications The position of the terminal function keys is marked on the worksheet for you to use as a guide in positioning your application screen function key input objects The screen area is 640 by 480 pixels The Panel View 1000 and 1400e touch screen terminals use analog resistive touch screens This allows input objects to be any size minimum 40 by 40 pixel
36. Select one or more graphic images to import HEI File name Folders bmp c ab pb1400e images isa Cancel i agitatr bmp agitatrl bmp blower bmp blowerl bmp comprsr bmp comprsrl bmp conveyr bmp conveyrl bmp ec Cy ab Network CX pb1400e images List files of type Drives windows Bitmaps bmj Y 2 Select one or more files to import Click a file name to select it Use sHIFT click to select a range of images and CTRL click to select additional images 3 Choose OK The files are listed in the Select Image dialog box Imported graphic images are stored with the PanelBuilder 1400e file If you do not use them in any screens remove them to keep your pvc file to a manageable size and to conserve disk space To remove unused symbols 1 In the Select Symbol dialog box select any unused files and choose Remove A warning message appears 2 Choose Yes to remove the image If you remove an image that is used in a screen the screen will display a white box marking the spot where the image was When you select this white box the name of the associated file appears in the status line You must delete the box or re import the file Otherwise PanelBuilder will report a validation error Exporting Symbols You can export a symbol to another PanelBuilder application by simply copying it and pasting it into the new application See Cutting Copying and Pa
37. You can delete racks or module groups if they haven t been used in a tag or block transfer file definition If you try to delete a rack that has tags or block transfer files assigned to it you will see an error message You must reassign the tag addresses and or block transfer files to another rack before you can delete the rack to which they re assigned To delete an existing rack or block transfer file assignment 1 Open the RIO Racks editor or RIO Block Transfer Files editor 2 Click on the row in the spreadsheet to be deleted or choose Next in the Form section until the desired row is highlighted in the spreadsheet 3 Choose Delete from the Edit menu 4 When you re finished choose Close To delete a module group from a rack Click the check box beside the module group to clear the X from it Then click Accept to save the change to the rack assignment Defining Communications for a Data Highway Plus or ControlNet Application Communication Setup Defining Communications 5 15 To define communications for a DH or ControlNet application use these three editors e Communication Setup Editor to specify the address of the PanelView terminal on the DH or ControlNet network If you are going to transfer the application to the PanelView terminal over the DH or ControlNet network instead of using serial Upload Download cable you can also define the terminal s complete DH or ControlNet routing address and netw
38. You need a copy of the Panel View 1200 1400e Transfer Utility Version 3 or Panel View FTU32 Version 4 installed on your personal computer if you want to transfer files between your computer and a PanelView terminal For PC requirements and installation instructions refer to the PanelBuilder 1400e Transfer Utility User Manual Publication Number 2711E ND7 PanelView Terminal You must have one or more terminals There are fifteen types of terminals on which applications created or edited in PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Version 3 or 4 can run PanelView 1000e Touch Screen Terminals Catalog Nos 2711E T10C6 2711E T10C7 2711E T10C15 PanelView 1000e Keypad Terminals Catalog Nos 2711E K10C6 2711E K10C7 2711E K10C15 e PanelView 1200e Touch Screen Terminals clip mount and stud mount Catalog Nos 2711E T12C6 2711E T12C4 PanelView 1200 Keypad Terminals Catalog No 2711E K12C6 Stainless steel model Catalog No K12C6L2 PanelView 1400e Touch Screen Terminals Catalog Nos 2711E T14C6 2711E T14C7 2711E T14C15 PanelView 1400e Keypad Terminals Catalog Nos 2711E K14C6 2711E K14C7 2711E K14C15 Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 1 4 Introduction to PanelBuilder Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 PanelView 1200 Color Keypad Terminal Series F and Catalog No 2711 KC1MC when upgraded with the Panel View 1200 Enhancement Kit Catalog Number 2711E U1B12C an
39. anuary 1998 What Is an Object Types of Objects Chapter 9 Creating Objects This chapter provides an overview of PanelBuilder 1400e objects It tells you about what objects are and do different types of objects working with objects creating objects adding labels to objects editing objects arranging objects configuring object states assigning tags and expressions to objects This chapter does not provide details about individual application screen objects For information on specific objects see the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Reference Manual Tip Before you begin creating objects and screens use worksheets to plan your application For details see Chapter 2 Planning Applications Objects are the components that make up each application screen appearing on the terminal Objects represent the components of traditional control panels such as push buttons indicators or bar graphs Objects also have different properties that allow them to perform the functions required for an automated process Objects allow the operator to monitor and control the operations of the process when the application is running Some objects are available only for touch screen applications Others are available only for keypad applications Most are available for both PanelBuilder automatically makes the appropriate objects available for your application type Important If your appl
40. degrees Celsius The Single data type yields a floating point decimal result analog input Tag For Temperature Probe The analog input variable is assigned to the tag that reads the analog input The conditional expression wraps to the next line Note the use of the line continuation character SELECTCASE analog input CASE O TO 1000 temperature analog input 100 1000 100 Use this calculation if analog value is between 0 and 1000 CASE 1001 TO 4000 temperature analog input 1000 200 3000 200 Use this calculation if analog value is betw 1000 amp 4000 Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 7 16 Creating Expressions Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 CASE 4001 TO 4095 temperature analog_input 4000 100 95 400 Use this calculation if analog value is betw 4000 amp 4095 CASEELSE temperature 1 The probe should not be returning values outside the range of 0 to 4095 If the PanelView terminal displays 1 then the operator will know something is wrong ENDSELECT Logical Operations Some logical operations take precedence over others Operations with the highest precedence are evaluated first Operands can include any combination of keywords variables tags constants and operators that result in a number or Boolean value The logical operation differs depending on the data type of the operand Data Type of Operand Logic Op
41. 3 Mesae3 4 Mesge 5 essage 5 essage T LEETE 15 14 1 3 2 ll 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EE pepe pgs pe po pe pep pr Bits 0 1 and 2 on would trigger alarms Message 1 Message 2 and Message 3 Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 11 8 Configuring Alarms Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Word triggered alarms can only capture one alarm at a time in a single tag or expression In the example above for Bit trigger assume the same alarm messages are defined and the tag is defined as an analog tag In this case only the alarm with trigger value 7 Binary 7 bits 0 1 2 On would be displayed Message 7 Refer to the Control section below for more information on Bit and Word triggered alarms and for details on using multiple alarm tags or expressions Alarm Acknowledge to PLC Depending on the options configured for an alarm once it is triggered it will continue to be displayed beep or energize the relay until it is acknowledged This requires the operator to be aware of the alarm and take action before the alarm is removed An alarm can be acknowledged by either the operator or the PLC The operator can acknowledge alarms from either the Multi line Alarm Window or from the Alarm History screen See Using the Alarm Message Window in the Terminal later in this chapter for more information The Alarm Acknowledge to PLC option allows the Panel
42. Configuration Software for Windows Reference Manual for more information To assign state values 1 In the object s configuration dialog box choose Edit States The Configure State Values dialog box opens Configure State Values x Spreadsheet Operations OK Clear Cut IBN 2 Paste State Benumber The state value range is a Enter a unique value from 2147483648 to 2147483647 He long signed integer value Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 9 58 Creating Objects Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 2 Click on the state to which you want to assign a value 3 Type the numeric value for the state For input objects this value is written to the programmable controller when the object s state changes For example with a Multistate button each time the operator presses a button the state changes to the next state and the state value is written to the Button Control tag For output objects this value determines which state appears on the screen Important To minimize the size of the application file use state values that increment by one for each state Do not configure more states than you need Note For analog tags the values are descaled before they are written to the PLC and are scaled when they are read from the PLC The following formulas are used Descaled Value Value Offset Sc
43. PLC 5 f DH PI Link 2 M2 9 PLC 5 1 PI Link 1 DH PanelView 1400e Terminal Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 2 42 Planning Applications Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Defining Scan Classes When your application is running it must periodically read values from the PLC controllers by scanning the PLC addresses You must assign all tags used in a DH or ControlNet application to scan class You can then assign each tag a different foreground and background scanning period rate The scan rate determines how often a tag value is updated A foreground period applies to the current screen the alarm and information window addresses and to the PLC controlled PLC I O Control options The background scan period applies to all other screens in the system If a tag is used by both a foreground and a background component it is scanned at the foreground rate Guidelines for Configuring Scan Classes e Specify a frequent scan rate for tags representing fast moving devices and a less frequent scan rate for tags representing devices that change less often This approach optimizes system performance providing high speed scanning where required and saving on system resources by using less frequent scanning where acceptable Set the scan period to be faster than the expected rate of change in the tag s data For exam
44. Remote Alarm Ack Value Alarm Normal Value AND Alarm Ack Tag is Block Yes No Y Write Remote Alarm Ack Value to Alarm Ack Tag Word or Block Was the Write to Alarm Ack out of range Generate MISTAKE Ack Out or Range 5 Set Acknowledge Button to PLC Bit for Hold Time Duration FIFO Load C Rung 2 Done 0 B3 R6 0 FFL I ede LOAD EN ource zi FIFO DN Control Length EM Position Rung 3 ACK Ack To PLC Control FIFO Load T Tag Empty NEQ N7 9 R6 0 Configuring Alarms 11 21 Example 4 PLC Logic Used to Control Remote Alarm Acknowledge from the PLC to the PanelView Terminal NEQ MOV NOT EQUAL MOVE Source A Source N7 8 0 Source B Destination N7 11 NOT EQUAL e FIFO UNLOAD Source A N7 1 1 EM FIFO N7 12 0 Destination N7 2 Source B N7 12 Control R6 0 0 Length 50 Position 0 Comments Rung 1 N7 8 contains the trigger value of the alarm to be remotely acknowledged Rung 2 The FIFO is loaded as alarm trigger values to be remotely acknowledged are copied from N7 8 to N7 11 Rung 3 The FIFO is unloaded resulting in alarms being remotely acknowledged N7 1 is the Acknowledge to PLC address It contains the trigger value of the alarm that was last acknowledged and is sent from the PanelView terminal to the PLC N7 9 1 disables this rung for the time duration set in the Acknowle
45. Remote Keyswitch and RS 232 Port Assembly 1200 1200 1400 Terminals a seas arate rea do d 1 7 PISIS uad ddr esed pd eodd tu ERR seek 1 7 Uploads and Downloads over DH 1 7 Uploads and Downloads 1 7 PCMCIA Memory Card Lacie a irre dra e rag rites 1 7 Chapter 2 Steps for Building Application 2 1 Planning SIRDS iassuskaxvibesxsaxwackaka eA Ra OR ACE COR wean 2 2 Planning for Safety 2 2 Programming the 2 3 Tips for Optimizing the Application 2 4 Using Worksheets to Help Plan Your Application 2 5 Step 1 Documentthe Process 2 5 Step 2 Design Application Screens and Objects 2 5 Tips for Planning Application Screen Designs 2 6 CONS SISNOY es 2 6 E 2 6 ital etate Pe es ee Rp 2 6 Use a Screen Template to Ensure Consistency 2 7 Using Worksheets to Design Screens 2 8 Screen Worksheet for PanelView 1200e Terminals 2 8 Screen Worksheets for PanelView 1000e or 1400e Terminals 2 10 Step 3 Plan Communications with the PLC 2 12 Planning Remote 1 0 Communications 2 12 Identifying Inputs and
46. Rw Allen Bradley PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Cat No 2711E ND1 Important User Information Because of the variety of uses for the products described in this publication those responsible for the application and use of this control equipment must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps have been taken to assure that each application and use meets all performance and safety requirements including any applicable laws regulations codes and standards The illustrations charts sample programs and layout examples shown in this guide are intended solely for purposes of example Since there are many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Allen Bradley does not assume responsibility or liability to include intellectual property liability for actual use based upon the examples shown in this publication Allen Bradley publication SGI 1 1 Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control available from your local Allen Bradley office describes some important differences between solid state equipment and electromechanical devices that should be taken into consideration when applying products such as those described in this publication Reproduction of the contents of this copyrighted publication in whole or in part without written permission of Allen Bradley Company Inc is prohibited Thro
47. dialog boxes form spreadsheet editors tag database editor screen editor This chapter covers the dialog boxes and form or spreadsheet editors Instructions for using the tag database and screen editors are in Chapter 6 Defining Tags and Chapter 8 Creating Screens Five of the PanelBuilder editors are dialog boxes Configure Communication Setup Configure Terminal Setup Configure Alarms PLC I O Control Configure Information Message Window Note Many of the PanelBuilder screen objects have Configuration dialog boxes The instructions here also apply to the object Configuration dialog boxes See Configuring Objects in Chapter 9 Creating Objects for more information The Configure Communication Setup dialog box shown next contains many of the features of these editors For more information on how to navigate through a dialog box see your Windows documentation Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 4 2 Working with Editors Click the arrow to Click to close the dialog box without saving changes Click to save changes and close the dialog box Click to cancel changes and close the dialog box Click to open online Help for this dialog box Configure Terminal open a drop down list of options Press ALT and the 2080 underlined letter to select the option Press ALT and the down arrow J to open the drop do
48. reset to PLC 11 48 R Rack Assignments Worksheet 1 using 2 31 Racks access full 2 16 5 9 listen only 2 16 5 9 assigning 5 8 5 9 assigning on worksheets 2 32 changing 5 14 defining 5 9 deleting 5 14 full 2 13 Last chassis 2 16 5 10 minimizing scan time 2 15 2 16 minimum size 2 18 module groups 2 14 partial 2 13 2 32 planning 2 16 shared 2 15 size requirements 2 18 Read objects 9 2 README TXT file P 3 Rectangles 9 6 9 12 Redo 9 19 Ref No 2 45 Regeneration of expressions 7 20 Registering PanelBuilder 1400e P 3 Related publications 1 0 scanner modules P 6 programmable controllers P 6 Relaxed validation 6 21 Remote alarm parameters setting 12 7 Remote 1 0 and PanelView 1 5 choosing as data source 6 3 6 23 reducing scan time 2 15 setting up terminal communications 5 3 Remote I O Scanner user manuals P 6 Remote 1 0 Tags Worksheet 1 recording tag information 2 22 using 2 21 Remote keyswitch 1 7 Remote station address 2 38 Removing graphic images 9 28 9 31 Removing filters in Tag Usage Viewer 6 28 Renaming applications 3 10 screens 8 5 tags 6 30 Repairing shared database 6 35 Reports creating 3 12 options 3 13 saving as ASCII file 3 16 screen 3 14 setting up printer 3 15 solving printing problems 3 15 Required equipment 1 3 Reserved keywords F 1 ResetQTY TIME button 11 46 Resetting the alarm status screen
49. 0 False otherwise IF var 3 THEN 5 if varis equal to 3 0 False otherwise IF Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 7 20 Creating Expressions Expression Compilation and Regeneration Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 When you save the application as a pvd file and when PanelBuilder creates a pvd file to download the application to the Panel View terminal expressions are compiled into executable code The executable code contains only the elements needed for evaluating the expression These changes are made to the expression comments are removed extra spaces tabs and blank lines are removed keywords and tag names are changed to upper case e line continuation characters are removed and the connected lines are combined into a single line local variables are renamed as VAROOO1 VAROOO2 and so on Where a conflict arises between a variable name and a tag name the variable is assigned the next higher number The maximum size for the compiled expression is 1 Kb Note An expression cannot be compiled if it contains syntax errors or invalid tag references The pvd file cannot be created until all errors are corrected See Validating Expressions later in this chapter for more information When you open a pvd file PanelBuilder automatically regenerates the source text of expressions in the application The expressions are regenerated so that they can be successfully compiled again The
50. 5 9 32 END IF Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 7 30 Creating Expressions Example 10 Local Variables Improve P erformance on Complex Expressions Expression DIM Varl AS INTEGER Varlz PRESS tag 3 TEMP tag 5 6 Varl gt 3095 AND Varl lt 6000 THEN s IF 1 gt 6000 THEN END IF Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Chapter 8 Creating Screens Application screens the screens that appear on the Panel View terminal when the application is running You create and design them in the Screens editor This chapter shows you how to create new screens open copy and rename screens update and close screens delete screens set the background color assign screen security validate screens view the tags used in a screen use grids zoom out to display function keys assign the Application Startup screen Creating a New To create a new screen for your application your Application Application Screen Window must be open and active To create a new screen 1 Choose New in the Screen menu or click on the toolbar If Screen New the Screens folder is empty you can double click it to create a new screen Rename Delete Del The Create a New Screen dialog box appears The next available screen number appears in the Number field Number MAN Cancel dii Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 8 2 Creating
51. Addresses defined as racks words and bits are locations within the Remote I O racks These locations are represented on the PLC s Remote I O image table The two types of addresses objects can use are discrete Remote I O addresses block transfer file addresses These two address types are discussed in detail later in this chapter Understanding Rack Assignments PanelView terminals are connected to a host controller usually a programmable controller The programmable controller communicates with one or more I O racks to solicit its input and write its output An I O rack is an addressing unit that corresponds to up to eight input words and eight output words in the I O image table To the programmable controller the PanelView terminal looks like any other Remote I O rack You can configure the PanelView terminal as one or more full or partial Remote I O racks in the Rack editor in PanelBuilder Depending on the type of controller the PanelView terminal can simulate up to 64 different rack numbers It can also simulate partial racks Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 2 14 Planning Applications Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 The following figure shows a PLC 5 15 It is configured for one local and three Remote I O racks The PanelView terminal could be configured to occupy all or part of the three Remote I O racks Input Output 2 Remote Rack 3 23730 Programmable Controller PLC 5 1
52. Assigning Write Expressions Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Saving Expressions You can save all expressions for the current object or function To save changes to expressions To save the expressions choose OK choose Cancel to discard all changes Write expressions allow the PanelView terminal to perform a mathematical calculation or logical operation on the value the operator enters at the Panel View terminal The result produced by the write expression is then sent to the Keypad Numeric Input control The use of write expressions is optional Note If the write expression attempts to divide by zero a value is not sent to the Keypad Numeric Input control Note If you assign a write expression the application will be compatible with Panel View Version 2 or later It will not be compatible with earlier versions You can assign write expressions to three PanelBuilder screen objects Numeric Keypad Enable Button Numeric Input Cursor Point Numeric Entry Keypad Each of these objects has an Optional Keypad Write Expression control If you assign the Optional Keypad Write Expression you must also assign a tag to the Keypad Numeric Input control or PanelBuilder reports a validation error Note If you assign an Optional Keypad Write Expression the Raise and Lower keys are disabled User Entry Character The User Entry Character provides a placeholder in the expression for the value the operator enters
53. Choose Sort Messages from the Edit menu or from the toolbar Your data is sorted according to the column s you selected Working with Editors 4 11 Duplicating Rows You can repeat the information in a single row by using the duplicate tool This is useful for creating several rows with similar information gt Note You can use this command to duplicate rows only not cells or columns To duplicate one or more rows 1 Select the rows 2 Choose Duplicate from the Edit menu or from the toolbar or press CTRL D The duplicate rows appear immediately below the last row you selected 3 Since records must be unique edit each duplicate row Filling Portions of the Spreadsheet Messages Only In the Messages editors there is a quick way to fill portions of the spreadsheet with identical data To fill a series of rows with identical data 1 Select a series of rows 2 Choose Fill Forward from the Edit menu or from the toolbar or press CTRL F The contents of the first row are copied into the successive rows of the selection Existing data in the successive rows is overwritten If the first row is blank all successive rows are blank also To fill a series of cells with identical data 1 Select a group of cells in a column 2 Choose Fill Forward from the Edit menu or from the toolbar or press CTRL F The contents of the first cell or cells is copied down each column into the successive cells Existing
54. Converting Applications Created in PanelBuilder 1200 or PanelBuilder fOr DOS seas Wa WE dae teas 3 4 The Conversion Process 3 5 Specifying Target Firmware 3 6 Saving Applications 3 7 Saving an Application in Another File Format 3 8 Copying Applications 3 10 Renaming 5 3 10 Validating Applications 3 10 Determining the Application Size 3 11 Creating Application Reports 3 12 Report OM acce au edes ex rro RopEE Rr 3 13 Report On Screens Options 3 14 PHC SOW 3 15 Solving Printing 3 15 Saving the Reportas an ASCII TextFile 3 16 Closing 5 3 17 Deleting Applications wey idees ru eR o eq 3 17 Chapter 4 Dialog Box EdIlOIS re Rey na 4 1 Form SpreadsheetEditors 4 3 Using the Spreadsheet and Form 4 3 Moving between the Spreadsheet and the Form 4 4 Using Multiple Editors 4 5 Working the Spreadsheet
55. For a Version 2 or later application you can use these formatting codes in your messages This code Does this n Displays the text following the code on the next line n Displays the text following the code without a carriage return See Example 1 on the next page For Version 2 or later applications the Newline code n counts as one character for purposes of determining message length When a Version 2 or later application is downloaded to the Panel View terminal the Newline code is converted to a carriage return and line feed sequence For a pre Version 2 application the n character sequence is not converted to a carriage return and line feed When a Version 2 or later application is uploaded from the Panel View terminal the carriage return and line feed is converted back to n Note For pre Version 2 applications n is not converted into a new line The n appears as is in a message format Note For alarm messages the Newline code works only in the Panel Alarm Message Window In the other Alarm Message Windows and alarm screens the code appears as this symbol Creating Messages 10 5 Version 2 or Later Applications You can use formatting codes only for applications that are compatible with PanelView Version 2 or later If you are creating a Version 2 or later application and you want to use the character sequence n you must enter it as n Otherwise PanelBuilder will interpret it as a carria
56. For details on assigning and creating tags see Chapter 6 Defining Tags For details on assigning and creating expressions see Chapter 7 Creating Expressions When you re finished configuring the Information Message Window choose OK to accept the changes and close the dialog box Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 About Transferring Applications Chapter 1 5 Transferring Applications To transfer application files to or from PanelView terminals the PanelView 1200 1400e Transfer Utility Version 3 or PanelView e FTU 32 Version 4 or later must be installed These utilities are included with your PanelBuilder software kit and are also available separately as Catalog Number 2711E ND7 For information about installing the Panel View 1200 1400e Transfer Utility or Panel View FTU 32 and transferring application files see the PanelView 1200e 1400e Transfer Utility User Manual Publication Number 2711E 6 8 For specific information about transferring Modbus application files see the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Modbus User Manual Publication Number 2711E 6 12 There are two ways to transfer an application from Panelbuilder to a Panel View terminal from within PanelBuilder if you have opened the application file and are working on it or using the PanelView 1200 1400e Transfer Utility or PanelView FTU 32 if you have already created a pvd Panel View terminal file Whichever met
57. Information Messages Local Messages Screens Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 11 6 Configuring Alarms Configuring Alarms Select the System Alarms editor to enter the Configure Alarms Global Controls dialog box Select the Global Controls tab Message Window Alarm Trigger Alarm Acknowledge to PLC Bit C Bit C Word Word Help Operator Operator and Remote Control Alarm Triqgers unassigned unassigned unassigned Remote Acknowledge unassigned Silence Alarms to PLC unassigned PLC Controlled Silence Alarms unassigned PLC Controlled Audio unassigned PLC Controlled Relay unassigned Message to PLC unassigned Message Control unassigned Message Handshake unassigned Assign Tag Assign Expin Unassign Alarm Trigger Bit or Word Before deciding whether to use Bit or Word triggers careful planning is essential Your choice here depends on your application and how you plan to implement alarms The following questions should be answered 1 How many alarms need to be generated 2 Do I need to monitor multiple alarms simultaneously or am I only concerned about the first alarm that occurs and want to ignore all subsequent alarms because they probably occur as a result of the domino effect of the first alarm 3 Are alarms com
58. Initial State Value Objects such as Multistate Push Buttons have a user configurable initial state whose value will supersede the tag s initial value when the application is first run Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 2 46 Planning Applications Tag Recording Tag and Expression Information T Analog Tag only Initial Range Name Scale Offset Data Value 9 The tag database records all the addresses used throughout an Values application It may also contain addresses the application doesn t use for example if the database is shared by another application Instead of assigning an address directly to an object you enter the address as a tag definition in the database and then assign the tag or an expression that uses one or more tags to an object If the same address is used by more than one object you need only define it once in the database For information about expressions see Chapter 7 Creating Expressions Some objects require more than one control tag or expression For example a Maintained Push Button needs a Button Control tag and an Indicator State tag or expression Record all necessary tag names and addresses in the worksheet as well as information about the expressions For each expression fill in the name of the expression in the object for example Indicator State the name of the tag or tags the expression will read data from a
59. Scan Classes LA RIO Racks lE RIO Block Transfer Files Defining Communications 5 29 4 Specify a node name and scan class if required You can specify a node name and scan class when you do the conversion or you can leave them blank If you enter a node name and scan class they will be used in all the tags that are converted In addition the node and scan class will be created for you with the default settings You can change the settings to suit your application later If you leave the Node Name and Scan Class fields blank the converted tags will have a blank node and scan class name You will have to create the nodes and scan classes that your tags will use then update each tag with the node and scan class names that you have created For details see Defining Communications for a Data Highway Plus or ControlNet Application earlier in this chapter Choose OK The following message will appear Cenfiqers Commenication Sebup Rack and Biock Transfer File definitions wil te 2 the network typo is corvertud in ContralHat Continue Choose Yes to confirm that you want to continue After converting the application to ControlNet you need to change the Terminal Network Address on the Terminal Communications tab of the Configure Communication Setup dialog Comdiqers Communication Setup Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 5 30 Defining Comm
60. Send in the enclosed Response Card to receive the required package of disks RSLinx Communication Drivers PanelBuilder 1400e Version 4 includes RSLinx communication drivers for application file transfers on Windows NT and Windows 95 INTERCHANGE WINLinx are still available for Windows 3 1 or later and Windows 95 if desired The term PanelBuilder refers to PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Where confusion may arise between the current and previous versions of the software the current release of the software is called PanelBuilder 1400e Version 4 Similarly the terms terminal and PanelView terminal refer to a Panel View 1000 1200 or 1400e terminal or an enhanced Panel View Series or G terminal Where confusion may arise between the 1000e 1200e and 1400e terminals and previous revisions specific series and revision names are used The terms PLC and programmable controllers refer to the Allen Bradley line of PLC Programmable Controllers The term control is a generic term that refers to the PLC addresses that dynamic objects write to or read from Some controls use tags only while others can use tags or expressions All dynamic objects use one or more controls In this manual the configuration table for each object lists the controls for the object and specifies which controls use tags only and which can use expressions For more information about expresssions see Chapter 7 Creating Exp
61. Some ASCII symbols may appear as their numeric equivalents on the report For example the ALT 009 symbol appears as 009 on the report The symbols will appear as expected when the text is displayed on the Panel View terminal Note The features you select are saved in the PB1400E INI file in the Windows directory for the next time you create a report This report option Does this PLC Communications e fora DH or ControlNet application shows the communications setup network type the terminal s network address and PanelView Location Routing Address and network download control tags and node and scan class definitions fora Remote 1 0 application shows the communications setup network type baud rate PanelView Location Routing Address and network file transfer information and rack and block transfer file definitions Terminal Setup Shows the Application Startup screen number application file comment application type Target Firmware Version the timing parameters and whether the Retain Cursor on Cancel option is enabled or disabled Tag Database Lists alphabetically all the tags in the database that are used in the application and shows each tag s definition Alarms Shows the configuration of the Alarm Window Alarm History and Alarm Status screens and their associated tags or expressions PLC 1 0 Control Lists all the PLC 1 0 Control options and identifies the tags or expressions that have been assigned
62. When the Multi line Alarm Message Window appears on a keypad terminal the function keys F1 through F16 are disabled for the application screen until the operator responds to the alarm On a touch screen terminal only those touch cells that are covered by the window are disabled for the application screen Whether the Multi line Alarm Message Window covers all or only some of the existing screen depends on how many messages are displayed The number of messages can be configured Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 11 32 Configuring Alarms Alarm messages Alarm screen buttons If the programmable controller triggers more alarm messages before the window is cleared the existing messages shift down and the new messages are added to the top of the list If more messages occur than can fit in the window the terminal shifts the oldest messages to the Alarm History screen The archived messages icon is displayed between the Alarm Status and Cursor Up buttons to indicate that messages have been moved to the Alarm History screen Using Buttons in the Multi line Alarm Message Window The buttons in the Multi line Alarm Message Window control the alarm system as follows This button Does this Acknowl Alarm Acknowledges time stamps and date stamps the highlighted alarm message and removes it from the Alarm Message Window If the alarm message has an audio or relay option enabled the alarm beeper
63. and the manipulation the expression will perform on the tag data For information about the kinds of operations expressions can perform see Chapter 7 Creating Expressions For each tag fill in the following Name A symbolic name you assign to the address The tag name can be up to 40 characters long and can include letters numbers the dash and the underscore character _ Spaces and periods are not permitted Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Planning Applications 2 23 When you define tags in the Tag Database editor you can also define folders Folders are a convenient way to organize tags For example you can put all the tags for one screen s objects in one folder The folder name becomes part of the tag name and is separated from the rest of the name with a backslash For example the full name for the tag StartButton_Control in the folder called Screen 1 is Screen lIWStartButton Control For details on creating tags and folders see Chapter 6 Defining Tags Type Specify one of these types of tags Tag Type Type of Data Stored Digital A single bit giving the values 0 or 1 Use a digital tag for devices that can only be on or off such as push buttons Analog Range of values depends on the data type selected Use an analog tag to control or monitor a value for example a temperature or the position of a rotary control When you define an analog tag you must also fill in the
64. application comment and setting timing parameters Tag Database editor for defining programmable controller addresses required by the application Alarms dialog box for configuring the alarm information that informs users about problems when the application is running PLCI O Control dialog box for assigning tags to PLC Controlled and Notify PLC options Information Message Window dialog box for configuring the look and function of the Information Message window Three Message editors for creating and editing messages Screen editor for designing the application screens and configuring the application screen objects that allow the operator to monitor and control the process or machine Use PanelBuilder to build applications that run on PanelView terminals PanelBuilder applications help automate industrial processes allowing an operator to monitor and control a single machine or an entire process through the terminal Applications created in PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Version 4 can run on e PanelView 1000e 1200e and 1400e operator terminals e Series F and G PanelView 1200 terminals that have been enhanced to MC catalog numbers with PanelView 1200e and 1400e Firmware 2 MB SIMM module and 4 MB PCMCIA memory card For information about enhancing your Series F or G terminals contact your Allen Bradley representative You can edit any application created with a previous version of Pane
65. choose the Network File Transfer tab 2 Type the PLC s station address in the PanelView Location Routing Address field Defining the Network File Transfer Controls If you plan to download an application via DH or ControlNet networks using the Pass Through Download feature you can define the network file transfer controls to monitor file download processes Note Although it s optional we strongly recommend that you define and use these controls You must assign all three controls for the mechanism to work properly There are three network download controls You can assign tags only to these controls Transfer Inhibit The terminal reads this control at the start of a download When this control is set to non zero the terminal won t permit a download You can use a digital tag for the Transfer Inhibit control since the terminal only looks for 0 and non zero Typically the control will be set and cleared by the programmable controller Transfer Request This control is set to 1 by the terminal when it receives a download request It is reset to 0 by the terminal when the download starts This control should use a digital tag that can be written to by the terminal You can program the PLC to clear the Transfer Inhibit control when this control is set to 1 This will allow subsequent file downloads to proceed Transfer Status This control is set to 1 by the terminal when it receives the first download block
66. press CTRL V The objects copied from the original screen are copied into the new screen in exactly the same location as on the original screen If you copied the objects with their tag assignments that is if Copy with Controls was checked in the Edit menu you must add the tags definitions to the database if the tags don t already exist You can change the name and number of an existing screen with the Rename command To rename a screen 1 2 Select the screen you want to rename in the Screens folder Choose Rename from the Application Window s Screen menu or Em from the toolbar Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 8 6 Creating Screens The Rename Screen dialog box opens with the current number and name From Number 1 Name MAIN Cancel To Help Number INITIAL 3 Select the Number field and type in the new number gt Note The number 255 is the default number for the Alarm History screen If you assign this number to a screen an error message appears You must either assign a new number to the alarm screen or assign a different number to the application screen 4 Select the Name field and type in the new name The name can be up to 15 characters long 5 Choose OK The new screen name and number replace the original name in the Screens editor Updating Screens When you close a screen the changes you made to your screen are updated automatically
67. same Trend object Knowing how to perform several basic actions and techniques will save you time as you create objects and screens Using the Toolbox and Color Palette PanelBuilder 1400e provides a toolbox for creating objects and a color palette for coloring them The toolbox differs slightly between touch screen and keypad applications The toolbox and color palette are optional and flexible You can move them anywhere on the screen by dragging and placing them with the pointer or by using the Move command in the Control menu hide or show them using the commands on the View menu or on their Control menus resize the toolbox by dragging a side or corner or by using the Size command in the Control menu Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 9 14 Creating Objects Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Touch Screen Toolbox Keypad Toolbox Hn ccs B Bi id Color Palette cx Selecting Objects Before you can work with an object you must select it When the Select tool is active the pointer appears as an arrow When another tool is active a symbol appears below the arrow to indicate which tool is active If the text tool is active the pointer appears as an I beam 1 Active Select tool Active graphic tool Text I beam cursor Creating Objects 9 15 To choose the Select tool do one of the following choose Select from t
68. see Configuring Tag Type earlier in this chapter Using the Tag Usage Viewer Reports Validate Change Network Type Application Size F3 Replace Tag Name Tag Usage Viewer Transfer Utility gt Defining Tags 6 25 Note If the Tag Database editor and Tag editor dialog boxes are open at the same time when you add a tag in the Tag editor it automatically appears in the Tag Database editor When you add a tag in the Tag Database editor to see the change in the Tag editor double click the folder to which the tag was added In the Tag Database editor you can also click the Refresh icon or choose Refresh from the View menu to update the display and sort the tags The Tag Usage Viewer window provides you with a cross reference listing of all the tags in an application sorted according to their address and shows where each tag is used This listing is similar to the Tag Address Cross Reference Report For tags in a DH or ControlNet application it also shows the node name and scan class Use the Tag Usage Viewer to help locate tag validation errors To open the Tag Usage Viewer Choose Tag Usage Viewer from the Tools menu or press rs system validates the screens and tags before it brings up the display To use the Tag Usage Viewer for Screens When editing screens choose Screen Tag Usage Viewer from the Screen menu or press F5 PanelBuilder displays only the tags us
69. showing that the objects are grouped When you select one of these objects you select the whole group You can move cut copy paste or delete the group of objects in one operation or you can change object attributes for all objects at once But you can still work with each object in the group individually When you click twice on an object in a group you select it You can move it within the group and edit it without changing its group status You can also cut copy and delete objects in the group Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 9 42 Creating Objects Arrange Grou Chie oemi to Align Lett Align Center Align Right Align Top Align Middle Align Botton Align Center Points Align te Grid pace Vertical peace Horizontal Flip Vertical Flip Horizontal Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 To ungroup objects 1 Select the group 2 Do one of the following choose Ungroup from the Arrange menu choose from the toolbar The objects are separate again Editing Overlapping Objects You can change the stacking order of overlapped objects with the Send to Back and Bring to Front commands Note An input object or button can be on top of another object but they cannot be under another object To bring an object to the front of the object stack 1 Select the object 2 Do one of the following choose Bring to Front from the Arrange menu choose 3 from the toolbar Tip To
70. source When you work with a shared database your changes are saved permanently each time you select the Accept button Converting a Private Database to Shared Convert a private database in either of these situations You want the application to share tags created by another PanelBuilder 1400e application or by an RSView database You want other PanelBuilder 1400e applications to share the current application s tags Note When you move an application that is using a shared database to another machine you must also move the database and use the same directory structure If the database is not in its original location use Repair Shared on the Database menu to reconnect the application to the tag database To convert a private database to shared 1 4 Open the application that contains the database you want to convert to shared Choose Convert To Shared from the Database menu Fill in the fields as follows Tag Database Name Displays the name of the current application if it has been named You can use this as the tag database name or type a new name Tag Database Path Displays the path where the shared database will be placed You can specify another path by selecting another directory subdirectory or drive or use the default Click OK to complete the conversion Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 6 34 Defining Tags Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Selecting a Shared Database You can se
71. the new screen If you wish you can continue copying this screen Copy as many screens as you wish 6 When you re ready to exit choose Close Important Since the object controls tag assignments and expression definitions in the application screen are also copied you may need to change them You can do a screen copy within the same application but not across multiple applications However you can copy certain objects from a screen in one application and paste them into a screen in another application Note Although you can copy some objects between touch screen and keypad applications you can t copy objects that are specific to touch cell or keypad applications or objects that contain buttons This includes objects such as Control List Selectors and Push Buttons By default when you copy objects their controls tag assignments and expression definitions are also copied You can choose whether or not to copy the controls Note Even if you copy the control tag assignments and expression definitions the tags themselves are not added to the destination application s tag database You must add the tags to the destination application s tag database before the application will validate successfully You may need to add the supporting racks and block transfer files for Remote I O tags or nodes and scan classes for DH or ControlNet tags Tip If copying objects across applications using the same tags make th
72. word and byte for the Pass Through File s control byte The rack must have full access A control byte is allocated in the output file You can t use this byte for a tag address or for the control byte of any other block transfer files 3 Choose OK Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 5 14 Defining Communications Changing Rack or Block Transfer File Assignments Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 As you develop the application you may find that you need to change the rack or block transfer file assignments When you change a rack assignment any assigned tags Block Transfer Files or Pass Through File control bytes are updated You can also add new racks module groups and or block transfer files as required To change an existing rack or block transfer file assignment 1 Open the RIO Racks editor or RIO Block Transfer Files editor 2 Click on the row in the spreadsheet to be changed or choose Next in the form section until the desired row is highlighted in the spreadsheet 3 To change the assignment select or deselect the appropriate fields in the form section 4 Choose Accept in the form section to confirm the new rack or block transfer file assignment A message informs you that all tags block transfer files and Pass Through control bytes that reference the original rack will be changed to the new rack number 5 When you re finished changing rack or block transfer file assignments choose Close
73. 010 0 14 is an input address with a length specified I 010 0 0 17 is an input address with a range specified Addressing Syntax C 17 Block Transfer Address Fff ww bb F File type B Block ff File number 1 64 decimal The file number must be followed by a space to separate it from the word number ww Start word 0 63 decimal Note The actual PLC data table addresses will be determined by the block transfer instruction in the PLC program bb optional Start bit 0 15 decimal If none is specified 0 is assumed Note The address can also be specified as a length or a range For length use the format Fff Il where ll is the bit length For range use the format Fff ww bb ww bb Examples B8 19 is file 8 word 19 bit 0 Whether this is read or write depends on the definition of your block transfer instruction Whether this is listen only or full access depends on the definition for the rack containing the control byte B1 31 2 14 is a block address with a length specified B1 31 2 31 15 is a block address with a range specified Discrete SLC Address F S ww bb F File type I Input O Output S optional Slot number 0 7 decimal Not used by the Panel View terminal ww Start word 0 31 decimal bb optional Start bit 0 15 decimal If none is specified 0 is assumed Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 C 18 Addressing Syntax Publication 2711E 819 J an
74. 1000 Keypad 1000e Keypad 1200e Keypad Application 1400e Keypad Target Firmware Version Describing the Application In addition to naming your application by giving it a file name when you first save it you can enter a brief description of the application This description is useful for explaining the function of the application For example the description appears on the PanelView Terminal Information and Select Application screens This helps the operator ensure that the correct application is being selected and executed The description is also useful for application reports and doesn t increase the amount of memory used by the application To describe the application 1 Type a description of your application up to 24 characters in length in the Application File Comment field 2 Choose OK Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 12 4 Configuring Terminal Setup Options Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Target Firmware Version You can select the version of Panel View firmware that you plan to use when you run your application The application will be compatible with the Target Firmware Version you specify as well as with all later versions When you validate your application PanelBuilder warns you if a feature you have used will make the application incompatible with the Target Firmware Version See Appendix E Version Control for a list of features that make applications incompatible with earl
75. 1000e Terminals 2 10 A 1 for 1200e Terminals 2 8 A 1 for 1400e Terminals 2 10 A 1 Screens assigning application startup screen 8 15 assigning new screen number 8 2 assigning security 8 8 closing 8 7 color palette 9 13 copying 8 3 controls 8 5 screen contents 8 4 creating 8 1 deleting 8 7 designing 2 6 grids 8 11 opening 8 3 Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 1 14 Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 planning 2 5 PLC controlled screen number tag 13 3 renaming 8 5 saving See updating screen number to PLC controller tag setting background color 8 7 templates 8 3 toolboxes 9 13 updating 8 6 using templates to design 2 7 using worksheets to design 2 8 validating 8 9 viewing tags used 8 10 Scrolling list 9 6 9 11 cursor list 9 59 object lists 9 59 defining number of states 9 59 Searching for text in the tag usage viewer 6 28 Security assigning to screens 8 8 Select command 9 21 tool 9 21 SELECT CASE in expressions 7 15 Selecting object components 9 17 objects 9 14 9 15 shared database 6 34 tags 6 6 terminal type 12 2 Selection conventions P 7 dialog boxes P 8 shortcut keys P 9 Serial upload download cable 1 6 Set bit cursor point 9 6 9 7 9 21 retain cursor on cancel 12 10 Setting auto repeat functions 12 8 baud rate remote 1 0 5 3 ControlNet station number 5 17 DH station number 5 17 push button hold
76. 1200 1400e Transfer Utility User Manual Publication Number 2711 6 8 To transfer an application from the PanelView 1200 1400e Transfer Utility For information about transferring applications using the Transfer Utility see the PanelView 1200e 1400e Transfer Utility User Manual Publication Number 2711E 6 8 Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 Appendix A Sample Worksheets The worksheets in this appendix are designed to help you plan your application To complete these worksheets see Chapter 2 Planning Applications Make copies of the worksheets as you need them and save the originals for future use This Appendix contains the following worksheets Discrete I O Usage Worksheet Use this worksheet to help you keep track of the PLC addresses Use one for each full or partial rack assignment Block Transfer File I O Usage Worksheet Use this worksheet to help you keep track of the block transfer addresses Use one worksheet for each block transfer file Rack Assignments Worksheet Use this worksheet to record your exact rack assignments Block Transfer File Worksheet Use this worksheet to record your block transfer file assignments Remote I O Tags Worksheet Use this worksheet to help you assign programmable controller addresses to each object on a screen Communications Worksheet DH Communications Worksheet ControlNet Communications Worksheet Use these worksheets to record details of the programm
77. 1200 or 1200e application all input objects such as push buttons automatically align to the touch cells even if the touch cell grid isn t selected or displayed The PanelView 1000e and 1400e touch screen terminals use analog resistive touch screens This allows input objects to be any size minimum 40 by 40 pixels and to be placed anywhere on the screen The analog resistive touch screen provides greater flexibility in screen design compared to PanelView 1200 and 1200e terminals PanelView 1200 and 1200e terminals use a touch matrix which requires that all input objects align with a touch grid ATTENTION Do not press multiple touch screen locations at the same time In the unlikely event that two or more touches occur simultaneously in the same horizontal or vertical line an input object located half way between the two touches could be activated This is inherent in the analog resistive touch screen technology used in PanelView 1000e and 1400e terminals Every PanelView terminal screen is 640 by 480 pixels in size You can change the grid spacing to enable you to size and position objects more precisely The following illustration shows the default grid setting 8 by 20 pixels for a keypad application screen Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 8 12 Creating Screens Next State Alt N Previous State Alt P Grid Settings Zoom In Zoom Out Show Color Palette Show Toolbox Publication 271
78. 135 pvz NODE Cont Screens 376 Numeric Data Dsp Disp Value 1135 pvz NODE Cont Screens 165 Vertical Bargraph Control 1 137 pv3 NODE Cont Screens 179 Horizontal Bargraph Control 1137 pv3 NODE Cont Screens 193 Nuneric Data Dsp Disp Value 1137 pv3 NODE Cont Screens 377 Numeric Data Dsp Disp Value 1 137 pv3 NODE Cont Screens 113 Vertical Bargraph Control 123 NODE Cont Screens 28 Multistate Indicato Indicator 41 Close Update Print Help To open the Tag Usage Viewer for Screens do one of the following choose Screen Tag Usage Viewer from the Screen menu press ALT U press F5 Note You can also view all the tags in an application using Tag Usage Viewer for Applications For details see Chapter 6 Defining Tags Chapter 6 also provides information on searching for strings and filtering updating and printing the spreadsheet Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Working with Grids Creating Screens 8 11 These grids are available as guides for positioning sizing and aligning objects screen grid touch screen grid if your application will run on a PanelView 1200 or 1200e terminal Using the Screen Grid How you ll use the screen grid depends on the application type Forkeypad applications use the grid to align objects and design screen layout Fortouch screen applications use the grid to align text graphic and display objects For a PanelView
79. 2 Planning Applications for tips on assigning foreground and background scan rates To open the Scan Class editor dialog box Open the PLC Communications folder and choose Scan Classes or choose from the toolbar The Scan Class editor opens Scan Class Editor Lie c Furmgersad Paing einer tani bad Period 41 me J To configure scan classes 1 Fill in the following information for each scan class Use the information you recorded in the Communications Worksheet Name A Through K You can keep the letter for the name of the scan class or you can type a up to 20 characters long The name can have upper and lower case letters numbers dashes and underscores Spaces are not permitted If you type a meaningful name it will be easier to keep track of what the scan classes represent For example you might name one scan class TimeCritical another SlowChanging and so on Changing the Network Type Defining Communications 5 25 Foreground and Background Period The period specifies in seconds how often the programmable controller address will be scanned A foreground period applies to tags used on the current screen to the alarm and information window tags foreground and background trends and to the PLC controlled PLC I O Control tags The background scan period applies to tags used in all other screens in the system The valid range of values
80. 2 24 2 48 Defaults assigning 9 52 file deleting 9 53 object defaults 12 9 Defining communications 5 1 for ControlNet applications 5 15 for DH applications 5 15 for Remote 1 0 applications 5 2 DH RIO Pass Through control byte 5 13 Ethernet Pass Through 5 13 network download controls 5 20 PanelView Terminal Address 5 19 PLC station address 5 7 Deleting applications 3 17 block transfer file assignments 5 14 data in spreadsheets 4 12 folders 6 9 module group from a rack 5 14 Index 1 5 objects 9 37 rack assignments 5 14 screens 8 7 Describing applications 12 3 Designing screen templates 2 7 screens 2 6 2 8 Determining application size 3 11 Device choosing as data source 6 21 data source for ControlNet applications 6 3 for DH applications 6 3 for Remote 1 0 applications 6 3 Device data source and scan classes 5 24 Device Tags Worksheet A 1 recording object information 2 45 recording tag information 2 46 recording the address 2 50 using 2 43 Device type assigning 5 8 Specifying 5 9 DH and PanelView 1 6 choosing device as data source 6 3 Nodes editor 5 21 remote station address bridged by 1785 KA 2 39 bridged by Pyramid Integrator 2 40 scan classes 5 24 Scan Classes editor 5 15 setting up terminal communications station number 5 17 DH Communications Worksheet A 1 defining the nodes 2 34 2 35 2 37 2 50 using 2 36 DH4 RIO Pass Through assi
81. 21 graphic images 9 5 9 8 9 29 grouping 9 40 increment value button 9 5 9 9 9 21 initial state value 2 27 2 49 8 7 9 3 9 60 interlocked push button 9 5 9 10 9 21 keypad 9 1 atched push button 9 5 9 10 9 21 ines 9 5 9 12 9 21 9 33 ist indicator 9 5 9 8 9 21 ist states configuring 9 59 ocal message display 9 5 9 9 9 21 maintained push button 9 5 9 10 9 21 menu 9 14 9 20 9 21 momentary normally closed push button 9 10 9 21 open push button 9 10 9 21 moving 9 39 multi component 9 51 multistate indicator 9 5 9 9 9 21 multistate push button 9 5 9 10 9 21 non retentive 9 3 9 4 normally closed momentary push button 9 5 normally open momentary push button 9 5 numeric data display 9 5 9 9 9 21 numeric entry keypad 9 5 9 9 9 13 numeric input cursor point 9 5 9 9 9 22 numeric keypad enable button 9 6 9 10 9 22 overlapping 9 42 panels 9 6 9 12 9 22 9 33 pasting 9 36 planning addresses 2 5 read 9 2 rectangles 9 6 9 12 redo 9 19 retentive 9 3 9 4 addressing 9 4 Safety considerations 9 4 return to previous screen button 9 6 9 11 9 21 9 22 scale 9 6 scales 9 11 screen keypad enable button 9 6 9 11 screen list selector 9 6 9 11 9 21 screen print button 9 6 9 11 9 21 screen select keypad 9 6 9 11 scrolling list 9 6 9 11 Selecting 9 15 set bit cursor point 9 6 9 7 9 21 sizing 9 38 Spacing 9 45 States configuring 9 55
82. 23 24 hour format Minute 0 59 Second 0 59 Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 About the Information Message Window Chapter 1 l Working with the Information Message Window This chapter explains e what the Information Message Window is and how it works at runtime how to configure the Information Message Window in PanelBuilder 1400e The programmable controller triggers the Information Message Window to display messages when certain events or processes occur The messages that appear in the Information Message Window are the information messages you define in the Information Messages editor in PanelBuilder Note You create the information messages in the Information Messages editor not in the Information Message Window For details about creating information messages see Chapter 10 Creating Messages The Information Message Window provides the operator with informative messages about the process prompts or instructions and information about current states When the application is running on the terminal the Information Message Window appears over the currently displayed application screen It is not affected when application screens change Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 14 2 Working with the Information Message Window Using the Information Message Window in the Terminal Terminal screen Information message Information Message Window Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 Th
83. 6 4 1 PLC 5 Family Programmable Controllers Hardware Installation Manual 1785 6 6 1 PLC 5 Programming Software 6200 6 4 7 5250 LP1 LP2 PLC 5 250 Programming Manual 5000 6 4 8 SLC 500 Family of Programmable Controllers Advanced Programming 1747 NM002 Software User Manual ControlNet PLC 5 Programmable Controllers User Manual 1785 6 5 14 Conventions Used RIO DH ControlNet DH and ControlNet All network types Preface 7 Information is provided in a consistent way throughout all the PanelBuilder 1400e user documentation The documentation uses these print conventions mouse conventions selection conventions key conventions and command conventions Print Conventions Applications can be created that communicate with PLCs over Remote I O DH or ControlNet When instructions apply specifically to one type of application or the other this is noted in the margin means instructions for a Remote I O application only e means instructions for a Data Highway Plus DH application only means instructions for a ControlNet application only means instructions for DH and ControlNet applications but not Remote I O applications means instructions for all applications regardless of communication network type Mouse Conventions You can use a mouse with one or two buttons This manual assumes that if you have a multiple button mouse the left mouse button is configured as the primary mouse button Procedu
84. 8 Epson 80 compatible printers 1 7 Equipment optional 1 6 required 1 3 Errors communication time before reporting 5 23 syntax in expressions 7 23 Ethernet Pass Through assigning 2 34 block transfer control byte 5 13 setting up 5 5 Evaluation of expressions 7 19 of local variables 7 7 Examples expressions 7 28 Exporting graphic images 9 31 messages 10 10 10 13 symbols 9 28 tag database 6 35 to MODSOFT database 6 36 to Taylor ProWORXPLUS database 6 36 Editors Expression 7 21 Expressions about 7 2 checking syntax 7 23 compilation of 7 20 components 7 5 7 21 maximum number of 7 8 creating 7 1 cutting copying and pasting 7 23 data types 7 3 defined 7 1 editing 7 21 after compilation 7 20 elements removed from during compilation 7 20 errors syntax 7 23 examples 7 28 floating point accuracy 7 4 formatting 7 22 how they work 7 2 indenting 7 23 language about 7 4 limits in 7 8 local variables in 7 6 maximum size of 7 8 7 20 operations order of precedence 7 4 operations in 7 4 optional write 7 2 read 7 2 regeneration of 7 20 reserved keywords F 1 return values in 7 19 samples 7 28 syntax checking 7 23 errors 7 23 types 7 2 user entry character 7 6 validating 7 27 values 7 19 write 7 2 7 24 Extended character set 1 MS Word Sans Serif 9 25 using 9 26 PanelView 9 25 using 9 25 F Features new P 1 File format for importi
85. 9 56 9 57 viewing 9 56 static 9 2 symbols 9 6 9 12 text 9 6 9 12 9 21 9 24 time display 9 6 9 13 9 21 toolbox 9 20 touch screen 9 1 trend 9 6 9 21 types 9 1 undo 9 19 ungrouping 9 40 wedge 9 6 9 12 9 21 9 33 working with 9 1 write 9 2 zooming 9 18 Offlink address 2 39 5 6 5 19 Offset 2 23 2 47 Online help P 3 P 10 Opening applications 3 3 screens 8 3 multiple 8 3 Operation hold time 12 7 Operations in expressions 7 4 arithmetic 7 9 comparison 7 11 construct 7 12 logical 7 16 Optional write expression 7 2 OR in expressions 7 17 Organizing tags 6 4 Overlapping objects 9 42 PanelBuilder 1200 applications converting PanelBuilder 1400e about 1 1 1 2 components 1 1 default file format 3 8 dialog boxes 1 1 documentation P 3 downloading applications 1 4 editors 1 1 4 1 equipment requirements 10 features P 1 hardware requirements P 10 1 3 optimizing performance 2 4 optional equipment 1 6 planning applications 2 2 README TXT file P 3 related publications P 6 software registration P 3 software requirements P 10 1 3 support services P 10 troubleshooting D 1 uploading applications 1 4 validation errors D 3 version compatibility 1 2 wildcards 6 3 6 6 PanelBuilder 900 importing a database 6 36 PanelBuilder for DOS applications converting 3 4 Panels 9 6 9 12 9 22 9 33 PanelView 1200 Enhancement Kit 3 1
86. A1 126 PLC 3 Timers and Counters FWWW nnnn bb F File type C Counter T Timer WWW Structured word CTL Control word PRE Preset value ACC Accumulated value nnnn Counter Timer number 0 9999 decimal bb Bit offset within word 15 octal done bit 16 octal timing bit 17 octal enable bit Example of digital address TCTL 125 17 Example of analog address CPRE 125 Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Addressing Syntax C 3 PLC 5 Data Files Fnnn eee bb F nnn eee bb optional File type B Binary N Integer D z Decimal BCD F Floating point ASCII File number 3 999 decimal Binary integer and floating point file types use the default file number if the file number is absent The default numbers are 3 binary 7 integer and 8 floating point Element number 0 999 decimal Bit offset within word 0 15 decimal Not applicable to floating point file types Example of bit address B3 173 15 Example of word address N7 12 PLC 5 Binary Files Optional Syntax Fnnn bbbbb F nnn bbbbb File type B Binary File number 3 999 decimal Uses default file number 3 if the file number is absent Bit offset from start of file 0 15999 decimal Example B3 1024 Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 C 4 Addressing Syntax Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 PLC 5 1 0 and Status Files F ee bb F ee bb optional Fil
87. Bit 2 running amp Bit 3 low speed means starting REM Any other bits means alarm state state motorl_sts current state of motor IF state 0 THEN result 0 motor is not running EXIT END IF The conditional expression wraps to the next line Note the use of the line continuation character o IF state AND 4 lt gt 0 AND NOT state AND 251 _ lt gt 0 THEN result 1 The motor is running EXIT END IF Creating Expressions 7 19 IF state AND 4 lt gt 0 AND state AND 8 lt gt 0 AND NOT state AND 243 lt gt 0 THEN result 2 motor is starting since run and low speed are active EXIT END IF IF state AND 243 lt gt 0 THEN result 3 motor has an alarm EXIT END IF The numbers used are based on converting the binary representation of the state bits into a decimal number For instance when bit 2 is set this is equivalent to the number 4 when bit 3 is set this is equivalent to the number 8 243 represents all alarm bits set Expression Return Values It is important to understand how an expression is evaluated in order to correctly determine the result of the expression An expression will return the value of its last executed statement In each of the following examples var is a properly declared local variable The expression Returns 3 3 5 2 10 var var var 3 3 var 3 1 True if varis equal to 3
88. Communication and other information Tags Link to tag database Screens The Shared Database Another PanelBuilder 1400e Application Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 6 32 Defining Tags Using Shared Tag Databases Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Important communication information for each application is still private However when you select another PanelBuilder 1400e application to share its database with your current application its communication information replaces the communications setup for your current application Changes you make to the communication information once an application is using a shared database will not affect the information in the other application When you create a new application its tag database is private If you want the database to be shared by other applications you must first convert the private database to a shared database Converting to a shared database creates an external database with links from the application to the database Note When you convert a private database to shared the application s private database is deleted from the file Keep the following points in mind when sharing databases A PanelBuilder 1400e application can only select a database from another PanelBuilder 1400e application of the same network type However a PanelBuilder 1400e application of any network type can select an RS View project Each application using the database ca
89. Control 8 11 13 15 Example T87 133 14 SLC 5 Enhanced Timer Counter and Control Files Analog Member Addressing Optional Syntax Fnnn eee o bb F nnn optional eee bb optional File type T Timer C Counter R Control File number Timer 4 9 255 decimal Counter 5 9 255 decimal Control 6 9 255 decimal Timer counter and control file types use the default file number if the file number is absent The default numbers are 4 timer 5 counter and 6 control Element number 0 255 decimal Word offset 1 2 decimal Bit number 0 15 decimal Example R44 72 1 14 Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 C 12 Addressing Syntax Mnemonic Tables Timer Mnemonics Mnemonic Instruction Type ACC Accumulator Value Analog DN Done Digital EN Enable Digital PRE Preset Value Analog TT Timing Digital Counter Mnemonics Mnemonic Instruction Type ACC Accumulated Value Analog CD Count Down Enable Digital CU Count Up Enable Digital DN Done Digital OV Overflow Digital PRE Preset Value Analog UN Underflow Digital For fixed 1 0 SLC only UA Update Accumulator Value Digital Control Mnemonics Mnemonic Instruction Type DN Done Digital EN Enable Digital ER Error Digital FD Found Digital IN Inhibit Digital LEN Length Analog POS Position Analog UL Unload Digital For all programmable cont
90. Control and the Message Handshake controls The Message to PLC control uses string tags only Full Handshaking When the message text is sent to the PLC after the Alarm Control Delay interval the terminal sets the Message Control to 1 and waits for a handshake response from the PLC When the Message Handshake makes a 0 to non zero transition the Message Control tag is reset to 0 If you want to use message handshaking you must assign both the Message Control and Message Handshake controls and you must program the PLC to reset the Message Handshake to 0 Configuring Alarms 11 25 State Transition Diagram for Alarm Message to PLC Complete Handshaking Offline Mode Switch or Power Up Enter Run Mode Reset Control Tag Wait for Alarm with Msg to PLC Flag Alarm with Msg to PLC Handshake Expression non zero Write message to PLC Reset Control Tag Start Control Display Clear Handshake Condition Mode Switch or Power Off Offline Mode Switch or Power Off Mode Switch or Power Off Wait for Wait for Alarm Transition in Expression Alarm with Msg to PLC Queue Msg Discard if queue full Delay Over Set Control Tag Raise Handshake Condition Alarm with Msg to PLC Queue Msg Discard if queue full Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 11 26 Configuring Alarms Partial Handshaking If the Message Control is assigned and the Message Handshake is not the Message Control is set to 1 after the Alarm Control Delay i
91. ControlNetto Remote 0 5 33 Converting from ControlNetto 5 34 Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 toc vi Table of Contents Defining Tags Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Chapter 6 What Are 6 1 TAQ arx a dE RO CORE ROLE EUR RD ER ERA 6 2 Read and Write 5 6 2 UP Pado tieu 6 2 FT T ET 6 3 io PCT 6 3 Organizing _ 6 3 Naming 5 6 4 Using Folders to Group TagS 6 4 The Tag Database Editor 6 4 Opening the Tag Database Editor 6 5 Using the Editor diese aaa daaa 2393 6 5 Using the FOM ss ota nds anendra Gee 6 6 Using the Buttons in the 6 6 Using the Query BOX 6 6 Using the Folder Hierarchy 6 7 Creating Folder cube e epaian bu ceases Did RE RERO 6 7 Nesting us oda hanane e FU etd 6 8 Openinga qux Ee eed 6 8 Adding Tags toa 6 9 Duplicating a 6 9 Deleting a 6 9 Using the Spreadsheet Viewer
92. Cursor Point objects and Set Bit Cursor Point objects in a keypad application Numeric Input Cursor Point objects and Set Bit Cursor Point objects cannot be configured for touch screen applications By default when the operator presses the Cancel button at the terminal the Cursor Point character becomes invisible for the Numeric Input Cursor Point or Set Bit Cursor Point object You may want to keep the character visible to give the operator a visual indication of which Numeric Input Cursor Point or Set Bit Cursor Point is active Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 12 10 Configuring Terminal Setup Options Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 To keep the Cursor Point character visible Click the Retain Cursor On Cancel checkbox to enable it The Cursor Point character will remain visible even after the Cancel button is pressed Configure Terminal Setup Note If you enable the Retain Cursor On Cancel option the application will be compatible with PanelView Version 3 or later it will not be compatible with earlier versions For more information about the operation of Set Bit Cursor Points and Numeric Input Cursor Points at the terminal see Cursor Point Default Operation in the chapter Control Selectors in the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Reference Manual Configuring PLC I O Control Options Chapter 1 3 Configuring PLC I O Control Options This chapter explains th
93. DOS Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 2 If you know the path and name of the application you can type this in the File Name field If you don t know the application name select the type of application you want to display by making a selection in the List Files of Type drop down list Your choices are PanelBuilder 1400e configuration files pvc this is a configuration file created in PanelBuilder 1400e PanelBuilder 1400e terminal files pvd this is a download file ready for downloading to a PanelView 1200e or 1400e terminal e PanelBuilder 1200 files pbw this is a configuration file created in PanelBuilder 1200 e PanelBuilder for DOS files cfg this is a configured application file created in PanelBuilder for DOS PanelBuilder 1200 terminal files apl this is a download file ready for downloading to a PanelView 1200 terminal e all files 3 Choose the application you want to open 4 Choose OK The Application Window for the application you just selected appears on your screen If you re opening a cfg pbw or apl application PanelBuilder automatically converts the application A status window appears while the application is being converted To run your PanelBuilder 1200 or PanelBuilder for DOS applications on a PanelView 1000e 1200e or 1400e terminal you must convert the application You can convert any cfg pbw or apl files To convert a PanelBuilder 1200 or PanelBuilder for
94. DOS application 1 Open the application as described in the previous section The following message appears Import Application Lx The version compatibility of this application will be set to 092 PanelView 1400 terminal firmware version 1 00 00 and above The application size be increased as a result Convert application Cancel Help The Conversion Process Working with Applications 3 5 2 Choose OK A progress window appears during the time it takes to convert the application Once the application is open you can edit it This application is now compatible with PanelBuilder 1400e only and will run on Panel View 1000e 1200e and 1400e terminals only However the original file remains unchanged on the computer s disk When you save or close the converted file it will be saved as a pvc file The pvc file format is the PanelBuilder 1400e configuration file format When the PanelBuilder for DOS or PanelBuilder 1200 application file is converted the following changes are made atag database is generated and a tag is defined for each unique address that had been associated with objects windows and Global Address options the rack and block transfer definitions are generated each object window and Global Address option that used to have an address associated with it now has the correct tag assigned to it all screen components are converted to their pixel graphic equiva
95. Data and Alarm check boxes in the Tag Database editor are present to maintain compatibility with RS View databases You cannot use them in PanelBuilder gt Tip For information about assigning tag addresses that optimize DH highway traffic see Guidelines For Organizing Tags to Optimize DH Network Performance in Chapter 2 Planning Applications Configuring an Analog Tag 1 If the tag is part of a folder select that folder in the folder hierarchy The folder name appears in the Name field and is the first part of the tag name 2 a tag name If the tag is part of a folder type the name after the backslash V lag Database Tr Edi E Se ay Homa j Sarenty r Ce p TTE Mean Dmt D Dein Type iratiod Dina Sinerce T Devin Coop C Menom 6 HRenaiel D Adumas EI fants The si arce Tren 1 fs L Log Eni Li 4 For Help press F1 3 For Type select Analog 4 Fill in the fields as outlined below Security This field is present to maintain compatibility with RS View databases You cannot enter anything in the Security field Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 6 14 Defining Tags Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Description Type a description of this tag up to 128 characters long Minimum and Maximu
96. Entry Keypad allows the operator to enter a value which is then sent to the programmable controller at the address specified by the Numeric Keypad Input control The keypad is available in large and small sizes for touch screen applications only Numeric Input Cursor Point consists of a numeric display and a cursor character The operator can enter numbers into an array of numeric fields similar to an array of thumb wheel switches on a control panel This object sends its control value to the programmable controller It is available only for keypad applications Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 9 10 Creating Objects Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 gt Note By default when the Cancel button is pressed at the terminal the Numeric Input Cursor Point Character becomes invisible To keep the character visible even after the Cancel key is pressed enable the Retain Cursor On Cancel checkbox in the Object Setup tab of the Terminal Setup dialog box For more information about terminal setup options see Chapter 12 Configuring Terminal Setup Options Note If you enable the Retain Cursor On Cancel option the application will be compatible with PanelView Version 3 or later It will not be compatible with earlier versions Numeric Keypad Enable Button pops up the Numeric Entry Scratchpad in which the operator can enter a number The number is then sent to the Numeric Keypad Input control This object is available only for ke
97. F 4 Import Message File If you made any changes and haven t updated them a message appears prompting you to save your changes 2 Choose Yes or No depending on whether you want to update the changes If you choose Yes PanelBuilder automatically checks your messages for errors If there are any errors PanelBuilder informs you of these Follow the steps outlined in the previous section and correct the messages If no errors exist the messages are updated and the editor closes Important If you choose No PanelBuilder closes the editor without updating the messages You ll lose any changes you made If you change your mind and don t want to close the editor choose Cancel Important Updating your messages stores the changes only temporarily If you exit the application without saving it these updates will be lost To ensure that you save all changes save your application frequently For details on saving the application see Chapter 3 Working with Applications Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 Chapter 1 1 Configuring Alarms This chapter describes these topics e the interaction between the terminal and the PLC program that generates alarms e the global controls used to report alarms and how to configure them e the Alarm Message Window and how to configure it e the Alarm Status screen and how to configure it e the Alarm History screen and how to configure it What Are Alarms Alarms indic
98. Files Fnnn eee bb F nnn eee File type B Binary D Decimal BCD N Integer F Floating point ASCII ST String File number 3 999 decimal Binary integer and floating point file types use the default file number if the file number is absent The default numbers are 3 binary 7 integer and 8 floating point Element number 0 999 decimal Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 6 Addressing Syntax bb optional Bit offset within word 0 15 decimal Bit offset is not supported for floating point and string file types Example B84 113 13 PLC 5 Enhanced Binary Files Optional Syntax Fnnn bbbbb F File type B Binary nnn optional File number 3 999 decimal Uses default file number 3 if the file number 1s absent bbbbb Bit offset from start of file 0 15999 decimal Example B27 248 PLC 5 Enhanced Timer Counter Control SFC Status Message PID Block Transfer and Token Data Files FFnnn eee MNE ss bb FF File type T Timer C Counter R Control SC SFC status MG Message PD PID control BT Block transfer TD Token data nnn File number 3 999 decimal Timer counter and control file types use the default file number if the file number is absent The default numbers are 4 timer 5 counter and 6 control eee Element number 0 999 decimal MNE Member mnemonic see mnemonic tables on Page C 11 Publication 2711E 8
99. Local Station Addressing For a node connected to the same DH network as the PanelView terminal valid station numbers are between 0 and 77 octal Remote Station Addressing A PanelView terminal can communicate with nodes on remote DH networks Remote DH networks can be bridged by a 1785 KA interface module or by a Pyramid Integrator that has an RM or KA module Planning Applications 2 39 DH 4 Networks Bridged by a 1785 KA The format of the station address for nodes on remote DH networks 18 Station Address Valid Entries ll rrr ss local bridge address 0 77 octal rrr remote bridge address 0 376 octal 55 Station address on remote DH 0 77 octal or You can shorten the offlink address by combining the remote bridge and remote station addresses into one three digit number The system reads only the first digit of the remote bridge address and adds the two digit remote station address to produce a shorter ad dress that still points to the same node 1 55 local bridge address 0 77 octal 55 combined remote bridge address and remote station 0 376 octal address The following figure shows a PanelView 1400e terminal connected to a DH network The local DH network is bridged to a remote DH network which is bridged to a second remote DH network The 1785 KA interface modules are used to bridge the networks The valid station entries for the various nodes in the figure are Station Address Vali
100. P ublic Wend Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Symbols amg file 10 11 apl file 3 4 Cfg file 3 4 csv 6 33 6 35 column ordering 6 37 importing a database 6 36 db file 6 33 img file 10 11 mg file 10 11 pbw file 3 4 file 3 4 pvd file 3 4 user entry character 7 6 in write expressions 7 24 Numbers 1771 Remote 1 0 Link 1 5 5 11 1785 KA 2 39 bridging DH networks 2 39 5 6 5 19 6200 Series P rogramming Software 2 40 A A l Series software importing a database 6 36 Acknowledge button hold time 12 7 Acknowledge hold time 12 8 Acknowledge to PLC controller tag 14 5 Acknowledging alarms 11 5 Actual firmware version defined E 1 Addresses See also Offlink address and tags 2 13 2 16 2 19 2 43 assigning 2 43 5 21 block transfer file 2 16 5 10 discrete 1 0 2 16 planning 2 19 using worksheets 2 19 recording on worksheets 2 27 2 50 reducing requirements 2 18 retentive objects 9 4 station 2 37 local 2 38 remote 2 38 Index Addressing syntax PLC 2 C 1 PLC 3 data table sections C 2 timers and counters C 2 PLC 5 binary files optional syntax C 3 data files C 3 1 0 and status files C 4 timers counters and control files C 4 PLC 5 Enhanced binary files optional syntax C 6 binary integer BCD ASCII float and string files C 5 1 0 and status files C 5 timer counter control SFC status message PID b
101. PLC These controls are optional When these controls are activated depends on your choice for the Operator versus Operator and Remote selection refer to the earlier section Alarm Acknowledge to PLC for more details To enable the Acknowledge to PLC option you must assign a tag to that control The tag allowed for the Acknowledge to PLC control depends on your selection for Alarm Acknowledge to PLC type Bit or Word Invalid tag types will not be reported until validation See Alarm Acknowledge to PLC earlier in this chapter for more information on making these selections If you selected this Expressions Max no of You must use this tag type forthe Valid Starting Alarm Acknowledge allowed Acknowledge to PLC Acknowledge to PLC control Trigger to PLC type tags Bit No 50 Block 1 to 65 535 Word No 1 Digital or Analog N A If the Acknowledge to PLC control tag type is this It does this when the alarm is acknowledged Block Only the bit corresponding to the acknowledged alarm s trigger value will be set For example if an alarm with a trigger value of 14 is acknowledged and the starting trigger is set to 1 then the fourteenth bit in that block tag will be set to 1 The bit will remain set to 1 until that alarm is triggered again when the bit will be reset to 0 Digital The tag will be set to 1 Analog The terminal will write the trigger value of the acknowledged alarm to the tag Note If yo
102. The Application Startup Screen 12 2 Changing the Application 12 2 Describing the Application 12 3 Target Firmware 12 4 Specifying Target Firmware 12 4 Timing Parameters 12 5 Setting the Push Button Hold Time 12 6 Setting the Remote Alarm Parameters 12 7 Setting the Enter Key Parameters 12 8 Setting the Information Message Window Acknowledge Hold Time 12 8 Setting the Auto R epeat Functions 12 8 Object SEW s usa ee odd ed ned Pu or Fr E E eg entes 12 9 Configuring PLC I O Control Chapter 13 Options Configuring PLC VO Control 5 13 1 PLC Controlled Options ssi cub sd ep Y ER bp PIER esas 13 3 PLC Controlled Screen Number 13 3 PLC Controlled Screen 13 4 About Screen Prints from the 13 4 PLC Controlled Date amp Time Control 13 4 Individual PLC Controlled Date amp Time Controls 13 5 Notify PLC ODUOIIS sexu x a vx ER Pa E RAD 13 6 Screen Numberto 13 6 Screen Print Active to PLC 13 6 Date amp Time to PLC
103. The terminal can queue up to 128 Message to PLC requests in first in first out order Once the queue is full write requests will be discarded and a minor fault will appear Note Delay intervals and hold times are configured in the Timing Parameters tab of the Configure Terminal Setup dialog box See Configuring Timing Parameters in Chapter 12 Configuring Terminal Setup Options for more information about these parameters Note If you use the Message to PLC control your application will be compatible with Panel View Version 2 or later It will not be compatible with earlier versions Message Control The Message Control is used to control the flow of messages to the PLC This control uses tags only Use a digital or analog tag When an alarm is triggered the Panel View terminal will initiate handshaking as described in the previous section Message to PLC The type of handshaking performed depends on whether the Message to PLC Message Control or Message Handshake controls are assigned Note Delay intervals and hold times are configured in the Timing Parameters tab of the Configure Terminal Setup dialog box See Configuring Timing Parameters in Chapter 12 Configuring Terminal Setup Options for more information about these parameters Note If you assign a tag to this control your application will be compatible with Panel View Version 2 or later It will not be compatible with earlier versions Message Handsh
104. Timeout sec E EM The Unsolicited Messages Node is the PanelView terminal By default the terminal s Station Address is the DH station number configured in the current application The Station Address can be changed in the Panel View terminal s Terminal Network Setup screen Note For more node definitions use additional copies of this worksheet Scan Class Definitions Note The default foreground and background rates are 0 000 seconds and 5 000 seconds respectively ControlNet Communications Worksheet Application File Name Panel View Station Number Node Definitions Node Name PLC Type Station Address Timeout sec The Unsolicited Messages Node is the Panel View terminal By default the terminal s Station Address is the station number configured in the current application The Station Address can be changed in the Panel View terminal s Terminal Network Setup screen Note For more node definitions use additional copies of this worksheet Scan Class Definitions Foreground sec Background sec Name Foreground sec Background sec Note The default foreground and background rates are 0 000 seconds and 5 000 seconds respectively Device Tags Worksheet Application File Name Screen Number Object Tag Address iti Analog 1 Ref Type pm Name Type nalog Tag Only Initi
105. View terminal the operator moves through the items in the list and makes selections Each item in the list is a different object state You can define the number of states in the list by resizing the list component Note You can also define the number of states for all but the Control List Selector in the objects configuration dialog boxes Note For the Scrolling List object the number of states in its Object Lists depends on the number of visible states defined for its Cursor List Once you ve assigned tags to visible states in the Scrolling List you can t remove the states by resizing the list You must first unassign the visible state tags Important If a list object has state text defined you can t resize the list so it is smaller than the number of states with text You must delete the text before you can resize the list To define the number of states in the list 1 Select the list component of the list object 2 Resize the list component vertically until it shows the desired number of states Note The maximum number of states an object can display depends on the font size If you select this font size The object can display this many states Small or Double Wide 24 Double High or Large 12 Extra Large 6 You cannot use the Extra Large Font for Scrolling List objects Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 9 60 Creating Objects The object in this illustration is a Screen List S e
106. You should already have determined the station address for each node when you completed the Communications Worksheet If not see Chapter 2 Planning Applications for details on determining station addresses Note A node definition can be changed at any time during application development At application or screen validation or download the nodes used by the tags in the application must be defined If you change the node type the tags that use this node may have invalid addresses If you change the node name you can automatically update your tags at the same time To open the Node editor Open the PLC Communications folder and choose Nodes or choose from the toolbar The Node editor opens DIETE The Node editor has two parts the data entry form on top where you define the node and the spreadsheet viewer on the bottom where you see all the nodes and select one for editing Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 5 22 Defining Communications ControlNet DH ControlNet Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 To configure the nodes 1 Fill in the following information for each node Use the information you recorded in the Communications Worksheet Node name Type a name of your choice up to 40 characters long This name represents a programmable controller on the network The only valid characters for a node name are a to z A to Z O to 9 dash and _ underscore The name is
107. a graphic image 1 Open the Select Image dialog box by doing one of the following choose Bitmap Image or DXF Image from the Graphic Image submenu on the Objects menu IT choose Or ET from the toolbox Select Bitmap Image x Current bitmap images AGITATR BMP AGITATRL BMP Cancel Import BLOWER BMP BLOWERL BMP Remove COMPRSR BMP Help COMPRSRL BMP CONVEYR BMP CONVEYRL BMP CYCLONE BMP CYCLONEL BMP Monochrome Bitmap Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 9 30 Creating Objects Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 2 Select an image and choose OK The pointer changes to the active graphic tool 3 Position the pointer where you want to place the graphic image and drag the mouse to create the object s outline 4 When you re finished release the mouse button You can assign different foreground and background colors and fill styles to monochrome graphic images See Changing Object Appearance later in this chapter To change a graphic image 1 Double click or right click the graphic image The Select Image dialog box appears 2 Select a new image To import new graphic images 1 In the Select Bitmap Image or Select DXF Image dialog box choose Import Select one or more graphic images to import HES File name Folders c ab pb1400e images isa Cancel if agitatr bmp agitatrl bmp blower bmp blowerl bmp
108. a keypad application select the Optional Keypad Write Exprn control Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 7 26 Creating Expressions Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 2 Choose Assign Exprn The Expression editor appears c Hen are ial be ry Piani ar eq da 3 Enter the Expression in the Expression editor Use the User Entry Character to indicate the position of the value entered by the operator 4 Choose OK 5 Assign the Keypad Numeric Input write tag The numeric result of the write expression will be written to this tag Validating Expressions Creating Expressions 7 27 Cuaonliquri Humuric Estry Keypad Enan 2 wm a iii Ermm Key Corbes F nei Kry piped Amuna mg J You perform a syntax check on your expressions as you create them as described in Using the Expression Editor earlier in this chapter Expressions are also validated when you perform a screen validation or application validation Both these types of validation check expression syntax and verify that all tag references are valid If expression syntax errors in screen objects are discovered PanelBuilder reports the screen object and expression that contains the error For expression syntax errors in global functions PanelBuilder identifies the functi
109. address is unchanged You will have to change the data source to Remote I O manually for any of these tags that you want to use and give them each a Remote I O address Ifyou convert the tags to Remote I O the data source for all the tags is changed to Remote I O but you will still have to give them valid Remote I O addresses manually Note Converting tags that are shared may make them invalid for the other applications that are using them Unused tags that are not converted will stay as DH tags Note If you convert an application from Remote I O to DH or ControlNet or vice versa the tag addresses may be invalid for the network to which you are converting Change the tag addresses to match the network type Defining Communications 5 31 Converting from DH to ControlNet 4 Choose OK The following message appears Cunfigure Communication Setup Nodes and Scan classes will be lost after LJ the network type converted to RIO Continua mm J w 5 Choose Yes to confirm that you want to continue 6 Once you have changed the network type you will have to configure the programmable logic controller type rack assignments block transfer files and Pass Through File control byte if needed in the Rack and Block Transfer File editors For details on configuring an application for Remote I O see Defining Communications for a Remote I O Application earlier in this chapter To change th
110. and 64 READ PLC In or WRITE PLC Out Circle One FULL or LISTEN ONLY Access Circle One PLC Bit Numbers 15 14 3 12 H 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 32 33 34 36 37 38 39 41 T T 42 ST 43 i i T T 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 i i i i 56 87 i i i i 1 T 1 1 T 1 T 1 T 1 T 1 T 59 i i i i i 60 T 61 i i 1 62 en 63 When you have assigned addresses to all the tags used for each object window and PLC I O Control option determine the I O requirements The best way to do this is to record the information on the Rack Assignments and Block Transfer File worksheets Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Planning Applications 2 31 The Rack Assignments Worksheet Once you know how much I O your application requires use the Rack Assignments Worksheet to keep track of your rack assignments Rack Assignments Worksheet Application File Name PLC Scanner Type Baud Rate 57 6K 10 000 Ft 115 2K 5 000 Ft 230 4K 2 500 Ft Note You must make at least one rack assignment Additional rack assignments are optional Record the Rack Number and circle the Module Groups
111. and active 1 Open the Screens folder The list of available screens appears 2 Choose the desired screen The screen is displayed in a separate window on your workspace You can have multiple screens open at a time For more information on working with multiple screens see Chapter 3 Creating Multistate Indicators and Drawing Lines in the Getting Started manual You can copy an existing application screen and make it into a new screen within the same application This is an efficient way to create several similar screens quickly Tip An easy way to ensure consistency between screens is to create a screen and make it into a screen template Copy this template for each screen in the application and add to it as required To create a new screen by copying an existing screen 1 Open the Screens folder and select the screen you want to copy 2 Choose Copy from the Application Window s Screen menu The Copy Screen dialog box appears with the name and number of the screen you are copying From fi OES 1 Name CONFIG Close To e E He CONFIG 3 Type new screen number in the Number field 4 new screen name in the Name field 5 Choose Copy Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 8 4 Creating Screens Copying Application Screen Contents into Another Application Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 This copies the screen its objects and all their tag assignments to
112. and transferring application files see the PanelView 1400e Transfer Utility User Manual Catalog Number 2711E 6 8 RIO Introduction to PanelBuilder 1 5 Programmable Controllers Panel View terminals can be connected to a programmable controller as follows PanelView terminals can be connected to any Allen Bradley 1771 Remote I O Link Applicable host controllers include almost all Allen Bradley Programmable Logic Controllers as well as certain IBM computers VME Controllers and the DEC Q Bus interface Newly released Allen Bradley programmable controllers not listed that support the 1771 Remote I O link will support Panel View terminals The following table lists the available programmable controller and scanner types Programmable Controller Scanner Type Rack Address Type Ranges PLC 2 1772 SD SD2 1 7 Octal PLC 3 1775 5 4A B 0 76 Octal PLC 3 1775 55 0 76 Octal PLC 3 10 1775 SR5 0 17 Octal PLC 5 11 Built in 3 Only PLC 5 15 Built in 1 3 Octal PLC 5 20 Built in 1 3 Octal PLC 5 20C Built in 1 3 Octal PLC 5 25 Built in 1 7 Octal PLC 5 30 Built in 1 7 Octal PLC 5 40 Built in 1 17 Octal PLC 5 40C Built in 1 17 Octal PLC 5 60 Built in 1 27 Octal PLC 5 80 Built in 1 27 Octal PLC 5 250 5150 RS 0 37 Octal SLC 5 02 5 03 5 04 1747 SN SerA 0 3 Decimal SLC 5 02 5 03 5 04 1747 SN SerB 0 3 Decimal IBM PC 6008
113. application name The file extension is rpt 2 To change the file name type the new file name in the File Name field 3 Change the drive or directory if required 4 Choose OK Note The ASCII text file does not include screen images Working with Applications 3 17 Closing Applications When you close an application all open editors for that application close as well New Application Ctrl N Open Application Ctrl 0 To close an application Save Application Ctrl S Save Application As 1 Choose Close from the File menu or from the Control menu press CTRL F4 or double click the control menu box on the Application Window Download Upload Alt F4 If you made any changes to the application since last saving it PanelBuilder prompts you to save the changes 2 Choose Yes or No Important If you choose No you lose changes you made in the configuration dialog boxes or editors However if you have a shared database those changes will already have been written to disk Deleting Applications Use the Windows Explorer to delete an application The application is stored in a file of the same name as the application with a pvc file extension See your Microsoft Windows User s Guide for details on how to use the Windows Explorer Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Dialog Box Editors Chapter l Working with Editors PanelBuilder has four types of editors
114. as the value of tag PUMP minus 1 PUMP 1 will be treated as the value of tag PUMP 1 Comments apostrophe or REM Use comments to describe the expression A comment can start at the beginning of the line or you can place comments to the right of executable code You cannot place comments to the left of executable code You can use up to 100 comments in each expression Com ments are removed when the expression is compiled We recommend that you begin each expression with a comment the first line of the expres sion is displayed in the Control list Multi line comments must include the comment indicator on each line See Examples 2 and 3 later in this chapter for samples of how to use com ments Constants any number Constants are simply numbers that you use in expressions Exit statements Exit Exit statements allow you to explicitly terminate the evaluation of the expression PanelView uses the value it calculated immediately before reading the Exit statement Use of Exit state ments is entirely optional The Exit statement may follow any line of executable code The Exit statement must be written on its own line although it may be followed by a comment Line continuations underscore Use the line continuation character when a line of code is too long to read easily in the Ex pression editor When used the line continuation character must be the last executable character on the line There must b
115. bits 1 BCD digit 4 2 BCD digits 8 3 BCD digits 12 4 BCD digits 16 5 BCD digits 20 6 BCD digits 24 7 BCD digits 28 8 BCD digits 32 Note If you assign 5 to 8 BCD digits the device must support Long Integer data Each group of four bits represents the equivalent of one decimal digit in the tag value The number of bits required depends on the maximum value required for the object This depends on the application Note The BIN3 BIN4 BIN6 and BINS data types are reserved for use in Modbus applications For more information see the PanelBuilder 1400e Modbus User Manual Publication Number 2711E 6 12 which is supplied as part of the optional Modbus Communications Kit Catalog Number 271 1E UMOD Initial Value The value to be placed in the input address of an object upon power up Assign Initial Values to objects with PLC input addresses Note For any multistate object you draw in the Screens editor you can define an Initial State If you define an Initial State for the object and an Initial Value for the object s control tag the object s Initial State takes precedence The tag s initial value is used only if an initial state is not defined Range of Values If an object has a range of state values record the values in this column Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 2 50 Planning Applications Address Number of Characters string tag only Carrying Out Your Plan Public
116. block transfer file addresses and the Pass Through control byte address These points summarize the process of planning your Remote I O communications using the worksheets Define the discrete or block transfer PLC addresses and tag names for each object on your screen using the Remote I O Tags Worksheet Enter the object reference number and screen number on the I O Usage worksheets to map your PLC memory usage Use the Discrete I O Usage Worksheet for discrete addresses Use both the Discrete I O Usage Worksheet and the Block Transfer File I O Usage Worksheet for block transfer files and addresses the Discrete I O Worksheet is for recording any block transfer control bytes in the Output section of the image table Use anew Remote I O Tags Worksheet for each screen Use one Discrete I O Usage Worksheet for each full or partial rack assignment and two Block Transfer File I O Usage Worksheets for each block transfer file Record the addresses for your windows and PLC controlled options on a different worksheet and map these addresses onto the Discrete I O Usage Worksheets Finish assigning addresses to your objects windows and PLC controlled options so you know how many racks to assign to your PanelView terminal Enter this information on the Rack Assignments and Block Transfer File Worksheets Important Before you use the worksheets determine the rack numbers you can use for your PanelView terminal You won t know yo
117. can use either a discrete I O address or a block transfer file address Using block transfer files increases the amount of address space available to you for the application Block transfer files can be defined as PLC input or PLC output files The other two editors in the PLC Communications folder the Scan Classes and Nodes editors are used exclusively for defining DH Data Highway Plus and ControlNet communications See page 5 15 Communication Setup The Configure Communication Setup dialog box has two tabs Terminal Communications and Network File Transfer ES PLC Communications ELT In the Terminal Communications tab you specify the baud rate used Nodes to communicate between the terminal and the PLC or the terminal Scan Classes network address depending on the application s network type The RIO Racks network type is a static field that indicates the network specified for L RIO Block Transfer Files ihe Gaitent application To change the application s network type see Changing the Network Type later in this chapter The information you define in the Network File Transfer tab is used only for DH RIO or ControlNet RIO Pass Through file downloads Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Defining Communications 5 3 If you are going to transfer applications between the development computer and the Panel View terminal using a Serial Upload Download cable you do not have to specify anything in
118. cell 8 13 using 8 11 Grouping See also Outer text nested groups 9 41 objects 9 41 performance of P anelBuilder 9 41 tags 6 4 ungrouping objects 9 41 Groups ungrouping nested groups 9 41 H Hardware requirements 1 3 Help See Online help Hot keys See Shortcut keys Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Index Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 1 0 image table 2 13 2 28 racks 2 13 IF THEN ELSE in expressions 7 13 Image bitmap 9 21 DXf 9 21 Import graphic images 9 27 9 30 9 32 Importing messages 10 9 file extensions 10 11 guidelines 10 10 using clipboard 10 9 tag database 6 35 from A I Series database 6 36 from Logic 5 database 6 36 from MODSOFT database 6 36 from PanelBuilder 900 database 6 36 from Taylor ProWORXPLUS database 6 36 Increment value button 9 5 9 9 9 21 Indenting in expressions 7 23 Indicators 9 8 Information message window about 14 1 acknowledging 14 2 Clearing 14 2 configuring 14 3 configuring window removal acknowledge hold time 12 8 disabling 14 3 enabling 14 3 font type 14 4 removing 14 4 tags 14 5 using at the terminal 14 2 Information messages 10 1 Information window control tag 14 5 Initial state value 2 22 2 27 2 45 2 49 9 3 9 60 deleting objects with 8 7 Initial value 2 27 2 49 9 3 Inner text 9 24 arranging 9 46 Inserting rows in spreadsheets 4 12 Interlocked push button 9 5 9 10 9 21 K KA mod
119. cleared reset to 0 when the download is completed successfully The Transfer Request control is cleared when the Transfer Status control is set We recommend you assign a digital tag type The tag s PLC address will be read and written to by the terminal For more information on downloading see Chapter 15 Transferring Applications To define network file transfer controls 1 In the Network File Transfer tab select one of the controls and click Assign Tag to choose a tag You can assign a digital or analog tag although a digital tag is recommended The Tag Browser dialog box appears Tip You can also double click the selected address to bring up the Tag Browser Select a tag from the list or choose New Tag to create a new tag Refer to Chapter 6 Defining Tags for more detailed information about the Tag Editor dialog box Repeat for the other two controls Configuring Nodes PLC Communications EY Communication Setup LA RIO Racks Scan Classes LE RIO Block Transfer Files Data Entry Form Spreadsheet Viewer Defining Communications 5 21 A node is a programmable logic controller connected to the DH or ControlNet network When you configure nodes you specify a name type and station address for each programmable controller with which the application will communicate A device at a DH or ControlNet station is referred to throughout a Panel View application by its node name
120. column You cannot use the Sort command in the Node editor entries are automatically sorted by Node Name when you open the editor Important You can not undo a Sort operation To sort all the entries in the spreadsheet 1 If working in a Messages editor select the column to sort by clicking on the column heading You do not need to select a column to sort the Rack and Block editors 2 Choose Sort or Sort Messages from the Edit menu or from the toolbar For messages data is sorted numerically if the data in the column is numeric or alphabetically if the data is text Entries in the Rack and Block editors are sorted as described above Sorting Portions of the Spreadsheet You can sort portions of a spreadsheet in the Messages editors only The data is sorted according to primary and secondary sort keys The left most selected column is the primary sort key Each successive selected column is a secondary sort key That is the data is first sorted according to the items within the left most selected column If there are any duplicate items they are arranged according to the contents of the next column For example you could sort local messages using the trigger value as the primary sort key The message text column could be the secondary sort key To sort a portion of the spreadsheet 1 Select the block of fields to sort by clicking on a cell and dragging the mouse diagonally toward the opposite corner of the block 2
121. condition is zero False evaluation of the construct ends and re turns a value of zero Note Conditions and statements can in clude any combination of variables tags constants and operators that result in a number IF THEN ELSE If Condition Then If the value ofthe condition is non zero Statement s True the statements are executed and Else evaluation of the construct ends p PE If the value of the condition is zero False n the else statements are executed and evaluation of the construct ends Note Conditions statements and Else statements can include any combination of variables tags constants and operators that result in a number SELECT CASE SelectCase Test If the value of the test matches any of the Case Constanti Statement s 1 Case Constant2 Statement s 2 Case ConstantN Statement s N CaseElse ElseStatement s EndSelect constants the statements following the first match are executed and evaluation of the construct ends Use of CaseElse is optional If you use it and the value ofthe test does not match any of the constants the else statements are executed and evaluation of the construct ends If you do not use it and the value of the test does not match any of the constants evaluation of the construct ends Note Tests statements and Else statements can include any combination of variables tags constants and operators that result in a number When using range of constants separate them wit
122. dialog box Report On Screens Options By default all the application screens are selected for printing If you don t want to print all the screens you can select a range of screens for printing You can also select from a range of screen print options These are described in detail in the table below To select a range of screens 1 With Screens selected select the From field in the Screens section Type the number of the first screen you want to print Select the To field and type the number of the last screen you want to print The options for Screen Reports are described in the following table This report option Does this Screen Images Shows the image of each screen and all its objects The Screen Images report is available only when you print the report to a printer not when you save the report to a file Object Summary Lists screen objects and associated information for the screens you ve selected You can choose two options for this report e Full e Include Wallpaper Objects If you don t choose of these options you get a brief description of all the non wallpaper objects Full Provides detailed configuration information on all objects Include Wallpaper Objects Includes all drawing objects that have been converted to wallpaper Working with Applications 3 15 Print Setup How you can set up the printer depends on how your printer is configured in Microsoft Windows
123. display was configured to have a range from 00000 to 99999 5 digits the assigned address would be a 20 bit contiguous string with 4 bits for each of the 5 digits 5 digits 4 bits each 20 bits A PLC word can support only 16 bits so an additional word is required for the additional 4 bits 3 When more than one PLC word is needed to support the required number of digits all remaining digits extend into the next word For example BCD value 123456 would be represented in two PLC words as follows Bit Numbers 17 16 15 14 13 121110 7654 3210 octal Word X 3 4 5 6 Word X 1 1 2 Note The BIN3 BIN4 BIN6 and BINS data types are reserved for use in Modbus applications For more information see the PanelBuilder 1400e Modbus User Manual Publication Number 2711E 6 12 which is supplied as part of the optional Modbus Communications Kit Catalog Number 2711E UMOD Range of Values Start Address No of Bits End Address or string tag only No of characters Tag Start Value Planning Applications 2 27 Initial Value The value to be placed in the input address of a tag on power up As with any value sent from the terminal to the PLC this value will have the offset subtracted and then be divided by the scale Assign Initial Values to tags with PLC input addresses Note For any multistate object you draw in the Screens editor you can define an Init
124. errors listed go back to the dialog box screen or message editor and correct the errors Tip Use the Tag Usage Viewer to help understand any tag related errors PanelBuilder calculates the size of the application the size of the file The application s maximum allowable size depends on the type of terminal it will run on and whether the application will be stored on the terminal s memory or on the PCMCIA memory card To ensure your application will fit on its destination determine the capacity of the space where it will be stored and check the application s size before downloading The maximum allowable application size regardless of the file s destination is 8 MB e Ona PanelView 1200 Series F or terminal the application and firmware both reside on the 4 MB PCMCIA memory card that comes with the PanelView 1200 Enhancement Kit Cat No 2711E U1B12C There will be approximately 2 2 MB available for the application Ona PanelView 1200 or 1400e terminal the application can reside in either Flash memory if the application is less than 256K or on the PCMCIA memory card if the application is more than 256K Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 3 12 Working with Applications e Ona PanelView 1000 terminal the application can reside in either Flash memory if the application is less than 2 256K or on the PCMCIA memory card if the application is up to 15 75 MB To determine the application size
125. executable code is identical to the original source text with the following exceptions the changes made during compilation remain in effect see the list of changes above alltag names that contain ambiguous characters are surrounded by braces e expressions contain parentheses to indicate precedence order local variables that were not declared with a data type are now declared AS VARIANT Using the Expression Editor Creating Expressions 7 21 The Expression editor contains a text entry area where you type the expression It also contains a list of components that you can use to create the expression You cannot open the Expression editor until you have created an object to which an expression can be assigned See Types of Expressions earlier in this chapter for more information about which objects can be assigned expressions To open the Expression editor 1 Choose Configure Screen Object from the Edit menu or double click the object 2 Select one of the object s controls and choose Assign Exprn Note The Assign Exprn button is enabled for controls which read values from the PLC It is disabled for controls which write values to the PLC with the exception of the following three objects which support an optional write expression Numeric Entry Keypad Numeric Input Cursor Point e Numeric Keypad Enable Button About the Expression Editor Window The left hand side of the Expression Edito
126. expressions to perform calculations and logical and conditional operations to manipulate the values of tags See Chapter 7 Creating Expressions The data source for a tag is the physical location within a programmable controller that PanelView is to read a value from or write a value to The data source for tags in a PanelBuilder application can be either Device or Remote I O Which one you select depends on whether you are creating tags for a DH ControlNet or Remote I O application The other two data sources you can see in the Tag Database editor Memory and DDE are used only by RSView Organizing Tags Defining Tags 6 3 Device When you create tags for a DH or ControlNet application select Device as the data source This means that the data comes from a specific memory location in a programmable controller that is connected to the DH or ControlNet network For each tag you must specify a node name a scan class and the physical address within the programmable controller that the tag is to reference The node name refers to the programmable controller s location on the DH or ControlNet network the scan class determines how often the terminal is to check the value at this address See Chapter 2 Planning Applications for details on configuring nodes and scan classes Remote When you create tags for a Remote I O application select Remote I O as the data source This means that data comes from a specific memory lo
127. feature in Scrolling Lists Cursor List Preview States of the value to Number of Visible States 1 2 1 In terminal firmware versions earlier than version 2 the range was 0 to Number of Visible States 2 1 SLC slot number configured to a value other than 0 The PLC Controlled Alarm Acknowledge Control Multiple Alarm Controls Thetwo Alarm Message to PLC Controls the Message Handshake Expression and the Message Control Tag Device block tags Trend objects Version 3 Firmware Features Version 4 Firmware Features Version Control and Downloading Applications Version Control E 3 e Scale objects Alarm window configured as a panel Increment Decrement buttons with floating point increments decrements Panel View Version 3 firmware includes support for the following PanelBuilder features Goto Configure Mode button PanelView 1000e applications Retain Cursor On Cancel feature Modbus Communications with the Modbus Communications Kit catalog number 2711E UMOD PanelView Version 4 firmware includes support for the following features Ethernet Pass Through over Remote I O e 1500 Message Alarm History Because you can use PanelView terminals as PCMCIA card writers for other terminals you can download applications to terminals which cannot run them Version Control does ensure however that you do not attempt to Make Current any application which will not run on the
128. file name 3 Choose OK Saving an Application in Another File Format Save your applications as e file format for PanelBuilder 1400e This is the default format e pvd the file format for an application to be downloaded to PanelView terminal Working with Applications 3 9 To save an application as another file type 1 Choose Save Application As from the File menu The Save As dialog box appears If you re saving a new application the file name field displays pvc If you re saving an existing application the application name is the default file name Savy List Fila of f pei 2 Enter the new name for your application using a maximum of eight characters or change the default drive or directory If you re saving the application as a different type of file type the appropriate file extension The application will be saved as the specified file type Important The pvc and pvd file extensions determine the file type the application will be saved as If you don t type a file extension the application will be saved according to the file type currently selected in the List Files of Type field Note When used with Windows 95 PanelBuilder does not support long file and directory names Ensure that the file and directory names you use conform to the DOS naming standard If you enter an invalid file or directory name an error message will appear and y
129. is 0 to 86 400 seconds 24 hours with a 0 1 second resolution To specify a period type a number You can use fractions of a second For example 0 6 means scan every six tenths of a second Keep the background rate slow so as not to slow down network traffic Tip For more information about optimizing ControlNet or DH highway traffic refer to your network user documentation Also see Guidelines for Configuring Scan Classes in Chapter 2 Planning Applications Note If a tag is being used by both a foreground and background component the tag will be scanned at the foreground rate 2 To save the information you ve configured choose OK Note If you change the name of a scan class used by tags you have the option of automatically updating the tags with the new name When you create an application you specify the type of network it is to run on and set up the communication parameters accordingly You can change the network type of an existing application to run it on another network You do this using the Change Network Type dialog box However when you change the network type all communication specifications including node definitions and scan classes will be lost You will have to re configure communications for your application This section describes the following network switches converting from Remote I O to DH converting from Remote I O to ControlNet converting from DH to Remote I O conver
130. is made current or executed at a PanelView terminal Before a downloadable pvd application file can be created it must be validated by PanelBuilder Part of this validation ensures that the features used in the application the application s Actual Firmware Version do not exceed the application s Target Firmware Version Target Firmware Version vs Actual Firmware Version To understand the difference between an application s Target Firmware Version and its Actual Firmware Version consider the following examples A PanelBuilder ControlNet application s Target Firmware Version is set to 2 and later If the application does not make use of features which require Version 2 firmware the application s Actual Firmware Version is 1 03 and it will run on terminals with firmware Version 1 03 required for ControlNet communications and later The application will not run on terminals with Version 1 firmware however A PanelBuilder ControlNet application s Target Firmware Version is set to 2 and later If the application does make use of features which require Version 2 firmware its Actual Firmware Version is 2 and it will not run on terminals equipped with firmware versions lower than 2 A PanelBuilder DH application s Target Firmware Version is set to 1 and later If the application makes use of features which require Version 2 firmware its Actual Firmware Version is 2 Validation fails because the features used in the applicat
131. mathematical relationship between the two temperature scales is linear Create an expression to convert the analog input temperature reading to Celsius To display the temperature using a Numeric Data Display object at the PanelView terminal assign this expression to the Displayed Value control Tag For Temperature Probe 400 4095 100 The expression uses integer division 4 7 The result will be truncated to an integer with no decimal places For higher accuracy when converting the analog value into a temperature use floating point division Tag For Temperature Probe 400 4095 100 This expression will produce a resultthat contains decimal places If you have configured the Numeric Data Display to use the Implicit or Fixed Position decimal point option the appropriate number of decimal places will be displayed However floating point math is much slower than integer math You must weigh the tradeoff between speed and accuracy when considering which type of division to use Creating Expressions 7 11 Comparison Operations Comparison operators have equal precedence They are evaluated in sequence from left to right Operands can include any combination of variables tags constants and operators that result in a number All comparison operations produce a result of the data type Boolean True if the comparison is true and False if it is not The result is considered reliable if both operands are rel
132. name from the four most recent entries in this field 3 Type the name of a new or existing tag in the Replace With box 4 Choose a Search In option Whole Application replaces all instances of the tag name specified in the Look For field with the tag name specified in the Replace With field Selection replaces the tag name specified in the Look For field with the tag name specified in the Replace With field only in the selected program components 5 Choose whether to rename the tag in the Tag Database automatically By default the Rename in Database box is checked Uncheck it to allow you to change a tag name to one that doesn t exist in the Tag Database You must create the tag manually before you validate the application 6 Choose whether you want the application to be validated automatically once the tag has been renamed By default the Validate on Completion box is checked Uncheck the box if you have unchecked the Rename in Database box 7 Choose Replace A PanelBuilder 1400e application can have its own private tag database or it can share a database with other PanelBuilder 1400e or RSView applications This means if you have applications that require the same tags you can define each tag once in one database and share this database with other applications The Private Database When you create a new application its tag database is private and is stored as part of the application file All the information relati
133. of the Configure Terminal Setup dialog box See Configuring Timing Parameters in Chapter 12 Configuring Terminal Setup Options for more information about these parameters Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 11 18 Configuring Alarms Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 The following table shows the valid entries and default settings for the remote alarm timing parameters For this timing parameter Valid choices are these The default setting is this 50 msec 250 msec 3 seconds 500 msec 750 msec Operation Hold Time 1 second 2 seconds 3 seconds 4 seconds 5 seconds 50 msec 250 msec 250 msec Acknowledge Control Hold SUD EC Time 1 second 2 seconds 3 seconds 4 seconds 5 seconds 200 msec 400 msec 200 msec 600 msec 800 msec Alarm Control Delay 1 second 2 seconds 3 seconds 4 seconds 5 seconds If the Acknowledge Control tag is not assigned disabled the next acknowledged alarm trigger value will be written to the PLC immediately It will not wait for the Alarm Control Delay It is therefore recommended that you use the Acknowledge Control tag to control the flow of alarms and acknowledgments Only one alarm acknowledgment can be processed at a time alarm acknowledgments are not queued An acknowledge request is ignored and discarded the alarm will not be removed from the Multi line Alarm Window and the acknowledged time will not be recorded in the Alarm History screen if it arrives when the t
134. options you need to define the device type and racks that these tags will address This is done in the RIO Racks editor using the Rack Assignments worksheet you prepared in Chapter 2 Planning Applications Important When you change the rack number of a rack assignment already used by a tag Block Transfer File or Pass Through Control Byte all references to the rack are updated to reflect the new number To open the Rack Editor dialog box Open the PLC Communications folder and choose RIO Racks or choose from the toolbar The Rack editor has two parts the data entry form on top where you define the rack and the spreadsheet viewer on the bottom where you see all the rack assignments and select one for editing Hack Editor Untitled Back Member Module Groups 7 01 Access Ful Listen elg T Ge Len Rock Jea Je GT asthe access Help press 1 Duplicate Ctrl D Delete Delete Insert Row Device Type Defining Communications 5 9 Specifying the Device Type Before you can assign racks you must first specify the type of programmable controller the terminal will be connected to The default is the PLC 5 15 To specify the PLC type Select a device type from the drop down list on the Rack Editor tool bar or choose Device Type from the Edit menu and select the type to use Addresses of tags used in an application must con
135. select an object that is at the back of a stack place your pointer on the objects and click or press SPACEBAR as many times as necessary to move through the objects in the stack Using SPACEBAR avoids accidentally double clicking and opening a configuration dialog box To send an object to the back of the object stack 1 Select the object 2 Do one of the following choose Send to Back from the Arrange menu choose Fal from the toolbar Arrange Group Ctril G Ungroup Send to Back Bring to Front Align Left Align Center Align Right Alian Tan Creating Objects 9 43 Aligning Objects Use the commands in the Arrange menu to align the objects in several ways Note Input objects for PanelBuilder 1200e touch screen applications automatically snap to the touch cell grid 64 by 40 pixel grid 1 Select the objects you want to align 2 Choose a command from the Arrange menu to align the objects in relation to each other This command Aligns selected objects to this object Align Left Left most selected object Align Center Horizontal center of all selected objects Align Right Right most selected object Align Top Top most selected object Align Middle Vertical center of all selected objects Align Bottom Bottom most selected object Align Center P oints Center of all selected objects Align to Grid Aligns all selected objects upper left hand cor
136. set the Enter Key Handshake Time Inthe Handshake Time drop down list select the time you want to assign The Enter Key Control Delay determines how long the terminal will wait after the Enter key is pressed to send a control value to the programmable controller and the time the Enter Key Control tag is set to 1 The delay ensures that the new value is recorded in the programmable controller before it sees the button tag trigger To set the Enter Key Control Delay Inthe Control Delay drop down list select the time you want to assign Setting the Information Message Window Acknowledge Hold Time When you configure the Information Message Window you specify how the window is to be removed One option is Operator Acknowledged If you choose this option you can define the Acknowledge to PLC Controller tag The Acknowledge Hold Time determines how long the address at the Acknowledge to PLC Controller tag will be held on when the operator presses the Acknowledge button To set the Acknowledge Hold Time p Inthe Ack Hold Time drop down list select the time you want to assign Setting the Auto Repeat Functions When the operator presses and holds down a button with auto repeat capability the button goes into auto repeat mode That is the terminal acts as if the operator were repeatedly pressing and releasing the button instead of just holding it You can set both the delay before the auto repeat mode begins and the numb
137. terminal to which you are downloading If you have selected the Make Current Application option in the Setup Download dialog box before downloading an application to a PanelView terminal PanelBuilder terminates the download with an error under these circumstances The firmware version required by the features used in the application the Actual Firmware Version exceeds the firmware version installed in the PanelView terminal to which you are downloading The terminal is of the wrong type The download aborts with an error if The application is configured for this the terminal to which you re downloading is this any Touch Screen terminal any Keypad terminal any Keypad terminal any Touch Screen terminal 1400e Touch Screen terminal 1200e Touch Screen terminal any Keypad terminal 1400e Keypad terminal 1200e Keypad terminal any Touch Screen terminal Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 E 4 Version Control Version Control at the PanelView Terminal Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 1784 KTCX network communication card is not installed in a terminal to which you re downloading a ControlNet application If you have not selected the Make Current Application option in the Setup Download dialog box before downloading an application to a PanelView terminal PanelBuilder downloads the application but warns you if any of the three conditions mentioned above exist Because you can use Panel
138. the Device 5 9 ASSIGNING ROCKS eased coment 5 9 Setting Up Block Transfer 5 5 10 Creating a Block 5 12 Defining the Pass Through File Control Byte 5 13 Changing Rack or Block Transfer File Assignments 5 14 Defining Communications for a Data Highway Plus or ControlNet Application 5 15 Communication iiia eri 5 15 Setting Up Terminal Communications 5 16 Specifying the Network 5 17 Setting the Terminal Network Address 5 17 Setting Up Network File Transfers 5 18 Specifying the PanelView Location Routing Address 5 18 Defining the Network File Transfer Controls 5 19 Configuring 5 21 Unsolicited Messages DHH 5 23 Configuring Scan Classes 5 24 Changing the Network Type 5 25 Converting from Remote 1 0 to DHE 5 26 Converting from Remote 1 0 to 5 28 Converting from DH to Remote 1 0 5 30 Converting from DH to 5 31 Converting from
139. the Information Message Window you can Information Message enable or disable it Window specify how the window is removed from the terminal s screen change the default colors and other aspects of the window s appearance define the control that the PLC uses to trigger the Information Message Window define the Acknowledge to PLC control if you specify that the operator must acknowledge each message To configure the Information Message Window E gt System DA Terminal Setup 1 Open the System folder and choose Information Message Window or choose le from the toolbar Ri PLC 1 0 Control EF Information Mes ge Window The Configure Information Message Window dialog box appears Configure Information Message Window Ea Message Window Window Removal State Disabled Operator Acknowledged M Cancel Window Look Help tk Font Type PanelView small IE Underline Blink Eoreground Color Blue Background Color ight Grey Control PLC Controlled Information Window unassigned Acknowledge to PLC unassigned Assign Tag Assign Exprn Unassign 2 Configure the window to your specifications by filling in each field as follows Message Window State The Information Message Window is an optional feature in your application By default it is disabled To make it appear select Enabled in the State drop down list If you don t want
140. the PanelView 1000e 1200e and 1400e Operator Terminals User Manual e The correct network communication driver is not installed You can verify that the correct hardware and communication drivers are installed by referring to the Terminal Information screen when the terminal is in Configure Mode This list indicates the firmware drivers that are installed This list indicates the hardware devices that are installed and detected Version Control 5 Tenmninal dvformation Cams Agplicetinn Some Size im Last IESI Comer Tammi Esppened Famam W udhuu Appicailen File Btesage Card Partition 1 Sele Eruret Total Sire KBE 414712 Fil Free Sgarn 11 217 Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Appendix F Reserved Keywords The following keywords are reserved for use in the Expression language and cannot be used to name local variables And Else Integer SelectC ase As End Long Single Boolean Endlf Mod Then Byte EndSelect Not To Case Exit Or True CaseElse False Rem Variant Dim If Select Xor The following keywords are reserved for future use in the Expression language and cannot be used to name local variables ByRef Function Static While ByVal Loop Step Do LoopUntil String Double LoopWhile Sub DoUntil Next Ulong DoWhile Private Until For
141. the object s inputs from and outputs to the PLC Expression definitions and tag names assigned to an object can be copied with the object but tag definitions cannot If you copy Ctrl Z cue controls across applications the tags are not added to the target Paste application You must create the tags if they do not exist or assign Copy with Controls Select All Duplicate Ctrl D Delete Del Clear All Make Label Set Object Defaults Configure Screen Object different tags gt Tip If both applications will use the same tags use a shared tag database To copy objects without controls Ensure the Copy with Controls item in the Edit menu does not have a check mark If it has one select the item so the check mark disappears Convert to Wallpaper Unlock Wallpaper ImportExport Graphic Copying Graphic Images If you copy graphic images across applications the images are automatically added to the target application If an image is already in the target application it will be overwritten with the new one Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Creating Objects 9 37 Deleting Objects You can delete one or more objects on a screen 1 Select one or more objects 2 Choose Delete from the Edit menu or press DELETE This deletes the object If you change your mind you can always undo your changes before closing the screen Duplicating Obj
142. the other When the PanelView terminal reads from the PLC it tries to optimize the packet by fitting as much data into it as possible If a tag is assigned the address N7 0 and another tag is assigned N7 118 the Panel View terminal will take all the data from N7 0 to N7 118 and fit it into one packet depending on the type of PLC using one read to get data for both tags Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 2 44 Planning Applications Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Group tags according to their scan classes e fone of the tags was on the currently displayed screen the packet would be scanned at the foreground rate of that tag If both tags were on screens not currently displayed the packet would scan at the fastest background rate assigned to those tags For example if the tag assigned to N7 0 had a background scan rate of 2 seconds and the tag assigned to N7 118 had a background scan rate of 10 seconds it will scan at the fastest rate of 2 seconds As the packet contains all the data from N7 0 to N7 118 to optimize this packet you should assign tags to the addresses in between Minimize the number of tag writes that must occur simultaneously e PanelView gives writes a greater priority than reads Outstanding reads cannot be processed until all outstanding writes have been sent to the PLC and acknowledged This means that display objects and tags may take longer than expected to update This causes proble
143. the tag name use backslash For example tags in the folder called Pump would start with Pump The folder name and separator character count in the 40 character tag name limit You can use mixed case Tag names preserve upper and lower case for readability but are not case sensitive For example the tag name MixerValvel is the same as mixervalvel but is displayed as MixerValvel Using Folders to Group Tags To organize tags create a folder and include tags that are related For greater organization you can nest folders For example you can organize the tag database first by area then by machines in the area and finally by devices in each machine nesting the folders at each step Tag names in the last folder might begin with something like this Areal Machine1 Pump Use the Tag Database editor to create or edit tags and folders The spreadsheet viewer portion of this editor allows you to see the database structure Note The Tag Database editor works with both PanelBuilder and RSView databases but because the two have different product feature sets some features will appear in the editor that are not relevant to editing tags in PanelBuilder These features will be disabled gt System H 6 Information Message Window m Terminal Setup Tag Database FA Alarms PLC 1 0 Control Form Query Box Folder Hierarchy Defining Tags 6 5 Opening the Tag Database Editor 1 Open t
144. time 12 6 remote alarm parameters 12 7 target firmware version 12 4 Setting up block transfer files 5 10 network file transfers ControlNet 5 18 DH 5 18 Remote 1 0 5 4 terminal communications ControlNet 5 16 DH 5 16 Remote 1 0 5 3 SFC status mnemonics C 15 Shared racks 2 15 Shared tag databases about 6 31 repairing 6 35 Selecting 6 34 using 6 32 with RS View 6 32 6 34 Shortcut keys P 9 Signed integer data type 2 24 2 48 Silence alarms to PLC 11 22 Single line alarm message window 11 30 choosing 11 36 Sizing list objects 9 59 objects 9 38 SLC 5 addressing syntax 2 37 SLC 5 Enhanced addressing syntax 2 37 C 7 binary files optional syntax C 9 binary integer float ASCII and string files C 8 I O files C 7 Status files C 8 timer counter and control files C 9 analog member addressing optional syntax C 11 bit member addressing optional syntax C 10 Software registration P 3 Sorting entries in a spreadsheet 4 10 Spacing objects 9 45 Specifying device type 5 9 Spreadsheets changing column width 4 13 changing row height 4 13 copying selections 4 9 cutting selections 4 9 deleting data 4 12 duplicating rows 4 11 editing 4 12 editing selections 4 12 filling with identical data 4 11 inserting rows 4 12 pasting selections 4 9 selecting a block of cells 4 8 selecting a cell 4 7 selecting a row 4 7 selecting a single column 4 8 selecting more than one
145. to a screen 1 Open the screen to which you want to assign security 2 Choose Screen Security from the Screen menu The Secure Screen dialog box appears Secure Screen x Authorize Operator 1 Secseceneoonenssonsesnecoscencecsentecnsesnecsnconsensconsed Authorize Operator 2 Authorize Operator 3 Authorize Operator 4 Authorize Operator 5 Authorize Operator Authorize Operator 7 Authorize Operator 8 Authorize Operator 9 Authorize Operator 10 Authorize Operator 11 Authorize Operator 12 Authorize Operator 13 Authorize Operator 14 Authorize Operator 15 Authorize Operator 16 Cancel dii Help Validating Screens Screen Creating Screens 8 9 3 For each operator you want to assign access to either click the check box or use TAB or the arrow keys to move through the selections and press SPACEBAR to make the selection 4 When you ve finished assigning security choose OK To view this screen when the application is running the operator must enter a 5 digit access code on a Security Entry window Note If you don t specify operator authorization the terminal won t request an access code and anyone can access this screen If you authorize one or more operators the terminal will request an access code before it displays the screen Access codes are assigned on the terminal A plant floor supervisor with a mode select key can view and change acces
146. to these options Information Message Shows the configuration settings for the Information Window essage Window and its tags or expressions Alarm Messages Lists all the messages including trigger values created in the Alarm Message editor and their options Information Messages Lists all the messages including trigger values created in the Information Message editor Local Messages Lists all the messages including trigger values created in the Local Message editor Tag Address Cross Lists all the places in the application where tags are Reference assigned sorted by tag address Graphic Images Lists the bitmap bmp and AutoCAD graphics dxf files imported into the application Note that PanelBuilder saves dxf images as wmf files once imported so dxf files appear as wmf files on the report PVD File Size and Used Lists the pvd file size and the number of tags used in the Count application Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 3 14 Working with Applications Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 To select Report On options 1 Select the fields of the features you want to document An X appears in the fields of the features selected for the report To deselect an option click the field so the X disappears When you ve selected all the options you want to document choose Print to print the report When you re finished choose Close to close the
147. toolbar press CTRL Y Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 9 20 Creating Objects Object Tools and You can create dynamic and static objects by selecting tools from the Commands toolbox or by selecting commands from the Objects menu Touch Screen Toolbox Pe ARES RET EU cea 624448 tsi B La E E Haise Keypad Toolbox Pm ST on See BB iB Dad S Y Ate aid gt Note The toolbox includes icons for the objects which are more frequently used It does not include icons for all objects found on the Objects menu Objects Menu Objects y Select Push Buttons Control Selectors Indicators Numerics Trend Bar Graphs Time and Date ASCII Input Scrolling List Symbol Local Message Display ASCII Display Goto Configure Mode Yv Y wo v Dynamic Objects v Y vY v Screen Selectors gt Static Objects Screen Print Button Text and Graphic Image Drawing Objects 34 Drawings Text Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Creating Objects 9 21 The following table shows the object tools and their menu commands This tool Corresponds to this command This tool Corresponds to this command Select Vertical Bar Graph You can change it to Horizontal in the Configure dialog box Text Time Display Bitmap Image Date Display DXF Im
148. transfer It remains set throughout the transfer and is reset to 0 when the download is completed when the terminal s mode is switched or when the power is cycled The Transfer Request control is cleared when the Transfer Status control is set This control should use a digital tag that can be written to by the terminal For more information on using Remote I O Pass Through to download applications see Chapter 15 Transferring Applications Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 Assigning Device Type and Racks for the PanelView Terminal PLC Communications i Communication Setup Nodes Scan Classes RIO Racks L RIO Block Transfer Files Data Entry Form Spreadsheet Viewer lt N Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 EY Defining Communications To define network file transfer controls 1 In the Network File Transfer tab of the Configure Communication Setup dialog box select one of the controls and click Assign Tag to choose a tag You can assign a digital or analog tag although a digital tag is recommended The Tag Browser dialog box appears 2 Select a tag from the Tags list or choose New Tag to create a new tag Refer to Chapter 6 Defining Tags for more detailed information about the Tag Editor dialog box 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the other two controls Before you can define tags for objects windows or PLC I O Control
149. type allowed expressions Trigger Bit No 50 tags only Block 1 to 65 535 Word Yes 50 tags or expressions Digital and or Analog N A Note For DH and ControlNet applications if you assign block tags to the Alarm Triggers control or Acknowledge to PLC control the application will be compatible with Panel View Version 2 or later It will not be compatible with earlier versions Note For all applications if you assign expressions to any control the application will be compatible with Panel View Version 2 or later It will not be compatible with earlier versions Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 11 10 Configuring Alarms Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 gt Note For all applications if you assign more than one Alarm Trigger tag the application will be compatible with Panel View Version 2 or later It will not be compatible with earlier versions Bit Trigger Operation For a block tag each bit in the tag that makes a 0 to 1 transition will trigger an alarm whose trigger value is equal to the tag s bit position added to the starting trigger value If more than one alarm is triggered at the same time the alarms are logged to the Alarm History file in ascending numerical order according to their trigger value If the alarms span multiple tags the alarms will be logged according to the order in which they were configured in the Configure Alarms dialog box Simultaneous alarms will be stamped with the same
150. unreliable but no minor fault message will appear A major fault message is displayed if the Panel View terminal runs out of memory while evaluating the expression Important If an expression uses division and the denominator is tag then a minor fault message is displayed when the application starts up under these conditions only e if the expression is assigned to an object on the Application Startup Screen e if the expression is assigned to any of the alarm or Global PLC I O controls Expression Data Types Expressions perform mathematical and logical calculations on numerical and Boolean values Expressions can work with values that use these data types Data Type Description Range Boolean A 32 bit value Truezl False 0 Byte An unsigned 8 bit value 010255 Integer A signed 16 bit value 32 768 to 32 767 Long A signed 32 bit value 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 Single An IEEE 32 bit floating 3 402823 1038 to 1 401298 10 37 for nega float point value tive values zero 1 401298 10 37 to 3 402823x10 8 for positive values Variant A special 32 bit value that See above Has full range of all the other data contain any one of types the Boolean Byte Integer Long or Single data types It adjusts its data type to accommodate the value assigned to it Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 7 4 Creating Expressions Expression Language Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998
151. uses the Bit Acknowledge to PLC Type with a Starting Trigger of 1 if the Acknowledge to PLC control is an analog or digital tag it uses the Word Acknowledge to PLC Type e if the application has messages that contain the character sequence the sequence is converted to to prevent validation error The sequence will appear as when you download the application to the Panel View terminal See Appendix E Version Control for a list of features that make applications incompatible with earlier versions of the Panel View firmware You can select the version of PanelView firmware that you plan to use when you run your application The Target Firmware Version you choose allows your application to run on the listed version as well as later versions of the firmware Version 1 and up Version 1 03 and up allows your application to run on a PanelView terminal connected to the ControlNet communication network Version 2 and up allows you to use the new features that come with PanelBuilder Version 2 Version 3 and up allows you to use the new features that come with PanelBuilder Version 3 Version 4 and up allows you to use the new features that come with PanelBuilder Version 4 When you validate your application PanelBuilder warns you if a feature you have used will make the application incompatible with the Target Firmware Version See Appendix E Version Control for a list of features that make
152. value use 100 M Initial Analog nitial analog value analog tag N Scale Scale multiplier val Scale X Offset analog tag 0 Offset Offset analog tag P Deadband Deadband unused use 0 Q Units Units label use blank R Off Label Digital Digital off label use blank S On Label Digital Digital on label use blank T Initial Digital Initial digital value must be either the on or off label use 0 or 1 digital tag U Length String String length string tag V Initial S tring Initial string value string tag W Node Name Node name device tag X Address Programmable logic controller address device tag Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 6 38 Defining Tags Creating a New Tag Database Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Column Description Y Scan class Scan class name use A K or custom names device tag Z DDE Application DDE application name use blank AA DDE Topic DDE topic name use blank AB DDE Item DDE item name use blank AC System Source System data source name use blank AD System Source Index System data source index use blank AE RIO Address Remote 1 0 address Remote 1 0 tags AF Element Size Block Use B block tag AG Number Number of bits in the block tag Elements Block AH Initial Block Initial value of a block tag 0 or 1 The New Database command on the Database menu creates a new empty tag data
153. will need is to identify the inputs and outputs the process requires Based on that information you can determine the number and size of the PLC racks required To identify inputs and outputs you need to know how addressing works on the programmable controller This section provides information to help you understand addressing rack assignments module groups shared racks Understanding Addressing When you assign tags to objects windows and PLC I O Control options you are assigning an address You need to assign the tag to establish communication between the programmable controller and the application in the PanelView terminal When the application is running it sends information to and receives information from the programmable controller The controller communicates through the input and output addresses assigned to the tags Planning Applications 2 13 The addresses defined in the tags work as follows the input addresses are for inputs to the programmable controller for example control list selectors push buttons or other objects that write to the programmable controller the output addresses are for outputs from the programmable controller for example display current state alarms or counts from the programmable controller Programmable Controller PanelView 1400e Touch Screen Terminal PanelView 1400 Machine or Process Read T Write
154. you need explained or problems you may encounter To get help press F1 or choose the Help button if you re in a window or dialog box The PanelBuilder 1400e Readme file is a Microsoft Windows Notepad file that is copied to your hard disk when you install PanelBuilder The Readme file informs you of any software changes made after the manuals were printed The PanelView 1000e 1200e and 1400e Operator Terminals User Manual Publication Number 2711E 821 describes how to install configure maintain and troubleshoot the PanelView terminal The PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Modbus User Manual Publication Number 2711E 6 12 describes how to create PanelBuilder applications for the Modbus communications network This manual is supplied as part of the optional Modbus Communications Kit Catalog Number 2711E UMOD Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 4 What s in the User Manual Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 The User Manual builds on the information presented in Getting Started The first part of the User Manual provides detailed information about planning your application as well as information about how to use PanelBuilder The remainder of the manual provides step by step instructions for building configuring and transferring applications Preface An overview of this manual and lists of related publications documentation conventions and prerequisites Chapter 1 Intr
155. you need them in other PanelBuilder editors Creating Tags as Needed You can add tags in any editor that can assign tags such as the PLC Control editor Select the Assign Tag button to bring up the Tag Browser dialog box which lets you browse the tag database add a new folder or bring up the Tag Editor dialog box to add a new tag or edit an existing tag Highlight the tag field and click the Assign Tag button The Tag Browser dialog box opens Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 6 24 Defining Tags Edit Tag New Folder Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 E3 Screen In this dialog box you can perform these actions Select a tag by double clicking it or by highlighting the desired tag and clicking OK The tag is assigned to the input field in the original dialog box e Edit a tag by highlighting it and then choosing Edit Tag The Tag Editor dialog box appears so that you can edit the tag s definition Create a new tag by opening the desired folder and choosing New Tag The Tag Editor dialog box appears so that you can define the tag Mi T Ley Der Create a new folder by clicking the New Folder button then typing the folder name in the New Folder dialog box The Tag Browser dialog box also has a button labeled Other DB This button is dimmed because this feature is not active It is there for compatibility with RSView databases For details on how to define tags
156. you want the alarm messages to blink Leave it unchecked to choose No Foreground Color Choose the foreground color of the alarm message Background Color Choose the background color of the alarm message Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 11 38 Configuring Alarms Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 4 For Alarm Message Panel configure the message trigger value as follows Show Alarm Panel Trigger Value Leave the box checked to display the message trigger value or clear the checkbox to not display the trigger value If you choose not to display the trigger value go to Step 5 Position Choose Before Message or After Message to specify where in the panel to display the trigger value The trigger value is left justified in the trigger value field if you choose Before Message It is right justified if you choose After Message Number of Digits Select how many digits of the trigger value to display 1 to 11 Note If a trigger value requires more digits than the number you select when that value s message is displayed the trigger value field is filled with asterisks on the PanelView terminal Underline Click the checkbox to choose Yes if you want the trigger value to be underlined Leave it unchecked to choose No Blink Click the checkbox to choose Yes if you want the trigger value to blink Leave it unchecked to choose No Foreground Color Choose the foreground color of the trigger value Backgrou
157. 0 10 Creating Messages Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 To copy messages into the spreadsheet using the clipboard 1 In the text editor select the message or messages to be copied 2 Choose Copy 3 In the message editor select the field where you are going to begin pasting To overwrite existing messages select the rows you want to overwrite To paste the messages into a larger or smaller area select that area 4 Choose Paste from the Edit menu from the toolbar or press CTRL V 5 The first message appears in the row whose cell you selected Any other messages are pasted into the cells below If you selected an area in the spreadsheet the messages are pasted into that area bis Ferer baa Paper Bim E Pager Jau Jam Toran bou m mui mf cial Nrag ser LE di i ZIIIIIIIzIM n You can also export messages by copying them from the message editors and pasting them into other Windows text editors as described in Exporting Messages later in this chapter Importing Existing Message Files You can also import existing message text for example from a text editor or old application files and convert the text into alarm information or local messages by using the Import Message File command Guidelines for Importing Message Files If you want to use the Import Message File com
158. 0253 ALT 0246 ALT 0254 E ALT 0247 m ALT 0255 Publication 2711E 819 1997 PLC Addressing Syntax Appendix C Addressing Syntax This appendix describes the addressing syntax for PLCs SLCs Remote I O For details more specific to your PLC consult the User s Manual for your PLC The following section provides addressing syntax for the following types of programmable controllers PLC 2 PLC 3 PLC 5 which includes the PLC 5 10 PLC 5 12 PLC 5 15 and PLC 5 25 PLC 5 Enhanced which includes the PLC 5 11 PLC 5 20 PLC 5 20C PLC 5 30 PLC 5 40 PLC 5 40C PLC 5 60 and PLC 5 80 PLC 2 aaaa bb aaaa Address 0 7777 octal bb optional Bit offset within word 0 17 octal Example of digital address 11 17 Example of analog and string address 1264 Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 C 2 Addressing Syntax PLC 3 Data Table Sections Fnnn wwww bb F File type A ASCII B Binary N Integer D Decimal BCD O Output I Input F Floating point S Status H High order integer nnn File number 0 999 decimal wwww Word address For I O section 0 7777 octal For all others 0 9999 decimal bb optional Bit offset within word 0 17 octal Bit offset not permitted in the H and F sections Example of digital address B5 173 15 Example of analog address N3 173 Example of string address
159. 1 Index I 11 PanelView 1200 1400e Transfer Utility about 15 1 PanelView terminal enhancing 1 2 information message window 14 2 off line to PLC 11 47 terminal address about 5 18 defining 5 19 types required 1 2 1 3 version control at E 4 Partial racks See Racks partial Pasting objects 9 36 PB1400E INI file 3 13 PCMCIA memory card 1 7 file format 3 8 Performance optimizing 2 4 6 3 PID mnemonics C 13 Planning addresses 2 19 applications 2 1 2 2 ControlNet 2 5 DH 2 5 Remote I O 2 5 Safety considerations 2 2 object addresses 2 5 rack assignments 2 16 screens 2 5 tags 2 19 PLC controlled audio 11 22 PLC controlled date and time control tag 13 4 PLC controlled QTY TIME reset 11 46 11 48 PLC controlled relay 11 23 PLC controlled screen number tag 13 3 PLC controlled screen print tag 13 4 PLC controlled silence alarms 11 22 PLC 1 0 control options about 13 1 date and time to PLC controller data tags 13 6 PLC controlled date and time control tag 13 4 PLC controlled screen number tag 13 3 PLC controlled screen printtag 13 4 screen number to PLC controller tag 13 6 screen print active to PLC controller tag PLC station address Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 1 12 Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 about 5 4 5 5 defining 5 7 PLC type 5 22 PLC 2 addressing syntax C 1 PLC Scanner Type recording on worksheets 2 31
160. 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Planning Applications 2 29 The Block Transfer File I O Usage Worksheet Complete the Block Transfer I O Usage Worksheet at the same time as you complete the Remote I O Tags Worksheet so you can keep track of free and allocated PLC I O addresses Complete both sheets for each block transfer file you use marking the PLC control bit s used in the tags assigned to each object window or PLC I O Control option Block Transfer File I O Usage Worksheet Page 1 of 2 Application File Name Block Transfer File Number Enter a number between 1 and 64 Number of Words Enter a number between 1 and 64 READ PLC In or WRITE PLC Out Circle One FULL or LISTEN ONLY Access Circle One PLC Bit Numbers I5 14 13 12 H 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 16 T T 1 1 1 1 1 1 Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 2 30 Planning Applications Block Transfer File I O Usage Worksheet Page 2 of 2 Application File Name Block Transfer File Number Enter a number between 1 and 64 Number of Words Enter a number between 1
161. 11 each with unique text and attributes The PLC output address would then be an 11 bit string The bit set by the PLC would determine the state displayed by the terminal Important If more than one bit is set at a time the terminal considers only the lowest bit set BCD Binary Coded Decimal If you assign one of the BCD data types the object s PLC control word will be a contiguous bit string of one of these numbers of bits This number of BCD digits Requires this many bits 1 BCD digit 4 2 BCD digits 8 3 BCD digits 12 4 BCD digits 16 5 BCD digits 20 6 BCD digits 24 7 BCD digits 28 8 BCD digits 32 Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 2 26 Planning Applications Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Each group of four bits represents the equivalent of one decimal digit 0 to 9 in the tag value The number of bits required depends on the maximum value required for the object This depends on the application You can align the BCD bit string on any PLC word bit Most of the time you ll want to start at bit 0 The BCD bit string can extend into the next word but cannot extend past the end of a rack assignment or block transfer file Example BCD Values or States 1 If you configured a BCD data value to have a maximum of 16 States 2 digits the assigned address would be an 8 bit contiguous string with 4 bits for each digit 2 digits 4 bits each 8 bits 2 If a numeric value
162. 11 46 Retain cursor on cancel configuring 12 10 Retentive objects 9 3 addressing 9 4 Safety considerations 9 4 Return to previous screen button 9 6 9 11 9 21 creating 9 22 Return values in expressions 7 19 RIO See Remote 1 0 RIO Block Transfer Files editor 5 2 5 11 RIO Racks editor 5 2 5 8 RM modules 2 40 RS 232 port 1 7 RSView and sharing tag databases 6 32 6 34 Running applications 1 2 5 Safety considerations 2 2 for retentive objects 9 4 programming the controller 2 3 Sample expressions 7 28 Index 1 13 Saving applications 3 6 3 7 in another file format 3 8 messages See Updating messages screens See Updating screens Scale 2 23 2 47 9 6 Scales 9 11 Scan classes configuring 5 24 5 25 for Device data source tags 5 24 Scan Classes editor using 5 24 5 25 Scanning about 2 42 scan classes 2 42 configuring 2 42 5 24 scan period 2 42 background 2 42 5 25 foreground 2 42 5 25 Screen keypad enable button 9 6 9 11 9 21 Screen list selector 9 6 9 11 9 21 Screen number to PLC controller tag 13 6 Screen print active to PLC controller tag 13 6 Screen print button 9 6 9 11 9 21 Screen prints from the terminal 13 4 PLC controlled screen print tag 13 4 screen print active to PLC controller tag 13 6 Screen reports options 3 14 Screen select keypad 9 6 9 11 Screen selectors 9 11 Screen templates designing 2 7 Screen worksheets for
163. 11E 819 J anuary 1998 gt gt Use the spreadsheet viewer to view tags or to select a tag to edit Use the query box or folder hierarchy to select the tags you want to view Note The Address column in the spreadsheet viewer contains node and scan class information for Device tags The node name scan class name and address are separated by commas Moving Through the Spreadsheet To scroll through the spreadsheet rows either use the Prev or Next buttons in the form area or use the Up and Down arrow keys or use the scroll bars in the spreadsheet viewers To select a row click anywhere in the row or click the row number Resizing Columns and Rows 1 Place the cursor over the division between the column or row until the cursor changes to a double arrow 2 Drag the column or row to the desired size Adding a Tag To insert a new row above the highlighted row use one of these methods choose the New button in the forms area or choose Insert Row on the Edit menu or choose the Insert Row button on the toolbar Choose Accept to save the information for a tag or Discard to discard it Note The row position of the new tag is only temporary Even if a tag is not displayed it is still saved When the spreadsheet viewer is refreshed the new tag if it still matches the query set will be displayed in alphanumeric order relative to other tags in the database Scrolling the spreadsheet closing fold
164. 1747 SN Series B scanner device See your scanner s User Manual to determine whether it supports the use of block transfers Each block transfer file must be assigned a control byte This control byte occupies space on an already defined rack In other words before you can assign block transfer files you must define the rack assignments See the previous section for more information Use the Block Transfer File Assignments worksheet you created in Chapter 2 Planning Applications To open the RIO Block Transfer Files editor Openthe PLC Communications folder and choose RIO Block Transfer Files or choose from the toolbar The Block Editor dialog box appears ELTTUTITTUBITUTTUB Ei Help Tile Humber ui Bira 64 EIUS Ces ACHE O Wrin mv TENTER Word J 5 Low E High Jen ack unb wor yis Fe Sa Ac 2 3 4 Pass Thryagh Fie Pin ond Suri rows selected columns The Block editor has two parts the data entry form on top where you define the block transfer file and the spreadsheet viewer on the bottom where you can see all the block transfer files and select one for editing See Chapter 4 Working with Editors for details on working in the form and spreadsheet sections of this editor Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 5 12 Defining Communications Publication 2711E 819 J an
165. 19 J anuary 1998 SLC Addressing Syntax Addressing Syntax C 7 55 Submember Only applies to ADDR and DATA members of PID structure and DATA member of MSG structure bb optional Bit number 0 15 decimal Only applies to analog word members Example MG59 33 DATA 0 15 Note For ControlNet device tags the Tag Database editor supports the full addressing syntax and range supported for the PLC 5C programmable controllers The following section provides addressing syntax for the SLC 5 Enhanced programmable controllers which include the SLC 5 03 05301 and SLC 5 04 SLC 5 Enhanced I O Files F ss www bb F File type I Input O Output 55 slot number 0 30 decimal www optional word number expansion 0 255 decimal bb optional Bit offset within word 0 15 decimal When input slot is 0 0 23 decimal Example I 22 254 13 Important Writing to the output files of a SLC 5 is not recommended However if you do be sure the SLC is not in RUN mode If it is in RUN mode the write will fail and an error message will be logged to the activity log file Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 Addressing Syntax Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 SLC 5 Enhanced Status Files F ww bb F bb optional File type S Status Word address SLC 5 03 0 68 decimal SLC 5 04 0 96 decimal Bit offset within word 0 15 decimal Example S 15 6 SLC 5 Enhan
166. 1E 819 J anuary 1998 Screens SAMPLE 1 MAIN iof x H If you don t want the grid to show you can turn it off Note If you change the grid settings all screens that you open in the future will default to the new grid settings To change the default screen grid settings 1 Choose Grid Settings from the View menu The Grid Settings dialog box appears You can choose not to show the grid or you can change the grid sizes of the X horizontal and Y vertical axes You can also change the grid color Grid Settings Ed Attributes OK Cancel Help Show Grid Spacing Hogizontal Vertical 1200e Touch Cell Grid To hide the grid clear the Show Grid box To hide the 1200e Touch Cell Grid clear its box To increase or decrease the spacing of the grid lines on either axis click the up or down arrow next to the appropriate field or type a number in the box For example a value of 8 creates a grid line every 8 pixels To change the color of the grid click on the Grid Color button Creating Screens 8 13 The Color dialog box appears showing the colors you can choose for your grid You can select one of the Basic Colors or you can choose the Define Custom Colors button and choose an area of the palette you want to use It will appear in the Custom Colors section You can then select it Basic colors Ennu NNE Cust
167. 2 1 2 2 ControlNet 2 5 DH 2 5 Remote 1 0 2 5 renaming 3 10 running 1 2 saving 3 6 3 7 in another file format 3 8 testing 2 1 transferring 15 1 from within PanelBuilder 15 1 using the PanelView 1200 1400e Transfer Utility 15 3 uploading 15 1 validating 3 10 Applying filters in Tag Usage Viewer 6 26 Arcs 9 5 9 12 9 21 9 33 Arithmetic operations in expressions 7 9 Arranging inner text 9 46 ASCII display 9 5 9 7 9 21 ASCII input 9 5 9 7 9 21 Assigning device type 5 8 racks 5 8 5 9 write expressions 7 25 Auto repeat functions rate 12 8 start delay 12 8 Background alarms 11 29 Background color screens 8 7 Bar graph 9 5 9 7 9 21 Baud rate for remote 1 0 5 3 selecting on worksheets 2 32 BCD data type 2 25 2 49 Binary Coded Decimal data type See BCD data type inary data type 2 24 2 48 it position data type 2 25 2 48 it triggered alarms 11 6 about 11 7 itmap image 9 21 inking objects 9 49 ock tags 6 2 configuring 6 18 Block Transfer File 1 0 Usage Worksheet 1 using 2 29 Block Transfer File Worksheet 1 using 2 33 Block transfer files about 5 10 access 5 12 addresses 2 16 changing file assignments 5 14 creating 5 12 deleting file assignments 5 14 file number 5 12 file size 5 12 requirements 2 18 setting up 5 10 Block transfer mnemonics C 14 C 15 Borders 9 48 Boxes 9 6 9 21 Bridged DH networks UJ UJ UJ UJ UJ UJ
168. 34567 Application File Name Remote I O Tags Worksheet Screen Number Object Tag Address Initial Analog Tag only Initial R Start No of Bits End Address Tag T Name T iti ange s ype State ype Off or string tag only Start set Data Type No Value Sedis Value of Values Addres No of characters Value Address formats Discrete I O rrw bb Iis input O is output rr is rack number w is start word bb is optional bit offset All numbers are octal e g E011 12 Block Transfer Bff ww bb B is block transfer ff followed by a space is file number ww is start word bb is optional bit offset All numbers are octal e g 01 01 Discrete SLC I O ss ww bb I is input is output ss is optional slot number ww is start word bb is optional bit offset All numbers are decimal e g O 01 18 Notes Initial State Value Tag Start Value Objects such as Multistate Push Buttons have a user configurable initial state whose value will supersede the tag s initial value when the application is first run This is called the tag s Start Value The start value is the tag initial value or the object initial state value if one exists DH Communications Worksheet Application File Name Panel View Station Number Baud Rate 57 6K 10 000 Ft Node Definitions Node Name PLC Type Station Address
169. 45 6 7 45 6 7 0 45 6 7 0 45 6 7 TK IK IK LK IK IK OTK 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 12 212 12 212 DL 2 45 4 0 1 2 45 6 7 45 6 7 1 23 1 23 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 222 2 3 lt Z 0 Block Transfer File Worksheet Application File Name PLC Scanner Type Baud Rate 57 6K 10 000 Ft 115 2K 5 000 Ft 230 4K 2 500 Ft Notes 1 Block Transfers are optional Record the Block Transfer File Number and Size write in one of the Rack numbers from the previous worksheet circle the appropriate Word and Byte circle Read or Write and Access used Use additional worksheets if necessary 2 Ifthe Block Transfer File is on a Listen Only rack the file can only have Listen Only access 3 The Pass Through Block Transfer File must be defined on a Full Access rack 4 Foreach block transfer file mark off the byte in the output image on the Discrete I O Usage Worksheet Block Transfer File Assignments Block Transfer File Size Rack Word Byte Number Pass Through 64 01234567 01234567 01234567 Pul Full Listen Only Full Listen Only Full Listen Only Full Listen Only 01734507 Full Listen Only 01234567 Ful Listen Only 01234567 Full Listen Only 01234567 01234567 01234567 Full Listen Only 01234567 Full Listen Only 01234567 Full Listen Only 01234567 Full Listen Only 01234567 Full Listen Only Full Listen Only Full Listen Only Full Listen Only 01234507 01234567 012
170. 5 For detailed information on configuring I O racks refer to Allen Bradley Programmable Controller and Remote I O Scanner user manuals Understanding Module Groups A PanelView rack supports up to eight module groups numbered 0 7 A module group consists of a 16 bit input word and a 16 bit output word The following table shows the starting module groups for the four rack sizes With this starting module You can assign these rack sizes group 1st quarter of rack 0 1 4 1 2 3 4 FULL 2nd quarter of rack 2 1 4 1 2 3 4 3rd quarter of rack 4 1 4 1 2 4th quarter of rack 6 1 4 Because the smallest part of a rack you can assign is 1 4 you must assign module groups in pairs 0 1 2 3 4 5 and 6 7 Each pair supports 32 input bits and 32 output bits Programmable Coniroller PLC 5 15 Rack 3 Planning Applications 2 15 The following figure expands the previous illustration with the module groups for rack 3 It shows that module group 7 is made up of input word 7 and output word 7 The module group pair 6 7 uses the fourth quarter of the rack PLC Racks Input Output Rack 0 gt Local Rack 1 Rack 2 gt Remote Rack 3 Input Output 1 module group 0123 45 67 3 45 67 S 1 Word 16 Bits 14 204 3 4 44 14 204 3 4 4 4 23730 Rack Fractions Important Each separate or partial rack assignment adds 5 to 7 milliseconds to the Remote I O scan time To maximize speed assign the Panel V
171. 5 0 7 Octal VME Bus 6008 SV 0 7 Octal DEC Q Bus 6008 SQ 0 7 Octal Other 1771 SN Sub Scanner 1 7 Octal Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 1 6 Introduction to PanelBuilder DH ControlNet Optional Equipment Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 For a description of each type of programmable controller refer to Chapter 1 Introducing PanelView Terminals in the PanelView 1000e 1200e and 1400e Operator Terminals User Manual The terminal appears as one or more I O racks to a programmable controller It has the same configurability as and more than a standard I O rack Refer to the Allen Bradley Programmable Controller and Remote I O Scanner user s manuals for connection and remote I O configuration limitations e You can connect the PanelView terminal to a DH network The terminal can then communicate with all the controllers on that highway and to controllers on a remote DH or Data Highway DH network via offlink addressing You can connect the PanelView terminal to a ControlNet network The terminal can then communicate with all the controllers on that network through unscheduled messaging Youcan connect the PanelView terminal to a Modbus network For more information see the PanelBuilder 1400e Modbus User Manual Publication Number 2711E 6 12 which is supplied as part of the optional Modbus Communications Kit Catalog Number 2711 E UMOD Programmable Controller Software and Logic Y
172. 9 J anuary 1998 2 2 Planning Applications Planning Steps Planning for Safety Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 G Save your application See Chapter 3 Working with Applications 3 Download the completed application to a Panel View terminal See Chapter 15 Transferring Applications 4 Test the application See the PanelView 1000e 1200e and 1400e Operator Terminals User Manual for information about testing the application on the Panel View terminal Before you can begin creating an application you need to follow these planning steps 1 Document the process you ll be automating 2 Design the application screens and objects 3 Plan how the application will communicate with the PLC This step includes several tasks Define nodes and scan classes for DH and ControlNet applications Identify all the PLC addresses needed for the screen objects Alarm and Information windows and PLC I O Control options then plan the tags and expressions that will link them to the PLC Define the rack assignments for discrete I O and block transfer files for Remote I O applications These steps are discussed in the remainder of this chapter At each stage of the planning process keep safety considerations in mind ATTENTION Do not rely on your PanelView terminal for emergency stops or any other controls that are critical to the safety of workers or equipment To ensure that the operation can be controlled safely
173. Appearance 9 46 Setting the Object s Foreground and Background Colors 9 47 How Colors Appear at Runtime 9 47 Setting an Objects Fill Type 9 48 Changing the Border and Line 514 65 9 48 Making Objects Blink 9 49 Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 toc x Table of Contents Changing 9 50 Changing Touch Margin Width or Height Touch Screen Only 9 50 Working with Multi ComponentObjects 9 51 Setting Object Defaults s s a 2c dogm horae d artc dara ers 9 52 Configunng Geddes eater 9 53 Assigning Function Keys Keypad Applications Only 9 54 Configuring Object 5 9 55 Configuring Number of States 9 56 Assigning Values 9 57 Eror STATES una anu iced ia aun tes aedi e dd 9 58 Configuring List Object 5 5 9 59 Adding Text to List Object 5 9 60 Configuring 9 60 Assigning Tags and Expressions to Objects 9 61 Viewing Assigned 05 9 63 Creating Messages Chapter 10 What Are 5 0 5 10 1 Kinds of Mes
174. Control Options dialog box then program the PLC to display these screens You configure the Alarm Message Window in the Message Window tab of the Configure Alarms dialog box Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 11 36 Configuring Alarms To configure the Alarm Message Window 1 In the Configure Alarms dialog box choose the Message Window tab Configure Alarms x Global Controls History Message Window OK State Disabled X Location Bottom of Screen A Cancel Type Multi line 7 Number of Lines 3 Window Look Show Alarm Panel Trigger Value Font PanelView small Position After Message v Number of Digits 4 Underline Blink Underline Blink Foreground Color Light Grey Foreground Color Light Grey Background Color Red Background Color Red Control Clear Window to PLC unassigned PLC Controlled Clear Window unassigned Assign Tag Assign Expm Unassign 2 Fill in the following Message Window information State Select Enabled or Disabled in the State drop down list The Alarm Message Window is an optional feature in your application You can enable the Alarm Message Window if you want it to appear or disable it if you don t Note that alarms will occur even if the window is disabled They won t be reported in the Alarm Message Window but will be displayed in the Alarm History and Alarm Status screens and logged in the Alarm History file
175. Display All Alarms or Display Past Alarms mode the display starts with the first active alarm from the current page on the screen and displays the next 14 active alarms If there are no active alarms from the current page to the end the search will go backward until it finds 14 alarms or until it reaches the beginning of the list The first alarm in the Active screen acts as an anchor to the alarm messages If this alarm changes to OFF all the alarms on the screen shift upwards If this same alarm becomes active again it reappears at the top of the list and the other alarms shift down As new alarms are entered on the screen the alarms below the new entry shift downwards Configuring Alarms 11 43 If all the alarms displayed on a screen turn OFF and there are no higher alarm numbers ON the display scrolls to the previous page of alarms Working in Display All Alarms Mode The Display All Alarms Mode lists all alarms whether they are in alarm or not This includes the alarms that haven t been in alarm since the last reset When the operator switches modes from Display Active Alarms or Display Past Alarms to Display All Alarms the alarm at the top of the screen stays in place and the next 14 alarms are displayed Working in Past Alarms Mode The Past Alarms Mode shows all alarms that are active or have been active since the last reset The Alarm State column shows ON or OFF to indicate the current active alarms
176. For details on how to set up your printer refer to your Microsoft Windows User s Guide You can use any printer supported by Windows to print reports To set up the printer 1 2 3 4 Choose Reports from the Tools menu Choose Print Setup in the Report Selection dialog box The Print Setup dialog box appears Select the printer and desired page orientation and size Choose OK See online Help for information about the Options and Network buttons Solving Printing Problems If you can t print follow these steps 1 Check your printer s manual to ensure you ve assigned the correct printer port setting and that the port is configured correctly Ensure your printer is turned on is online and supplied with paper Ensure you ve selected report options Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 3 16 Working with Applications Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Saving the Report as an ASCII Text File You can save the application report as an ASCII text file To save the report as ASCII text file 1 Choose the Save As button in the Report Selection dialog box The Save As dialog box appears Save As File name Folders cXabipb1400e Cancel E c 5 PB1400E Network DEMO COSb DLL C3 IMAGES CPALETTE DLL TUTORIAL CSHR100 DLL DEFLTGFX 21 Save file as type Drives fal Files 4 C 7 By default the file name is the same as the
177. Help Document Feeder Paper Misfeed Top Exit Jam Finisher Jam Paper Bin fi Out of Paper Paper Bin B 0 Copier Paper Jam Copier Cabinet Open import messages using the Import Message File command 1 Choose Import Message File from the File menu A dialog box appears If it doesn t show the file you want to import you may need to change the drive and directory 2 Select the file 3 Choose OK If there are no errors in the format of the message file it appears in your message list above any existing messages 4 Choose Update Messages from the File menu or from the toolbar to save the messages Note The messages you are importing are added to the message database at the current cursor position They are automatically re sorted by trigger value when you next open the Message Editor You can save a maximum of 2000 alarm messages If the messages you are importing increase the number of messages in the message database beyond 2000 you will see an error message and only the first 2000 messages are saved Exporting Messages Validating Messages Undo Ctrl Z Redo Ctri Cut Ctrl C Paste Ctrl V Duplicate Message Ctrl D Delete Message Del Insert Message Select All Fill Forward Ctrl F Sort Messages Creating Messages 10 13 To export messages you must use the clipboard You can copy
178. Last Chassis designation and Access used Use additional worksheets if necessary Rack Assignments Module Groups 1 23 45 67 1 23 45 67 1 23 45 67 u 2 45 67 1 23 45 67 Listen 23 45 67 I v Listen On ole o9 le o zum ji m m fe Listen Listen 23 45 67 23 45 67 23 45 67 Listen Ti Listen gt le le le Ti Listen u Listen On 1 23 45 67 1 23 45 67 v Listen Only 123 45 67 Y Listen Only Fu Listen IK IK IK IK IK IK IK IK IK 2 5 z z z z z z z z Iz z z z z z gt le o o le i 2 4 5 67 2 3 4 5 6 7 lt z Recording the PLC Scanner Type In the PLC Scanner Type field record the programmable controller or scanner type that you will be using The following table lists the available programmable controllers and scanners Programmable Controller Scanner PLC 2 20 or PLC 2 30 1772 SD SD2 PLC 3 1775 S4A B PLC 3 1775 55 PLC 3 10 1775 SR5 PLC 5 11 ntegral PLC 5 15 ntegral PLC 5 20 ntegral PLC 5 25 ntegral PLC 5 30 ntegral PLC 5 40 ntegral PLC 5 60 ntegral PLC 5 80 ntegral Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 2 32 Planning Applications Programmable Controller Scanner PLC 5 250 5150 RS SLC 5 02 5 03 or 5 04 1747 SN Series A or Series B IB
179. M PC 6008 5 VME Bus 6008 SV DEC Q Bus 6008 SQ Other 1771 SN Sub Scanner Selecting the Baud Rate The baud rate determines the speed at which the terminal communicates with the programmable controller The baud rate depends on the cable length and on the baud rate supported by other devices on the Remote I O network Select this baud rate For distances up to 230 4K 2 500 feet 115 2 5 000 feet 57 6 10 000 feet p gt Note The PLC 5 15 and PLC 5 25 support only 57 6K baud Assigning Racks For each assignment in the Remote I O Tags Worksheet define the following e Rack Number Specify the number of the rack you re using Module Group Circle the module groups you are assigning to the rack number Last Chassis Choose Yes if there are no other fractional PLC rack assignments that have the same rack number and a higher starting module group number Otherwise choose No Access Choose Full if the PanelView terminal will have full read and write access to the rack choose Listen Only if the terminal will only monitor the rack Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Planning Applications 2 33 The Block Transfer File Worksheet Block transfer files occupy space in the PLC discrete output table only For each file define the block transfer file address and the block transfer file control address in the PLC Important Some scanners the 1771 SN and 1747 SN Series A Modules for example do not s
180. Note You can also use expressions to perform calculations on the values of analog and digital tags that read information from the PLC See Chapter 7 Creating Expressions Units This field is present to maintain compatibility with RS View databases You cannot enter anything in the Units field Remote I O DH and ControlNet Defining Tags 6 15 Data Type Select the data type that matches the format of the data stored in the programmable controller The default data type is Default In DH and ControlNet applications Default will let the tag address dictate the tag s data type for example N7 integer H3 0 long Unless special data is expected Default should be acceptable For Remote I O applications Default means Unsigned Integer You will need to set the data type to the format of the data expected in the I O tables For Remote I O tags the address length depends upon the data type assigned The default data type is Unsigned Integer with an address length of 16 bits When assigning a Binary or Bit Position data type unless an address length is specified the address length defaults to 1 bit Byte defaults to 8 bits Long Integer defaults to 32 bits and 1 to 8 BCD defaults to 4 to 32 bits You can also use the Floating Point data type for Remote I O applications Tags that use this data type must use a block transfer file address Note If you use the Floating Point data type for a Remote I O application the applicat
181. Number Screen Color Eoreground White Background Red 2 Fill in the following information Screen Number Select a screen number ranging from 1 to 255 from the drop down list The default is 255 You can assign any unused screen number to the Alarm History screen Important If you leave the Screen Number field blank the Alarm History screen cannot be called up by screen select objects or by a PLC Controlled Screen Change Foreground Choose the foreground color of the Alarm History screen Background Choose the background color of the Alarm History screen 3 Choose OK to save your Alarm History screen configuration About Terminal Setup Options gt System 5 Terminal Setup 4 Tag Database Alarms e PLC 1 0 Control e Information Message Window Chapter 1 2 Configuring Terminal Setup Options This chapter explains how to match the application to your terminal Instructions include how to specify the Application Startup screen how to change the application type how to assign a comment to the application file how to specify the target PanelView firmware version how to select timing parameters such as Push Button hold time and Remote Alarm hold times and delay how to specify default behavior of objects in the application The System folder contains the Configure Terminal Setup dialog box where you can specify general and timing parameters for the application file and
182. Numeric Input Cursor Point and Numeric Keypad Enable Button objects These objects allow you to use an optional write expression that manipulates the operator s input before sending it to a write tag You can define each tag when needed using the Tag Browser dialog box or you can define all the tags in the Tag Database editor You define expressions individually in the configuration dialog box for each object although you can copy expressions from one object to another Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 9 62 Creating Objects To assign a tag or expression 1 Open the object s configuration dialog box using one of the methods described previously The following illustration shows the configuration dialog box for the Local Message Display object This object uses only one control named Message Control Configure Local Message Display xi Cancel lf Control Message Control unassigned Assign Tag Assign Exprn Unassign 2 To assign a tag double click the control name or click the control name and choose Assign Tag The Tag Browser dialog box appears From this dialog box you can choose an existing tag by double clicking it or create a new one by choosing New Tag If you choose New Tag the Tag editor appears For details on using the Tag editor see Other Methods of Creating Tags in Chapter 6 Defining Tags 3 To assign an expression click the cont
183. PLC Screen Print Active to PLC unassigned Date amp Time to PLC Year unassigned Day of the Week unassigned Month unassigned Day of the Month unassigned Hour unassigned Minute unassigned Second unassigned Assign Tag Unassign NotifyPLO Cancel Help PLC Controlled Screen Number 1 PLC Controlled Screen Print unassigned PLC Controlled Date amp Time Control unassigned PLC Controlled Date amp Time Year unassigned Month unassigned Day of the Month unassigned Hour unassigned Minute unassigned Second unassigned Assign Tag Assign Exprn Unassign Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 Configuring PLC I O Control Options 13 3 To assign or unassign a PLC I O Control option 1 In the PLC I O Control dialog box select either the Notify PLC tab or the PLC Controlled tab 2 Highlight the desired control option and choose Assign Tag Assign Exprn Expression or Unassign The control options are described in the next two sections If you are assigning a tag the Tag Browser dialog box appears Assign Tag For details on how to assign a tag or create a new one see Chapter 6 Defining Tags If you are assigning an expression the Expression Editor appears For information about expressions see Chapter 7 Creating Expressions If you unassign
184. PLC 3 addressing syntax data table sections C 2 timers and counters C 2 PLC 5 addressing syntax 2 37 C 1 binary files optional syntax C 3 data files C 3 1 0 and status files C 4 timers counters and control files C 4 PLC 5 Enhanced addressing syntax 2 37 C 1 binary files optional syntax C 6 binary integer BCD ASCII float and string files C 5 1 0 and status files C 5 timer counter control SFC status message PID block transfer and token data files C 6 Powerup screen See Application startup screen Precedence order of in expressions 7 4 7 9 7 11 7 12 7 16 Print conventions P 7 Printer compatible with development computer 1 7 compatible with PanelView 1 7 setting up 3 15 solving problems 3 15 Printing screen reports options 3 14 Private tag databases about 6 30 converting to shared 6 33 Problems D 1 validation D 3 Programmable controllers and PanelView terminals 2 13 for DH applications 2 37 1 0 image table 2 28 PLC addressing syntax C 1 reducing addressing requirements 2 18 Safety considerations 2 3 SLC addressing syntax C 7 software requirements 1 6 types supported 1 5 PLC types 1 5 scanners 1 5 user manuals P 6 Publications related P 6 Push button hold time setting 12 6 Push buttons 9 10 changing touch margins 9 50 Pyramid Integrator bridging DH networks 2 40 Q QTY Time reset button 11 48 enabling 11 49
185. QTY TIME Reset unassigned QTY TIME Reset to PLC Tag_D103_0_0_Bit Assign Tag Assign Exprn Unassign 2 Fill in the following Alarm Status screen information Screen Number Select the screen number from the drop down list You can assign any unused screen number from 1 to 255 Important If you leave the Screen Number field blank the Alarm Status screen cannot be called up by screen select objects or by a PLC Controlled screen change Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Configuring Alarms 11 49 QTY Time Reset Button Choose Enabled or Disabled from the drop down list When you enable the QTY Time Reset Button option the QTY Time Reset Button will appear on the Alarm Status screen By pressing this button the operator can reset the alarm count and total time in alarm to zero There are two ways to have the quantity and time values reset on the Alarm Status screen Manual reset the operator can reset the alarms by pressing the QTY Time Reset Button if the QTY Time Reset Button is enabled Automatic reset the programmable controller can reset the alarms automatically if the PLC Controlled QTY TIME Reset control is assigned Important Be sure you have at least one reset enabled If both are disabled the alarm count can t be reset Note If the value of the TIME field exceeds 99 99 99 the field displays instead The QTY field stops accumulating at 9999 Foreground Choose th
186. Scale Offset and Data Type fields String ASCII string series of characters or whole words maximum of 82 characters Use a string tag only with the ASCII Read and ASCII Display objects and optionally for sending alarm messages to the PLC Block A contiguous bit string of up to 1024 bits A block tag is used strictly for defining the Alarm Triggers and Acknowledge to PLC controls These controls can monitor and acknowledge multiple simultaneously active alarm conditions For details see Chapter 11 Configuring Alarms Scale Analog Tag Only Specify a value with 1 being the default The scale and offset work together to modify any raw data that comes from or is written to a PLC For example to convert the raw data into engineering units Offset Analog Tag Only Specify a value with 0 being the default The scale and offset work together to modify any raw data that comes from or is written to a PLC When the PanelView terminal reads a value from the PLC it multiplies this value by the scale value and then adds the offset before it writes the value to the terminal s value table Similarly when the terminal sends data from the terminal to the PLC it first subtracts the offset and then divides by the scale value to convert the value back to raw data before it is written to the PLC With Scale 1 and Offset 0 the default values PLC data is not changed Note For PLC output from Analog and Digital tags yo
187. Screens Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 2 To change the screen number type the number you want to assign in the Number field The number must be between 1 and 255 and must be unique The number 255 is the default number for the Alarm History screen If you assign this number to another screen an error message appears You must either assign a new number to the Alarm History screen or assign a different number to the application screen 3 In the Name field type the name for your screen up to 15 characters 4 Choose OK If this is the first screen you created for this application a message appears informing you that the Application Startup screen has been reassigned to this screen You can change this if you wish See Assigning the Application Startup Screen later in this chapter for information The new screen appears It shows the name and number you assigned Screens SAMPLE 1 MAIN ioj x 4 Note An asterisk in the screen s title bar indicates that changes made to the screen haven t yet been saved Opening Screens ES Screens 1MAIN EH 2 PUMPS EH 3VALVES EH 4ROTATOR Copying Application Screens within the Same Application Screen New Copy Rename Delete Del Creating Screens 8 3 You open existing screens through the Application Window To open a screen To create a new screen for your application your Application Window must be open
188. Silences the audio indicator and unlatches the alarm relay if either was triggered by an alarm message It performs the same function as the Silence button in the Alarm Message Window Page Up Page Down Displays the previous or following page of alarms Cursor Up Cursor Down Moves the highlight bar up or down one line through the list of unacknowledged alarms so the operator can acknowledge the appropriate alarm When the highlight bar gets to the bottom or top of the screen the next press will scroll the highlight bar up or down to the next alarm if there is one Print Sends the Alarm History information to a printer via the terminal s RS 232 port Alarm Status Opens the Alarm Status screen Exit Returns you to the screen from which you entered the Alarm History screen Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 11 52 Configuring Alarms Configuring the Alarm History Screen Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 When the operator acknowledges the alarm the time and date of the acknowledgment are displayed directly to the right of the time and date of the alarm occurrence Note The alarm remains active until the alarm condition no longer exists Acknowledging the alarm does not deactivate it To configure the Alarm History screen 1 In the Configure Alarms dialog box choose the History tab Configure Alarms x Global Controls History OK um x Cancel Alarm History Screen Screen
189. Status screen and the current application screen to display the new screen Viewing the Alarm Messages The Alarm Status screen can hold up to 2000 alarm messages but only 14 messages can fit on the screen at a time The first 50 characters of the message appear on screen The operator can use the Page Up and Page Down buttons to scroll through the messages There are three different viewing modes Display All Alarms Mode Display Active Alarms Mode Display Past Alarms Mode Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 11 42 Configuring Alarms Alarm messages Display modes To change the viewing mode Press the Display Mode button in the Alarm Status screen Pressing this button changes the display mode The current display mode is indicated by the checkbox In the example below the past alarms are displayed Display Past Alarms Mode Trigger Time Display Mode button E S pum Lest tTmeResrt Sie AM 3 Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 sje Lg dis E Working in Display Active Alarms Mode The Display Active Alarms Mode shows all the alarms currently active whose state is ON The Alarm Status screen opens first in Active mode This mode shows all alarms that are ON in numerical order of the alarm trigger along with the alarm s quantity accumulated time and message information If you enter Display Active Alarms mode from
190. T 0188 ALT 0195 ALT 0189 ALT 0196 BEES ALT 0190 ALT 0197 ALT 0198 ALT 0205 ALT 0199 ALT 0206 ii ALT 0200 ALT 0207 EGER ALT 0201 ALT 0208 Jl Jl ALT 0202 a ALT 0209 Publication 2711 819 1997 The Extended Character Set B 7 Key Character Key Character ALT 0203 ALT 0210 T T ALT 0204 ALT 0211 ll ALT 0212 L ALT 0219 ALT 0213 F ALT 0220 ALT 0214 n ALT 0221 ALT 0215 T ALT 0222 ALT 0216 ALT 0223 B ALT 0217 4 ALT 0224 ALT 0218 ALT 0225 TEES Publication 2711E 819 uly 1997 B 8 The Extended Character Set
191. Tag Data Types in Expressions You can only use an analog or digital tag in an expression The tag s data type affects how the tag s value is represented in an expression Digital tags are represented with the Long data type and their value is unaffected For analog tags if the data type is Float the tag is represented with the Single data type All other analog tag data types are represented as the Long data type Note PanelView ensures expressions have floating point accuracy of at least 7 decimal digits The PanelBuilder expression language is modeled after the Microsoft Visual Basic programming language and uses many of the same conventions This section describes the syntax to use for the various components of your expressions Line breaks are meaningful in the PanelBuilder expression language A line break can indicate a particular construct or the end of a statement Follow the syntax rules described in this section to ensure that your expressions perform as expected Keywords tag names and local variable names are case insensitive That means you can enter them as upper case lower case or as a mixture When expressions are compiled on pvd file creation PanelBuilder converts all keywords tag names and local variables to upper case Types of Operations Expressions Can Perform You can use expressions to perform these types of operations on tag values arithmetic operations comparison operations construct
192. This manual is for users who have a basic knowledge of PanelBuilder and a good knowledge of Microsoft Windows Users who are unfamiliar with PanelBuilder should first read Getting Started Users who are not familiar with Microsoft Windows should read their Microsoft Windows User s Guide for users of Windows 3 1 Introducing Microsoft Windows 95 for users of Windows 95 or Introducing Microsoft Windows NT Workstation for users of Windows NT Related Publications The following table lists Allen Bradley remote I O scanner module user manuals Publication Number 1772 SD SD2 Remote 1 0 Scanner Distribution Panel 1772 2 18 1775 54 1 0 Scanner Programmer Interface Module User s Manual 1775 6 5 1 1715 55 1775 SR5 1 0 Scanner Communication Adapter Module 1775 6 5 5 User s Manual 5150 RS PI Start up and Integration Manual 5000 6 5 1 6008 51 IBM PC 1 0 Scanner User s Manual 6008 6 5 3 6008 SV VME 1 0 Scanner User s Manual 6008 6 5 2 6008 50 Q Bus 1 0 Scanner Utility Software User s Manual 6008 6 4 1 1771 SN Sub 1 0 Scanner Module Data Sheet 1771 2 91 1747 SN RIO Scanner User s Manual 1747 NM005 The following table lists Allen Bradley programmable controller user manuals Publication Number 1772 LP2 PLC 2 20 Programming and Operations Manual 1772 6 8 1 1772 LP3 PLC 2 30 Controller P rogramming and Operations Manual 1772 6 8 3 PLC 3 Family Controller Programming Reference Manual 1775
193. To define communications for a DH or ControlNet application go to page 5 14 The third section of this chapter describes how to change from one communication network type to another For information about changing from one network type to another go to page 5 25 Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 5 2 Defining Communications Defining Communications To define communications for a Remote I O application also called for a Remote RIO use these three editors Application Communication Setup Editor to define the baud rate used to communicate between the terminal and the programmable controller If you are going to transfer the application to the PanelView terminal using Pass Through via a DH ControlNet or Ethernet network instead of using a serial Upload Download cable you also have the option of defining the station address of the terminal s PLC for DH RIO ControlNet RIO or RIO Ethernet Pass Through and you can define network file transfer control tags RIO Racks Editor to identify the programmable logic controller the terminal will communicate with and to identify the racks that are assigned to the terminal The Panel View terminal supports Full and Listen Only access racks Racks can be defined as full or partial e RIO Block Transfer Files Editor to define block transfer files and the DH RIO ControlNet RIO or RIO Ethernet Pass Through control byte When assigning addresses in PanelBuilder you
194. View terminal to notify the PLC when an alarm acknowledge occurs sets the Acknowledge Control bit and to send the trigger value of the acknowledged alarm to the PLC in the address defined for Acknowledge to PLC The Bit or Word selection here refers to the type of addressing used to send the trigger value of the acknowledged alarm to the PLC See the example above in the Alarm Trigger Bit or Word section for the difference between Bit and Word Your selection here is independent of your selection for the Alarm Trigger type This selection is only required if you want to use the Alarm Acknowledge to PLC option If not it can be ignored and you can use the default selection In general Bit Acknowledge to PLC will give you more flexibility in using the acknowledged trigger value in the PLC For example you can use the individual bits in the ladder logic to clear the alarm condition See the example in Acknowledge To PLC and Acknowledge Control later in this chapter for sample PLC logic required to do this Use Word Alarm Acknowledge to PLC if you are short on address space or are concerned about scan time performance It will take less address space and less time to transfer one word of data than to transfer several blocks of data If you choose this option Configuring Alarms 11 9 The Operator or Operator and Remote selection defines when to activate the Alarm Acknowledge to PLC option This s
195. View terminals as PCMCIA card writers for other terminals you can download applications to terminals which cannot run them Version Control does ensure however that you do not attempt to Make Current any application which will not run on the terminal to which you are downloading The PanelView terminal will not allow you to select the Make Current Application option for an application under these circumstances The firmware version required by the features used in the application the Actual Firmware Version exceeds the firmware version installed in the PanelView terminal The terminal is of the wrong type You can select the Make Current Application option for these configurations The application is configured for this the terminal is this 1000e Touch Screen terminal 1200e Touch Screen terminal 1400e Touch Screen terminal 1000e Touch Screen terminal 1400e Touch Screen terminal 1200e Touch Screen terminal 1200e Touch Screen terminal 1000e Keypad terminal 1200e Keypad terminal 1400e Keypad terminal 1000e Keypad terminal 1200e Keypad terminal 1400e Keypad terminal The required communication hardware or firmware driver has not been installed in the PanelView terminal For example for ControlNet a 1784 KTCX network communications card and the correct communication driver must be installed in the terminal For more information about determining the correct configuration of the terminal see
196. Window Configuring Alarms 11 35 The Alarm Message Panel can be removed from the screen by acknowledgement of the alarm in the Alarm History screen a PLC Controlled Clear Window tag or expression a remote acknowledgment from the PLC If the alarm displayed in the Alarm Message Panel becomes inactive the window remains on the screen but the message is erased If the screen changes the alarm display remains on the new screen unless it is cleared by the PLC or the alarm is acknowledged by the operator or PLC When you configure the Alarm Message Window you can enable or disable the Alarm Message Window select the window type single line multi line or panel determine the location of the window and the number of lines it can display define the appearance of the window font type underline blink and colors for the panel window type define whether to display the alarm trigger value and configure the appearance of the trigger value assign controls to determine how the window is cleared Important The operator cannot access the Alarm History or Alarm Status screens through the Single line Alarm Message Window or the Alarm Message Panel If you choose either of these window types the operator can call up the Alarm History and Status screens if you design the application with one of these features ensure all screens provide a Goto Screen button assign the PLC Controlled Screen Number tag in the PLC I O
197. a tag the tag remains in the database but is no Unassign Tag longer assigned to the option If you unassign an expression it is deleted 3 Choose OK PLC Controlled Options The PLC Controlled Options include these controls PLC Controlled Screen Number PLC Controlled Screen Print e PLC Controlled Date amp Time Control which works with the PLC Controlled Date amp Time tags or expressions PLC Controlled Screen Number With the PLC Controlled Screen Number assigned the programmable controller can display specific screens The screen the programmable controller chooses will override the operator s selection and take the operator to the current screen for that state of the operation The programmable controller relinquishes screen change control back to the operator when the tag or expression s value is zero Important Ensure your tag address is large enough to accommodate the largest screen number including the screen numbers of the Alarm History and Alarm Status screens Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 13 4 Configuring PLC I O Control Options Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 PLC Controlled Screen Print By activating the PLC Controlled Screen Print option you allow the programmable controller to trigger a screen print of the currently active screen and pop up windows such as the Alarm and Information Windows When the tag or expression value changes from 0 to non zero the screen and pop up
198. a time Since alarm acknowledges are not queued it is recommended that if you are using remote acknowledge you also enable the Alarm Acknowledge to PLC function set the Alarm Acknowledge to PLC to Operator and Remote and use the Acknowledge Control bit to control the flow of remote alarm acknowledges as follows Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 11 20 Configuring Alarms Waiting for Remote Ack Expression to A change Receive Remote Ack Value from Yes PLC IS a previous Acknowledge still active Does Remote Ack Value match an ACTIVE alarm Yes Y Ack Time Stamp same for ALL ACTIVE instances of alarm in Alarm History file Is Alarm Window active Yes Y Update Alarms in Alarm Window Is Alarm History Screen active Yes Y Update Alarms in Alarm History Screen Does Ack Alarm have Audio Flag Yes Y Disable Beeper if PLC controlled Audio is not active Does the Ack Alarm have Relay Flag Yes y Disable Relay if PLC contolled Relay is not Active Does the Ack Alarm have Print Flag Yes Y Print ALL instances of Acknowldged Alarm from the Oldest to Newest No Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Is Notify PLC option enabled No Yes
199. able controllers the terminal will be communicating with Device Tags Worksheet Use this worksheet to help you assign programmable controller addresses to each object on a screen Screen Worksheet for 1200e Terminals Use this worksheet to plan the object positions for each screen you want to create for PanelView 1200e Keypad or Touch Screen terminal applications Screen Worksheet for 1400e Terminals Use this worksheet to plan the object positions for each screen you want to create for PanelView 1400e Keypad or Touch Screen terminal applications Screen Worksheet for 1000e Terminals Use this worksheet to plan the object positions for each screen you want to create for PanelView 1000e Keypad or Touch Screen terminal applications Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Discrete I O Usage Worksheet Application File Name Rack Number Full or Listen Only Access Circle One PLC Output Bit Numbers 17 16 15 14 13 12 10 7 6 5 4 3 PLC Input Bit Numbers 17 16 15 13 12 10 7 6 5 4 3 0 Block Transfer File I O Usage Worksheet Page 1 of 2 Application File Name Block Transfer File Number Number of Words READ PLC In or WRITE PLC Out FULL or LISTEN ONLY Access Enter a number between 1 and 64 Enter a number between and 64 Circle One Circle One PLC B
200. able controller manuals Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 2 18 Planning Applications Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Determining Rack Size and Block Transfer File Requirements Rack size and block transfer requirements depend on the number of objects windows and PLC I O Control options that must interact with the PLC The smallest rack size you can assign is two module groups or 1 4 rack If this size is not enough to support your application features do any or all of the following increase the rack size to 1 2 3 4 or FULL assign additional rack numbers assign block transfer files To determine the rack sizes you will need full access to find out what rack numbers are available This depends on the type of PLC you are using approximately how many racks you will need for your application You must also decide which racks require monitoring only Define these with Listen Only access Use the following table as a guide to determine if you ll need to use block transfer files The table shows per rack the number of discrete I O image table words and bits available for PLC communication Note You can assign up to 64 rack numbers Rack Size 16 bit Input 16 bit Output Total Input Total Output Words Words Bits Bits 1 4 2 2 32 32 1 2 4 4 64 64 3 4 6 6 96 96 FULL 8 8 128 128 Each block transfer file provides up to 64 words 1 024 bits of space The file can be either read o
201. ackground Color options in the Format menu or by using the color palette The color palette consists of two identical color bars The colors in the upper bar are the foreground colors The colors in the lower bar are the background colors 2 E WIN Foreground colors Background colors If multiple objects are selected whose foreground colors differ the foreground color indicator in the color palette will be displayed as a dotted rectangle Likewise the background color indicator will appear as a dotted rectangle if the background color of the selected objects differ The color menu will show these conditions by not displaying a check 7 beside any color Foreground colors are used for text monochrome graphic images lines arcs wedges ellipses rectangles bar graph fill scale lines and for button and list highlight colors Background colors are used for the filled part of the rest of the object How Colors Appear at Runtime For buttons and button objects the foreground color of the button s panel determines the color of the button border highlight when the button is pressed For list objects the foreground color of the list s panel is the highlight color when a state in the list is selected To apply colors before drawing 1 Select a drawing tool or the text tool 2 Select the colors from the color palette or from the Format menu Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 9 48 Creating Objects Publicatio
202. ag a side handle to change the width or height Drag a corner handle to change both the width and height 4 When the object is the correct size release the mouse button or the CTRL arrow keys Moving Objects You can move objects by using the mouse or by using the arrow keys in addition to the mouse Note Do not move objects off the screen You cannot download an application if an object is off the screen Note Input objects for PanelBuilder 1200e touch screen applications can be moved by touch cell increments only not by pixels To move an object 1 Select the object 2 Place the pointer on the object not on the handles 3 Hold down the left mouse button and drag the object to the position you want If you re using only the keyboard press CTRL arrow to move the object To move objects more precisely press the or keys on the numeric keypad before you press the arrow key This allows you to move the object in increments The amount of the increment varies according to how many times you press the or key before you begin pressing the arrow key An outline appears as you drag the object Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 9 40 Creating Objects Ctrl Z Ctrl V Ctrl X Cut Copy Ctrl C Paste Y Copy with Controls Select All Duplicate Ctrl D Delete Del Clear All Make Label Set Object Defaults Configure Screen Object Convert to YY
203. age Small ASCII Input omentary N O Push Button Large ASCII Input omentary N C Push Button Symbol Latched Push Button Local Message Display aintained Push Button Scale Trend ASCII Display DHK e e e e gt Multistate Push Button Goto Screen Button Interlocked Push Button Return to Previous Screen Button Control List Selector with Enter Key Le Screen List Selector Control List Selector without Enter Key Screen Keypad Enable Button Keypad applications only Small Screen Select Keypad Touch applications only Set Bit Cursor Point Screen Print Button Keypad applications only ultistate Indicator Line qus List Indicator E Rectangle ncrement Value Button Ellipse You can change itto with Display in the Configure dialog box Decrement Value Button Arc co You can change it to with Display in the Configure dialog box Numeric Data Displa Wedge 51 Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 9 22 Creating Objects This tool Corresponds to this command This tool Corresponds to this command Numeric Keypad Enable Button Keypad applications Panel only Numeric Entry Keypad Touch applications only Numeric Input Cursor Point Keypad applications only Creating Dynamic and Static Objects Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 The method for
204. ake You can use a digital or analog tag or an expression that reads one or more digital or analog tags for the Message Handshake control This option provides the terminal with confirmation that alarms with the Message to PLC option enabled are actually received by the PLC The Message Handshake works with the Message to PLC and Message Control See Message to PLC earlier in this chapter for more information Note If you use this control your application will be compatible with PanelView Version 2 or later It will not be compatible with earlier versions About the Alarm Message Window Configuring Alarms 11 29 The Alarm Message Window displays the alarm messages you create in the Alarm Messages editor The Alarm Message Window is triggered by the programmable controller and appears on the terminal when the application is running It provides messages to the operator including alarm conditions warnings informative messages You create these messages in the Alarm Messages editor See Chapter 10 Creating Messages for details You use the Message Window tab of the Configure Alarms dialog box to enable or disable the Alarm Message Window to configure the appearance of the window and to assign control tags or expressions You can choose one of these types of Alarm Message Window e Single line Alarm Message Window displays only the most recent alarm message at the top or bottom of the screen Multi line Ala
205. al Range Address Number of characters Du Value Scale Offset Data Type Value of Values string tag only Value Notes Initial State Value Objects such as Multistate Push Buttons have a user configurable initial state whose value will supersede the tag s initial value when the application is first run Tag Start Value This is called the tag s start value The start value is the tag initial value or the object initial state value if one exists For information about addressing syntax refer to Appendix C Addressing Syntax Screen Worksheet for 1200e Terminals Application File Name Screen Name Screen Number co c co rc co ei C4 C4 LL LL LL LL LL 5 The grid shows the location of the touch cells on a PanelView 1200e Touch Screen terminal PanelBuilder sizes 40 80 120 160 200 240 280 320 360 400 440 480 Notes 1 buttons in multiples of touch cells The smallest size for a 1200e touch screen application input object is 64 by 40 pixels 2 You can use this worksheet to align buttons you draw on the screen to keypad terminal function keys Screen Worksheet for 1400e Terminals Application File Name Screen Number Screen Name 15 65 95 145 175 225 255 305 335 385 415 465 495 545 575 625 Notes 1 You can use this worksheet to align buttons you draw on the screen to keypad terminal function keys 2 The PanelView 1400e touch screen terminals use analog
206. alarm conditions and when an alarm is to be generated send the trigger value that corresponds to that alarm to the PanelView terminal An alarm trigger tag or expression defined in PanelBuilder is required to send the trigger value from the PLC to the PanelView terminal Up to 50 different tags or expressions can be configured to trigger alarms from multiple locations Alarm Indication Options When configuring Alarm Messages in the Alarm Messages editor see Chapter 10 each message can be configured to sound PanelView s Audio alarm Print the message on a printer Display the alarm in the Alarm Message Window energize PanelView s built in Relay or send the triggered alarm Message to the PLC where it can be sent to other devices such as a supervisory computer Alarm Messages i OF x i i i N N Document Feeder Paper Misfeed N N Lj N Top Exit Jam N N N N Finisher Jam N N Li N N Paper Bin A Paper low N N Li N N Paper Bin B Paper low N N N N Copier Paper Jam N N bi N N Copier Toner Low Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 How Are Alarms Displayed Configuring Alarms 11 3 Alarms can be displayed in three ways e Message Window e Alarm History screen e Alarm Status screen Alarm Message Windows display unacknowledged alarms They pop up over any user configured screen and the information they display is not retained across power cycles of the Panel View terminal The u
207. alarm reports Uploads and Downloads over DH Panel View terminals support DH Direct or RIO DH Pass Through file transfers To upload or download your applications over DH you must connect your development computer to the Data Highway Plus network Uploads and Downloads over ControINet PanelView terminals support ControlNet Direct or RIO ControlNet Pass Through file transfers To upload or download your applications over ControINet you must connect your development computer to the ControINet network PCMCIA Memory Card PanelView terminals provide Personal Computer Memory Card International Association PCMCIA support You can use the PCMCIA memory card Catalog No 2711 NM11 12 13 or 14 to install firmware directly without having to open the terminal or to store application files For more information see the PanelView 1400e Serial Firmware Upgrade Utility Readme file and online help Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Steps for Building an Application Chapter 2 Planning Applications A well designed application requires careful planning before you start building To help with planning this chapter covers steps for building an application steps in planning an application including documenting the process designing screens and identifying communications planning for safety tips for optimizing the application using worksheets Creating an application is easier if you plan it This chapter discu
208. ale Scaled Value Value x Scale Offset If the state values are to be read from or written to an analog tag they must be scaled values For details see Chapter 6 Defining Tags and Chapter 7 Creating Expressions To remove a state value Select the state value and choose Clear To renumber state values 1 Click the first state value and drag the mouse to highlight all the state values to renumber Tip To quickly select all state values select the State Value column heading or select the first state value and then press CTRL SHIFT END Choose Renumber PanelBuilder sequentially assigns state values to all selected states using the first highlighted state as the starting value State values are assigned in increasing order Error States If an object has more than one state these two conditions can cause an error state The value of the object s control does not match any of the state values defined for the object The control for the object has not been assigned Creating Objects 9 59 For button objects if an error state occurs the highest state is displayed without its label for Interlocked Push Buttons no button is highlighted For list objects if an error state occurs the highlight bar disappears Configuring List Object States You can configure these types of list objects e List Indicators Control List Selectors e Screen List Selectors e Scrolling Lists At the Panel
209. allpaper Unlock Wallpaper Import Export Graphic Arranging Objects Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Select the object Drag the object to the correct position 4 When the object is in the correct position release the mouse button or the CTRL arrow keys Converting Static Objects to Wallpaper Wallpaper objects are part of the screen background and cannot be selected or edited You can convert any static drawing or text object to wallpaper Converting all static objects to wallpaper can significantly improve performance of screens at runtime For example imagine you ve imported a bitmap of your company logo for a screen background The logo would work well as wallpaper You might also select the screen s title text and other drawing objects and turn them into wallpaper Changing objects to wallpaper is also useful when creating screens You cannot accidentally select objects that are wallpaper and the drawing grid is displayed over wallpaper objects so you can easily position other objects in relation to the wallpaper objects To convert static objects to wallpaper Select the objects and choose Convert to Wallpaper from the Edit menu To convert wallpaper back to static objects Choose Unlock Wallpaper from the Edit menu All objects that have been converted to wallpaper will be unlocked After you create objects you can arrange them in a number of ways using tools in the too
210. alog box See Chapter 11 Configuring Alarms for more information If you use this option the application will be compatible with PanelView Version 2 or later It will not be compatible with earlier versions The default for the Audio Print Relay and Message to PLC options is N for No For Display the default is Y for Yes You can change these options when you are creating a new message or when editing an existing message Slot TL Pokies E F Bener in PLE O dena Jet Baumani Terter Tup Enid Jam Fisisher Paper Copier Carine Bramsber sut of sTegbes Kbapisr im jamri EFE FEET IZXIZZEIXIIB WazkESESIN Creating Messages 10 9 Importing Messages To change an alarm message option in the spreadsheet Select the cell of the option that you want to change Double click to change the N to a Y or the Y to an N or press TAB SHIFT TAB or the arrow keys to move through the options Press the BACKSPACE key twice to delete the existing option and type Y or N to change the option as desired then press ENTER To change an alarm message option in the form Click in the field of the option that you want to change or use TAB or ALT the key for the underlined letter to move to the box and press SPACEBAR You can copy messages from other Windows spreadsheets text editors or word processors and past
211. an shorten the offlink address by combining the remote bridge and remote station addresses into one three digit number The system reads only the first digit of the remote bridge address and adds the two digit remote station address to produce a shorter ad dress that still points to the same node ll rss local bridge address 0 77 octal 55 combined remote bridge address and 0 376 octal remote station address The following table shows the syntax for a remote station connected by a Pyramid Integrator Station Address Valid Entries II rrrrr ss local bridge address 0 77 octal rrrrr PI Link number 0 65535 decimal 55 Station address on remote DH 0 77 octal For more examples of valid remote station addressing see the section DH Addressing in Chapter 2 Planning Applications While these examples show remote station addresses for a programmable controller the method is the same for the Panel View Location Routing Address To define the PanelView Location Routing Address 1 In the Configure Communication Setup dialog box choose the Network File Transfer tab 2 In the PanelView Location Routing Address field type the terminal s station number If the Panel View terminal and development computer are on different bridged DH networks you must specify local and remote bridge addresses in addition to the station number Defining the Network File Transfer Controls If you plan to download
212. and on a non retentive object automatically reverts back to its initial values Retentive objects can either revert to their Initial State values or depending on the application type do this retain the values of their last active states use the current programmable controller values Note Scrolling Lists can be configured to retain the values of their last active states for all application types The objects runtime behavior depends on how you configure the Application Startup screen on the Panel View terminal For more information on configuring this screen refer to the PanelView 1000 1200e and 1400e Operator Terminals User Manual Note If the terminal is switched from Run to Configure mode and back again or if the operator changes screens retentive objects always retain their last values in Remote I O applications DH and ControlNet objects do not retain their last values except for the Scrolling List object if it has been configured to retain its last state Initial Tag Values and Initial State Values All tags have initial values If a tag is used as a write tag its initial value is used to initialize the programmable controller when the application is first downloaded It can also be used to initialize the programmable controller after a power cycle Certain objects have an initial state value For some it is predefined and cannot be changed For others you can optionally specify the initial state When an in
213. applications incompatible with earlier versions of the PanelView firmware E gt System 5 Terminal Setup 2 Tag Database Alarms e PLC 1 0 Control e Information Message Window Saving Applications New Application Ctrl N Open Application Ctrl 0 Save Application 5 Save Application As Close Ctrl F4 Download Upload Alt F4 Working with Applications 3 7 To specify the Target Firmware Version 1 Open the System folder and choose Terminal Setup or choose from the toolbar The Configure Terminal Setup dialog box appears Gmm Dey roms pamp Sleep ad sos E Applicetian Type Typu 1000 Kirgpnd Fie Commo _ Tange Firrmsearg Wrenn 0390 ard ap zi 2 In the Target Firmware Version field select a version from the drop down list 3 Choose OK When you save an application you save all work that you created in the editors Tip To avoid losing work due to a system failure save your application immediately after you ve made important or extensive changes There are two ways to save an application e Save Application overwrites the originally opened version of the application e Save Application As saves an open application with a new name in a new directory or in another file format To save changes to an open application Choose Sav
214. are and assign values to variables Evaluation of Local Variables If the value assigned to a variable uses a different data type than the variable s data type the value may be outside the range of the local variable If this occurs the result of the assignment is Unreliable If the value is within the range of the local variable s data type the value is converted to the local variable s data type Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 7 8 Creating Expressions Local Variable Data Type This table lists the resulting value after the value is converted to the local variable s data type Value Data Type Byte Integer Long Single Boolean Variant Byte Integer Long Value is Unreliable if outside local Value is Unreliable if outside If value 0 resulting value Value unchanged variable s range otherwise value local variable s range is False If value 0 is unchanged otherwise value is resulting value is True unchanged Single Value is truncated to an integer Value unchanged If value 0 resulting value Value unchanged Value is Unreliable if outside local is False If value lt gt 0 variable s range otherwise value resulting value is True is the integer value Boolean Value is 0 if False 1 if True Value is 0 if False 1 if True Value unchanged Value unchanged Variant See above resulting value de See above resulting value See above resulting value Value unchanged pends on which data type t
215. arge enough Windows 3 1 Use Control Panel 386 Enhanced Settings to reconfigure the size and type of the swap file We recommend using Permanent if 32 bit access is supported by your hardware Windows 95 Choose the Performance tab from the System folder in the Control Panel and set the minimum size of the virtual memory swap file to 5 MB and the maximum size to 16 MB Windows NT Choose the Performance tab from the System folder in the Control Panel Click Change and set the Virtual Memory swap file to the Recommended number under Total Paging File Size for All Drives PanelBuilder Validation Errors Consult the following table to identify and respond to PanelBuilder Validation Errors Validation Error Message Cause What to Do Tag type must be Analog Digital or Block Incorrect tag type Use the correct tag type Tag name must be Analog or Digital Incorrect tag type Use the correct tag type Baud rate of rate is not valid for PLC device type device type Some PLC types can only have a baud rate of 57 6K Consult your PLC User Documentation Object object name at position on screen overlaps a button Static elementis on top of an input object i e an indicator is placed over a push button Move one of these objects so they do not overlap Tag tag name does not exist You have entered an invalid tag name or the tag may have been deleted Check the tag definition in
216. ary 1998 Configuring Alarms 11 17 Using Multiple Acknowledge to PLC Tags for Bit Trigger Operation If you use the Bit Acknowledge to PLC type you can assign up to 50 block tags to this control Each tag must be assigned a starting trigger value from 1 to 65 535 The Panel View terminal uses the starting triggers to determine which block tag to send the alarm acknowledgment to and sets the appropriate bit position of the tag to 1 where bit position alarm trigger value starting trigger See the previous section Alarm Triggers for more information on Bit trigger and starting trigger operation To enable the Acknowledge Control assign a digital or analog tag When an alarm is acknowledged and after the trigger value is written to the Acknowledge to PLC tag the terminal sets the Acknowledge Control tag to 1 after the Alarm Control Delay interval The Acknowledge Control tag is set to 1 for as long as the Acknowledged button is being pressed for operator acknowledge or for the Remote Alarm Ack Control Hold Time for remote acknowledge whichever is longer After the Remote Alarm Ack Control Hold Time expires the tag will be reset to O Timing Diagram Ack Control Hold Time Ack Control Display n T2 SetAcknowledge Trigger SetAcknowledge Reset Acknowledge Value to PLC Control Tag Control Tag 24761 Note The Alarm Control Delay time and Ack Control Hold Time are configured in the Timing Parameters tab
217. at exiting from the Alarm History screen will reveal the application screen beneath The Screen Number to PLC if enabled is set to the Alarm History screen number If the Alarm History screen is invoked by the PLC Controlled Screen Change or a screen selection object this occurs When the Alarm History screen is exited the Screen Number to PLC is set to that of the application screen previously obscured by the Alarm History screen Another PLC Controlled Screen change request will remove the Alarm History screen and the current application screen to display the new screen Configuring Alarms 11 51 The following figure shows an example of the Alarm History screen Alarm History 5 apen 3 x H m Using Buttons on the Alarm History Screen This button Does this Acknowl Alarm Acknowledges the highlighted alarm The operator can acknowledge alarms that haven t been acknowledged in the Alarm Message Window If the alarm message has an audio or relay option enabled the alarm beeper is silenced or the relay is deactivated If the alarm message has the print option enabled the alarm is printed again with the acknowledgment time and date stamp Pressing the Acknowl Alarm button has no effect on the audio beeper if the PLC Controlled Audio value is non zero or on the alarm relay if the PLC Controlled Alarm Relay value is non zero Silence Alarms
218. ata Highway Plus or ControlNet Application earlier in this chapter After converting the application to ControlNet you need to change the Terminal Network Address on the Terminal Communications tab of the Configure Communication Setup dialog C nadigurn Communication Sebup The Terminal Network Address remains unchanged by the conversion Ensure this value is still correct for your application or change it The range is 1 to 99 decimal Important For versions 1 0 and 1 25 of ControlNet the PanelView Terminal Network Address should not be set to 1 For example if the Terminal Network Address for your DH application was 25 octal it will be 25 decimal for your ControlNet application In the Network File Transfer tab the Panel View Location Routing Address will be set to the Terminal Network Address Converting from ControlNet to Remote I O Defining Communications 5 33 To change the network type from ControlNet to Remote If you change an application from ControlNet to Remote I O you must define the necessary racks block transfer files and Pass Through File control byte if needed as well as change any tag addresses that are not valid for Remote I O You will also lose your defined nodes and scan classes 1 2 Choose Change Network from the Tools menu In the Target Network field choose Remote I O To convert the tags in the application select the Convert Tags chec
219. ate to an operator that a priority condition has occurred which requires immediate attention An alarm can be indicated in a number of ways including e Displaying alarm message text on the PanelView terminal s screen e Triggering PanelView s alarm relay to energize e Triggering PanelView s audio beeper to sound e Sending alarm message text to a printer e Sending alarm message text to the PLC for use by a supervisory computer ha elg bar aushep LE A 1 ia open Safety bar number iB h is open du Hoter H 1z B is Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 11 2 Configuring Alarms ATTENTION Do not rely on your terminal as a primary warning device or as an indicator of a critical or dangerous situation Critical means any situation that could result in physical injury product damage or significant process down time An operator s response to a critical or dangerous situation must never depend on software or solid state electronics All critical alarm indications and any critical host controller responses must employ redundant and hard wired or mechanical interlocks How Are Alarms Before the Panel View terminal can report alarms you must define Triggered the alarm conditions in the application file and program the PLC to trigger the alarms In PanelBuilder you create a list of alarm messages For each message you specify text and a unique trigger value The PLC must be programmed to monitor
220. ates the object s new state 3 If there are more states move through them to view them all To configure state appearances 1 Select the object 2 Select a state as described above 3 Make the desired changes using the options from the Format menu If you wish add text or graphic image labels Configuring Number of States Variable state objects are created with a default number of states For example a symbol has four states by default You can change the default number of states The table on the previous page shows the allowable number of states for each variable state object Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Creating Objects 9 57 To configure the number of states 1 Open the object s configuration dialog box using one of the methods described previously 2 For variable state objects except Control List Selectors assign the number of states here Number of States js For Control List Selectors assign the number of states by sizing the list as described in Configuring List Object States later in this chapter gt Note When you increase the number of states the attributes of the last state are used for all new states You must assign state values for these new states Assigning Values You must assign a value to each of the object s states gt Note For the Scrolling List Object s Cursor List you can also specify whether to skip individual states See the PanelBuilder 1400e
221. ation 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Recording the Address For each tag record the programmable controller address as follows Address The tag address Record the full tag address of digital and analog tags in this column Except for string and block tags the length of the address will be the size of the data file element in the address For string and block tags record the address of the first bit in the array in this column The data file location in the PLC must accept string tag addresses The address must start on an element boundary sub element starting addresses are not supported The address cannot cross PLC data file boundaries The syntax depends on the type of address or controller See Appendix C Addressing Syntax Number of Characters String Tags or Number of Bits Block Tags For String tags specify the length of the string in characters The length of the string must be a multiple of the number of bytes in the address For Block tags specify the number of bits in the array up to 1024 The number of bits must correspond to the element in the address For example if the address is located at an integer file element the length must be a multiple of 16 the bit length of an integer Tag Start Value The tag start value is the initial value or the object s initial state value if one exists For block tags the initial value can be 0 or 1 After you complete the planning steps in this chapter
222. ation Routing Address you will have to specify one in the Setup Download dialog box The following table shows the syntax for a remote station address bridged by a 1785 KA Station Address Valid Entries ll rrr ss local bridge address 0 77 octal rrr remote bridge address 0 376 octal SS station address on remote DH 0 77 octal or You can shorten the offlink address by combining the remote bridge and remote station addresses into one three digit number The system reads only the first digit of the remote bridge address and adds the two digit remote station address to produce a shorter ad dress that still points to the same node ll rss local bridge address 0 77 octal rss combined remote bridge address and remote station 0 376 octal address The following table shows the syntax for a remote station connected by a Pyramid Integrator Station Address Valid Entries ll rrrrr ss local bridge address 0 77 octal rrrrr PI Link number 0 65535 decimal 55 Station address on remote DH 0 77 octal For examples of valid remote station addressing see the section Addressing in Chapter 2 Planning Applications Though the examples in Chapter 2 show remote station addresses for a PLC the method is the same for the Panel View Location Routing Address Defining Communications 5 7 To define the PanelView Location Routing Address 1 In the Configure Communication Setup dialog box
223. ave to re specify the Panel View Location Routing Address on the Network File Transfer tab in the Configure Communication Setup dialog box For details on configuring an application for Remote I O see Defining Communications for a Remote I O Application earlier in this chapter Converting from To change the network type from ControlNet to DH ControlNet to DH 1 Choose Change Network Type from the Tools menu 2 In the Target Network field choose DH 3 Choose OK The following message will appear Configure Communication Setup x 7 Change to new DH device type No Help 4 Choose Yes to change your ControlNet application to DH Choose No if you do not wish to continue with the conversion PanelBuilder checks that the station numbers of all ControlNet nodes will still be valid when the network type is converted to DH A message appears if invalid station numbers are detected For example station number 8 is an invalid octal number The following message will appear prompting you to convert invalid station numbers There js atleast one node whichis curently incompatible willy Ihe new nebak typa Continus and corwart esed Bes ar Pi Pr me Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 E PLC Communications Communication Setup dea Nodes Scan Classes LA RIO Racks L RIO Block Transfer Files GT ID TG Communication Setu
224. ay Bay Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 World Wide Web http www ab com Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 40061 296 01 D Supersedes Publication 2711E 819 J uly 1997 Copyright 1998 Allen Bradley Company Inc Printed in USA
225. base for the application When you use this all the tags in the current database whether it is private or shared are deleted If the application has a shared database that no longer exists a new shared database is created What Are Expressions Chapter 7 Creating Expressions This chapter describes types of expressions expression syntax using the Expression Editor adding copying editing and deleting expressions assigning write expressions validating expressions Expressions perform mathematical or logical calculations to manipulate the display of tag values in the PanelView terminal Expressions can reduce the complexity of PLC ladder logic by allowing the application in the PanelView terminal to make calculations and perform indicator logic normally done in the PLC For example a temperature probe used to monitor the temperature of an oven is connected to a 12 bit analog input card in the PLC but you want the PanelView terminal to display the temperature in degrees Celsius You can create an expression to convert the temperature at the PanelView terminal instead of creating a ladder rung in the PLC to perform the calculation see Example 3 later in this chapter for more information Note If you assign expressions that contain any component other than tag names and comments the application will be compatible with PanelView Version 2 or later It will not be compatible with earlier versions Tip Us
226. bed previously 3 From the Function Key drop down list select the function key you want to assign Repeat for each button in the object gt Creating Objects 9 55 Function keys that are already assigned have an asterisk beside them Function keys that have more than one assignment have multiple asterisks Do not assign the same function key more than once in a screen Tip If you need to use two function keys simultaneously use one key from the horizontal group F1 to F16 and one from the vertical group F17 to F21 Do not use two keys from the same group 4 Choose OK Tip Where appropriate move the button so it is positioned next to the assigned function key This makes the application easier to use on the PanelView terminal To unassign a function key p gt Select the blank item in the Function Key drop down list or assign another function key to the selected button Configuring Object States Certain objects in PanelBuilder 1400e can have different states There are two state objects and variable state objects These are the two state objects Momentary Push Buttons e Latched Push Buttons Maintained Push Buttons Each time a two state button is pressed it changes state For example when a Normally Closed Momentary Push Button is pressed it changes from On State 0 to Off State 1 gt Button press Button release lt lt State 0 State 1 You can change
227. bject that supports labels the text automatically becomes a label If you have an existing text object or a graphic image that you want to move into a screen object as a label use the Make Label command Note You cannot use PanelBuilder drawing objects for example arcs lines and ellipses as labels Editing Objects Creating Objects 9 35 To change a background text object or graphic image into an object label 1 Select the background text object or graphic image 2 Move the text or graphic image inside the screen object s borders 3 Choose Make Label from the Edit menu or choose from the toolbar Note Text or graphics must be placed fully inside the object to be a label If text or graphics overlap the object s borders they cannot be a label Note If Make Label is dimmed PanelBuilder automatically made the text or graphic image into a label when you placed it The text or graphic image is now part of the object When you click on the text or graphic image its handles are hollow if it is a label Note For multistate objects when you change text or a graphic image into an object label the label is linked to the object state You can add a different label for each object state When the application is running and the state changes the label changes too See Configuring Object States later in this chapter To remove an object label 1 Select the text or graphic image 2 Cut the text or graphic ima
228. buttons to move an arrow through the available selections The selection is sent to the programmable controller when the Enter button is pressed Control List Selector without Enter Key contains a vertical list of choices The operator uses the object s Up Cursor and Down Cursor buttons to move through the available selections The current selection s state value is automatically sent to the programmable controller via the object s Selector Control Tag Set Bit Cursor Point consists of a tag a cursor character and text This object is used to point to screen text Several Set Bit Cursor Points can be in the same screen Each one can have a different user defined cursor character At runtime only the current Set Bit Cursor Point cursor character is visible and blinking Only the current Set Bit Cursor Point s Control Tag is on that is 1 all other Set Bit Cursor Points Control Tags are off that is 0 The programmable controller thus always knows the current selection This object is available only on keypad applications Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 9 8 Creating Objects Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 gt Note By default when the Cancel button is pressed at the terminal the Set Bit Cursor Point Character becomes invisible To keep the character visible even after the Cancel key is pressed enable the Retain Cursor On Cancel checkbox in the Object Setup tab of the Terminal Setup dialog box For mor
229. byte Word Specify which word between 0 and 7 in the specified rack will contain the control byte Byte Specify which byte of the word to use for the control byte the high byte or low byte Usage Specify whether the block transfer byte is a block transfer read or a block transfer write 3 Choose Accept 4 Define any other files you will need Defining the Pass Through File Control Byte gt Defining Communications 5 13 Before you can transfer an application file over the DH ControlNet or Ethernet network using the Remote I O Pass Through you must define the Pass Through File Control Byte You configure this byte in the RIO Block Transfer Files editor Note If the PLC specified as the device in the RIO Racks editor does not support pass through you will not be able to define a Pass Through File control byte If this happens go into the RIO Racks editor and select another device type In addition to the 64 available block transfer files there is a dedicated block transfer file called Pass Through The file size for this block transfer is fixed at 64 words and can t be changed To define the Pass Through File Control Byte Fill in the information from the Block Transfer File Assignments worksheet 1 Choose Pass Through File from the Block editor s menu The Pass Through File dialog box appears gt fivte Beck NN weer j 2 Choose the rack number
230. cation clear the check from the Convert Tags check box Ifyou don t convert the tags to ControINet format the tags data source remains Remote I O For any tags to be used in the ControlNet application you will have to change the data source to Device and give them valid ControlNet addresses Ifyou do convert the tags to ControINet format all the tags in the database that are used by your application will be converted to Device tags Analog tags using the binary data type will be switched to unsigned integer because binary is not supported for ControlNet applications Note If your application s Target Firmware version is Version 1 or Version 1 03 block tags are reported as errors when you validate the application Block tags used in the application are supported in ControINet applications that use Target Firmware Version 2 or later Note If you convert shared tags this may make them invalid for the other applications that are using them Unused tags are not converted and remain as Remote I O tags Note If you convert an application from Remote I O to DH or ControlNet or vice versa the tag addresses may be invalid for the network to which you are converting Change the tag addresses to match the network type Change Network Type Ex Current Network Remote 1 0 Target Network ControlNet Cancel IX Convert Tags Node Scan Class E PLC Communications Communication Setup dea Nodes
231. cation in the programmable controller that is linked directly to the PanelView terminal through the I O rack For each tag you must identify the address within the controller s Remote I O racks by specifying a rack or block transfer file address See Chapter 2 Planning Applications for details about rack and block transfer file configuration and Appendix C Addressing Syntax for addressing details Organizing tags makes database creation and maintenance faster and simpler and helps optimize PanelView performance To organize tags e Establish naming conventions Naming conventions enable you to use wildcards most effectively when searching for and displaying tags during development and runtime Use folders to group related tags Avoid defining more than one tag for a particular address Each tag used in the application requires memory when the application is run without regard to the tag s address Additionally keeping the address tag relationship unique lets you change all references to an address by simply editing the tag Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 6 4 Defining Tags The Tag Database Editor Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 gt Naming Tags Tag names can be up to 40 characters long If you create a folder the folder name becomes part of the tag name The tag name can contain the following characters AtoZ 109 underscore and dash To separate the folder name from the rest of
232. ced Binary Integer Float ASCII and String Files Fnnn www bb F nnn optional WWW bb optional File type B Binary N Integer F Floating Point ASCII ST String File number Binary 3 9 255 decimal Integer 7 9 255 decimal Floating Point 8 9 255 decimal ASCII 9 255 decimal String 9 255 decimal Binary integer and floating point file types use the default file number if the file number is absent The default numbers are 3 binary 7 integer and 8 floating point Word address 0 255 decimal Bit offset within word 0 15 decimal Bit offset is not supported for floating point and string file types Example F8 129 2 Addressing Syntax C 9 SLC 5 Enhanced Binary Files Optional Syntax Fnnn bbbb F nnn optional bbbb File type B Binary File number 3 9 255 decimal Uses default file number 3 if the file number is absent Bit offset from start of file 0 4095 decimal Example B3 3999 SLC 5 Enhanced Timer Counter and Control Files Fnnn eee MNE bb F File type T Timer C Counter R Control nnn optional eee MNE bb optional File number Timer 4 9 255 decimal Counter 5 9 255 decimal Control 6 9 255 decimal Timer counter and control file types use the default file number if the file number is absent The default numbers are 4 timer 5 counter and 6 control Ele
233. ciated with the optional write expression for the object Only four Trend objects are allowed per screen You have assigned more than four Trend objects to the current screen Ensure that no more than four Trend objects are used on the current screen No more than 3000 points are allowed in all the Background plotting trend pens in an application The total number of data points for all pens using background plotting in your application cannot exceed 3000 Configure fewer pens for background plotting or reduce the sample rate or time span of some of the trend objects No more than 85 pens are allowed in all the Background plotting trend objects in an application You can configure a maximum of 85 pens across all Trends in your application for background screen plotting Reduce the number of pens configured for background screen plotting in your application Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 What Is Version Control Version Control and Application Validation Appendix E Version Control Version Control is a set of rules embedded in PanelBuilder and in Panel View terminal firmware which determines the version of Panel View firmware with which a PanelBuilder application is compatible Version Control is imposed at three levels when a PanelBuilder application is validated e when a PanelBuilder application is downloaded to a Panel View terminal before a PanelView terminal application
234. column 4 8 selecting more than one row 4 8 selecting the entire spreadsheet 4 8 sorting entries 4 10 using 4 3 using Undo and Redo 4 7 working in 4 6 Stacking See Overlapping Startaddress 2 27 Startup screen See Application startup screen Static objects 9 2 converting to wallpaper 9 40 Station address 2 37 5 22 local 2 38 remote 2 38 Station number ControlNet 5 17 converting from ControlNet to DH 5 34 converting from DH to ControlNet 5 32 DH 5 17 String tags 6 2 configuring 6 17 Support services P 10 Symbols 9 6 9 12 creating 9 26 exporting 9 28 Syntax in expressions checking 7 23 errors 7 23 T Tag data specifying source 6 21 6 23 Tag database and RS View 6 1 defined 6 1 editing tags 6 11 importing and exporting 6 35 organizing 6 3 private 6 30 converting to shared 6 33 selecting tags 6 6 shared 6 30 repairing 6 35 selecting 6 34 Tag Database editor 6 5 Tag Database editor about 6 4 editing tags 6 11 using 6 5 using the spreadsheet 6 10 wildcards 6 6 Tag folder creating 6 4 Tag spreadsheet viewer 6 10 Index 1 15 Tag start value 2 50 Tag Usage Viewer 3 11 filtering data 6 26 for screens 8 10 removing filters 6 28 searching for text 6 28 using 6 25 Tags adding to folders 6 9 analog 6 2 configuring 6 13 in expressions 7 4 and addresses 2 13 2 16 2 19 2 43 and Remote 1 0 6 2 assigning a name 2 22 2 46 as
235. command You can also arrange the text relative to the object For example you could arrange the text to line up with the sides of the object or the middle To arrange text relative to the object 1 Select all the text objects Then sHiFT click the object to select it 2 Choose the appropriate command for example Align Center to arrange the text as you want Each object has certain default settings for colors size number of states and so on You can change these settings to suit your needs You can apply different foreground and background colors to objects select different borders or add emphasis to objects by making them blink Format Foreground Color Background Color Small Font Double Wide Font Double High Font Large Font Border Style Line Style Fill Style Blink Underline Text Indicates object foreground color Indicates object background color Creating Objects 9 47 Setting the Object s Foreground and Background Colors You can set different foreground and background colors for graphic objects and screen objects For static objects choose the colors before you create the object For dynamic objects create the object and then specify the colors Dynamic objects have default appearance attributes For details about viewing the defaults see Configuring Object States later in this chapter You can set an object s colors by using the Foreground Color and B
236. comprsr bmp comprsrl bmp conveyr bmp conveyrl bmp ab re P Network images C3 isa List files of type Drives Windows Bitmaps bmj 2 Select one or more files to import Click a file name to select it Use sHIFT click to select a range of images CTRL click to select additional images 3 Choose OK The files are listed in the Select Image dialog box Imported graphic images are stored with the PanelBuilder 1400e file If you do not use them in any screens remove them to keep your pvc file to a manageable size and to conserve disk space Creating Objects 9 31 To remove unused graphic images 1 In the Select Bitmap Image or Select DXF Image dialog box select any unused files and choose Remove A warning message appears 2 Choose Yes to remove the image If you remove an image that is used in a screen the screen will display a white box marking the spot where the image was When you select this white box the name of the associated file appears in the status line You must delete the box or re import the file Otherwise PanelBuilder will report a validation error Exporting Graphic Images You may want to export images from your pvd application to recreate their bmp source files This allows you to re use the graphic files on other screens in other applications or in non PanelBuilder programs You can export bmp and dxf images from an a
237. creating all dynamic and static objects is basically the same The illustrations for the following procedure show how to create a Return to Previous Screen Button To create an object 1 Choose the object tool by doing one of the following choose from the toolbox open the Objects menu and select the type of object to create v Select Push Buttons Control Selectors Indicators Numerics Trend Bar Graphs Time and Date ASCII Input Scrolling List Symbol Local Message Display ASCII Display Goto Configure Mode ow v v ow wow Goto Screen Button Return to Previous Screen Button Screen List Selector Screen Keypad Enable Button Screen Selectors Screen Print Button Graphic Image Drawings Text Ctrl T Note Most object types have a submenu indicated by an arrow at the right side of the Object menu If there is a submenu when you select the type of object the submenu appears Then you choose the particular object For example choose Return to Previous Screen Button from the Screen Selectors submenu The pointer changes to the active pointer gt 2 Position the pointer approximately where you want to place the object Creating Objects 9 23 3 If you re using the mouse press the mouse button and drag the pointer until you see the object outline If you re using the keyboard press CTRL arrow until you see the button s outline S
238. creen 255 by default If you want to use a different screen as the Application Startup screen select a new screen from the Screen drop down list For more information see Assigning the Application Startup Screen in Chapter 8 Creating Screens Changing the Application Type You select the type of Panel View terminal on which the application is run when you create the application However you can use the General tab of the Configure Terminal Setup dialog box to change the application type so it can run on a different terminal type Keep the following in mind when changing the Application Type You can t run a keypad application on a touch screen terminal or a touch screen application on a keypad terminal Once you choose touch screen or keypad for your application type you cannot change to the other type Configuring Terminal Setup Options 12 3 e 1000e or 1400e touch screen application can run interchangeably only on 1000e or 1400e touch terminals However you can convert a 1000e or 1400e touch screen application to a 1200e touch screen application or vice versa if you do check your screens carefully as the size and placement of objects may change To change the application type Select the application type from the Application Type drop down list Configure Terminal Setup x Timing Parameters Object Setup Application Startup Screen Screen 255 Alarm History hd Application Type Type
239. creens Untitled 1 Demo Position the outline where you would like the object and release the button Screens Untitled 1 Demo LJ s The small square remains at the base of the pointer because the object tool is still selected You can continue to place additional copies of the same object If you are finished creating this type of object deselect the tool To deselect a tool do one of the following e click in an empty area of the screen press ESC choose Select from the Objects menu to return to select mode choose from the toolbox to return to select mode click the right mouse button click another object Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 9 24 Creating Objects Creating Text Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 To configure an object Double click or right click on the object or choose from the toolbar A configuration dialog box opens If you are creating an application for a keypad terminal you assign the function keys for the object here See the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Reference Manual for detailed information about configuring objects You can create background text for your screen You can also add text to objects You can choose the text s attributes font color and so on before you create it or you can create the text first and assign attributes later You can also center left justify or right justify multiple lines of tex
240. ct Note For any rack number there can be only one rack assignment with Last Chassis enabled When you define multiple assignments for a rack any Last Chassis enabled for those with lower module groups will be disabled when rack assignments with higher module group numbers are defined 3 When you have finished choose Accept to save the rack assignment 4 If desired assign further racks and related module groups A tag with a block transfer file address can be used anywhere in place of a tag with a discrete I O address Discrete addressing provides better performance and requires less PLC programming However if you don t have enough discrete address space or need more contiguous address space use block transfer files A block transfer file can be either a read or a write file with Full or Listen Only access depending on the access of the assigned control byte A byte is used in the output space of the rack regardless of file type However a read and a write file can share the same byte in the output table E gt PLC Communications Communication Setup dea Nodes Scan Classes LA Racks AIO Block Transfer Files Data Entry Form Spreadsheet Viewer Defining Communications 5 11 Important Some scanners the 1771 SN and 1747 SN Series A modules for example don t support block transfers to a Remote I O device Block transfer file assignments apply only if you re using another remote 1771 I O or
241. cters including the backslash V character Use this wildcard by itself to display all the tags in the tag database Press ENTER to display the results of your query in the spreadsheet viewer The first tag that matches the query is displayed in the form Using the Folder Hierarchy Defining Tags 6 7 The hierarchy and spreadsheet work together The hierarchy shows the tag folders and the spreadsheet shows the tags within the folders A folder icon called root is always present in the hierarchy window It is at the top of the folder hierarchy Initially the root folder is empty You can add other folders to the hierarchy or you can nest folders within another If a folder icon has a plus sign it contains one or more folders If a folder icon is blank it does not contain any other folders This folder contains one or more folders 71 This folder does not contain another folder To view a series of nested folders or long tag names resize the query and hierarchy boxes Place the cursor over the right border of the box surrounding them When the cursor changes to a double arrow drag the border to the desired size Tip Before you begin defining tags consult your Device Tags or Remote I O Tags Worksheets and check whether you want to change or add to the folder hierarchy you planned in the worksheets Creating a Folder 1 Choose New Folder from the Edit menu New Folder Ea Name Screen 50 2 Type
242. cts for PanelBuilder 1200e touch screen applications can be sized by touch cell increments only not by pixels Note Do not resize an object so part of it is off the screen You cannot download an application if part of an object is off the screen Important If you are sizing an object that contains a text or graphic image label you cannot make the object smaller than the label For example if you size a push button that has text in state 0 and no text in state 1 you can t size the button smaller than the text size in state 0 even if you re in state 1 where you can see no text Important If you want to resize graphic images in PanelBuilder set your display adapter to 65 536 colors To change the size of an object 1 Select the object 2 Position the pointer over a handle The pointer changes to show the direction you can size the object 3 Press the left mouse button While holding it down drag the object If you re using only the keyboard press CTRL arrow to size the object To size objects more precisely press the or keys on the numeric keypad before you press the arrow key This allows you to size the object in increments The amount of the increment varies according to how many times you press the or key before you begin pressing the arrow key Creating Objects 9 39 The outline of the object stretches or contracts from the anchor point to the pointer position as you move the mouse or press the keys Dr
243. d object to indicate that it is selected or Drag diagonally to draw a selection box around the components Click the object within the first object Hollow handles appear on the second object to indicate that it is selected or Use the arrow keys to move to an object and press SPACEBAR to selectthe whole object press SPACEBAR again to select the component or object Hollow handles appear on the second object to indicate that itis selected Tip When using a selection border to select objects within another object press crRL sHiFT to select only the inner objects See the example that follows Overlapping objects Click the overlapping objects and continue clicking until you select the desired object Each time you click a different overlapping object is selected or Use the arrow keys to move to an object and press SPACEBAR to Select the object Continue pressing SPACEBAR until you select the desired object Each time you press SPACEBAR a different overlapping object is selected Creating Objects 9 17 Example 1 Multiple Levels of Selection When you select an object within an object such as one component of a multi component object hollow handles appear around the inner object The status bar reports which part of the object is selected The following illustration shows three selection levels the whole button the panel and the label The status line is also shown 1 Click once to selec
244. d running Version 1 or later firmware e PanelView 1200 Color Touch Screen Terminal Series F and Catalog Nos 2711 TC1MC 2711 TC4MC when upgraded with the PanelView 1200 Enhancement Kit Catalog Number 2711E U1B12C and running Version 1 or later firmware Transferring or Installing the Application To run an application you must first transfer it from the development computer to the PanelView terminal using one of the following methods e Serial download using the RS 232 port and cable for a Remote I O DH or ControlNet application e DH RIO Pass Through download over DH for a Remote I O application ControlNet RIO Pass Through download over ControlNet for a Remote I O application Remote I O Ethernet Pass Through download over an Ethernet for a Remote I O application e DH direct download over DH for a DH application ControlNet direct download for a ControlNet application PCMCIA memory card for Remote I O DH or ControlNet application Databook compatible drive For more information about equipment necessary for transferring applications see Optional Equipment in this chapter To transfer application files to or from PanelView terminals the PanelView 1200 1400e Transfer Utility must be installed This utility is included with your PanelBuilder distribution It is also available separately as Catalog Number 2711E ND7 For information about installing the Panel View 1200 1400e Transfer Utility
245. d 1200e terminals PanelView 1200 and 1200e terminals use a touch matrix which requires that all input objects align with a touch grid To complete each PanelView 1000e or 1400e screen worksheet 1 Draw all objects that will be displayed on each screen Most objects can be any size p Note The smallest size for a touch object is 40 by 40 pixels 2 Make a note of the button labels on the worksheet This will help you remember where you are locating common objects such as GoTo Screen buttons and Exit buttons Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 2 12 Planning Applications Step 3 Plan Communications with the PLC Planning Remote 1 0 Communications Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 The third step in designing an application is to determine the programmable controller addresses relevant to your application Because the tasks involved in planning PLC addresses differ for Remote I O and DH or ControlNet applications the remainder of this chapter is divided into two sections one for each To continue planning a DH or ControlNet application go to Page 2 35 This section describes how to complete Step 3 for a Remote I O application It includes information about these tasks Identifying inputs and outputs e Planning rack assignments e Planning addresses Using worksheets to help you plan Remote I O communications Identifying Inputs and Outputs The first step in determining which addresses the application
246. d Entries 14 14 21 7 310 21 or 7 321 Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 2 40 Planning Applications Remote DH Remote DH Local DH Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 24724 PanelView 1400e Terminal Multiple DH Networks Connected by a Pyramid Integrator The format of the station address for nodes on a remote DH network is Station Address Valid Entries ll rrrrr ss local bridge address 0 77 octal rrrrr PI Link number 0 65535 decimal 55 Station address on remote DH 0 77 octal The Pyramid Integrator PI Link number for each DH network must be unique Use the A B 6200 Series Programming Software to configure link numbers All station routing addresses must be local addresses A PI chassis contains one RM module with two network channels It can also contain up to four KA modules each with two network channels Using the RM and four KA modules a Panel View terminal can communicate with programmable controllers on any or all of 10 DH networks The figure on the following page shows a Panel View 1400e terminal connected to a DH network The PI routes requests among four DH networks Bridge Address Planning Applications 2 41 The valid station entries for the various nodes in the figure are Station Address Valid Entries 12 12 3 6 2 3 23 6 3 23 10 6 4 10 P Chassis PI Link 3 D f 0 1
247. d color and the background screen For example a panel blinks between its background colors and the screen color A text object blinks between its foreground color and the screen color Do not make too many objects blink because blinking objects can be distracting 1 Select the object 2 Fora multistate object select the desired state 3 Choose Blink from the Format menu The object won t blink on your screen but will blink when the application is running in the PanelView terminal Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 9 50 Creating Objects Format Foreground Color Background Color Small Font Double Wide Font Double High Font Large Font Extra Large Font Button Margins Border Style Line Style Fill Style Blink Underline Text v Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 Changing Text Appearance You can change the font size to one of these options Small Font Double Wide Font Double High Font Large Font tra Large Font You can also choose Underline Text to have the text underlined 1 Select the text object 2 Choose a text size or choose Underline from the Format menu The text will change according to your selection Note Text labels cannot exceed an object s boundaries To change to a larger font that would exceed the boundaries select the object first then increase the text size The object will automatically resize to accommodate the larger text Tip To chan
248. data is overwritten gt Note You cannot use Fill Forward in the Node Rack and Block editors Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 4 12 Working with Editors Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Inserting a Row in the Spreadsheet You can insert new rows anywhere in the spreadsheet 1 Select a row in the spreadsheet 2 Choose Insert from the Edit menu or from the toolbar A blank row is inserted just above the selected row The existing rows are shifted down Deleting Data in the Spreadsheet You can delete rows columns or blocks of data in the Messages editors You can delete rows of data in the Node Rack and Block editors Unlike the Cut operation when you delete the data is not copied to a clipboard 1 Select the row column or block of data you want to delete 2 Choose Delete from the Edit menu or from the toolbar Or press the DELETE key The data is deleted Important In the Messages editors use the Undo command to reverse any action since the last update except sorting Editing Selections Messages Only In the Messages editors you can edit a group of records or block of cells in one operation You must have both the form and spreadsheet views open to do this 1 Select the group of records or block of cells to be edited The first record of the group is displayed in the form section 2 Edit in the form section the field or fields to be changed Then choose Accept The change is app
249. dge Control Hold Time parameter This allows control of the flow of remote alarm acknowledges Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 11 22 Configuring Alarms Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 N7 12 contains the trigger value of the alarm to be remotely acknowledged from the PLC and is unloaded to the Remote Acknowledge tag address N7 2 Note If you use Remote Acknowledge your application will be compatible with Panel View Version 2 or later It will not be compatible with earlier versions Silence Alarms to PLC When the operator presses the Silence button in the Alarm Message Window or the Alarm History screen the terminal sets the assigned tag to 1 for the Remote Alarm Operation Hold Time and then resets it to 0 This control uses tags only Use a digital or analog tag Note Hold times are configured in the Timing Parameters tab of the Configure Terminal Setup dialog box See Configuring Timing Parameters in Chapter 12 Configuring Terminal Setup Options for more information about these parameters PLC Controlled Silence Alarms The PLC Controlled Silence Alarms option silences the beeper and deactivates the alarm relay when the value associated with this tag or expression changes from 0 to non zero You can use a digital or analog tag or an expression for this control This tag affects the beeper and relay if they are active at the time of 0 to non zero transition and has no effect on alarms triggered after th
250. dicated in the following data table are turned On Messages 1 2 6 8 and 12 will be triggered Block Tags 0 0 010 To assign tags to Bit triggered Alarm Triggers Bit Position Triggered Alarming x Alarm value range 1 16 tigger Assign Tag 1 In the Configure Alarms dialog box select the Global Controls tab Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 11 12 Configuring Alarms Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 2 Go to Control and double click Alarm Triggers or click Alarm Triggers and choose Assign Tag The Bit Position Triggered Alarming dialog box appears with a table of tags and their starting triggers Click on a row to enter the tag 3 Choose the Assign Tag button and the Tag Browser dialog box appears From this dialog box you can choose an existing tag by double clicking it or create a new one by choosing New Tag If you choose New Tag the Tag Editor dialog box appears For details on using the Tag editor see Other Methods of Creating Tags in Chapter 6 Defining Tags 4 In the Bit Position Triggered Alarming dialog box assign a Starting Trigger value from 1 to 65 535 for each tag See Starting Trigger above for more details 5 To assign multiple tags up to 50 click on the next available row and enter the new tag repeating steps 3 and 4 If additional rows are needed choose Insert Row To delete a row choose Delete Row 6 Select OK to return to th
251. different colors for each state Any monochrome bitmap or monochrome dxf image can be used for a symbol You can increase or decrease the size of a monochrome bitmap to achieve the symbol size you want PanelBuilder is installed with 32 bitmaps of standard ISA symbols in two sizes If the default installation was followed these are contained in the C AB PB1400E IMAGES directory A set of DIN symbol bitmaps is also installed there Text Text is used for screen titles to provide instructions or to add text labels to objects Text can be configured as transparent or solid with background and foreground colors Working with Objects Next State AIt N Previous State Alt P Grid Settings Zoom In Zoom Out Show Color Palette Show Toolbox Creating Objects 9 13 Time and Date Date Display shows the current date It can be displayed anywhere on the screen Depending on the Panel View terminal settings the object can appear in a variety of formats Time Display shows the current time It can be displayed anywhere on the screen Depending on the settings configured in the Panel View terminal a variety of formats can be displayed Trends Trend allows the operator to track process variables over a period of time It is a dynamic graphical display object with time on the horizontal axis and the value range of the process variable on the vertical axis Up to four process variables can be plotted using the
252. display active alarms mode 11 42 display all messages mode 11 43 display past alarms mode 11 43 resetting 11 46 screen security 8 8 using buttons 11 45 using in the terminal 11 40 viewing alarm messages 11 41 viewing modes 11 41 Alarm triggers about 11 9 bit 11 6 word 11 6 Alarms about 11 1 acknowledging 11 5 background 11 29 configuring 11 5 displaying 11 3 global controls configuring 11 6 message control 11 28 message handshake 11 28 message to PLC 11 24 methods of indicating 11 1 PLC controlled audio 11 22 PLC controlled relay 11 23 PLC controlled silence alarms 11 22 quantity and time 11 44 silence alarms to PLC 11 22 triggering 11 2 Aligning objects 9 43 Allen Bradley 1771 Remote I O Link 1 5 6200 Series Programming Software 2 40 technical support P 10 Analog tags 6 2 address length 6 23 configuring 6 13 data types 2 24 2 47 AND in expressions 7 17 Application file comment 12 3 Application startup screen assigning 8 15 changing 8 15 security 8 8 selecting 12 2 Applications building 2 1 closing 3 17 compressing 3 8 3 9 configuring 2 1 converting from PanelBuilder 1200 3 4 from PanelBuilder for DOS 3 4 copying 3 10 creating 2 1 3 1 defining communications 5 1 ControlNet 5 15 DH 5 15 Remote 1 0 5 2 deleting 3 17 describing 12 3 determining size 3 11 downloading 2 1 15 1 file formats 3 4 opening 3 3 optimizing 2 4 planning
253. diting Text 5a idee toad bated SCR CR DECR 9 25 Creating Extended 5_ 9 25 Creating Symbols 9 26 Exporting 5 9 28 Creating Graphic Images 9 29 Exporting Graphic Images 9 31 Creating Drawing Objects 9 33 Adding Labels 9 34 Editing Objects 9 35 Cutting Copying and 5 9 36 Copying Objects with Controls 9 36 Copying Graphic Images 9 36 Deleting ODJECE 9 37 D plicating OBJEC ue oaa eaae outed 9 37 SIZ MG O DJECU ood ed Du ten 9 38 Moving DISCS 2 9 39 Converting Static Objects to Wallpaper 9 40 Arranging ODISEIS v rub t e end led 9 40 Grouping and Ungrouping Objects 9 41 Editing Overlapping Objects 9 42 Aligning Objects 9 43 Spacing Objects 9 45 Flipping Objects iis va kr OE IR RR REA ERE 9 45 Arranging Labels 9 46 Changing Object
254. e transition is made PLC Controlled Audio The PLC Controlled Audio option allows the programmable controller to sound the terminal s built in beeper You can use a digital or analog tag or an expression that reads one or more digital or analog tags for this control Whenever the value associated with this tag or expression changes from 0 to non zero the beeper sounds When the value is reset to 0 the beeper stops Configuring Alarms 11 23 The programmable controller can sound the beeper by setting the associated control value or you can allow the operator to control the beeper from the terminal by assigning this control to a push button on a screen Important PLC Controlled Audio does not affect any alarm messages you may have configured to sound the beeper These alarms will sound the beeper regardless of whether you ve enabled or disabled PLC Controlled Audio However if the audio is controlled in both alarm messages and by the PLC Controlled Audio the beeper will not be reset unless both the trigger points are reset PLC Controlled Relay The PLC Controlled Relay option allows the programmable controller to trigger the alarm relay Whenever the value associated with this tag or expression changes from 0 to non zero the alarm relay turns on When the value is reset to zero the alarm relay turns off You can use a digital or analog tag or an expression for this control The programmable controller can turn
255. e Application from the File menu or from the toolbar or press CTRL S PanelBuilder replaces the previous version of the application with the new version Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 3 8 Working with Applications Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 gt Tip You can reclaim the disk space occupied by deleted parts of your application by compressing your application file When you make extensive edits to an application especially if you delete existing screens or remove bitmaps from the library PanelBuilder doesn t free the space those objects or screens occupy in your application This makes your files quicker to save but requires more disk space in which to save them To compress an open file 1 Choose Save Application As from the File menu 2 Check the Compress field 3 Choose OK To save an open application under a new name or in another directory 1 Choose Save Application As from the File menu The Save As dialog box appears The application name is the default file name 2 Type the new name for your application using a maximum of eight characters or change the default drive or directory Note When used with Windows 95 or Windows NT PanelBuilder does not support long file and directory names Ensure that the file and directory names you use conform to the DOS naming standard If you enter an invalid file or directory name an error message will appear and you will be prompted to re enter the
256. e False True False True True False False False Example 4 Using Logical Operations in Expressions With expressions you can pack a large amount of information into a single word of data The bit wise operations AND OR and NOT can be used to extract information out of the packed data and used to set the state of a multi state indicator for example Consider a Symbol object representing a motor that controls a conveyor belt The Symbol representing the motor on the PanelView terminal has four colors each representing a possible State State Value Color 0 Gray not running no alarms present 1 Green running Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 7 18 Creating Expressions Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 State Value Color 2 Bright Green starting run contact on and low speed contact off 3 Red not running in alarm The 1 0 for each starter has been mapped into file N7 0 Bit Position Description 0 Overload Alarm High Temp Thermistor 2 Run Contact from Starter Low Speed Contact 4 Phase Loss Alarm 5 Under Over Voltage Alarm 16 Low Speed Alarm The following expression uses tag motor1_sts defined as N7 0 and sets the appropriate state at the PanelView terminal DIM state AS INTEGER current state of the motor DIM result AS INTEGER result decode status info REM All bits 0 means not running REM Only bit 2 value 4 means running REM
257. e Global Controls dialog box Word Trigger Operation For a digital tag when the tag value changes from 0 to 1 the alarm is triggered For an analog tag any non zero value will trigger an alarm with the corresponding trigger value When an expression is used it will be evaluated any time a tag in the expression changes Any non zero expression result will trigger the alarm with the corresponding trigger value Expressions allow the PanelView terminal to perform calculations on control values and determine internally whether an alarm state has occurred and then trigger the alarm This reduces ladder logic required in the PLC In the following expression example the alarm tag Alrm_cntl is used to monitor temperature If the temperature falls below 100 F then the alarm message with a trigger value of 2 will be triggered The alarm message with a trigger value of 3 will be triggered if the temperature rises above 150 F Configuring Alarms 11 13 Expression Editor x Double click on an entry or hit return Construct List IF THEN ELSE SELECT CASE Dimension List DIM AS BOOLEAN DIM AS BYTE DIM AS INTEGER DIM AS LONG DIM AS SINGLE DIM AS VARIANT Miscellaneous EXIT REM Comparison List equality lt gt inequality lt less than gt greater than lt ls than or eq to gt than or eq tc Logical List Arithmetic List
258. e Indicator State control tag or expression determines which item is highlighted State values are user defined Creating Objects 9 9 Multistate Indicator can display between 2 and 255 states one state at a time Each state can have a different combination of text colors graphic images and attributes The value of the Indicator State control tag or expression determines which state is displayed State values are user defined Local Message Display Local Message Display object displays messages from the list of local messages to provide status information or instructions to the operator Numerics Decrement Value Button decreases the value stored at the Button Control Tag by a whole or a fractional value each time the button is pushed If the button is held down the programmable controller value continues to decrease until it reaches a pre assigned limit The object can be configured to display the numeric value contained in the tag Increment Value Button increases the value stored at the Button Control Tag by a whole or a fractional value each time the button is pushed If the button is held down the programmable controller input value continues to increase until it reaches a pre assigned limit The object can be configured to display the numeric value contained in the tag Numeric Data Display shows the current value of the Displayed Value control tag or expression The display can show polarity and decimal points Numeric
259. e Information Message Window appears at the bottom of the screen on the terminal BEGIN START START STOP CLEAR CHCLE COMMEY COMJEY To trigger an information message the programmable controller places a non zero value in the Information Window Control This value must correspond to the trigger value of a message you created in the Information Messages editor The terminal reads this trigger value and displays the corresponding information message Depending on how you configure the Information Message Window the window will remain on the screen until one of the following OCCUIS e The programmable controller sets the value at the Information Window Control to 0 The operator presses the window s Clear button e The operator presses the window s Ack button This button appears only if the Acknowledge to PLC control has been enabled When the operator presses the Ack button the Acknowledge to PLC tag is set to 1 for the duration of the Information Window Ack Hold Time The PLC can be programmed to instruct the terminal to clear the window by setting the Information Window Control back to zero Note If the Information Message Window is on screen at the moment when an alarm occurs the Alarm Window may overlap the Information Message Window The Information Message Window will remain after the Alarm Window is cleared Working with the Information Message Window 14 3 Configuring the When you configure
260. e PLC I O Control Options It provides information about what each PLC I O Control Option is how the PLC I O Control Options are used how to define controls for each PLC I O Control Option You can instruct the programmable controller to control and monitor certain functions in the terminal by assigning PLC I O Control Options For example to have the programmable controller manage which screen is displayed on the terminal you must assign a control tag or expression to the PLC Controlled Screen Number option Alternatively the operator at the Panel View terminal can control these options and send the option status to the PLC The options are then referred to as the Notify PLC options Using the same example you would assign a tag to the Screen Number to PLC control These three options can be controlled by either the PLC or the operator at the Panel View terminal Screen Number e Screen Print e Date and Time You configure all these PLC I O Control options in the PLC I O Control dialog box Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 13 2 Configuring PLC I O Control Options System To open the PLC I O Control dialog box p Terminal Setup Tag Database Open the System folder and choose PLC I O Control or choose Alarms from the toolbar The following dialog box opens PLC 1 0 Control 5 8 p L gj Information Message Window PLC 1 0 Control x PLC Controlled Control Screen Number to
261. e a space or tab between the previous executable code and the line continuation character You can use the line continuation character on consecu tive lines Parentheses Use parentheses to override operation precedence in your expressions and to add clarity See Examples 1 through 3 later in this chapter for samples of how to use parentheses Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 7 6 Creating Expressions Component Symbol Description Spaces tabs and blank lines You can use spaces tabs and blank lines wherever you like to make your expressions clear and readable The only place where a space is not permitted is between the negation operator and its operand In some cases spaces are required For example between the line continuation character and the previous executable code If in doubt see the section that describes the expression component you are using Extra spaces tabs and blank lines are removed when the expression is compiled Tags Tagname You can use any analog or digital read tag in your expressions You must use the full tag name including any tag folder names You can use the same tag multiple times in an ex pression However you may then wish to assign the tag to a local variable You can use up to 50 different tags in each expression See also Braces above User entry character You must use the user entry character in the optional write expressions if you assign them Its
262. e and time to PLC controller data tags 13 6 PLC controlled date and time control tag 13 4 Time display 9 6 9 13 9 21 Timeout 2 38 5 23 Timer mnemonics C 12 Timing parameters 12 5 push button hold time 12 6 remote alarm 12 7 Token data mnemonics C 15 Toolboxes items 9 14 9 21 using 9 13 9 20 Touch margins 9 50 Touch screen objects 9 1 Transfer inhibit control 5 7 5 20 Transfer request control 5 7 5 20 Transfer status control 5 7 5 20 Transferring applications about 15 1 from within PanelBuilder 15 1 using the PanelView 1200 1400e Transfer Utility 15 3 Trend 9 6 9 21 Trigger value and messages 10 2 simplifying PLC programming 10 2 Triggering alarms 11 2 Troubleshooting D 1 validation D 3 Type 2 45 U Undo 9 19 Ungrouping nested groups 9 41 objects 9 41 9 42 Unsigned integer data type 2 24 2 48 Unsolicited messages about 5 23 Updating messages 10 14 screens 8 6 Upload download cable 1 6 Uploading applications 15 1 Usability and screen design 2 6 User entry character in expressions 1 6 in write expressions 7 24 V Validating applications 3 10 relaxed validation 6 21 expressions 7 27 messages 10 13 problems with D 3 screens 8 9 tag definitions 6 21 Validation results window 3 11 8 9 10 13 Variables local evaluation of 7 7 in expressions 7 6 naming 7 6 Version 1 03 firmware features E 2 Version 2 firmware features E 2 Versio
263. e created for you with the default settings You can change the settings to suit your application later If you leave the Node Name and Scan Class fields blank the converted tags will have a blank node and scan class name You will have to create the nodes and scan classes that your tags will use then update each tag with the node and scan class names that you have created For details see Defining Communications for a Data Highway Plus or ControlNet Application earlier in this chapter 5 Choose OK The following message appears Configure Communication Rack and Block Transfer File definitions will be 2 jost after the network type is converted to Continua Le oue 6 Choose Yes to confirm that you want to continue Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 5 28 Defining Communications Converting from Remote I O to ControlNet Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 To change the network type from Remote I O to ControlNet Important When you change an application from Remote I O to ControlNet you will have to define the necessary ControlNet nodes and scan classes and change any tag addresses that are not valid for ControlNet device tags Choose Change Network Type from the Tools menu In the Target Network field choose ControlNet To convert the tags in the application select the Convert Tags check box If you don t want to convert tags in the appli
264. e foreground color for the messages in the Alarm Status screen Background Choose the background color for the messages in the Alarm Status screen 3 Assign controls in the Control field This control Does this PLC Controlled QTY TIME Allows the programmable controller to reset the time and Reset quantity counts in the Alarm Status screen Whenever the programmable controller sets the control value from 0 to non zero the time and quantity are reset Assign a tag or expression to enable this option For information about expressions see Chapter 7 Creating Expressions QTY TIME Reset to PLC Allows the terminal to notify the programmable controller when an Alarm Status QTY Time Reset has occurred whether from a PLC Controlled QTY TIME Reset from the Reset QTY Time button When a reset occurs the control is setto 1 for the Remote Alarm Operation Hold time before it is reset to 0 Assign a tag to enable this option See Chapter 6 Defining Tags and Chapter 7 Creating Expressions for information about how to assign and unassign tags and expressions 4 Choose OK to save the Alarm Status screen configuration Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 11 50 Configuring Alarms About the Alarm History Screen Working with the Alarm History Screen in the Terminal Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 The operator can view a list of historical alarms by calling up the Alarm History screen The Alar
265. e information about terminal setup options see Chapter 12 Configuring Terminal Setup Options Note If you enable the Retain Cursor On Cancel option the application will be compatible with PanelView Version 3 or later It will not be compatible with earlier versions Goto Configure Mode The Goto Configure Mode object is a special object that allows operators to switch the Panel View terminal from Run Mode to Configure Mode without using the terminal s hardware keyswitch The Goto Configure Mode object works with the firmware object the Run Mode button which is enabled separately in the firmware For information about the Run Mode button and how to enable it see the PanelView 1000e 1200e and 1400e Operator Terminals User Manual Graphic Images Graphic Images are imported bitmaps in monochrome or 16 color bmp format that can appear as a static part of the screen or as object labels PanelBuilder can be installed with a library of graphic images including machine parts symbols and arrows You can place any of these in your application If you wish you can change the foreground and background colors of monochrome images and configure them as hollow or solid You can also import bmp files from another application or AutoCAD graphics saved in the dxf format and place them on the screen Indicators List Indicator displays a list of programmable controller states with the current state highlighted The value of th
266. e mouse button The pointer changes to an I beam 2 Position the I beam on the text string you want to edit and click the mouse or press any key and begin typing 3 Use BACKSPACE Or DELETE to delete characters Creating Extended Characters In PanelBuilder you can use two extended character sets PanelView extended character set to create characters in screens and messages MS Word Sans Serif extended character set to create characters in all other areas of PanelBuilder where you type text for example in naming screens objects or tags Note To view the extended character sets use the Windows Character Map The Character Map is part of the standard install set for Microsoft Windows prior to Windows 95 For Windows 95 and Windows NT ensure the Character Map is installed Note You can edit extended characters as you would edit any text string To use the PanelView extended character set 1 With PanelBuilder running open the Character Map from the Windows Accessories group 2 In the Font field select any Panel View font The Panel View 8 by 20 font is preferable because it is closest to the actual pixel size of text on the screen When you select a font the characters available in that font are displayed Note The Character Map does not show all the extended characters For a list of characters see Appendix B The Extended Character Set 3 Select the character you want to use and note the ALT nu
267. e network type from DH to ControlNet 1 Choose Change Network Type from the Tools menu 2 In the Target Network field choose ControlNet 3 Choose OK The following message will appear Conliqure Communication Setup 1 Change to new Control Het device hype 4 Choose Yes to change your DH application to ControlNet Choose No if you do not wish to continue with the conversion Note If a DH node is defined as station 0 or station 64 through 77 inclusive it will be invalid for a ControlNet application The following message will appear prompting you to convert the station number Thare j ad least one noie which i curently incompatitle with Him new types Continus and convert inc mpaibha Padog te thet reis rab yg Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 5 32 Defining Communications E PLC Communications Communication Setup amp Nodes 11 Scan Classes l RIO Racks Block Transfer Files Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Select Yes or No If you select Yes any node with an invalid station number for the ControlNet network will be changed to have a station number of 2 If you select No the network conversion will be cancelled Note The Unsolicited_Mesgs node will automatically be removed when the application is converted to ControlNet For details on configuring an application for ControlNet networks see Defining Communications for a D
268. e tag database Shared and have both applications use it Or if you want to keep the tag databases Private export the source application s tags and import them into the destination application Copy Paste Copy with Controls Select All Duplicate Delete Clear All Make Label Set Object Defaults Configure Screen Object Convert to Wallpaper Unlock Wallpaper Import Export Graphic Renaming Screens Screen New Copy Rename Delete Del Ctrl Z Ctrl Y Ctrl X Ctrl C Ctrl D Del Creating Screens 8 5 To choose whether or not to copy controls gt Choose Copy with Controls in the Edit menu If the Copy with Controls menu item has a check mark beside it the option is selected If there is no check mark the option is deselected To copy a screen s contents into the screen of another application 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Open up both applications Open the screen you want to copy Select the objects you want to copy If you want to copy the entire screen contents choose Select All from the Edit menu or press CTRL A Choose Copy from the Edit menu or from the toolbar or press CTRL C Create a new application screen in the application you want to copy the screen to Click anywhere on the new screen window or within the screen Choose Paste from the Edit menu or from the toolbar or
269. e the information on the Remote I O Tags or Device Tags Worksheets when creating expressions for your application Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 7 2 Creating Expressions Types of Expressions How Expressions Work Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 gt You can use an expression to manipulate the value of any analog or digital tag that reads output from the PLC You cannot assign expressions to the following the ASCII Display object because it requires String tags the Transfer Inhibit Control the Bit triggered Alarm controls An expression can also perform calculations on the values of multiple read tags However expressions can perform calculations on analog and digital tags only Expressions cannot perform calculations on string or block tags If a control allows you to use an expression the Assign Expression button is available otherwise it is dimmed The use of expressions is always optional If you don t want to use expressions you can assign tags to the controls PanelBuilder also supports write expressions A write expression allows you to manipulate the value of a tag before it is written to the PLC PanelBuilder supports write expressions for these objects Numeric Entry Keypad Numeric Input Cursor Point Numeric Keypad Enable Button For these three objects only you can assign an optional write expression that performs calculations on the operator s input before sending it to a
270. e them into the message editors Or you can use the Import Message File command Both methods for importing messages are described in this section Note If you are importing messages into an existing message file they are inserted above the currently selected row in the Messages spreadsheet Because each application can contain a maximum of 2000 messages you will see the error message You have reached the maximum number of messages if the messages you are importing increase the total number of messages to more than 2000 Importing Messages Using the Clipboard You can import messages by copying fields rows or columns of text from a text editor The text entries are stored on the clipboard You can then paste them into the message editor To copy and paste a single column each column field must be on a separate line To copy and paste one or more rows each row must begin on a separate line Each field in a row must be separated from the previous one by a tab The following illustration shows an example of how the messages could appear ELTTTETTTEN IET E Dscumenb Feeder Pager HisTrrd Top Exit Jan Finisher Jan Paper Bia B Paper low Paper E Paper low Copier Pager Jum Copier Teer Loe Stapler i5 auk oF staples Skapler janmed 1 a 5 a zzixmrriririri EEZEZEEEER 22444244 ee oe a rZ TITIIITIZIXEI Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 1
271. e type I Input O Output S Status Element number For input and output files PLC 5 10 0 037 octal PLC 5 12 0 037 octal PLC 5 15 0 037 octal PLC 5 25 0 077 octal For status files 0 31 decimal Bit offset within word For input and output files 0 17 octal For status files 0 15 decimal Example O 64 17 PLC 5 Timers Counters and Control Files Fnnn eee MNE bb F File type C Counter T Timer R Control nnn File number 3 999 decimal MNE bb optional Timer counter and control file types use the default file number if the file number is absent The default numbers are 4 timer 5 counter and 6 control Element number 0 999 decimal Member mnemonic see mnemonic tables on Page 11 Bit number 0 15 decimal Only applies to analog word members Example T57 38 ACC Addressing Syntax 5 PLC 5 Enhanced I O and Status Files F eee bb F eee bb optional File type I Input O Output S Status Element number For input and output files PLC 5 11 0 037 octal PLC 5 20 0 037 octal PLC 5 30 0 077 octal PLC 5 40 0 177 octal PLC 5 60 0 277 octal PLC 5 80 0 277 octal For status files 0 127 decimal Bit offset within word For input and output files 0 17 octal For status files 0 15 decimal Example O 167 11 PLC 5 Enhanced Binary Integer BCD ASCII Float and String
272. e width 0 50 1 35 double width messages displayable at one time aximum number of limited by object size 3 Single line window 1 lines displayable per Multi line window 1 message Panel window 1 6 aximum number of 1 1 Single line window 1 Multi line window up to 20 depending on text size Panel window 1 Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 10 4 Creating Messages Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 gt Note If you use a message length that is above the range listed in the Message length earlier versions row the application will be compatible with PanelView Version 2 or later It will not be compatible with earlier versions The maximum message lengths described above are independent of the font and size of the message window If the message is too long to fit in the message window it will be truncated The character gt indicating there is more text in the message appears at the end of the displayed message if the message is truncated If the message is too long to fit on a single line and the window can display more than one line for the message the message will wrap to the next line after a break between words Or you can use the Newline code to specify where you want the line to break See Using Formatting Codes in Your Messages next Using Formatting Codes in Your Messages Formatting codes give the Panel View terminal instructions on how to display your message
273. e you choose determines the maximum length of the messages Ifyou choose Small or Double High the messages can be up to 70 characters e Ifyou choose Double Wide or Large the message can be up to 35 characters Blink Click the check box to choose Yes if the messages are to blink Leave it unchecked to choose No Underline Click the check box to choose Yes if the messages are to be underlined Leave it unchecked to choose No Foreground Color Choose the foreground color for the text in the Information Message Window Background Color Choose the background color for the Information Message Window Assign the Information Window Control and if appropriate the Acknowledge to PLC control These two controls are explained in more detail in the following table Working with the Information Message Window 14 5 This control Does this PLC Controlled Directs the terminal to display a message The Information Window programmable controller places a trigger value at this control s address and the terminal displays the message with the corresponding trigger value You must assign this control for the Information Message Window to function Acknowledge to PLC Notifies the PLC when the ACK button is pressed This enables the programmable controller to control the window display until the operator acknowledges it You must assign this control if you ve specified Operator Acknowledged as the window removal method
274. eads this value and displays it visually on the application screen Display objects are also called read objects They can use tags and expressions All display objects are non retentive Input objects transmit information to the programmable controller These objects usually control the application For example Increment and Decrement Value buttons could be configured to control the pressure in a storage tank If the operator presses the Increment Value button the new value is written to the button s tag at the programmable controller The programmable controller uses this value to increase the pressure accordingly Input objects are also called write objects Input objects generally use tags only All input objects are retentive Display and input objects receive information from and transmit information to the programmable controller For example a Momentary Push Button sends information to the PLC to control a machine process and the PLC sends information back to the push button to indicate the state the button should display An object that both displays information and provides input to the PLC is also called a read and write object It can use both tags and expressions RIO DH and ControlNet gt Creating Objects 9 3 Except for Momentary and Latched Push Buttons all display and input objects are retentive About Retentive Objects If an application is selected and run for the first time or if power is switched off
275. ects The Duplicate Command is a quick way to create identical objects Unlike the Cut and Copy commands the Duplicate command does not use the clipboard This command duplicates any tag names and expression definitions associated with the object Note There can be only one ASCII Input object and Cursor List object per screen so you can t duplicate either of these objects Note There can only be four Trends per screen so you cannot duplicate or paste the Trend more than three times To duplicate an object 1 Select the object 2 Choose Duplicate from the Edit menu or from the toolbar or press CTRL D The duplicated object appears slightly offset from the original object 3 Move the new object to another position on the screen Tip Duplicate also duplicates actions For example if you duplicate an object move it and then duplicate it again the Duplicate command will duplicate and move the object in a single step This is useful if you are creating a series of objects with an equal distance between them Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 9 38 Creating Objects Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Selectobject Duplicate object Move object Duplicate again Sizing Objects You can change the size of most objects by selecting and dragging them to the size you want The exceptions are text objects ASCII Input object Screen Select Keypad and the small and large Numeric Entry Keypads Note Input obje
276. ects Space vertically distance Centers are separated by an equal horizontal distance Select objects Space horizontally Flipping Objects Flipping a group of selected objects creates a mirror image of those objects You cannot flip single objects such as graphic images symbols buttons lists and text objects 1 Select the objects or object components 2 Choose a flip command from the Arrange menu This command Flips selected objects this way Flip Vertical Top to bottom upside down Flip Horizontal Left to right Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 9 46 Creating Objects Changing Object Appearance Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 The following illustration shows objects flipped vertically and horizontally m m m m m m m A DIC m a m m m D A m m m m m m Select group Flip vertical Flip horizontal Arranging Labels You can arrange labels such as multiple lines of text or graphic images within an object To space labels vertically or horizontally you must first position one object at each end of the area in which you want to arrange them To align or space multiple lines of text within an object 1 Position the two outermost text objects as desired 2 To select only the text elements press CTRL SHIFT while you draw a selection border 3 Choose the appropriate Align or Space
277. ed on the current screen Note Because the Tag Usage Viewer uses the Windows default printer setup use the Windows Print Manager to change the printer settings for example to set it to Landscape mode so that all the columns will be printed Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 6 26 Defining Tags ag Usan EU for Application TUT ORK 1 0 ee igital Pull rg Tiae PLE 1 JD d D7 DIDO D d D 7 Analie3 Tull 4 ZSETUP ZHZHTIEC 12 BO Inrzuxarnt Valm Ben Comesal Tag p 0 0 7 amp nalo Full 5 AETUPZCFRENTIEG 184 Deckexenr Vapor IDO 07 Tag DZD3 D g D 7 Bis Tull SETUP amp SHEETIEC 112 20 Interlcck PusbBtr Tag DICI D LE Bir Ligqicab Pull Scraenac 552 i Pushin Corral Tag p 53 BLE DigsEaL Pull PFereenas 352 Agen tery HAT Binh Indicates Tag DICO D L7 Bir Ligia Tull Zcraansaz 552 160 Hzzantarg Conrrzal Tag 6 17 Bir bigiralb Full Sepeenss UO XETURCFBEMTIWO 1552 160 Haw enrarg H l FushBre Indicarer JD L DL Tag PICO 3 0 1 L Analog Tull feces ZETUT amp ZBENTIECG 4D 175 Catil Liszt Selecter Eontral ji 1 Tag DIDI J d 5 Bim 5 Tull Scrssnac liar slegter
278. eens TUTORK 1 INITIAL SCREEN KODIAK Duplicator NAAM Ec If your computer has Super VGA resolution to return to normal view you can resize the screen or choose the button If your computer has VGA resolution choose Zoom In from the View menu to restore the screen to normal size Assigning the Application Startup Screen Creating Screens 8 15 The Application Startup screen is the first screen that appears when you start the application In an application file without screens the Application Startup screen is preset to the Alarm History screen screen 255 by default if the Alarm History screen is enabled The first screen you create in an application is automatically assigned as the Application Startup screen If you wish you can assign another screen as the Application Startup screen If you delete the Application Startup screen the screen with the next highest number will automatically be assigned as the Application Startup screen Important When the Panel View terminal is powered up the Application Startup screen is always displayed regardless of the security assigned to it To change the Application Startup screen 1 In the Application Window open the System folder and choose Terminal Setup or choose from the toolbar 2 In the General tab click on the Screen field 3 Choose the screen you want to assign from the drop down list that appears Publication 2711E 819
279. election is only required if you want to use that option If not it can be ignored The Acknowledge Control will be set and the acknowledged alarm trigger value will be sent to the PLC when Operator The operator presses the acknowledge button on the Multi line Alarm Message Window or on the Alarm History screen Operator and Remote The operator presses the acknowledge button on the Multi line Alarm Message Window or on the Alarm History screen and or when an alarm is acknowledged remotely by the PLC Note If you set the Acknowledge to PLC option to Operator and Remote the application will be compatible with PanelBuilder Version 2 or later It will not be compatible with earlier versions Control You must assign the Alarm Triggers before any alarms can be reported to the Panel View terminal The remaining Global Controls are optional Alarm Triggers Alarm Triggers are tags or expressions used by the Panel View terminal to monitor alarm conditions generated at the PLC Assignment of Alarm Trigger s is required for alarms to function Up to 50 different alarm tags or expressions can be assigned to monitor alarms from multiple sources The tag type or expression allowed depends on your selection for Alarm Trigger type as follows Invalid tag types will not be reported until validation If you selected this Expressions Max no of alarm tags You must use this tag type Valid Starting Alarm Trigger
280. ents for which tags or expressions are assigned will be updated For example if only the Year control is assigned then the programmable controller will only be asked to update the year not the month day of the month or time The way these controls display the date and time on the Panel View terminal depends on the terminal s Configure Mode settings for the date and time display For information about configuring the Panel View terminal to display the date and time see Setting Time and Date in Chapter 5 Configuring PanelView Terminals in the PanelView 1000e 1200e and 1400e Operator Terminals User Manual If an error is detected in the data received from any of the assigned controls while the application is running the data is discarded and a minor fault message is displayed Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 13 6 Configuring PLC I O Control Options Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Notify PLC Options Options that are passed from the terminal to the programmable controller include these controls Screen Number to PLC Screen Print Active to PLC Date amp Time to PLC Screen Number to PLC Assign the Screen Number to PLC control to transfer the current screen number from the terminal to the programmable controller This option is useful for multiplexing display data from programmable controller output addresses based on screen number Important Ensure your tag address is large enough to acco
281. er see the Microsoft Windows User s Guide As you create your application periodically validate it to ensure there are no problems The Validate option searches for application errors in Terminal Setup Alarms PLC I O Control Information Message Window the message editors screens tags and expressions The Validate Option locates errors such as overlapped input screen objects offscreen objects conflicting tag initial values invalid messages invalid expression syntax and version control violations Validate Change Network Type Application Size Replace Tag Name Tag Usage Viewer Transfer Utility Determining the Application Size Working with Applications 3 11 To validate your application 1 Choose Validate from the Tools menu or press F9 A progress bar is displayed then the Validation Results window appears It lists and describes the errors If there are no errors a check mark appears 4 Validation Results for Application Untitled1 OL x Total number of errors 0 Update Communication Setup no errors found Tag Usage Viewer Terminal Setup errors found Alarms no errors found z PLC VO Control no errors found Print Info Msg Window no errors found Alarm Messages no errors found Print Setup Information Messages no errors found Local Messages no errors found Help Screens no errors found Tags no errors found 2 If there are
282. er of times per second the press release action is repeated Configuring Terminal Setup Options 12 9 For some objects you configure the auto repeat delay and rate when you define the button These are objects that directly write to a tag without any user confirmation for example the Increment Decrement Value Button and the Control List Selector without Enter Key Configuring auto repeat allows more precise control for each object to prevent overshooting target values When you set the Auto Repeat values in the Timing Parameters tab of the Configure Terminal Setup dialog box you set the values for the cursor movement buttons in the following objects Screen List Selector Control List Selector with Enter Key Cursor Point in a keypad application for navigating between cursor points Scrolling List s Cursor List To change the Auto Repeat Start Delay Inthe Auto Repeat Start Delay drop down list select the time you want The default rate for auto repeat is 0 which means no repeats The maximum repeat rate you can assign is 20 repeats per second To change the cursor Auto Repeat Rate p In the Auto Repeat Rate drop down list select the cursor auto repeat rate you want Object Setup The Object Setup tab allows you to configure the default behavior of objects in the application There is currently only one object configuration option Retain Cursor On Cancel This option applies to all Numeric Input
283. er the object reference number object type and screen number as well as the tag definition Use a new Device Tags worksheet for each screen Record the addresses for your windows and PLC controlled options on a different worksheet Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 2 36 Planning Applications The Communications Worksheet Record node and scan class information on the Communications worksheet Communications Worksheet Application File Name PanelView Terminal Network Address Baud Rate 57 6K 10 000 Ft Node Definitions The Unsolicited Messages Node is the Panel View terminal By default the terminal s Station Address is the DH station number configured in the current application The station address can be changed in the Panel View terminal s Terminal Network Setup screen This node is used in DH applications only Note For more node definitions use additional copies of this worksheet Scan Class Definitions Note The default foreground and background rates are 0 000 seconds and 5 000 seconds respectively Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Node PLC Type Station Address Timeout sec Unsolicited_Msgs PLC 2 0 3 000 DH DH ControlNet Planning Applications 2 37 Defining Nodes A node is a programmable controller that your application will be communicating with on a network For each node you must identify the type of programmable controlle
284. eration Type If both are Byte Integer Long Variant or any Bit wise combination of these If one or both are Boolean or Single Boolean 1 2 True 0 False In either case the result is considered reliable if both operands are reliable Creating Expressions 7 17 This table describes the types of logical operations you can use expressions to perform Operators are listed in order of precedence Operator Data of Oper Description Syntax If Operandi Is And Operand2 Then Result ands Is Is Not Byte Integer Long Performs a bit wise Not 0 1 negation the operand 1 2 Boolean or Single Performs a logical negation True False on the operand False True And Byte Integer Long Performs a bit wise And Oper 0 0 0 conjunction on the oper and2 0 1 0 ands 1 0 0 1 1 1 Boolean or Single Performs a logical conjunc True True True tion on the operands True False False False True False False False False Or Byte Integer Long Performs a bit wise Operand1 Or Oper 0 0 0 disjunction on the oper and2 0 1 1 ands 1 0 1 1 1 1 Boolean or Single Performs a logical True True True disjunction on the True False True operands False True True False False False Xor Byte Integer Long Performs a bit wise 1 Oper 0 0 0 exclusion on the operands 2 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 Boolean or Single Performs a logical exclu True True False sion on the operands Tru
285. erminal 18 sending a previous acknowledge to the PLC or waiting for the Alarm Control Delay time or waiting for the Ack Control Hold Time Configuring Alarms 11 19 Remote Acknowledge With Remote Acknowledge the PLC is used to acknowledge the alarm rather than the operator acknowledging it from the terminal This is useful for background alarming when there is no acknowledge button available when using the Single line Alarm Message Window or Alarm Message Panel or when the operator is acknowledging the alarm from a remote location The Remote Acknowledge control is optional However in order to remotely acknowledge an alarm a digital or analog tag or expression must be assigned to this control Whenever the value of this tag or expression matches an alarm trigger value the alarm with that trigger value is acknowledged All unacknowledged instances of the same alarm are acknowledged at the same time with the same time stamp If the Alarm Acknowledge to PLC function is enabled the Acknowledge to PLC tag is assigned and the Alarm Acknowledge to PLC option is set to Operator and Remote it will be activated when a remote acknowledge occurs even if the operator or the PLC has already acknowledged the alarm Refer to the sections Alarm Acknowledge to PLC and Acknowledge to PLC and Acknowledge Control earlier in this chapter for more details Remote Acknowledge allows only one alarm to be acknowledged at
286. ers and opening folders will cause a refresh Duplicate Defining Tags 6 11 Duplicating a Tag Select the tag you want to duplicate Choose Duplicate on the Edit menu or select the Duplicate button on the toolbar A new row is inserted below the highlighted row The new row contains all the same information except the tag name In the Tag Name field type the name for the new tag Choose Accept to save the new row or Discard to cancel it Note As with saves the row position of the new tag is only temporary Even if a tag is not displayed it is still duplicated When the spreadsheet view is refreshed if the duplicate tag still matches the query set it will be displayed in alphanumeric order relative to other tags in the database Scrolling the spreadsheet closing folders and opening folders will cause a refresh Editing a Tag 1 Select the tag you want to edit The details of the tag appear in the form area Edit any details Choose Accept to save the editing changes or Discard to cancel the changes Renaming a Tag For information on renaming a tag see Renaming a Tag later in this chapter Deleting a Tag 1 Select the tag you want to delete 2 Choose Delete on the Edit menu or choose the Delete button on the toolbar Note If you delete a tag that is assigned to an object you will get a validation error Use the Tag Usage Viewer to see which tags have been assigned to objects See Usin
287. erves as a placeholder for the value the operator enters The user entry character will be replaced by a numeric value and is treated as a Long or Floating Point constant You cannot use the user entry character in any other expressions See Assigning Write Expressions later in this chapter for more information Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Local Variables Local variables allow you to simplify your expression text and make it more readable For example if you are repeatedly referencing a tag with a long name such as Tag_For_Temperature_Probe you can create a local variable called analog input and assign the tag to it You can also use a local variable when you want to use a calculated value multiple times in an expression See Example 5 at the end of this chapter You can use up to 30 local variables in each expression You must declare a local variable in the expression before you use it The declaration includes the name of the variable and optionally the data type Use this syntax to declare local variables Dim varnamel As datatypel varname2 As datatype2 Alternatively you can declare each variable separately on its own line with its own Dim statement For example DIM temperature AS SINGLE input AS INTEGER probe AS LONG Variable names are a maximum of 40 characters long They must begin with a letter from A to Z and can contain letters numbers and the underscore character _ Va
288. es e Ifyou do convert the tags to DH format all the tags in the database that are used by your application will be converted to Device tags Analog Tags using the binary data type will be switched to unsigned integer because binary is not supported for DH applications Note If your application s Target Firmware version is Version 1 or Version 1 03 block tags used in the application are reported as errors when you validate the application Block tags are supported in DH and ControlNet applications that use Target Firmware Version 2 or later gt Note If you convert shared tags this may make them invalid for the other applications that are using them Also unused tags are not converted and remain as Remote I O tags gt Note If you convert an application from Remote I O to DH or ControlNet or vice versa the tag addresses may be invalid for the network to which you are converting Change the tag addresses to match the network type Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Defining Communications 5 27 Change Network Type x Current Network Remote 1 Target Network DH Cancel IX Convert Tags Node Scan Class 4 Specify a node name scan class You can specify a node name and scan class when you do the conversion or you can leave them blank If you enter a node name and scan class they will be used in all the tags that are converted In addition the node and scan class will b
289. es in pre Version 2 applications remain unchanged Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 10 6 Creating Messages ES Messages amp Alarm Messages i Infarmation Messages E Local Messages Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Note When a pre Version 2 application is uploaded and the user changes the target firmware version to Version 2 or later the messages will not be automatically converted or updated from Wn to Creating New Message You can create messages in both the form area and the spreadsheet To create a message in the spreadsheet 1 Open the message editor by choosing the appropriate editor in the Messages folder or tool from the toolbar for alarm messages choose for information messages choose for local messages choose The message spreadsheet appears by default The following illustration shows the Information Messages spreadsheet Note For details on using the spreadsheet form style editor see Chapter 4 Working with Editors Inderal en TUTOAK Hetisge esi Be ter is running 2 Position the mouse pointer in the first available Trigger Value field and click or use the down arrow to move to the field 3 Type a trigger value and press ENTER Note The trigger value cannot be 0 It must be unique for that editor 4 Move to the Message field Use TAB to move to the field press the right arrow or m
290. ess For example if the address is N7 0 an integer file the data type would be integer Unsigned Integer An unsigned integer occupies one 16 bit word stored in binary format The range of raw data values is from 0 to 65535 Integer A signed integer occupies one 16 bit word stored in two s complement format The range of raw data values is from 32 768 to 32 767 Long Integer A long integer occupies two 16 bit words stored in two s complement format The range of raw data values is from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 Floating Point Single precision 32 bit floating point The range of data values is 3 402823E 38 to 1 175494 37 0 and 1 175494E 37 to 3 402823E 38 Byte The byte data type occupies 8 bits of unsigned data The range of raw data values is from 0 to 255 Binary Youcan use this data type for Remote I O applications only Bit Position This data type is a contiguous bit string The position of the least significant bit in the bit string determines the value of the tag For value ranges from 0 to 16 use a 16 bit address For value ranges from 0 to 32 use a 32 bit address Range of Values Planning Applications 2 49 BCD Binary Coded Decimal If you assign one of the BCD data types the object s PLC control word will be a contiguous bit string of one of these numbers of bits This number of BCD digits Requires this many
291. essages provide the operator with prompts instructions warnings and information on current status and about what is happening in the process Kinds of Messages You can create messages in each of the Messages editors There are three kinds of messages Alarm messages alert the operator to problems in the process Each alarm message can be equipped with special notification options These can sound an audio alarm print the alarm message display the message in the Alarm Window on the terminal s screen send the alarm message to a PLC and energize an alarm relay You can create a maximum of 2000 alarm messages Alarm messages appear in the single line multi line and panel Alarm Windows on the PanelView terminal s screen and in the Alarm History and Alarm Status screens Information messages inform the operator about the status of the operation providing prompts instructions or warnings You can create a maximum of 2000 information messages Information messages appear in the Information Message Window on the PanelView terminal Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 10 2 Creating Messages Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Local messages inform the operator about the status of an operation or provide prompts or instructions You can create a maximum of 2000 local messages Local messages appear in the Local Message Display object in application screens The list of local messages is used by all the Local Message Disp
292. ets to guide you through planning your screens and identifying communications with the PLC The remainder of this chapter includes instructions on using the worksheets as you plan There are eleven sample worksheets in Appendix A of this manual Make photocopies of the worksheets and use them as directed Getting to know the process you ll be automating is the most important planning step Try to find out as much as possible about the existing process and or the one you plan to design To get information about the process talk to operators process engineers and other experts who will be running the system Ask questions such as What specific tasks does the process need to perform What controls do they need Where should the controls go What values and types of values are they working with Should access to certain controls be restricted What needs to be alarmed Next find out which programmable controllers the process will be using and how this will affect the application Tip A questionnaire is a valuable tool to get this kind of information quickly When you are finished researching the process make a comprehensive list of its individual operations and tasks The second step in planning an application is designing the screens and objects This section includes the following information how to plan application screen designs how to plan for consistency across the application how to use wo
293. evious line began To revert to the margin press the Backspace key until the cursor is at the left hand margin or to move to a previous level of indent press the Backspace key until the cursor is at the position of the previous level of indent All subsequent lines will be indented at this position until you next change the indent position You can copy cut and paste text in expressions First highlight the text you want to copy or cut or position the cursor at the position you want to paste text then To do this Press this Copy Ctrl C Cut Ctrl X Paste Ctrl V This also works for copying cutting and pasting text between the Expression Editor and other Windows applications Checking Syntax You can check the syntax of an expression at any time by choosing Check Syntax If there are no errors in the syntax of the expression the message No syntax errors found in expression is displayed in the Results message box If there are syntax errors the message A total of x syntax errors were found in the expression is displayed where x is the number of errors found The errors together with the line number on which they were found are displayed beneath the first message in the Results message box To locate and correct a syntax error double click the message of the error you want to correct or select the error message and choose Go To Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 7 24 Creating Expressions
294. ew DIES 2 amp Bit Digital Tull Memzsrcarg HA The field containing the first occurrence of the specified text is highlighted In the example above the first occurrence of the specified text Cntl List Selector is highlighted Press the Search button again to continue the search When the search has reached the bottom of the list it will wrap to the top and begin again You can search a filtered list If one or more filters are in place the most recent filter is named under the Filter In Column button For information on customizing the display in the viewer see Changing Column Width and Row Height in Chapter 4 Working with Editors gt Note The Tag Usage Viewer retains the new settings when you change column widths The next time you open the Tag Usage Viewer columns you shrank to hide will appear as thin strips that you can resize to hide or reveal Rows are restored when you reopen the viewer Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 6 30 Defining Tags Renaming a Tag Private and Shared Tag Databases Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Use the following procedure to rename specified instances or all instances of a tag 1 From the Application Window choose Replace Tag Name on the Tools menu 2 Type the tag name you want to change or choose to select a tag name from the Tag Browser Or click the down arrow to choose a tag
295. ew terminal and network types are listed You must assign a name when you save the application Working with Applications 3 3 at PanelBuilder 1400e File Screen Database Tools Window Help eel as ese eels Application Untitled1 Application Title 1200e Keypad Remote I O Private Tags Terminal Network and Tag Type PLC Communications System Messages Screens Application Window Opening Applications New Application Ctrl N Open Application Ctrl 0 Download Upload Exit Alt F4 You can open an application created in PanelBuilder for DOS PanelBuilder 1200 or PanelBuilder 1400e For information on converting a PanelBuilder for DOS or PanelBuilder 1200 application see the following section To open an existing application 1 Choose Open Application from the File menu or from the toolbar or press CTRL O The Open dialog box appears It lists the available applications in the specified drive and directory If no applications appear you may need to change the drive or directory or select a different file type in the List Files of Type drop down list Open HEI File name Folders Fave c ab pb1400e E c E DEMO E TUTORIAL Listfiles of type Drives PanelBuilder pvc c Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 3 4 Working with Applications Converting Applications Created in PanelBuilder 1200 or PanelBuilder for
296. eypad 1400e Touch Screen Network Type Remote I O DH ControlNet Modbus Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 3 2 Working with Applications Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Select the type of terminal you will be using to create this application Choose one of the following terminal types PanelView 1000e Keypad PanelView 1000e Touch Screen PanelView 1200e Keypad PanelView 1200e Touch Screen PanelView 1400e Keypad PanelView 1400e Touch Screen Important You can t convert a keypad application to a touch screen application or vice versa However you can switch between 1000e 1200e and 1400e application types See Changing the Application Type in Chapter 12 Configuring Terminal Setup Options Select the network you will be using to create this application Choose one of e Remote I O e DH ControlNet Note For information about creating a Modbus Application see the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Modbus User Manual Catalog Number 2711E UMOD Note You can convert an application from one communication network type to another If you do change network types you may lose node scan class rack or block transfer definitions See Changing the Network Type in Chapter 5 Defining Communications for more information Choose OK The Application Window opens inside the PanelBuilder window Note that the application is still untitled and the PanelVi
297. form to the address syntax for the selected device The SLC address syntax differs from that of the PLC devices When the device is switched from a PLC to SLC device or vice versa the application tag addresses will be updated automatically when the application is validated Tip Validate your application right after a SLC to PLC or PLC to SLC device type change to update all your tag addresses so your reports and the Tag Usage Viewer will display the correct information Assigning Racks You can define the Panel View terminal to function as one or more partial or full racks on the programmable controller You can also configure the terminal to monitor the communication between the programmable controllers and other Remote I O adaptors You can have up to 64 rack assignments Each will give you both input and output address space To assign racks you must define the following for each rack assignment e Rack Number Any rack supported by your programmable controller can be used in a rack assignment You can make several rack assignments with the same rack number until you have assigned all module groups for that rack Access Access can be Full or Listen Only Specify Full access for racks whose I O space is in the terminal The input section of a Full access rack can be written to by the terminal Listen Only access means that the PanelView terminal can read from the rack s I O space but can t write to it Listen Only is usefu
298. full magnification you can reduce the view twice Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Ctrl Z Ctrlt Y Cut Ctrl X Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl Y Copy with Controls Select All Ctrl Duplicate Ctrl D Delete Del Clear All Make Label Set Object Defaults Configure Screen Object Convert to Wallpaper Unlock Wallpaper Graphic Creating Objects 9 19 Using the Undo and Redo Commands Use the Undo and Redo commands any time you draw or edit objects and decide you want to reverse your actions When you move the pointer over the Undo or Redo icons the status bar displays the undo or redo action that will be performed Important You can undo all the operations performed in a screen since you opened the screen or since you last saved the application This includes configuring objects and assigning tags and expressions One Undo resets all work done in a single session of configuring an object in the Configure dialog box but does not undo a tag creation or edit To undo an operation do one of the following choose Undo from the Edit menu choose from the toolbar press CTRL Z When you undo an operation and then change your mind you can reverse your action using the Redo command You can use the Redo command as many times as you used the Undo command To redo an operation do one of the following choose Redo from the Edit menu choose from the
299. g point se lected These tags can represent complex states such as temperature or the position of rotary controls Digital 00 1 These tags can represent devices that can only be on 1 or off 0 such as push buttons String ASCII string series of characters or whole words maximum of 82 characters These tags are used only when defining ASCII Input and ASCII Display objects and for sending alarm messages to the PLC Block A contiguous bit stream of up to 1024 bits A block tag is used strictly for defining the Alarm Triggers tag and Acknowledge to PLC tag when multi ple simultaneous alarms need to be monitored Use Block Tags when using bit triggered alarms Note that PanelBuilder Version 2 supports Device block tags as well as Remote 1 0 block tags Read and Write Tags At runtime PanelBuilder objects and control functions can read from or write to PLC addresses assigned to any of the tag types The terms read tag and write tag will sometimes be used A read tag is a tag with a PLC address that only needs to be read by PanelBuilder objects and functions A write tag is a tag with a PLC address that can be written to by PanelBuilder objects and functions For a Remote I O application a read tag can use any Full or Listen Only I O address A write tag must use a discrete Full Access address or the block transfer file address of a file with a control byte defined on a Full Access input module Note You can use
300. g the Tag Usage Viewer later in this chapter for more information Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 6 12 Defining Tags Working in Multiple As you work in the Tag Database editor you can open other editors to Editors work in multiple editors simultaneously For example as you are creating tags for a DH or ControlNet application you can add or edit a node in the Node editor To open another editor 1 Click eJ or choose Application Window from the View menu The PanelBuilder window appears a PanelBuilder 1400e Oo x File Screen Database Tools Window Help 19 Application TUTORK ojx 1200e Keypad Remote Private Tags PLC Communications amp System 3 Terminal Setup Tag Database Alarms T PLC 1 0 Control 8 Information Message Window Messages Screens 2 Click the name of the editor you want to open in the Application window or choose its icon from the toolbar 3 Press ALT TAB to move between the open editors Note If you make a change in the Scan Class editor while the Tag Database editor is open when you return to the Tag Database editor the list of scan classes is automatically updated Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Configuring Tag Type Defining Tags 6 13 This section describes how to fill in the fields for analog digital string and block tag types Use the information you entered on the Device Tags and Remote I O Tags Worksheets gt Note The Log
301. ge Cutting and pasting are described in the next section 3 To keep the text or graphic image paste it outside of the object s boundaries This operation converts the text or graphic image back to a separate background screen object Once you ve drawn an object you can select the object and edit it The kinds of changes you can make depend on the type of object You can cut copy and paste all objects delete all objects duplicate all objects move all objects resize certain objects Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 9 36 Creating Objects Cutting Copying and Pasting You can cut or copy and paste objects between screens and applications gt Note You cannot copy keypad specific objects to touch screen applications or vice versa Neither can you copy button objects or objects containing buttons between touch and keypad applications To cut or copy and paste objects 1 In the screen select the objects you want to cut or copy 2 Choose Cut or Copy from the Edit menu choose or from the toolbar or press CTRL X or CTRL C This places the contents in the clipboard replacing the clipboard s previous contents 3 Open the screen you want to copy the objects into and click in the screen area 4 Choose Paste from the Edit menu choose from the toolbar or press CTRL V The objects are pasted into the new screen Copying Objects with Controls Expressions and tags control
302. ge return and line feed PanelBuilder strips out the extra backslash when creating the Version 2 or later pvd file so the characters in your message will appear as n on the Panel View terminal The following examples illustrate how messages containing the n character sequence appear in PanelBuilder and Panel View Example 1 Using the Newline Code in Version 2 and Later Applications When you do this The message appears like this Type the code in PanelBuilder The conveyor has stopped nClear feeder and Version 2 or later notify supervisor Display the message on the The conveyor has stopped PanelView terminal Version 2 or Clear feeder and notify supervisor later Upload the application from The conveyor has stopped nClear feeder and PanelView into PanelBuilder Version Wnotify supervisor 2 or later Example 2 Using n in Pre Version 2 Applications When you do this The message appears like this Type the backslash in PanelBuilder REL Clear feeder notify supervisor wait for signal Display the message on the Paper jam Clear feeder notify supervisor wait for PanelView terminal signal Upload the application from Paper jam Clear feeder notify supervisor wait for PanelView into PanelBuilder signal pre Version 2 or PanelBuilder Version 3 Upload the application from Paper jam Clear feeder notify supervisor wait for PanelView into PanelBuilder Version signal 2 02 Note Messag
303. ge the size of several text objects at once select them all and apply the new size Changing Touch Margin Width or Height Touch Screen Only In a touch screen application you can change the touch margin width or height for buttons Using a large touch margin prevents users from accidentally pressing an adjacent button The margin width or height increases the size of a button so the button overlaps adjacent touch cells When the application is running only the middle area of the button is touch sensitive the touch cells covered by the margin are not touch sensitive Important Do not allow the button margin to overlap other buttons or button margins or to be positioned off the screen An application cannot be downloaded if any buttons overlap or are off the screen Creating Objects 9 51 To specify the size of the button margin 1 2 Button margin Active button area Select the button Choose Button Margins from the Format menu The Button Margins dialog box opens Button Margins x Horizontal Margin E Vertical Margin p a Cancel Help Specify horizontal and vertical margins for the button The numbers you specify determine the number of pixels the margins will occupy The button will change to the specified size Although the button appears larger on the screen only the original area is touch sensitive When you select and move or size the button a dotted rectangle appears around the act
304. gning 2 34 block transfer control byte 5 13 ialog box editors about 4 1 navigating 4 1 ialog boxes about 1 1 selection conventions P 8 igital tags 6 2 configuring 6 16 isabling nodes 5 23 iscrete 1 0 addresses 2 16 J Oo J J Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Index Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 i iscrete 1 0 Usage Worksheet 1 using 2 28 isplay active alarms mode 11 42 isplay all alarms mode 11 43 isplay past alarms mode 11 43 isplaying alarms 11 3 Downloading applications 2 2 15 1 version control and E 3 Drawing arcs 9 33 graphic images 9 29 lines 9 33 objects 9 20 panels 9 33 wedges 9 33 Duplicating folders 6 9 objects 9 37 rows in spreadsheets 4 11 tags 6 11 DXF Image 9 21 Dynamic objects 9 2 read 9 2 write 9 2 D D D D Editing messages 10 3 objects 9 35 selections in spreadsheets 4 12 tags 6 11 text 9 25 Editors about 1 1 alarms 11 5 Communication Setup 5 2 5 15 ControlNet Nodes 5 15 5 21 ControlNet Scan Classes 5 15 DH Nodes 5 15 5 21 DH Scan Classes 5 15 dialog box 4 1 form spreadsheet 4 3 RIO Block Transfer Files 5 2 5 11 RIO Racks 5 2 5 8 Scan Classes 5 24 5 25 Tag Database 6 5 types 4 1 working in multiple 6 12 Ellipse 9 5 9 21 Ellipses 9 12 Enabling nodes 5 23 Enhancing PanelView terminals Series F andG 1 2 Enter key parameters 12 8 control delay 12 8 handshake time 12
305. groups 2 14 5 10 deleting from a rack 5 14 Modules KA 2 40 RM 2 40 Momentary normally closed push button 9 10 9 21 open push button 9 10 9 21 Mouse conventions P 7 Moving objects 9 39 Multi component objects 9 51 Multi line alarm message window 11 31 choosing 11 36 using buttons 11 32 Multistate indicator 9 5 9 9 9 21 Multistate objects 9 55 Multistate push button 9 5 9 10 9 21 N Naming tags 6 4 Nesting folders 6 4 6 8 Network download controls transfer inhibit control 5 20 transfer request control 5 20 transfer status control 5 20 Network file transfers ControlNet PanelView terminal address 5 18 Index 9 setting up 5 18 DH PanelView terminal address 5 18 setting up 5 18 Remote 1 0 PLC station address 5 4 5 5 setting up 5 4 Network transfer controls defining 5 20 Transfer inhibit 5 7 Transfer request 5 7 Transfer status 5 7 Network type changing 5 25 5 26 5 30 from ControlNet to DH 5 34 5 35 from ControlNet to Remote 1 0 5 33 5 35 from DH to ControlNet 5 31 5 35 from Remote 1 0 to ControlNet 5 28 5 35 Node name valid characters 5 22 Nodes about 5 21 configuring 5 22 defining 2 34 2 35 2 37 2 50 enabled 5 23 local station addressing 2 38 name 2 37 PLC type 5 22 remote station addressing 2 38 station address 5 22 timeout 5 23 Non retentive objects 9 3 Normally closed momentary push button Normally open m
306. gth must be a multiple of the size of the programmable controller data element you re addressing Important For device tags odd lengths are permitted in the string section only For Remote I O tags string lengths must be a multiple of 2 Initial Value Enter an initial value for the tag When a tag is used with a PanelBuilder input object or function this initial value is written to the programmable controller when the application first executes Note There can be no more than 720 string tags in an application 5 To fill in the fields for data source see Specifying a Data Source later in this chapter Configuring a Block Tag Block tags can be defined in a Remote I O application or in a DH or ControlNet application If you use block tags in a DH or ControlNet application the application will be compatible with PanelView Version 2 or later It will not be compatible with earlier versions Important Block tags are used only for the Alarm Control and the Alarm Ack Value control when multiple simultaneous alarms need to be monitored For more information see Chapter 11 Configuring Alarms 1 If the tag is part of a folder select the folder in the folder hierarchy The folder name appears in the Name field and is the first part of the tag name 2 Type a tag name If the tag is part of a folder type the name after the backslash V 3 For Type select Block RIO DH and ControlNet Defining Tags 6 19
307. h for example 1 To 5 Note Once PanelView has finished evaluating the construct the terminal evaluates the statements following the EndIf or EndSelect keyword if any Creating Expressions 7 13 Example 2 Using If Then Else Constructs in Expressions The analog input temperature probe from the previous example does not produce linear results The probe has three linear sections each with a different slope Analog Input Temperature in C 0 100 1000 200 4000 400 4095 500 Use the If Then Else construct to create a new expression to convert the analog input temperature reading to Celsius This example also uses variables and comments described later in this chapter This expression converts the analog input temperature probe value to degrees Celsius The temperature probe produces the following output Analog Celsius 0 100 0 i 1000 200 0 d 4000 400 0 4095 500 0 DIM analog_input AS INTEGER analog input is the variable name for the analog input from the probe DIM temperature AS SINGLE Temperature is the variable name for the temperature in degrees Celsius The Single data type yields a floating point decimal result analog input Tag For Temperature Probe The analog input variable is assigned to the tag that reads the analog input conditional expression wraps to the next line Note the use of the line contin
308. h addresses in the 512 word data table When the application runs new values written to the tag are stored in the terminal s data table where they can be read by other programmable controllers In addition the programmable controller can write values to the terminal s data table and PanelView will scan the tag addresses to read the new values Tags defined on the Unsolicited Message node must use standard PLC 2 addressing format See Appendix C Addressing Syntax for addressing format information Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 5 24 Defining Communications Configuring Scan Classes E gt PLC Communications Communication Setup eee Nodes L RIO Racks RIO Block Transfer Files E Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Any tag that has Device as its data source must be assigned to a scan class At runtime the PanelView terminal periodically updates its tag information by scanning the programmable controller addresses You determine how often a tag value is updated by assigning the tag to a scan class that you have configured in the Scan Classes editor Make sure that tags with rapidly changing PLC values are assigned to a fast scan rate while those that don t change often are scanned less frequently This helps optimize traffic flow on the DH or ControlNet network You should already have determined the rates for the scan classes when you completed the Communications Worksheet If not see Chapter
309. he Objects menu choose from the toolbox press ESC click the right mouse button Selection Handles When you select an object handles appear around the edge of the object to show it is selected m B AN Object handles When you select an object that is inside of or grouped with another object such as a grouped object or multi component object hollow handles appear around the edge of the object to show it is selected HH p Objecthandles m Selection Methods To select this Do this An object Click the object or Use the arrow keys to move the selection arrow to the object and press SPACEBAR Several objects Click the first object sHirt click additional objects or Use the arrow keys to move to the object and press SHIFT4SPACEBAR All objects in an area Drag diagonally to draw a selection box around the objects When the objects are surrounded by the box release the mouse button or Use the arrow keys to move to an object then press CTRL arrow keys to draw a selection box All objects on the screen Choose Select All from the Edit menu or Press CTRL A Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 9 16 Creating Objects Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 To select this Do this An object within an object for example an object component or a grouped object Click the whole object and then click the component or object Hollow handles appear on the secon
310. he application you want to edit 2 Open the System folder and choose Tag Database or choose from the toolbar Using the Editor The Tag Database editor has the following parts form query box folder hierarchy and spreadsheet Each part is described on the following pages PanelBuilder allows both full and incomplete tag information to be saved If all tag fields are filled in only completely valid tag records are accepted Otherwise error messages flag the fields in error If any of the data fields are not filled in clicking the Accept button will save the incomplete tag record without validating it This lets you define a tag first and fill in nodes racks scan classes and addresses later Tag Database KIACEDHP 155 e pee Do compton Se Ey COM Lait 1 Un 1 i Hust hw wales 2 Onin Soarce i Type Deio O D C dO F Leg Dota Bode MODE PLC iL rmn Clas 5 a r Aden Search For Data Source Address Far Help press F1 7 1 a Aire Cir Digit il MODE 70 PLCS Gant Sean z Arm cnt Anang Duce NODE fa PLGA Gor Scan 3 jan Analog Device KODE PLCS Cond Scar 4 imm Anang Device NODE PLS Gant Seam 5 ami Analog Device NODE PLCh Scan Sirim Device MODE 7 Cond Scar a Spreadsheet V
311. he value depends on which data type depends on which data is evaluated as the value is evaluated as type the value is evaluated as Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Expression Maximums The number of components in each expression must not exceed these maximums Component Maximum Tags 50 Local variables 30 Comments 100 There are no limits on the other types of components However the size of an expression s text cannot exceed 2048 characters The size of the compiled expression in the pvd file cannot exceed 1 Kb The Percent Full indicator in the Expression editor alerts you to when you are approaching the size limit for an expression Creating Expressions 7 9 Arithmetic Operations This table describes the types of arithmetic operations you can use expressions to perform Operators are listed in order of precedence and exceptions are noted below Operator Symbol Syntax Description of Result Data Type of Result Negation Operand If the operand is data type Single the result is Single Otherwise the result is Long ultiplication Operand1 Operand2 If either operand is data type Single the result is Single If neither operand is Single the result is Long Division Operand1 2 Floating point contains Single decimal places nteger division Operand1 Operand2 Integer no decimal places Long odulo Mod Mod Operand2 Remainder of an i
312. hod you choose the process of configuring the communication parameters and upload or download options is the same To transfer an application from within PanelBuilder PanelBuilder transfers applications using the Transfer Utility However for your convenience you can configure and initiate the upload or download without leaving PanelBuilder 1 Prepare the Panel View terminal to receive the upload or download For details see Chapter 3 Uploading 1000e 1200e 1400e Application Files and Alarm History and Chapter 4 Downloading 1000e 1200e 1400e Application Files in the PanelView 1200 1400e Transfer Utility User Manual Publication Number 2711E 6 8 Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 15 2 Transferring Applications 2 Choose Download from the File menu or from the toolbar Download Application x C WINDOWS TEMPA TUTORK P YD Memory Partition 2 or choose Upload from the File menu from the toolbar Upload Application Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 Transferring Applications 15 3 3 For information about configuring the upload or download once the Upload Application or Download Application dialog box appears see Chapter 3 Uploading 1000 1200 1400 Application Files and Alarm History Chapter 4 Downloading 1000e 1200e 1400e Application Files and Chapter 5 Configuring Communications Settings for 1000 1200 1400 Application Transfers in the PanelView
313. holding the mouse button down and drag the mouse through the row numbers until all the desired rows are highlighted Release the mouse button The rows are highlighted indicating that they are selected To select a single column Click the column header at the top of the spreadsheet The column is highlighted indicating that it is selected To select more than one column 1 2 Click the column header of the first column you want to select Continue holding the mouse button down and drag the mouse through the column headers until all the desired columns are highlighted Release the mouse button The columns are highlighted indicating that they are selected To select the entire spreadsheet Choose Select All from the Edit menu or click on the empty field in the top left corner of the spreadsheet above the column numbers and to the left of the column headings Working with Editors 4 9 Cutting or Copying and Pasting Selections Messages Only You can cut or copy and paste any entry in the spreadsheet Note You cannot cut copy or paste entries in the Node Rack and Block editors To cut or copy and paste cells rows or columns 1 In the spreadsheet select the area that you want to copy 2 Choose Cut or Copy from the Edit menu or or from the toolbar This places the contents in the clipboard replacing the clipboard s previous contents 3 Select the area into which you want t
314. hoose OK Creating Drawing Objects Creating Objects 9 33 The following table shows the tools you use to draw shapes to illustrate your screens To create perfect circles or squares hold down SHIFT while dragging the ellipse or rectangle tool s pointer The table also illustrates the elements you can format for each drawing object Use this tool To draw Hold down sHiFT to draw Line Foreground Background Fill Border iine Tool Straight lines in any Lines that are horizontal ee direction vertical or at a 45 angle E Rectangle Tool A rectangle or square A square Ellipse Tool An ellipse or circle A circle f An open segment of an An open segment of a circle Arc Tool ellipse or circle A closed segment of an A closed segment of a circle 81 Wedge Tool ellipse or circle Panel Tool A rectangular objectto use square panel as a background for other objects To draw a line rectangle ellipse or panel 1 2 Choose the object tool from the Objects menu or toolbox Position the pointer where you want to begin drawing If you re using the mouse hold down the left mouse button and drag the pointer to draw the object If you re using the keyboard press CTRL arrow to draw the object When the object is as you want it release the mouse button or the keys See Changing Object Appearance later in this chapter for informat
315. iable This table describes the types of comparison operations you can use expressions to perform Operator Symbol Syntax Equality Operand2 Inequality lt gt 1 lt gt Operand2 Less than lt lt Operand2 Greater than gt gt Operand2 Less than or equal to lt 1 lt Operand2 Greater than or equal to gt 1 gt Operand2 There are spaces before and after all the comparison operators Important You also use the symbol to assign variables To avoid confusion between the two operations always place parentheses around the operands when you wish to perform the equality operation on a variable Otherwise PanelView may treat the operation as an assignment to the variable See Construct Operations next for examples using comparison operators in expressions Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 7 12 Creating Expressions Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Construct Operations Construct operations allow you to use conditional logic in your expressions This table describes the types of construct operations you can use expressions to perform Operator Syntax Description of Result IF THEN If Condition Then If the value ofthe condition is non zero Statement s True the statements are executed and Endlf evaluation of the construct ends If the value of the
316. ial State If you define an Initial State for the object and an Initial Value for the object s control tag the object s Initial State takes precedence The tag s initial value is used only if an initial state is not defined Note A tag can have only a single initial value If more than one object is configured to write its initial state value to a single tag a validation error will occur if the initial state values are different e Range of Values If an object has a range of state values record the values in this column Recording the Address For each tag record the PLC address as follows Start Address For Remote I O applications the starting point of the address To address an area of memory larger than a single bit specify the length or end address The syntax depends on the type of address or controller See Remote I O in Appendix C Addressing Syntax No of Bits End Address or String Tags Only No of Characters The length of the tag s address Specify one of the following For digital tags the bit address you enter in the Start Address column is the entire address Ignore this column For analog tags specify either the number of bits used or the end address In the Tag Database editor you can enter this address in one of two forms Start Address No of Bits that is the start address a comma and the number of bits like this I 011 01 3 Start Address End Address that is the star
317. ial state and a main control tag the object s initial state value supersedes the tag s initial value so that the initial state value is written to the programmable controller instead of the tag s initial value On application upload the object s initial state value is used as the tag s initial value 5 To fill in the fields for data source see Specifying a Data Source later in this chapter Configuring a String Tag 1 If the tag is part of a folder select the folder in the folder hierarchy The folder name appears in the Name field and is the first part of the tag name An parc n EN ik PEDI EI Edi 217 ay X m EE nian Tina Soence Typo T Deus Chor Memor Rennie io l s dom Autres Search For Date Source Address 11 2 Type a tag name If the tag is part of a folder type the name after the backslash V 3 For Type select String Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 6 18 Defining Tags Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 4 Fill in the fields as outlined below Security This field is present to maintain compatibility with RS View databases You cannot enter anything in the Security field Description Type a description of this tag up to 128 characters long Length Type a number between 1 and 82 to specify the length of the string tag in bytes The len
318. ication in the terminal The Last Qty Time Reset stamp is retentive When an application is first run it will be set to the time the terminal is switched to Run Mode What Happens when the Operator Resets the QTY TIME When a reset occurs the terminal automatically sets the Alarm Status screen s QTY TIME Reset to PLC tag if assigned It sets this tag for the Remote Alarm Operation Hold Time after detecting the Alarm Status reset whether or not the Reset QTY TIME button is still being pressed or the PLC Controlled QTY TIME Reset tag or expression is still active The Reset QTY TIME button or the PLC Controlled QTY TIME Reset tag or expression must make another 0 to non zero transition before the Alarm Status screen s QTY TIME Reset to PLC tag is set Important While the Alarm Status screen s QTY TIME Reset to PLC tag is set to 1 any subsequent Alarm Status QTY TIME resets from the PLC or via the Reset QTY TIME button will not affect the state of this tag Important Make sure the Reset QTY TIME button is enabled or the PLC Controlled QTY TIME Reset control is assigned If both are disabled the alarm count cannot be reset When a reset occurs the Alarm Status screen updates the Alarm Status Last Qty Time Reset stamp Configuring Alarms 11 47 Last Qty Time Reset Stamp The Last Qty Time Reset stamp is always retained between power cycles What Happens when the Terminal is Off Line The terminal stops increment
319. ication is configured for a touch screen terminal you can t change it to run on a keypad terminal or vice versa Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 9 2 Creating Objects Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Dynamic and Static Objects Objects are dynamic or static depending on whether or not they interact with the programmable controller Dynamic objects communicate with the programmable controller by receiving or transmitting information You assign one or more tags or expressions to each dynamic object You can use tags to write to or read from the programmable controller In general you can use expressions to read from the programmable controller only For more information about tags see Chapter 6 Defining Tags For more information about expressions see Chapter 7 Creating Expressions Static objects appear on the screen but don t interact with the programmable controller Therefore you don t assign tags or expressions to these objects Some examples of static objects are display text and lines Display and Input Objects Dynamic objects are either display input or display and input objects depending on how they interact with the programmable controller Display objects receive information from the programmable controller These objects usually display information about the status of the process For example the programmable controller places a value in the control tag of a bar graph The bar graph object r
320. icons the status bar displays the action that will be performed Note You cannot use Undo and Redo in the Node Rack and Block editors To undo an operation Choose Undo from the Edit menu or from the toolbar To redo an operation Choose Redo from the Edit menu or from the toolbar Selecting Cells Rows and Columns Before you can edit your records in the spreadsheet you must select the area you want to work with You can use the first method for all the form spreadsheet editors The remaining methods work in the Messages editors only To select a single row Click the row number at the left edge of the spreadsheet The row is highlighted indicating that it is selected To select a cell Click the cell or press TAB or the arrow keys A gray border appears to indicate that the cell is selected Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 4 8 Working with Editors Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 To select a block of cells Select a cell in one corner of the block you want to select Press the left mouse button While holding down the mouse button drag the mouse toward the opposite corner of the block until the desired selection is highlighted Release the mouse button If you are using a keyboard hold down the sHIFT key and use the arrow keys to highlight the block To select more than one row 1 2 Click the row number for the first row you want to select Continue
321. identical except that alarm messages have extra features These features are explained separately Guidelines for Creating and Editing Messages Each message must have both a trigger value and text Alarm messages are the only exception in that text is optional If the audio print or relay alarm option is set to Yes you don t need to enter text But if the Message to PLC alarm option is set to Yes you must enter text The trigger value must be a signed long integer A value of 0 cannot be assigned Each trigger value must be unique in each editor You can use any ASCII character including the characters in the extended ASCII character set See Appendix B The Extended Character Set Also ASCII Displays in the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Reference Manual lists the regular ASCII character set The following table describes the fonts and message lengths you can use Information Messages Alarm Messages Font size all all except Extra Large Single line window Small Multi line window Small and Double High Panel window all except Extra Large Where to configure Format menu with the Configure Information Message Message Window tab of the Configure Alarms dialog characters earlier versions font size Local Message Display Window dialog box box object selected essage length in 1 256 1 144 0 80 characters Version 2 or later firmware essage length in 1 72 1 70 singl
322. ier versions of the Panel View firmware Specifying Target Firmware Version You can select the version of Panel View firmware that you plan to use when you run your application The Target Firmware Version you choose allows your application to run on the listed version as well as later versions of the firmware Version 1 and up Version 1 03 and up allows your application to run on a PanelView terminal connected to the ControlNet communication network Version 2 and up allows you to use the new features that come with PanelBuilder Version 2 Version 3 and up allows you to use the new features that come with PanelBuilder Version 3 Version 4 and up allows you to use the new features that come with PanelBuilder Version 4 When you validate your application PanelBuilder warns you if a feature you have used will make the application incompatible with the Target Firmware Version See Appendix E Version Control for a list of features that make applications incompatible with earlier versions of the PanelView firmware Configuring Terminal Setup Options 12 5 To specify the Target Firmware Version 1 Open the System folder and choose Terminal Setup or choose E gt System Terminal Setup from the toolbar 2 Tag Database Alarms The Configure Terminal Setup dialog box appears e PLC 1 0 Control 8 Information Message Window Configure Terminal Setup x Application Startup Screen Screen 255 Alarm H
323. iew terminal to as few PLC racks as possible Understanding Shared Racks If the Panel View terminal doesn t occupy a full rack on the programmable controller another Panel View terminal can share the same rack by occupying the unused partial Remote I O rack Each Panel View terminal with full access must occupy a unique section of the rack The following table is an example of how two Remote I O racks can occupy the same PLC rack Parameter First Remote 1 0 Rack Second Remote I O Rack Rack Number 1 1 Starting Module Group 0 6 Rack Size 3 4 1 4 Last Chassis No Yes Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 2 16 Planning Applications Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Panel View uses the Last Chassis designation to optimize PLC scanning When you specify a partial rack definition as the last chassis the programmable controller won t scan beyond the specified module group on the rack Understanding Full and Listen Only Access Full access means that the PanelView terminal has full read and write access to the rack s I O space Listen Only access means that the Panel View terminal can read from the rack s I O space but cannot write to it Listen Only is useful when one Panel View application wants to monitor the I O activity on another I O rack without having the programmable controller handle or re route the information Planning Rack Assignments To plan your application fully you need to determine
324. iewer Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 6 6 Defining Tags Using the Form Using the Query Box Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Use the form to create a tag In the upper part of the form define the basic tag characteristics such as tag name type and specifics related to the tag type In the lower part of the form define the data source where the tag s values will come from Using the Buttons in the Form When you go into the Tag Database editor the buttons in the form are Close Prev Next and New Close closes the editor Prev displays the previous tag in the form section Next displays the next tag New clears the form input fields so you can define a new tag When you enter information the Prev and Next buttons change to Accept and Discard Choose Accept to save tag information and Discard to cancel changes to a tag Important For shared databases see Using Shared Tag Databases later in this chapter Accepted changes are saved permanently to disk For private databases changes are only saved temporarily You must save the PanelBuilder application to save the tag changes permanently Use the query box to select the tags you want displayed in the spreadsheet You have two options e Select a single tag by typing the tag name Select multiple tags by typing wildcards There are two wildcards This character Does this Matches any single character Matches any number of chara
325. ime If the audio indicator or alarm relay is active they will be silenced if they are not being activated by PLC Controlled Audio or Alarm Relay functions Alarm Message Panel The Alarm Message Panel displays the most recent alarm message only Unlike the Single line Alarm Message Window the Alarm Message Panel can display a single message including the Alarm Trigger value that is up to 6 lines long Messages are left aligned in the panel and may be configured with different font sizes If the message is longer than a single line Panel View automatically breaks the message after the last word that will fit on the line and continues the message on the next line You can also use the Newline code to specify where you want lines to break as described in Chapter 10 Creating Messages The Alarm Message Panel can also display the alarm message trigger value You can configure the appearance of the message trigger value separately from the appearance of the rest of the Alarm Message Panel The trigger value can appear before the message and the allowable number of digits is 1 to 11 The window can appear at the top or bottom of the terminal s screen depending on how you configure it in the Message Window tab of the Configure Alarms dialog box This window has no buttons and allows the current application screen s buttons to remain active for operator input On Panel View 1200 and 1200e touch screen terminals if the center of a butto
326. ime can be reset to 0 either by the operator or programmable controller Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 Configuring Alarms 11 41 Calling up the Alarm Status Screen from the Terminal When the application is running the operator can call up the Alarm Status screen from the Multi line Alarm Message Window the Alarm History screen screen selection objects or the PLC Controlled Screen Change function How the terminal display appears depends on how the Alarm Status screen is invoked When called up from the Multi line Alarm Message Window it overlays the Alarm Message Window and the currently displayed application screen The Screen Number to PLC is not changed When called up from the Alarm History screen the Alarm Status screen replaces it The Screen Number to PLC is not changed When called up by a screen selection object or via PLC Controlled Screen Change it will overlay the application screen such that exiting from the Alarm Status screen will reveal the application screen beneath The Screen Number to PLC if enabled will be set to the Alarm Status screen number If the Alarm Status screen is invoked by the PLC Controlled Screen Change or a screen selection object this occurs When the Alarm Status screen is exited the Screen Number to PLC will be set to that of the application screen previously obscured by the Alarm Status screen Another PLC Controlled Screen change request will remove the Alarm
327. in the terminal The User Entry Character is a question mark You must enter at least one in the write expression You can enter multiple User Entry Characters in a single write expression Creating Expressions 7 25 Example 5 Entering User Entry Characters in Expressions In this example the user can regulate the speed of a conveyor belt by entering a value using for instance a Numeric Entry Keypad A latched push button defines the value as feet or meters per second One state of the latched push button corresponds to feet per second the other to meters per second The tag is feet_or_meters and the PLC address is N7 0 If the user enters the value in feet per second the value is passed to the PLC without conversion If the user enters the value in meters per second the write expression converts the value to feet per second before passing it to the PLC If input speed is entered in m sec convert to ft sec DIM input_speed AS INTEGER input_speed If feet or meters 1 convert input speed from ft sec to m sec IF feet or meters 0 THEN input speed ELSE input speed 3 281 END IF The character is the placeholder for the value the operator enters at the terminal To assign a write expression 1 In the object s configuration dialog box in our example the Numeric Entry Keypad s configuration dialog box for a touch screen application or the Numeric Keypad Enable Button s configuration dialog box for
328. ing alarm history screen 11 52 alarm status screen 11 48 alarms configuring 11 5 global controls 11 6 analog tags 6 13 block tags 6 18 communications 2 1 digital tags 6 16 information message window 14 1 14 3 list object states 9 59 nodes 5 22 object defaults 12 9 object states 9 55 9 56 9 57 objects 9 53 scan classes 2 42 5 24 string tags 6 17 tag type 6 13 terminal setup 12 1 Consistency and screen design 2 6 using screen templates 2 7 8 3 Construct operations in expressions 7 12 IF THEN ELSE 7 13 SELECT CASE 7 15 Control byte 5 13 Control list selector with enter 9 5 9 7 9 21 Control list selector without enter 9 5 9 7 9 21 Control mnemonics C 12 Control selectors 9 7 control list selector with enter 9 7 control list selector without enter 9 7 set bit cursor point 9 7 ControlNet choosing device as data source 6 3 Node Editor 5 15 5 21 optimizing data flow 5 24 Scan Class Editor 5 15 scan classes 5 24 setting up terminal communications station number 5 17 ControlNet Communications 1 ControlNet Communications Worksheet using 2 36 Controls alarms 11 9 copying with screen object 8 5 Conventions commands P 9 documentation P 7 key combinations P 9 mouse P 7 print P 7 selection P 7 selection in dialog boxes P 8 shortcut keys P 9 Converting PanelBuilder 1200 applications 3 4 PanelBuilder for DOS applications 3 4 priva
329. ing Tags and Expressions to Objects Creating Objects 9 61 If you leave the Initial State field blank the tag s initial value is used instead of the state value To specify the inital state 1 Open the object s configuration dialog box using one of the methods described previously 2 Enter a value in the Initial State field Initial State o Important tag s address can have only one initial state value If you assign more than one initial state value to a tag address by assigning the same tag to two different objects with different initial states an error will be reported during the application validation process You must assign tags or expressions to all dynamic objects on your screens For information about tags see Chapter 6 Defining Tags For information about expressions see Chapter 7 Creating Expressions For details about a particular object see the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Reference Manual check the configuration section for the object you are configuring All dynamic objects require at least one tag or expression Depending on the object several tags and expressions may be required In general for read functions you can use either a tag or an expression The only exception is the ASCII Display object which uses a string tag Expressions do not support string tags For write functions you generally must use tags only The exceptions are the Numeric Entry Keypad
330. ing from multiple PLCs DH or ControlNet 4 Do I need to perform arithmetic or logical operations to determine which alarm to display for example threshold alarming 5 Do Ihave any addressing space constraints In general if monitoring of simultaneous alarms is required it is best to use Bit triggered alarms Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 N7 0 Starting Trigger 1 Configuring Alarms 11 7 If monitoring of simultaneous alarms is not required Word triggered alarms will generally save address space and therefore update time because one word can generate up to 2000 alarms one at a time Word trigger is also a good choice for monitoring threshold conditions because expressions can be assigned to Word triggered alarms This can offload logic required in the PLC because Panel View does the calculations Alarms be generated from up to 50 different sources on one or more PLCs since up to 50 tags or expressions can be assigned Bit triggered alarms allow the Panel View terminal to capture simultaneous alarms within the same tag reference you cannot define expressions for Bit triggered alarms That is more than one alarm within a tag can be triggered at a time Here s how it works Example 1 Bit Triggered Alarms Assume the following alarm messages and Alarm Trigger block tag starting at N7 0 are defined in the application The tag s Starting trigger value is 1 Trigger Value Message Text essage
331. ing the accumulated alarm time and quantity when it is offline to the programmable controller In this case offline means one or more of the following conditions exists the terminal is disconnected from the controller the terminal is in Configuration mode the controller is not in Run mode the controller has the terminal Remote I O racks disabled When the terminal goes back online the alarm counts are increased by one for those alarms currently in alarm and accumulation of the times resumes Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 11 48 Configuring Alarms Configuring the Alarm You can configure the Alarm Status screen as follows Status Screen e Assign the screen number Enable or disable the QTY Time Reset Button Set the colors Assign the PLC Controlled QTY TIME Reset control to enable the option When enabled this option allows the PLC to reset the alarm count and total time in alarm to zero Assign the QTY TIME Reset to PLC control This tag indicates to the PLC when an Alarm Status QTY TIME Reset has occurred This can be done either with the QTY Time Reset Button or through the PLC To configure the Alarm Status screen 1 In the Configure Alarms dialog box choose the Status tab Configure Alarms xd m Sa Alarm Status Screen Screen Number 254 QTY Time Reset Button Enabled Screen Color Foreground white Background Red Control PLC Controlled
332. ing with application screens and using some of the tools Chapter 9 Creating Objects An overview of the different types of application screen objects you can create in PanelBuilder and step by step instructions for creating editing and configuring objects Chapter 10 Creating Messages Information about the different types of messages and how they work and instructions for creating editing and importing messages Chapter 11 Configuring Alarms General discussion of how alarms are reported on a Panel View terminal and details about how to configure the various alarm reporting options Chapter 12 Configuring Terminal Setup Options Information about configuring options that determine how the application appears on the terminal Chapter 13 Configuring PLC I O Control Options Information about configuring options that determine how the application interacts with the PLC Chapter 14 Working with the Information Message Window Information about configuring the Information Message Window object to display messages on the terminal s screen Chapter 15 Transferring Applications Information about transferring applications between the development computer and PanelView terminal using the Upload Download cable RIO Pass Through direct network downloads and uploads or the PCMCIA memory card Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 6 Preface Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Who Should Read This Manual
333. ion exceed the application s Target Firmware Version Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 E 2 Version Control Version 1 03 Firmware Features Version 2 Firmware Features Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 The Target Firmware Version is therefore an upper threshold for the features used in an application and causes a validation error if that threshold is exceeded This helps ensure that the applications you develop with PanelBuilder will run on the terminals to which they are downloaded Panel View Version 1 03 firmware includes support for all the features of Version 1 firmware plus ControlNet communications Using ControlNet for a Pass Through download PanelView Version 2 firmware includes support for the following PanelBuilder features Expressions Local Messages longer than 72 characters Alarm Messages longer than 50 characters Information Messages longer than 35 characters with a double wide or large font Information Messages longer than 70 characters with a small or double high font Embedded Newline control characters n in Local Messages Embedded Newline control characters in Information Messages Embedded Newline control characters in Alarm Messages Remote I O Floating Point analog tags Numeric Input Objects configured with the Implicit Decimal Option Extra large fonts Skipped states used in Scrolling Lists Use of the Retain Last List State
334. ion about changing the object s formatting elements To draw an arc or wedge 1 2 Choose the Arc or Wedge tool from the Objects menu or toolbox Position the pointer where you want to begin drawing If you re using the mouse hold down the left mouse button and drag the pointer to draw the object If you re using the keyboard press CTRL arrow to draw the object Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 9 34 Creating Objects Adding Labels Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 4 When the object is the right size release the mouse button or the keys The object will have four handles When you point to one of the four handles the pointer changes to a cross 5 Select one of the handles and drag the pointer around the circumference of the object to create the arc or wedge If you re using the keyboard press CTRL arrow 6 When the object is as you want it release the mouse button or the keys You can assign different line styles foreground and background colors and fill styles See Changing Object Appearance later in this chapter You can add a graphic image or descriptive text to a button to inform operators of its function For example you could add text labels to the two states of a push button to inform the operator whether the button is On or Off or graphic images such as up and down arrows to show the button s purpose When you type text or place a graphic image inside a screen o
335. ion will be compatible with Panel View Version 2 or later It will not be compatible with earlier versions Note The BIN data types are reserved for Modbus applications and cannot be used for DH ControlNet or Remote I O applications For more information about creating applications for Modbus see the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Modbus User Manual Catalog Number 2711E 6 12 For DH and ControlNet Device tags the number of bits in an address is always determined by the address s data source No address length is required Addressing a float section of the PLC controller allows the terminal to access float values Initial Value This is the default value of the tag at the terminal When a tag is used with a PanelBuilder input object or function this initial value after descaling is written to the programmable controller when the application first executes For a PanelBuilder object with an initial state and a main control tag the object s initial state value supersedes the tag s initial value so that the initial state value is written to the programmable controller instead of the tag s initial value On application upload the object s initial state value is used as the tag s initial value To fill in the fields for data source see Specifying a Data Source later in this chapter Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 6 16 Defining Tags Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 C
336. ions values are between 1 and 99 decimal Only local addresses are supported Unsolicited Messages DH Defining Communications 5 23 Timeout Type the number of seconds 0 100 to 6553 500 you want the terminal to wait before reporting a communication error The default timeout period is three seconds Enabled Normally nodes are enabled allowing data collection However while you are debugging your application or troubleshooting your network you can disable a node to prevent communication faults or invalid data Once the application file is downloaded and running any values normally sent to a disabled node will be recorded in the terminal but the actual PLC value will remain unchanged To disable nodes clear the Enabled check box Important Make sure the nodes are enabled before you run an application in an online environment 2 When you ve finished configuring nodes choose Close For DH applications the PanelView terminal supports Unsolicited Messages using the PLC 2 format unprotected read and write requests Unsolicited messages allow the terminal to talk to more than one programmable controller using only a single tag address The terminal will maintain a PLC 2 format data table of 512 words Data is retained across power cycles and mode switches At runtime a PanelView application can interact with programmable controllers using Unsolicited Messages by defining tags on the Unsolicited Message node wit
337. ions to Alarm Messages Creating and editing alarm messages is identical to the procedure described previously except that you can enable one or more of these options for each alarm message Audio sounds a continuous alarm when the alarm is triggered Print sends the alarm message text to a printer when the alarm is triggered The printer prints each alarm message with the time and date when the alarm occurred The alarm message will be printed again with the time and date when the alarm is acknowledged You can configure the printer s form feeds and line feeds through the PanelView terminal s Printer Setup screen See the PanelView 1000e 1200e and 1400e Operator Terminals User Manual for information about configuring the printer Display sends the message to the Alarm Window This option is enabled by default If this option is disabled the message will still appear in the Alarm History and Alarm Status screens if these are enabled but will not be displayed in the Alarm Window Relay energizes the alarm relay when the alarm is triggered This switches on whatever device is connected to the relay such as a warning light or remote audio alarm Message to PLC sends the alarm message to the PLC where it can be retrieved by a third party utility or another PanelView terminal This option is disabled by default To use this option you must assign the Alarm Message controls in the Global Controls tab of the Configure Alarms di
338. irectory containing the desired database is not displayed you can select the drive where the directory is located 4 Choose OK to share the specified database Tag Database Import and Export Defining Tags 6 35 Repairing a Shared Database You can repair the links to a shared database in these circumstances The application has been moved to another machine where the database is in a different path The database has been deleted and you have to link to another The database has been corrupted and you have to link to another Note The application s communication information is not affected when you repair a shared database To repair a shared database 1 Open the application with the database you want to repair 2 Choose Repair Shared from the Database menu 3 Type the database name and path specification or select the Browse button to search for a tag database A database file will have the extension db 4 Choose OK to connect the application to the specified database Note If you get the message The file specified is not a tag database when you try to repair a database either you are pointing to the wrong file or the current version of the database has been damaged beyond repair Perhaps it has had some of its files deleted If so you will have to use a back up copy of the database You can export a tag database created in PanelBuilder to a comma separated variable csv file that can be used b
339. is silenced or the relay is de energized If the alarm message has the print option enabled the alarm is printed again with the acknowledgment time and date stamp the print queue can hold up to 128 triggered and acknowledged alarms Pressing the ACKNOWLEDGE ALARM button has no effect on the audio beeper if the PLC Controlled Audio control value is non zero or on the alarm relay if the PLC Controlled Alarm Relay control value is non zero Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 Configuring Alarms 11 33 This button Does this Silence Alarms Silences the audio indicator and de energizes the alarm relay if either was triggered by an alarm message If the Silence Alarms to PLC option is enabled this button sets the Silence Alarms to PLC tag value to 1 for the configured Remote Alarm Operation Hold Time Pressing the SILENCE ALARMS button has no effect on the audio beeper if the PLC Controlled Audio control value is non zero or on the alarm relay if the PLC Controlled Alarm Relay control value is non zero Alarm History Displays the Alarm History screen Alarm Status Displays the Alarm Status screen Cursor Up Down Moves the cursor bar up or down the list of alarms so the operator can acknowledge a specific message Exit Clears the Alarm Message Window If the Clear Window to PLC option is enabled pressing EXIT sets the Clear Window to PLC tag to 1 for the duration defined as the Remote Alarm Operation Hold T
340. istory m Application Type Type 1000 Keypad Application File Comment Target Firmware Version Version 03 00 and up 01 00 01 03 02 00 03 00 and up 2 In the Target Firmware Version field select from the drop down list 3 Choose OK Timing Parameters In the Timing Parameters tab of the Configure Terminal Setup dialog box you define timing parameters that affect the operation of the terminal and control the flow of information to and from the PLC Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 12 6 Configuring Terminal Setup Options Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Configure Terminal Setup x ng Object Setup Push Button Hold Time OK Cancel Remote Alarm Help Operation Hold Time 3 seconds Ack Control Hold Time 250 msec Alarm Control Delay 200 msec Enter Key Auto Repeat Handshake Time 4 seconds Start Delay Control Delay 400 msec Rate 0 disabled gt Information Window Ack Hold Time Setting the Push Button Hold Time If an operator presses a button very quickly the programmable controller may miss that press between I O scans By setting the Push Button Hold Time you set the minimum time that a push button is held on by the terminal so that the programmable controller can sense it To set the Push Button Hold Time Inthe Push Button Hold Time drop down list select the minimu
341. it Numbers 15 14 13 12 10 9 8 7 6 WN Block Transfer File I O Usage Worksheet Page 2 of 2 Application File Name Block Transfer File Number Number of Words READ PLC In or WRITE PLC Out FULL or LISTEN ONLY Access Enter a number between 1 and 64 Enter a number between and 64 Circle One Circle One PLC Bit Numbers 15 14 13 12 10 9 8 7 6 Rack Assignments Worksheet Application File Name PLC Scanner Type Baud Rate 57 6K 10 000 Ft 115 2K 5 000 Ft 230 4K 2 500 Ft Note You must make at least one rack assignment Additional rack assignments are optional Record the Rack Number and circle the Module Groups Last Chassis designation and Access used Use additional worksheets if necessary Rack Assignments 01 23 45 67 Y N Fui Listen Only 23 45 67 Y Fel LienOny Full Listen Only Full Listen Only Full Listen Only Full Listen Only Full Listen Only Full Listen Only Y N Full Listen Only 0 0 0 0 0 Full Listen Only Fut LisenOny Full Listen Only 1 3 1 1 1 x 45 6 7 45 6 7 45 6 7 45 6 7
342. it to appear leave it disabled gt Note Information messages defined in the Information Messages editor will not appear if the window is disabled Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 14 4 Working with the Information Message Window Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Window Removal At runtime the Information Message Window can be removed from the terminal s screen in one of three ways Select the desired option from the Window Removal drop down list PLC Cleared the programmable controller clears the window by setting the value at the Information Window Control to 0 If you select this option the Information Message window will not contain a Clear or Acknowledge button Operator Cleared the operator presses the window s Clear button and the terminal removes the window Operator Acknowledged the operator presses the window s Ack button The terminal then sets the Acknowledge to PLC control to a value of 1 The programmable controller must be programmed to monitor this tag When the tag is set to 1 the programmable controller sets the Information Window Control to 0 This removes the window The Acknowledge to PLC control is set to 1 for the Information Window Ack Hold Time Font Type You can choose from four different font sizes Small Double High Double Wide and Large If you are creating a Version 2 application each message can contain up to 144 characters For earlier versions the font siz
343. itial state is defined for an object the state value of this state overrides the object s control tag s initial value The object s initial state value is used to initialize the programmable controller Note If the initial state is not defined the object state value will not override the control tag s value Two objects with different initial state values cannot share the same tag or a validation error will occur Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 9 4 Creating Objects Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Safety Considerations for Retentive Objects Instead of using a retentive object to start a machine or process use a momentary input object such as a Momentary Push Button Also make sure that the programmable controller is programmed to stop any machines or processes whenever the communication is interrupted so that a machine or process can only be restarted by an operator ATTENTION Never use a retentive object to initiate a process or turn on a machine For example imagine your programmable controller is programmed to turn a machine on whenever a Maintained Push Button is set to 1 If communication is temporarily cut while the Maintained Push Button is set to 1 the machine will automatically restart as soon as communication resumes Retentive Objects and Tags Retentive objects reduce programmable controller programming instructions Every retentive object must have a tag that writes to the programmab
344. ity User Manual PanelView 1200 1400e Transfer Utility is performing another file transfer You are trying to upload download a file while another upload download is already in progress Close the Upload Download dialog from the Transfer Utility if the transfer is complete PanelView 1200 1400e Transfer Utility is not installed Please install PanelView 1200 1400e Transfer Utility Version 3 or Version 4 or later You are trying to upload download a file and the PanelView 1200 1400e Transfer Utility is not installed Install the PanelView 1200 1400e Transfer Utility Version 3 or Version 4 or later Installed Transfer Utility is not compatible with this version of PanelBuilder The version of the Transfer Utility installed on your computer is obsolete Install the PanelView 1200 1400e Transfer Utility Version 3 or Version 4 or later Tag Database won t start up Low resources Close all other programs and any extra PanelBuilder windows If this doesn t work close down Windows and restart Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Problem Cause Troubleshooting D 3 What to Do Not enough disk space Delete all unnecessary files in the temporary directory This may require running the MS DOS deltree utility from within your temporary directory You should close down Windows before doing this and be aware of what other items are in the temporary directory Virtual Memory Swap file not l
345. ive touch area The rectangle indicates the button s touch area The solid outer rectangle indicates the margin area and changes size as the button is stretched or moved Working with Some objects such as Control List Selectors and ASCII Input Multi Com ponent Objects objects consist of multiple components Depending on the object you can change the format attributes of the different components For example you can change border styles touch margins fill type and foreground and background colors You can also resize many components or move them To edit a component of a multi component object 1 Select the main object by clicking it 2 Click again on the component Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 9 52 Creating Objects The button is selected and the text On is selected Setting Object Defaults Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 For details on how to select the various components of a multi component object see Selecting Objects earlier in this chapter Hollow handles appear around the component You can edit it according to the options available from the Format menu An easy way to create similar dynamic objects is to use the Set Object Defaults command You create one object edit it as you want and then use the Set Object Defaults command to designate this object s attributes as the default attributes for all new objects of that type Note Static drawing objects labels func
346. k box If you don t want to convert tags in the application clear the check from the Convert Tags check box Ifyou don t convert the tags to Remote I O format the tags data source remains Device and the address is unchanged You will have to change the data source to Remote I O manually for any of these tags that you want to use and give them each a Remote I O address Ifyou convert the tags to Remote I O the data source for all the tags is changed to Remote I O but you will still have to give them valid Remote I O addresses manually Note Converting shared tags may invalidate them for other applications that use them Any unused tags will remain unconverted Note If you convert an application from Remote I O to DH or ControlNet or vice versa the tag addresses may be invalid for the network to which you are converting Change the tag addresses to match the network type Choose OK The following message will appear Caosnanaimic atii Salij Notas and Scan classes will be st after 2 the network type is converted to RIO Continua Choose Yes to confirm that you want to continue Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 5 34 Defining Communications 6 Once you have changed the network type you will have to configure the programmable controller type rack assignments block transfer files and Pass Through File control byte in the Rack and Block Transfer File editors You may also h
347. ken Data Mnemonics Mnemonic Instruction Type LO Low Analog HI High Analog SFC Status Mnemonics Mnemonic Instruction Type DN Done Digital ER Step Error Digital FS Forced Scan Digital LS Last Scan Digital OV Timer Overflow Digital PRE Preset Analog SA Scan Active Digital TIM Active Time Analog Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 16 Addressing Syntax Remote 1 0 Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 The following section provides addressing syntax for Discrete and Block Transfer Remote I O Discrete PLC Address F rrw bb F File type I Input O Output Rack number PLC 2 20 1 7 octal PLC 2 30 1 7 octal PLC 3 0 76 octal PLC 3 10 0 17 octal PLC 5 11 3 octal PLC 5 15 1 3 octal PLC 5 20 1 3 octal PLC 5 25 1 7 octal PLC 5 30 1 7 octal PLC 5 40 1 17 octal PLC 5 60 1 27 octal PLC 5 80 1 27 octal PLC 5 250 0 37 octal SLCS 0 3 octal 1771 SB 1 7 octal w Start word 0 7 octal bb optional Start bit 0 17 octal If none is specified 0 is assumed Note The address can also be specified as a length or a range For length use the format F rrw bb I where ll is the bit length For range use the format F rrw bb w bb Examples I 070 is an input address pointing to word 0 on rack 07 I 61 03 is an input address pointing to rack 6 word 1 bit 3 O 011 01 is an output address pointing to bit 1 of word 1 in rack 1 I
348. l when one PanelView application needs to monitor the I O activity on racks used by other devices or configured with Full access for another PanelView terminal Note You can t configure Listen Only for Rack 0 of PLC 2 and PLC 5 programmable controllers Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 5 10 Defining Communications Setting Up Block Transfer Files Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Module Groups You can select any or all module groups 0 2 4 or 6 Each of these module groups occupies a 1 4 rack Follow these guidelines when assigning module groups Assign each module group only once for any given rack that has multiple assignments Ensure module group assignments are contiguous for each rack assignment For example you can assign modules 0 2 and 4 but not modules 0 2 and 6 Last Chassis Enabling Last Chassis signals to the programmable controller that it does not need to scan further module groups for the racks past those defined in the rack assignment If you are using partial rack assignments you can enable Last Chassis for any one of module groups 0 1 or 2 3 or 4 5 Module group 6 7 if used in a rack assignment will always have last chassis enabled automatically To assign racks 1 In the Rack Number field select the rack number you want to use 2 Select the contiguous module groups you want to assign for that rack number An X appears in the check box beside each module group you sele
349. lBuilder for example an application created in Version 1 of PanelBuilder DOS However once an application is edited in PanelBuilder 1400e you can save it only as a Version 4 PanelBuilder 1400e format file pvc and you can only edit it using PanelBuilder Version 4 Depending on the features you used in the application you can however download and run it on terminals running PanelView 1000e 1200e and 1400e Firmware Version 1 and later Version compatibility issues are highlighted wherever they occur in this manual and are explained in more detail in Appendix E Version Control Required Equipment Introduction to PanelBuilder 1 3 Note The pvd files are terminal files that are created automatically when an application is downloaded to a PanelView terminal You can also create a pvd file manually by saving PanelBuilder application as a terminal file Terminal pvd files can be Version 1 or later depending on the features used in the application You need the following software and equipment to create PanelBuilder applications and run them on a Panel View terminal PanelBuilder Software You need a copy of PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Version 3 or 4 installed on your personal computer For PC requirements and installation instructions refer to Chapter 2 Introducing PanelBuilder 1400e in PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Getting Started Manual Panelbuilder Transfer Utility
350. lay objects in all the screens of the application You can also configure Local Message Displays as part of the Scrolling List object For information about the Alarm and Information Message Windows see Chapters 11 and 12 For detailed information about the Local Message Display object see the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Reference Manual How Messages Are Triggered Each message is assigned a trigger value This value must be unique in each message editor and can be any signed long integer except 0 At runtime messages are displayed according to their trigger values For example when the programmable controller moves a number that matches an information message trigger value to the Information Window Control the Information Message Window appears if it is enabled and displays the message that has been assigned this trigger value The trigger values you assign can help simplify PLC programming For example you could assign trigger values to these messages as follows Message Trigger Value Temperature is 32 32 Warning Temperature is 1009 1009 Danger Temperature is 1457 1457 In this example the trigger value of each message matches its temperature Creating and Editing Messages gt Local Messages Creating Messages 10 3 You create and edit each message type in its own editor Note The procedure for creating and editing alarm information and local messages is
351. lbar or menu commands from the Arrange menu You can combine several objects into a group that behaves as a single object divide a grouped object into its component objects layer objects align objects with each other horizontally or vertically space objects horizontally or vertically flip objects horizontally or vertically Creating Objects 9 41 Grouping Ungrouping Objects You can group several objects so they can be moved or edited as a single unit You can also group an existing group with another object or with another group These kinds of groups are called nested groups All groups can be ungrouped If you ungroup nested groups they are ungrouped in their nesting sequence gt Note Too many levels of nested groups can slow down PanelBuilder For faster performance keep groups to 10 or less nesting levels To group objects 1 Select the objects you want to group Handles appear on all objects to show they are selected The status bar tells you how many objects are selected Arrange 2 Choose Group from the Arrange menu or choose from the Group GrG toolbar Send t Hack Bring to Erant Lati oe Align Center Albun Bight Align Align Center Points Align bn Grid Aliqn Middle DS e Aun Bottom N Space Vertical Space Horizontal Flip Vertical Flip Hprizantal Selectthe objects Group them One set of handles appears
352. le controller More than one retentive object can be assigned to the same tag For example you can assign control selectors from different screens to the same tag When one selector changes the tag value other selectors will reflect the change Important Momentary Push Buttons and Latched Push Buttons have a fixed initial state This forces the buttons control tags to the initial state value Therefore if other objects share the same control tag with these buttons their initial state values cannot be different from those of these buttons ATTENTION Make sure that the initial state values you define are the same values that the programmable controller program considers as the Off or default state Creating Objects The following table lists all the objects and shows whether they are application specific It also lists some of their properties Object Type Keypad or Read or Retentive Touch Write Screen Arc Static Both Not N A applicable ASCII Display Dynamic Both Read Non retentive ASCII Input large or small Dynamic Both Both Yes Bar Graphs vertical or horizontal Dynamic Read Non retentive Control List Selector with Enter Dynamic Both Both Yes Key Control List Selector without Enter Dynamic Write Yes Key Date Display Dynamic Both Not N A applicable Decrement Value Button Dynamic Both Write Yes El
353. lect another PanelBuilder 1400e database or an RS View database If you select another PanelBuilder 1400e database the network type must be the same in both applications The selected application s communication profile information nodes and scan classes for DH and ControlNet applications or racks and block transfer files for Remote I O applications is copied into the destination pvc file This overwrites the current application s communication profile and ensures that it will be ready to use tags in the shared database If you select an RSView database only the tag definitions in the database are shared You will have to configure node and scan class information for the current application Note An RSView database can only be selected if RS View is installed on the same development computer as PanelBuilder 1400e Sharing across a network is not supported To select a shared database 1 Open the application for which you want to select a shared database 2 Choose Select Shared from the Database menu 3 Fill in the fields as outlined below File Name Type the name of the application whose database file you want to share or select the application from the list of files List Files of Type Shows the type of files that can be shared by the current application Select pvc for PanelBuilder files and rsv for RSView files Directories Choose the directory containing the database you want to select Drives If the d
354. lector The Selector s list has five states as indicated by the arrows You can add text for each state in the list Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 You re now ready to configure the states For example if the object is a Screen List Selector you can assign a different screen to each state See the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Reference Manual for more information Adding Text to List Object States When you ve defined all the states for your list you can add text to the list This allows the operator to select states from the list To add text to each state 1 Select the Text tool 2 Position the I beam next to the first state in the list and type the name for that state 3 Move to the next item in the list and type the name for the state The quickest way to move to the next item is to press ENTER Note While you edit text the status bar indicates the current state Configuring Initial States Certain objects have pre defined initial states while other objects allow you to configure the inital state You can configure the initial state for the Control List Selectors the Maintained Push Button and the Multistate Push Button When you assign a tag to a control the tag you assign to the object can also have an initial value defined for it If you define both an initial state for an object and an initial value for a tag the object s initial state will take precedence Assign
355. lent For example two connected lines will now appear as two regular lines buttons will have the new three dimensional button borders and so on lines of characters are converted to text e the file format is pvc When you open an application created with PanelBuilder for DOS PanelBuilder 1200 or an earlier version of PanelBuilder 1400e than Version 4 the following Version 4 default values are set the application s pvc file is saved as a PanelBuilder Version 4 file It is set to run on a PanelView terminal using firmware Version 1 or later To change the Target Firmware Version see Specifying Target Firmware Version next the Message to PLC option for Alarm Messages is set to No the Retain Last List State and Skip State options for Cursor Lists are set to No in Scrolling List objects ifthe application uses an Enhanced SLC device the Slot Number field in the Network File Transfer tab of the Configure Communication Setup dialog box is set to 0 ifthe application has a block tag assigned to the Alarm Triggers control the tag uses the Bit Alarm Trigger Type with a Starting Trigger of 1 if the Alarm Triggers control is an analog or digital tag it uses the Word Alarm Trigger Type Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 3 6 Working with Applications Specifying Target Firmware Version Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 e if the application has a block tag assigned to the Acknowledge to PLC control the tag
356. lied to all the selected records not only to the one displayed in the form Note All selected cells change to match the corresponding cells in the first selected record Select only cells you want to change Working with Editors 4 13 Changing Column Width and Row Height Each time you open a Messages editor the default column and row settings appear However while you are working in the spreadsheet you can customize it by stretching or shrinking both the width of the columns and the height of the rows The Node Rack and Block editors retain your changes to columns when you close them For example hidden columns remain hidden On the other hand rows are restored to their default height and position when you reopen the editor To change the width of a column 1 Place the cursor on the line dividing the column headers The cursor changes to a double arrow 2 Hold the left mouse button down and drag the cursor to stretch or shrink the column width to its desired size You can hide a column completely by shrinking it until it disappears To retrieve the column click between the two columns that surround the hidden column in the header and drag to the right To change the height of a row 1 Place the cursor on the line dividing the row numbers The cursor changes to a double arrow 2 Hold the left mouse button down and drag the cursor to stretch or shrink the row height to its desired size You can hide a row comple
357. lipse Static Both Not N A applicable Goto Configure Mode Static Both Not N A applicable Goto Screen Button Static Both Not N A applicable Graphic Image Static Both Not N A applicable ncrement Value Button Dynamic Both Write Yes nterlocked Push Button Dynamic Both Write Yes Latched Push Button Dynamic Both Both on retentive Line Static Both Not N A applicable List Indicator Dynamic Both Read on retentive Local Message Display Dynamic Read on retentive aintained Push Button Dynamic Both Yes ultistate Indicator Dynamic Both Read Non retentive ultistate Push Button Dynamic Both Both Yes Normally Closed Momentary Push Dynamic Both Both Non Button retentive Normally Open Momentary Push Dynamic Both Non Button retentive Numeric Data Display Dynamic Both Read Non retentive Numeric Entry Keypad smalland Dynamic Touch Both Yes large Screen Numeric Input Cursor P oint Dynamic Keypad Both Yes Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Creating Objects Object Type Keypad or Read or Retentive Touch Write Screen Numeric Keypad Enable Button Dynamic Keypad Both Yes Panel Static Both Not N A applicable Rectangle Static Both Not N A applicable Return to Previous Screen Button Static Both Not N A applicable Scale Static Both Not N A applicable Screen Keypad Enable Button Static Keypad No
358. ll up the Alarm History screen from the Single line Alarm Message Window include a Goto Screen button on your screens that calls up the Alarm History screen Important If the Single line Alarm Message Window is used the operator can acknowledge and clear alarms only through the Alarm History screen See About the Alarm History Screen later in this chapter for more information Single line Alarm Message Windows can also be cleared by the programmable controller 7 31 01 AR 12 15 everbeated Single line Alarm Message Window bottom of screen Configuring Alarms 11 31 07 29 45 6 Safety bar number The Single line Alarm Message Window can be removed from the screen by e acknowledgement of the alarm in the Alarm History screen a PLC Controlled Clear Window tag or expression aremote acknowledgement from the PLC If the alarm displayed in the Single line Alarm Message Window becomes inactive it still remains in the window If the screen changes the alarm display remains on the new screen unless it is cleared by the PLC or the alarm is acknowledged by the operator or PLC Multi line Alarm Message Window The Multi line Alarm Message Window can display up to 20 single height or 10 double height alarm messages with the time and date of occurrence The window has a set of buttons with which to respond to alarms The window always appears at the bottom of the screen
359. lock transfer and token data files C 6 SLC 5 writing to output files C 7 SLC 5 Enhanced binary files optional syntax C 9 binary integer float ASCII and string files C 8 1 0 files C 7 status files C 8 timer counter and control files C 9 analog member addressing optional syntax C 11 bit member addressing optional syntax C 10 Alarm acknowledge to PLC about 11 8 Alarm control delay 12 7 Alarm controls 11 9 Alarm editors 11 5 Alarm history screen 11 50 about 11 3 11 50 calling up from the terminal 11 30 11 34 11 50 configuring 11 52 screen security 8 8 using buttons 11 51 using in the terminal 11 50 Alarm message panel about 11 33 Alarm message window about 11 3 11 29 choosing type multi line 11 36 single line 1 36 disabling 11 36 enabling 11 36 multi line 11 31 Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 single line 1 30 types 11 29 using buttons 11 32 using in the terminal 11 30 Alarm messages 10 1 11 29 11 31 audio 11 23 changing options 10 9 displaying on the terminal 11 31 enabling audio option 10 8 print option 10 8 the alarm relay 10 8 in alarm history screen 11 50 in alarm status screen 11 41 in alarm window 10 8 options 10 8 Alarm status screen 11 39 about 11 4 11 39 assigning reset control automatic 11 49 manual 11 49 calling up from the terminal 11 41 configuring 11 48
360. m These fields are present to maintain compatibility with RS View databases You cannot enter anything in the Minimum and Maximum fields Scale and Offset Type a number For the scale do not use 0 Scale and offset together transform raw PLC data into meaningful units for the operator At runtime all data read from the programmable controller into an analog tag will be scaled using the formula y mx b where m scale x raw PLC data b offset y scaled value The terminal displays the scaled value When data is written to the programmable controller using an analog tag the value will be inversely scaled using the formula _ 9 b m This converts the value back to raw PLC data before it is written to the programmable controller With Scale 1 and Offset 0 the default values for a new analog tag programmable controller data is not changed Important A fractional scale or offset value will result in a floating point scaled value This will be true regardless of the tag s data type Extensive use of floating point values can slow a terminal s performance Important If the descaled value to be written to the tag address is a fraction but the tag is not configured to deal with floating point data 1 Float data type or Default data type with a tag address in the Float section of the programmable controller the value will be truncated to the nearest whole number before it is written to the tag address
361. m History screen contains a list of the most recent alarms maximum 128 for the current application with the most recent alarm at the top of the list Note If more than 128 alarms occur the oldest alarm records will be dropped from the list The maximum number of alarm triggers and acknowledgements that can be in the print queue at one time is also 128 If you need to keep a permanent list of old alarms print the message list regularly or upload the Alarm History file See the PanelBuilder 1400e Transfer Utility User Manual for information about uploading the Alarm History file This section tells you how the Alarm History screen works when the application is running Calling up the Alarm History Screen from the Terminal When the application is running the operator can call up the Alarm History screen from the Multi line Alarm Message Window the Alarm Status screen screen selection objects or the PLC Controlled Screen Change function How the terminal display appears depends on how the Alarm History screen is invoked When called up from the Multi line Alarm Message Window it overlays the Alarm Message Window and the currently displayed application screen The Screen Number to PLC is not changed When called up from the Alarm Status screen it replaces it The Screen Number to PLC is not changed When called up by a screen selection object or via PLC Controlled Screen Change it overlays the application screen such th
362. m is acknowledged by the operator or by the PLC the address corresponding to this tag is set to 1 for the specified time To set the Acknowledge Control Hold Time Inthe Ack Control Hold Time drop down list select the minimum time you want to assign The Alarm Control Delay determines the interval between the time the acknowledged alarm value is sent to the programmable controller and the time the Acknowledge Control tag is set The delay ensures that the acknowledged alarm value is recorded in the programmable controller before it sees the button tag trigger The delay controls the flow of alarm messages and acknowledgements to the PLC If the Alarm Message to PLC is enabled it also determines the interval between the time a message is sent to the PLC and the time the Message Control tag is set To set the Alarm Control Delay p Inthe Alarm Control Delay drop down list select the time you want to assign Note For more information on alarms see Chapter 11 Configuring Alarms Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 12 8 Configuring Terminal Setup Options Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Setting the Enter Key Parameters Many objects such as the Control List Selector and the Numeric Input Keypad have an Enter Key Handshake control tag or expression The following settings apply to those controls The Enter Key Handshake Time determines how long the terminal will wait for a handshake from the PLC controller To
363. m time you want to assign By default this is 250 milliseconds By increasing the On time you ensure that the PLC controller doesn t miss a button press For example if an operator presses and releases a button very quickly the programmable controller is more likely to register the press if the Push Button Hold Time is set to one second Note If you ve set the hold time for one second operators must wait one second before they can press the same button again If they press the same button sooner the terminal will ignore the press No operator initiated screen changes are allowed when a Push Button Hold Time 15 active However PLC controlled screen changes will cancel the hold time and be processed Configuring Terminal Setup Options 12 7 Setting the Remote Alarm Parameters The Operation Hold Time allows you to specify the interval of time the Alarm Control Tag is set for when any of the following is activated e Silence Alarms to PLC Clear Window to PLC QTY TIME Reset to PLC Message to PLC By default the interval is 3 seconds Note For Remote I O applications this default is usually sufficient For DH and ControlNet applications the hold time should reflect the highway traffic To set the Operation Hold Time p Inthe Operation Hold Time drop down list select the minimum time you want to assign The Ack Control Hold Time determines the time interval for the Acknowledge Control When an alar
364. mand to import messages follow these guidelines in preparing your message file The trigger value can be any value from 1 to 2000 The values do not have to be created in any order but no two messages can have the same trigger value The message text must be surrounded by quotation marks e To include a quotation mark 7 in your message preface it with a second quotation mark 7 e PanelBuilder will ignore any spaces found outside the quotation marks Creating Messages 10 11 Acharacter with an ASCII code below 32 is not valid and won t be imported See the ASCII Displays chapter in the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Reference Manual for details of the ASCII character set Also see Appendix B The Extended Character Set in this manual Use the comment character as the first character in the line of a comment PanelBuilder will ignore lines that begin with The number of characters in each message should be 80 characters or less for alarm messages 144 characters or less for information messages 256 characters or less for local messages When you name your file use one of the following extensions e img for information messages e Img for local messages e for alarm messages Format of the Message File Before you begin importing existing message files using the Import Message File option ensure that the file is an ASCII text file Your messages mu
365. mber key combination in the Keystroke field Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 9 26 Creating Objects Creating Symbols Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 4 In PanelBuilder open the screen where you want to create the text 5 Select the text tool Position the I beam on the screen and click the mouse button or press any key 6 Hold down Arr and type the key combination from the Character Map on the numeric keypad To use the MS Word extended character set 1 Open the Character Map from the Windows Accessories group 2 In the Font field select MS Sans Serif The characters available in this font are displayed 3 Select the character you want to use and choose Select If you wish select additional characters 5 When you ve selected all the characters you want choose Copy 5 n PanelBuilder click in the dialog box field where you want to use the character and press CTRL V Note Instead of copying and pasting a character you can type the character using its ALT number key combination as described for using the PanelView extended character set Symbols are identical in function to Multistate Indicators except that the same graphic image label appears for every state Symbols use less memory than Multistate Indicators and the PanelView terminal processes information more quickly for symbols You can include any number of symbols in your screen A symbol can be any monochrome bitmap drawings that y
366. ment number 0 255 decimal Member mnemonic see mnemonic tables on Page 11 Bit number 0 15 decimal Applies to analog members only Example R67 123 EN Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 C 10 Addressing Syntax Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 SLC 5 Enhanced Timer Counter and Control Files Bit Member Addressing Optional Syntax Fnnn eee MNE F nnn optional eee MNE File type T Timer C Counter R Control File number Timer 4 9 255 decimal Counter 5 9 255 decimal Control 6 9 255 decimal Timer counter and control file types use the default file number if the file number is absent The default numbers are 4 timer 5 counter and 6 control Element number 0 255 decimal Bit member mnemonic see mnemonic tables on Page 11 Example 77 99 SLC 5 Enhanced Timer Counter and Control Files Bit Member Addressing by Bit Address Optional Syntax Fnnn eee bb F nnn optional File type T Timer C Counter R Control File number Timer 4 9 255 decimal Counter 5 9 255 decimal Control 6 9 255 decimal Timer counter and control file types use the default file number if the file number is absent The default numbers are 4 timer 5 counter and 6 control Element number 0 255 decimal bb optional Addressing Syntax C 11 Bit number Timer 13 15 Counter 10 15
367. minal to get the time and date from the individual PLC Controlled Date amp Time controls This option is especially useful if you have several terminals connected to the same programmable controller Instead of an operator having to reset the date and time on each terminal the programmable controller can reset all internal clocks at once Configuring PLC I O Control Options 13 5 When the PLC Controlled Date amp Time Control value changes from 0 to non zero the terminal resets its internal time and date to the time and date read from the individual PLC Controlled Date amp Time controls Important You must also configure the individual PLC Controlled Date amp Time controls described in the next section for the PLC Controlled Date amp Time Control to function Individual PLC Controlled Date amp Time Controls The individual PLC Controlled Date amp Time controls work with the PLC Controlled Date amp Time Control The PLC Controlled Date amp Time controls define the programmable controller addresses from which the terminal gets the time and date There are six controls This control Accepts this range of data Year 2 digit form 80 99 1980 1999 and 00 43 2000 2043 4 digit form 1980 2043 Month 1 12 Day ofthe Month 1 31 Hour 0 23 24 hour format Minute 0 59 Second 0 59 These controls are all individually assignable independent of the others Only the date and time compon
368. mmodate the largest screen number including the screen numbers of the Alarm History and Alarm Status screens Screen Print Active to PLC If you try to make screen prints while running an application on the terminal but the printer is busy it will ignore your screen print request If you assign the Screen Print Active to PLC control the terminal informs the programmable controller that a screen print is in progress A tag value of 1 indicates the Screen Print Active condition a tag value of 0 indicates the non active condition and that the printer is free Date amp Time to PLC Use these options if you want the programmable controller to store the current time and date from the terminal s clock You can use 7 separate controls which are listed in the table below Any of them can be assigned or left unassigned When the value of any one of the assigned controls changes the values of all the assigned controls are updated Configuring PLC I O Control Options 13 7 Note For Remote I O applications all assigned tags are sent to the PLC in the same programmable controller scan However for DH and ControlNet applications it is not possible to guarantee synchronicity The controls are updated in the order in which they appear in the following table This control Sends this range of data to the PLC Year 2 digit form 0 99 Day of the Week 1 7 1 Sunday Month 1 12 Day of the Month 1 31 Hour 0
369. ms only when you have a busy network combined with a large number of writes being generated in quick succession by the PanelView terminal A large number of writes can be generated under the following conditions assigning any or all of the Time and Date to PLC tags as these tags write once every second when entering a screen some objects write to their tag address Problems can occur if there is a large number of write objects on one screen Some objects that can cause problems are Scrolling Lists with large numbers of visible states assigned to them and Numeric Input Cursor Points with many points defined when the application is first powered up or is run for the first time if default operation is not used in the Application Startup menu of the PanelView configuration screen In this case you will write either the object s initial state value or if it does not have an initial state 1t will write its initial value as defined in the tag Planning Applications 2 45 Device Tags Worksheet Application File Name Screen Number Object Tag Address Initial Analog Tag Only Tag Ref iti Number of Charact No Type State Name Type Fic Data Initial Range agross Number of Characters star n Value Scale Offset Type Value Values Value Notes Initial State Value Objects such as Multistate Push B
370. n After you complete the planning steps in this chapter your worksheets contain all the information you need to create your application To create your application work through the remaining chapters in this manual as described in Steps for Building an Application at the beginning of this chapter Planning DH or ControlNet Communications DH and ControlNet Planning Applications 2 35 This section describes how to complete Step 3 planning how the application will communicate with the PLC for a DH Data Highway Plus or ControlNet application It includes information about these tasks using worksheets to help you plan DH ControlNet applications defining nodes e defining scan classes e planning addresses Using Worksheets to Plan Communications Use these worksheets to determine addressing and communication requirements in DH and ControlNet applications Communications worksheet Device Tags worksheet Appendix A contains a blank copy of each worksheet These points summarize the process of planning your DH or ControlNet communications using the worksheets Identify each programmable controller the application will communicate with by defining nodes on the Communications worksheet Define the foreground and background rates for the 11 scan classes Define the programmable controller addresses for each object on your screen using the Device Tags worksheet For each object on a screen ent
371. n 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 gt Tip If you re drawing static objects and want to use the attributes of an existing object select that object first Then choose the object tool you want and begin drawing or typing The new object will have the same attributes as the selected object To apply colors to an object 1 Select one or more objects 2 Select the colors from the color palette or from the Format menu Setting an Object s Fill Type Many objects can be hollow or solid If you make an object hollow any object that it covers will show through The following illustration shows the difference between hollow and solid fill when applied to text This tex llow fill Mie qu Se Gull al Changing the Border and Line Styles You can change the border style of most objects The following panel objects show four possible border styles Raised 4 Raised Inset Raised 12 Inset 4 Creating Objects 9 49 For line ellipse arc wedge and rectangle objects you choose a variety of line styles The following illustration shows four possible styles Solid 1 201020 Dash 1 Dash Dot Dot 1 To change an object s border or a line s style 1 Select the object or line 2 Choose a border or line style from the Format menu Making Objects Blink One way to add emphasis to objects is to make them blink Blinking alternates between the object s foreground or backgroun
372. n 3 firmware features E 3 Version 4 firmware features E 3 Version compatibility 1 2 Version control and downloading applications E 3 atthe PanelView terminal E 4 defined E 1 target firmware version 12 4 Viewing forms 4 4 Index 1 17 spreadsheet 4 4 ControlNet Communications 2 36 tags in a folder 6 8 A 1 tags used screen 8 10 Device Tags 2 43 A 1 DH Communications 2 36 A 1 Discrete I O Usage 2 28 A 1 Rack Assignments 2 31 1 Wallpaper 9 40 Tags 2 21 1 Wedge 9 6 9 12 9 21 9 33 using to design screens 2 8 2 10 Wildcards 6 3 6 6 using to help plan applications 2 5 Word triggered alarms 11 6 using to plan addresses 2 19 about 11 8 Write expressions 7 24 Worksheets assigning 7 25 about A 1 Write objects 9 2 completing fora Remote 1 0 application 2 20 2 35 recording addresses 2 27 2 50 X sample Worksheets 1 1000e Terminals 2 10 A 1 1200e Terminals 2 8 A 1 XOR in expressions 7 17 1400e Terminals 2 10 A 1 Z Block Transfer File 2 33 A 1 Block Transfer File 1 0 Usage 2 29 Zooming 9 18 A 1 Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 N Rockwell Automation Rockwell Automation helps its customers receive a superior return on their investment by bringing together leading brands in industrial automation creating a broad spectrum of easy to integrate products These are supported by local technical resources available worldwide a gl
373. n is obscured by an Alarm Message Panel the button will not respond to presses On Panel View 1400 terminals if any part of a button is not obscured by an Alarm Message Panel it will still respond to presses Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 11 34 Configuring Alarms Alarm Message Panel large text and underlined top of screen If you use the Alarm Message Panel the application will be compatible with PanelView Version 2 or later It will not be compatible with earlier versions Tip Because you won t be able to call up the Alarm History screen from the Alarm Message Panel include a Goto Screen button on your screens to call up the Alarm History screen Important If the Alarm Message Panel is used the operator can acknowledge and clear alarms only through the Alarm History screen Alarm Message Panels can also be cleared by the PLC and the PLC can acknowledge the message that appears in the Alarm Message Panel Safety bar 1 8 1 is open Close it before starting motor E n the conveyor ip detersioe the current 16 8 cS E n the memor ip deGersion the current riaios 16 8 15 Alarm Message Panel small premere text bottom of screen Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Configuring the Alarm Message
374. n it is running this application By default the Terminal Network Address is assigned to the Panel View Location Routing Address field in the Network File Transfer tab For ControlNet applications because no ControlNet bridge devices are available the Panel View Location Routing Address can only be a local network address For DH applications if you change the Terminal Network Address PanelBuilder will update the Panel View Location Routing Address to match and vice versa A message will be displayed informing you of the change Any bridged DH addresses in the Panel View Terminal Address will not be affected When you set up a DH or ControlNet Direct download the Network File Transfer s Panel View Location Routing Address is used This ensures that the download does not go to the wrong station by mistake To set the Terminal Network Address p Inthe Terminal Network Address field type the Panel View terminal s address on the network For DH networks valid entries are 0 to 77 octal For ControlNet networks valid entries are 1 to 99 decimal Important For versions 1 0 and 1 25 of ControlNet the PanelView Terminal Network Address should not be set to 1 Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 5 18 Defining Communications Setting Up Network File Transfers You establish the PanelView Location Routing Address and define network download control tags in the Network File Transfer tab LI Communica
375. n modify the database so make sure that any definitions you change won t adversely affect the other applications Databases can be shared only by applications on the same physical computer They cannot be shared over a network When you select a PanelBuilder 1400e database for the current PanelBuilder 1400e application to share you specify the PanelBuilder application not the database itself The source application s communication information nodes racks and so on is copied into the current application Important Ifan application already has communication information defined it will be overwritten when you select a shared database When you select an RSView database no communication information is copied to the PanelBuilder 1400e application You must define node and scan class information for the application using the Nodes and Scan Classes editors RS View does not support Remote I O tags Defining Tags 6 33 In order to select an RS View project RSView must be installed on the same computer as PanelBuilder If RS View is not installed on your machine you need to export the RSView project as a csv file then import this file into PanelBuilder You can also use the Repair Shared command on the Database menu to point to the RSView db file When you share a database between PanelBuilder 1400e and RSView PanelBuilder 1400e cannot edit tags that it cannot use such as RSView tags with Memory System or DDE as their data
376. nd Color Choose the background color of the trigger value About the Alarm Status Screen Configuring Alarms 11 39 5 Assign controls in the Control field This control Does this Clear Window to PLC The Clear Window to PLC control tells the PLC that the Alarm Message Window is no longer displayed on the PanelView terminal s screen When the user clears the Single line Multi line or Alarm Message Panel the terminal sets the Clear Window to PLC control to 1 for the Remote Alarm Ack Control Hold Time After the Remote Alarm Ack Control Hold Time the control is reset to 0 The user can clear the Single line Multi line or Alarm Message Panel by acknowledging all alarms The user can also press Exit on the Multi line Alarm Message Window to clear it Assign a tag to enable this option Important Only the Multi line Alarm Message Window contains an Acknowledge or Exit button PLC Controlled Clear Clears the Alarm Message Window as well as the alarm Window beeper and relay when a 0 to non zero transition is detected on the assigned control Assign a tag or expression to enable this option For information about expressions see Chapter 7 Creating Expressions Note Subsequent alarm triggers are processed even if the tag or expression remains at non zero 6 Choose OK to save the Message Window configuration When the application is running the operator can call up the Alarm Status screen to view a list of alarm
377. nd the manipulation the expression will perform on the tag data For information about the kinds of operations expressions can perform see Chapter 7 Creating Expressions For each tag fill in the following Name A symbolic name you assign to this address The tag name can be up to 40 characters long and can include letters numbers the dash and the underscore character _ Spaces and periods are not permitted When you define tags in the Tag Database editor you can also define folders Folders are a convenient way to organize tags For example you may put all the tags for one screen s objects in one folder The folder name becomes part of the tag name and is separated from the rest of the name with a backslash For example the full name for the tag StartButton_Control in the folder called Screen 1 is Screen lWStartButton Control For details on creating tags and folders see Chapter 6 Defining Tags Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Planning Applications 2 47 Type Specify one of these types of tags Tag Type of Data Stored Digital A single bit giving the values 0 or 1 Use a digital tag for devices that can only be on or off such as push buttons Analog Range of values depends on the data type selected Use an analog tag to control or monitor a value for example a temperature or the position of a rotary control When you define an analog tag you must also fill in
378. nelBuilder 1400e L 98 a x File Screen Database Tools Window Help Lo 1400e Touch Screen Remote I O Private Tags PLC Communications amp System Hi Terminal Setup H PLC 1 0 Control 8 Information Message Window Messages Screens Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 4 6 Working with Editors Working in the Spreadsheet Undo Ctrl4 Z Redo Ctrl Cut Paste Ctrl V Duplicate Message Ctrl D Delete Message Del Insert Message Select All Ctrl A Fill Forward Ctrl F Sort Messages Validate F9 Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 In Form view you can edit only one record at a time using the Prev Previous and Next buttons to scroll through the records In Spreadsheet view in the Messages editors you can edit many records at once as described in Editing Selections later in this chapter In the Node Rack and Block editors you can click on a row in the spreadsheet to edit the record in the form For the Node Rack and Block editors you can t type entries directly into the spreadsheet Note The editors do not all operate in the same way The three Messages editors can do all the editing described in the remainder of this chapter The commands with an asterisk in the table below are commands you can use in the Node Rack or Block Editors You can edit records using the tools from the toolbar or commands from the Edit menu
379. ners to the nearest screen gridpoint Aligning objects left right and center m m a m a a a Select objects Align left a a a a Align center Align right Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 9 44 Creating Objects Aligning objects top middle and bottom Align top ee Align bottom Aligning objects to grid Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 Senc to Back Bring to Erant Align Lett Align Center Align Right Align Align Middle Align Bottom Align Center Points Align to Grid Space Horizontal Flip Vertical Horizontal Send to Back Bring to Erant Align Lett Align Center Align Bighi Allgn Top Align Michelle Align Bottom Align Center Points Align to Grid Space Vertical Space Horizontal Flip Horizontal Creating Objects 9 45 Spacing Objects Use the Space Vertical and Space Horizontal commands to space the objects vertically or horizontally so the center points of the objects are at equal distances from each other 1 Select the objects you want to space 2 Choose a space command from the Arrange menu This command Does this Space Vertical Places the centers of the selected objects an equal distance apart vertically Space Horizontal Places the centers of the selected objects an equal distance apart horizontally R EM m Centers are Ope separated by an equal eee vertical Select obj
380. nfigure the Alarm Global Controls the Alarm History screen the Alarm Message Window and the Alarm Status screen Use the Messages Alarm Messages editor to define all the alarm messages their corresponding and Audio Print Display Relay and Message to PLC indication options See Chapter 10 for more details Configuring Alarms 11 5 Alarms can be acknowledged by an operator pressing the Acknowledge button provided in the Multi line Alarm Message Window or in the Alarm History Screen They can also be remotely acknowledged by the PLC See details later in this chapter on configuring the different acknowledge options When an alarm is acknowledged the terminal does the following depending on how Alarms are configured removes the alarm from the Alarm Message Window records the acknowledged time and date in the Alarm History screen silences the alarm beeper de energizes the alarm relay prints the acknowledged alarm with its acknowledged time and date stamp sends the trigger value of the acknowledged alarm to the PLC You use three editors to configure alarms in PanelBuilder Application Untitled 1400e Touch Screen Remote 1 0 Private Tags E gt PLC Communications Communication Setup eee Nodes Scan Classes L RIO Racks RIO Block Transfer Files E gt System a Terminal Setup 4 Tag Database Alarms RH PLC 1 0 Control 8 Information Message Window f Messages Alarm Messages
381. ng messages 10 11 Filtering data in the Tag Usage Viewer 6 26 removing filter 6 28 Setting filters 6 28 Firmware target version 12 4 Firmware features Version 1 03 E 2 Version 2 E 2 Version 3 E 3 Version 4 E 3 Flipping objects 9 45 Floating point accuracy in expressions 7 4 Floating point data type 2 24 2 48 Folders adding tags 6 9 creating 6 7 deleting 6 9 digital tags 6 17 6 18 duplicating 6 9 nesting 6 4 6 8 opening multiple folders 6 8 using to group tags 6 4 working with 6 7 Font in information message window 14 4 Font sizes 9 50 Form S preadsheet editors using 4 3 Index 1 7 Formatting expressions 7 22 indenting 7 23 Formatting codes in messages 10 4 Forms using 4 3 Fractional racks See Racks partial Full access 2 16 Full racks See Racks full Function keys assigning 9 54 displaying in PanelBuilder 8 14 G Global controls message control 11 28 message handshake 11 28 message to PLC 11 24 PLC controlled audio 11 22 PLC controlled relay 11 23 PLC controlled silence alarm 11 22 silence alarms to PLC 11 22 Goto Configure Mode 9 8 Goto screen button 9 5 9 11 9 21 for calling up the Alarm History screen 11 30 11 34 Graphic images 9 5 9 8 9 29 as labels 9 34 exporting 9 31 importing 9 27 9 30 9 32 library 9 29 removing 9 28 9 31 Graphic objects See objects Grids changing default settings 8 12 screen 8 11 touch
382. ng the Alarm Message Window 11 35 About the Alarm Status Screen 11 39 Working with the Alarm Status Screen in the Terminal 11 40 Calling up the Alarm Status Screen from the Terminal 11 41 Viewing the Alarm Messages 11 41 Working in Display Active Alarms Mode 11 42 Working in Display All Alarms Mode 11 43 Working in PastAlarms Mode 11 43 About Alarm Quantity and Accumulated Time 11 44 Using the Alarm Status Screen Buttons 11 45 Resetting the Alarm Status Screen s QTY TIME 11 46 What Happens when the Operator Resets the QTY TIME 11 46 What Happens when the Terminal is OffLine 11 47 Configuring the Alarm Status Screen 11 48 About the Alarm History Screen 11 50 Working with the Alarm History Screen in the Terminal 11 50 Calling up the Alarm History Screen from the Terminal 11 50 Using Buttons on the Alarm History Screen 11 51 Configuring the Alarm History Screen 11 52 Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 toc xii Table of Contents Configuring Terminal Setup Chapter 12 Options About Terminal Setup 5 12 1 5 12 2
383. ng to the application from the communication definitions that is nodes scan classes racks and block transfer files to the tags and the screens is contained in one file This file has the extension pvc Communication and other information Link to tag database Screens PanelBuilder 1400e Application Defining Tags 6 31 Communication and other information Tags Screens The application file pvc When a tag database is part of the application file no other applications can access it If you are creating a single application or if none of the tags in your applications are common this is all you need Note An advantage of using a private tag database is that the application is self contained within the pvc file This simplifies moving the application complete with its tags to another machine or directory Important When you make changes to the tags in a private database the changes are not saved until you save the application The Shared Database If you are creating multiple PanelBuilder 1400e applications or if you are working on a PanelBuilder 1400e application and an RSView project you may want to share the tag database with more than one application When you convert a private database to a shared database the database is stored outside the application file This improves the speed of opening and saving a large tag database
384. not case sensitive your characters will be displayed as you typed them Spaces are not permitted Note The node name Unsolicited_Msgs is reserved for system use in DH applications and cannot be assigned to a node defined by the user It allows the terminal to support unsolicited messages to and from the PLC You cannot use a node with this name in ControlNet applications Tip Use a name that will help you to identify your programmable controllers when you are assigning tags later in your application For example you could name your programmable controllers according to their locations or according to the machine or part of the process they will be controlling or monitoring Type Select the type of programmable controller you are using from the drop down list The type of programmable controller determines the addressing syntax and range for all the tags with addresses on this node For ControlNet applications you can only select PLC 5 Enhanced Channel The Channel number is 1 by default The application network type determines this channel You cannot change this value This field maintains compatibility with RS View and provides future communication option expansion Station Type the address of the programmable controller You can use local and remote stations on bridged DH networks For station addressing syntax see the section DH Addressing in Chapter 2 Planning Applications For ControlNet applicat
385. nsure Consistency To help increase operator efficiency keep a consistent appearance between all the screens in an application Present the same pieces of information in the same place on each screen for example e titles e Goto Screen buttons local messages and ASCII display objects e time and date objects A screen template is a useful tool for ensuring consistency between screens To create a screen template 1 Use screen design worksheet to hand draw a screen template that contains the elements common to all or most screens Photocopy the 1000e 1200e or 1400e screen worksheet in Appendix A for this purpose Save the original for later use 2 Make a photocopy of the hand drawn template for each application screen Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 2 8 Planning Applications Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 3 Design each application screen on a copy of the screen template You can also design the screen template in PanelBuilder copy it each time you need to create a new screen and use it as your starting point for each new screen For more information see Chapter 8 Creating Screens Using Worksheets to Design Screens PanelBuilder and the Windows environment offer considerable flexibility for creating and changing application screens Nevertheless you may find it useful to plan the screens using screen worksheets before you begin developing the application Use the following worksheets t
386. nt Analog Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 C 14 Addressing Syntax Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Mnemonic Instruction Type Submember Range SPOR SP Out of Range Digital SWM Software A M Mode Digital TIE Tieback 96 Analog UPD Update Time Analog Message Mnemonics Mnemonic Instruction Type Submember Range AD Asynchronous Done Digital AE Asynchronous Error Digital CO Continuous Digital DATA Reserved Internal Use Analog 0 51 DLEN Done Length Analog DN Synchronization Done Digital EN Enable Digital ER Synchronization Error Digital ERR Error Code Analog EW Enable Waiting Digital NR No Response Digital RLEN Request Length Analog ST Start Transmission Digital TO Time Out Digital Block Transfer Mnemonics Mnemonic Instruction Type AD Asynchronous Done Digital AE Asynchronous Error Digital CO Continuous Digital DLEN Done Length Analog DN Done Digital EC Error Code Analog ELEM Element Number Analog EN Enable Digital ER Error Digital EW Enable Waiting Digital FILE File Number Analog IDX File Index Analog NR No Response Digital PLEN Program Length Analog Addressing Syntax C 15 Block Transfer Mnemonics continued Mnemonic Instruction Type RGS Rack Group Slot Analog RLEN Requested Length Analog RW Read Writes Digital ST Start Digital TO Time Out Digital TOUT Time Out Analog To
387. nteger di Long vide Addition Operand2 f either operand is data type Single the result is Single If neither operand is Single the result is Long Subtraction Operand2 f either operand is data type Single the result is Single If neither operand is Single the result is Long There is no space between the negation symbol and the operand while there are spaces before and after all the other arithmetic symbols Note Some arithmetic operations take precedence over others Operations with the highest precedence are evaluated first However Addition and subtraction have equal precedence and multiplication and floating point division have equal precedence over integer division Operations with equal precedence are evaluated in sequence from left to right Operands can include any combination of variables tags constants and operators that result in a number Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 7 10 Creating Expressions Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Example 1 Using Arithmetic Operations in Expressions A temperature probe used to monitor the temperature of an oven is connected to a 12 bit analog input card in the PLC but you want the PanelView terminal to display the temperature in degrees Celsius The temperature probe has a range of 100 C to 500 C A temperature of 100 C produces an analog input of 0 and a temperature of 500 C produces an analog input of 4 095 The
388. nterval and reset to 0 after the Remote Alarm Operation Hold Time expires State Transition Diagram for Alarm Message to PLC Control and No Handshaking Offline Mode Switch or Power Up Enter Run Mode Reset Control Tag Wait for Alarm with Msg to PLC Flag Alarm with Msg to PLC Operations Hold Time Expires Write message to PLC Reset Control Tag Start Control Display Clear Handshake Condition Mode Switch or Power Off Offline Mode Switch or Power Off Mode Switch or Power Off Wait for Wait for Alarm Operation Hold Control Delay Time to Expire Alarm with Msg to PLC Alarm with Msg to PLC Queue Msg Queue Msg Discard if queue full NL Discard if queue full Control Delay Over Set Control Tag Raise Handshake Condition Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Configuring Alarms 11 27 No Handshaking If the Message Control is not assigned the message is sent immediately to the PLC without handshaking to confirm that the PLC receives the message State Transition Diagram for Alarm Message to PLC No Control or Handshaking Offline Mode Switch or Power Up Enter Run Mode Reset Control Tag Wait for Alarm with Msg to PLC Flag Mode Switch or Power Off Alarm with Msg to PLC Write Complete Offline Mode Switch or Power Off Write Message to PLC Alarm with Msg to PLC Queue Msg Discard if queue full Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 11 28 Configuring Alarms Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998
389. nto PanelBuilder as an A I database Note To import or export a Taylor PoWORXPLUS database or a MODSOFT database see the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Modbus User Manual Publication Number 2711E 6 12 This manual is supplied as part of the optional Modbus Communications Kit Catalog Number 2711 E UMOD To import a database or csv tag file 1 Open the application to which you want to import a tag database 2 Select Import Export from the Database menu 3 From the list that is displayed choose the type of database to import 4 If desired select one of these options To make the import faster select the Skip Existing Tags button e To update existing tags from the tags being imported select the Update Existing Tags button Select Next A tA If you are importing a tag database as opposed to a csv format file specify a Tag Database Source or select the Down Arrow to display the list of sources and choose one from it If you are importing a csv tag file or a text database specify the file or choose the button and select the file from the Select File dialog box 7 Select Next 8 Select Finish To export a database 1 Open the application from which you want to export a tag database 2 Select Import Export from the Database menu 3 Select Export to PanelBuilder 1400e CSV Tag file and choose Next Defining Tags 6 37 default destination file name pvtags csv and
390. ntroller sees the PanelView terminal as a faulted I O rack In a DH or ControlNet application the terminal remains in the Active Node Table but does not respond to communications and cannot be accessed by other stations on the network To clear the fault switch the terminal to configure mode then back to run mode or cycle power to the terminal To ensure a safe recovery program the controller to return any machine or process to a safe state monitor the rack fault bit associated with the PanelView terminal s rack assignment For information on the rack fault bit table refer to your programmable controller documentation For additional information on programming the programmable controller for safety refer to your programmable controller documentation Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 2 4 Planning Applications Tips for Optimizing the Application DH and ControlNet Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 As you carry out the planning steps in the remainder of this chapter keep these tips in mind They can help you optimize your application s performance when it is running in the terminal Convert all static objects that is text lines rectangles ellipses wedges arcs and graphic images to wallpaper This will speed up the screen refresh rate on the active screen Use bitmaps sparingly If you use the same bitmap more than once ensure that each copy is the same size as the original This means that
391. o define screens and objects Screen Worksheet for 1000e Terminals Screen Worksheet for 1200e Terminals Screen Worksheet for 1400e Terminals Choose the worksheet that matches the Panel View terminal on which the application will run Both show the location of the terminal function keys relative to the screen Each worksheet can be used for designing either touch screen or keypad applications Screen Worksheet for PanelView 1200e Terminals Use this worksheet to plan application screens for PanelView 1200e keypad and touch screen applications The position of the touch cells is marked on the worksheet for you to use as a guide in positioning touch cell input objects The screen area is 640 by 480 pixels in size There is a 10 by 12 grid of touch cells the smallest size for a touch object is 64 by 40 pixels PanelBuilder sizes touch objects only in multiples of touch cells The position of the terminal function keys is marked on the worksheet for you to use as a guide in positioning function key input objects Objects can be placed anywhere on the screen they need not align to this grid Important objects can overlap but cannot be positioned off screen Planning Applications 2 9 Screen Worksheet for 1200e Terminals Application File Name Screen Number Screen Name 0 64 128 192 256 320 384 448 512 576 640 F17 F18 F19 F20 F21 1 F10 Fil F12 F13 F14 F15 F16
392. o object The PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Reference Manual explains each object in detail and describes how to configure them This section describes only the most common types of configuration These are assigning function keys to input objects on keypad applications configuring object states configuring list object states assigning tags and expressions to objects Note To minimize the size of the application file do not assign names to objects Names use one byte per character To open an object s configuration dialog box do one of the following select the object and choose Configure Screen Object from the Edit menu select the object and choose from the toolbar select the object and right click the mouse button place the pointer over the object and double click place the pointer over the object and press ENTER The options you can configure differ from object to object The following illustration shows the Configure Control List Selector dialog box Here you can choose between the two different types of Control List Selectors define different state values configure the object s buttons assign function keys to them and assign tags and expressions Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 9 54 Creating Objects Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Configure Control List Selector x Name Control List Type RAAR Cancel Initial State Edit States
393. o paste the contents of the clipboard or click on a single cell 4 Choose Paste from the Edit menu or from the toolbar This pastes the selection into the entire area you selected Or if you clicked on one cell only this pastes the selection into the area starting with the cell Copying and Pasting into Differently Sized Areas The area you copy doesn t need to be the same size as the area you paste into To copy information into a differently sized area 1 Select the area you want to copy 2 Choose Copy from the Edit menu or from the toolbar or press CTRL C 3 Select the area you want to paste into 4 Choose Paste from the Edit menu or from the toolbar or press CTRL V If you pasted a small selection into a larger area information is repeated If you pasted a large selection into a smaller area information is truncated Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 4 10 Working with Editors Messages only Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Sorting Entries in the Spreadsheet You can sort all or some of the entries in the spreadsheet numerically or alphabetically In the Messages editors if more than one column is selected to be sorted the Sort operation will proceed beginning with the left most selected column Any duplicate items are arranged according to the contents of the next columns The Rack editor is sorted numerically by the Rack column The Block editor is sorted numerically by the File Number
394. obal network of system solutions providers and the advanced technology resources of Rockwell s A Worldwide representation A NU 2 Argentina e Australia e Austria e Bahrain e Belgium e Bolivia e Brazil e Bulgaria e Canada Chile e China People s Republic of e Colombia e Costa Rica Croatia e Cyprus Czech Republic e Denmark e Dominican Republic e Ecuador e Egypt e EI Salvador e Finland e France Germany e Ghana e Greece e Guatemala e Honduras e Hong Kong Hungary e Iceland e India e Indonesia e Iran e Ireland e Israel e Italy eJ amaica eJ eJ ordan e Korea e Kuwait e Lebanon Macau e Malaysia e Malta e Mexico e Morocco The Netherlands e New Zealand e Nigeria e Norway e Oman e Pakistan e Panama e Peru ePhilippines e Poland e Portugal e Puerto Rico e Qatar e Romania e Russia e Saudi Arabia e Singapore e Slovakia e Slovenia e South Africa Republic of e Spain eS weden e Switzerland e Taiwan Thailand Trinidad e Tunisia e Turkey e United Arab Emirates United Kingdom e United States e Uruguay e Venezuela lt u TS Rockwell Automation Headquarters 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Rockwell Automation European Headquarters Avenue Hermann Debroux 46 1160 Brussels Belgium Tel 32 2 663 06 00 Fax 32 2 663 06 40 Rockwell Automation Asia Pacific Headquarters 27 F Citicorp Centre 18 Whitfield Road Causew
395. oduction to PanelBuilder An overview of PanelBuilder its editors and required and optional equipment Chapter 2 Planning Applications An outline of what you need to do before you create an application including an overview of the steps for building an application and how to plan for safety and optimal runtime performance This chapter also explains in detail the planning steps of documenting the process your application will control or monitor designing your screens and planning communications Chapter 3 Working with Applications Instructions for working with applications such as creating opening saving and closing applications Chapter 4 Working with Editors Instructions for working with dialog boxes and the form spreadsheet style editors used to configure an application Chapter 5 Defining Communications Instructions for defining PLC communications for Remote I O applications including selecting the controller and baud rate assigning racks and block transfer files and setting pass through communication parameters For DH and ControlNet applications the instructions include selecting the controller and baud rate and defining nodes and scan classes Chapter 6 Defining Tags Information about using the Tag Database editor to define tags Chapter 7 Creating Expressions Information about using the Expression editor to define expressions Preface 5 Chapter 8 Creating Screens Instructions for work
396. om colors BEB EEE BE EEE Define Custom Colors gt gt 6 Select the color you want 7 Choose OK Using the Touch Cell Grid for PanelView 1200e Applications Only The touch cell grid indicates the touch cells that are available on the Panel View 1200 terminal In 1200e touch screen applications all input objects such as push buttons automatically align themselves to the touch cell grid To show the touch cell grid 1 Choose Grid Settings in the View menu The Grid Settings dialog box appears Select the 1200e Touch Cell Grid checkbox You can t change the size of the touch cell grid Choose OK The touch cell grid appears on the application screen Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 8 14 Creating Screens Displaying Function Keys Keypad Applications Only Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 When you re creating application screens for keypad terminals you may want to align input objects to the function keys that are assigned to them PanelBuilder enables you to display the function keys for your keypad application screens To display the Function keys Ifyou have Super VGA resolution choose Maximize from the Control menu or in screen s title bar Ifyou have VGA resolution choose Zoom Out in the View menu The screen appears with the function keys displayed With Super VGA resolution the screen appears as in the following illustration Scr
397. omentary push button 9 5 NOT in expressions 7 17 Numeric data display 9 5 9 9 9 21 Numeric entry keypad 9 5 9 9 9 13 Numeric input cursor point 9 5 9 9 9 22 retain cursor on cancel 12 10 Numeric keypad enable button 9 6 9 10 9 22 Numerics 9 9 0 Object setup configuring 12 9 Objects addresses 2 19 aligning 9 43 arcs 9 5 9 12 9 21 9 33 arranging 9 40 ASCII display 9 5 9 7 9 21 Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 1 10 Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 ASCII input 9 5 9 7 9 21 assigning addresses 2 43 assigning function keys 9 54 assigning tags 9 61 assigning write expressions to 7 24 bar graph 9 5 9 7 9 21 blinking 9 49 boxes 9 6 9 21 buttons changing touch margins 9 50 changing border styles 9 48 changing colors 9 47 changing line styles 9 48 colors 9 47 commands 9 14 9 21 configure dialog box 9 53 configuring 9 53 control list selector with enter 9 5 9 7 9 21 control list selector without enter 9 5 9 7 9 21 copying 9 36 with addresses 9 36 without addresses 9 36 creating 9 20 9 22 cutting 9 36 date display 9 5 9 13 9 21 decrement value button 9 5 9 9 9 21 defaults 9 52 deleting 9 53 defined 9 1 deleting 9 37 drawing 9 20 duplicating 9 37 dynamic 9 2 read 9 2 write 9 2 editing 9 35 ellipse 9 5 9 21 ellipses 9 12 fill 9 48 flipping 9 45 Goto Configure Mode 9 8 goto screen button 9 5 9 11 9
398. on and expression that contains the error Tag error messages identify the tag name nature of the error expression and line of the expression containing the error A validation error also occurs if an optional write expression is assigned but the associated numeric input write tag is not assigned Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 7 28 Creating Expressions More Expression Examples Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Use the following examples to help create your own expressions Example 6 Arithmetic Operations Provide Numeric Display Calculations within PanelView Numeric Display Object 56 GOOD PART YIELD Expression GOODPART TAG TOTALPART TAG 100 Example 7 Logical Operators Provide Indicator Logic within PanelView Multistate Indicator Object State 0 State 1 cun Expression MTR1 tag AND NOT MTR1 OL tag OR MTR2 tag AND NOT MTR2 OL tag AND PRESS SW tag Creating Expressions 7 29 Example 8 Comparative Operators Allow Threshold Logic within PanelView Multistate Indicator Object State 0 State 1 State 2 Expression IF TEMP tag 100 THEN ELSE IF TEMP tag gt 100 AND TEMP tag 200 THEN ELSE IF TEMP_tag gt 200 THEN END IF Example 9 Numeric Write Expressions Allow Input to PLC Numeric Input Object Maintained P anelBuilder O bject State 0 State 1 32 deg m gt 0 deg C m PLC DEG C DEGF Numeric Write Expression IF PB tag 0 THEN ELSE IF PB tag 1 THEN
399. on the relay by setting the associated control value or you can allow the operator to control the relay from the terminal by assigning this control to a push button on a screen ATTENTION Do not use the alarm relay for control purposes All critical controls must be hard wired for safety Note The PLC Controlled Relay doesn t affect any alarm messages you may have configured to trigger the alarm relay These alarms will energize the relay regardless of whether you ve enabled or disabled the PLC Controlled Relay or whether this control value is 0 or non zero However if the relay is controlled in both alarm messages and by the PLC Controlled Relay the relay will not be reset unless both the trigger points are reset Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 11 24 Configuring Alarms Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Message to PLC When an alarm is triggered if the Message to PLC option is enabled for the alarm message and the control is assigned the Panel View terminal sends the message text to the PLC at the location of this control The maximum length of an alarm message is 80 characters The maximum length of a string tag for DH ControlNet or Remote I O applications is 82 characters The message will be sent to the PLC in the following format Bit 15 8 7 0 1st word 1st character 2nd character 2nd word 3rd character 4th character The flow of messages through this tag is controlled using the Message
400. onfiguring a Digital Tag A digital tag has two possible values at runtime 0 or 1 Use a digital tag wherever a toggle or Boolean function is needed 1 If the tag is part of a folder select the folder in the folder hierarchy The folder name appears in the Name field and is the first part of the tag name 2 Type a tag name If the tag is part of a folder type the name after the backslash V 3 For Type select Digital AB TTE TT ol Edi Ywa ag Homa fngin or prom Ct im Lahe iilii Snence T Deio Chor C benom io Lp Bei Adreea Search For Tag Data Source Ackiress 4 Fill in the fields as outlined below Security This field is present to maintain compatibility with RS View databases You cannot enter anything in the Security field Description Type a description of this tag up to 128 characters long Off Label and On Label These fields are present to maintain compatibility with RS View databases You cannot enter anything in them Defining Tags 6 17 Initial Value Enter an initial value of 0 or 1 for the digital tag When a tag is used with a PanelBuilder input object or function this initial value is written to the programmable controller when the application first executes For a PanelBuilder object with an init
401. ooting Version Control Reserved Keywords Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Appendix D 5 D 1 PanelBuilder Validation Errors D 3 Appendix E What Is Version Control E 1 Version Control and Application Validation E 1 Target Firmware Version vs Actual Firmware Version E 1 Version 1 03 Firmware Features E 2 Version 2 Firmware Features E 2 Version 3 Firmware Features E 3 Version 4 Firmware Features E 3 Version Control and Downloading Applications E 3 Version Control at the PanelView E 4 Appendix F Index Welcome to PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Preface Preface Welcome to Allen Bradley s PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Version 4 With this software you can create applications in the Microsoft Windows 3 1 or later operating system in Windows 95 and in Windows NT 4 0 You can use the PanelBuilder applications in Panel View 1000 1200 or 1400e terminals or PanelView 1200 Series F and later terminals that have been enhanced to MC catalog numbers PanelBuilder 1400e Version 4 provides expanded hardware support to allow you to create applications fo
402. operations logical operations Order of Precedence Arithmetic operations take precedence over comparison operations and comparison operations take precedence over logical operations Use parentheses to override the order of precedence Operations within parentheses are performed before operations outside the parentheses Operations within parentheses are performed according to the precedence rules Component Symbol Creating Expressions 7 5 The following list shows the order of precedence in descending order for all operators negation and floating point division integer division Mod and subtraction and lt gt and lt and gt and lt and gt Not And Or Xor See the section for each type of operation for more information For example see Arithmetic Operations later in this chapter for information about the order of precedence of individual arithmetic operators Other Expression Components You can also use these components in your expressions Description Braces Use braces to enclose tag names Use of braces is optional but required when tag names contain these ambiguous characters backslash period hyphen and underscore C If you do not use braces the ambiguous characters will be treated as expression language syntax rather than as part of the tag name For example there are tags called PUMP and PUMP 1 PUMP 1 will be treated
403. ork download control tags Node Editor to identify the type and address of the programmable logic controllers the application will communicate with Scan Class Editor to define the speed at which tags used in application will be scanned for new values The other two editors in the PLC Communications folder the RIO Racks and RIO Block Transfer Files editors are used exclusively for defining Remote I O communications The Configure Communication Setup dialog box has two tabs Terminal Communications and Network File Transfer In the Terminal Communications tab you specify the address of the PanelView terminal on the DH or ControlNet network If you are going to transfer the application between the development computer and the PanelView terminal using a serial Upload Download cable you do not have to specify anything in the Network File Transfer tab If you are going to transfer the application via the DH or ControlNet network you can specify the complete address for the PanelView terminal This address is used as the default terminal location when the application is downloaded over the network You should also assign network download control tags to facilitate the transfer of the application file Do this in the Network File Transfer tab Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 5 16 Defining Communications To open the Configure Communication Setup dialog box E PLC Communications Communication Setup oe Nodes
404. ou will be prompted to re enter the file name 3 To minimize the file size check the Compress field The file size doesn t shrink when you edit and save the file even if you ve deleted screens or removed bitmap images from the library Compressing saves fragmented files in as small a size as possible Compress has no effect on pvd files Note For large applications with many screens compressing the file can take a few minutes 4 Choose OK Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 3 10 Working with Applications Copying Applications Renaming Applications Validating Applications Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 To copy an application you can use the Save As command and save the application under another name See the previous section for more information You can also use the Windows Explorer in Microsoft Windows to copy the application The application is stored in a file of the same name as the application with a pvc file extension See your Microsoft Windows User s Guide for details on how to use Windows Explorer Tip To make a copy of an application with a shared tag database to move to another machine first convert the database from Shared to Private then copy the application Then only a single pvc file will need to be moved You can use the Save As option described previously to rename an existing application or you can use the Windows Explorer For details on using the Windows Explor
405. ou import into a screen Note You can resize symbols See Sizing Objects later in this chapter To create a symbol 1 Open the Select Symbol dialog box by doing one of the following choose Symbol from the Objects menu choose Creating Objects 9 27 Select Symbol Lx Current symbols DISTOWR BMP DISTOWRL BMP EXCHNGR BMP EXCHNGRL BMP FTRLIQD BMP Only imported images are available for selection To use Import an image thatis not in the Current symbols list import it as described below Cancel FTRLIQDL BMP FTRVACM BMP FTRVACHL BMP FURNACE BMP FURNACEL BMP didit Help Monochrome Bitmap 4 Select an image and choose OK The pointer changes to the active graphic tool Position the pointer where you want to place the symbol and drag the mouse to create the object s outline When you re finished release the mouse button You can assign different foreground and background colors and fill styles to monochrome graphic images See Changing Object Appearance later in this chapter To change a symbol 1 3 Double click or right click the symbol The Configure Symbol dialog box appears Click the Select Graphic Image button The Select Symbol dialog box appears Select a new symbol To import new symbols 1 In the Select Symbol dialog box choose Import Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 9 28 Creating Objects Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998
406. ou need the appropriate software to run the programmable controller You also need to write a PLC program for the programmable controller so it can interface with the PanelBuilder application You can enhance your system with the following equipment Serial Upload Download Cable RS 232 Use the Upload Download cable to transfer applications between the development computer and terminal If you have several terminals or want a spare cable you can order additional cables For PanelView 1200 1200e and 1400e terminals the cable is Catalog Number 2711 NC1 For PanelView 1000e terminals the cable is Catalog Number 2711 NC13 2711 NC14 or 2706 NC13 Introduction to PanelBuilder 1 7 Remote Keyswitch and RS 232 Port Assembly 1200 1200e 1400e Terminals Only All terminals have a Mode Select Keyswitch and RS 232 port on the back If this is difficult to access for PanelView 1200 1200e and 1400e terminals you can install the Remote Keyswitch and RS 232 Port Assembly Catalog No 2711 NC2 in a more convenient location Refer to the PanelView 1000e 1200e and 1400e Operator Terminals User Manual for more information Printer You can use any standard or serial printer supported by Microsoft Windows to print reports from the development computer To print graphics screen reports from PanelBuilder your printer must support graphics printing The Panel View terminal supports Epson FX 80 compatible printers for printing screens and
407. ove the mouse pointer to the field and click 5 Type the message text in the Message field next to the trigger value and press ENTER Creating Messages 10 7 To edit a message in the spreadsheet 1 Open the spreadsheet 2 Select the trigger value or message text you want to edit 3 Double click to activate the text insert bar or simply begin typing 4 Edit the message text or trigger value as you wish and press ENTER when you re finished To create a message in the form 1 Open the message editor by selecting the appropriate editor in the Messages folder or the tool from the toolbar 2 Open the form by checking Form in the View menu 3 If there are existing messages choose Next until you arrive at the first blank record 4 Select the Trigger Value field and enter a unique trigger value Note If you do not enter a trigger value the row number is the default trigger value 5 Select the Message Text field and enter the message text 6 Choose Accept CCLEC I E 7 Choose Next if you want to create another message To edit a message in the form 1 Open the form 2 Use the Prev or Next button to move to the message you want to edit 3 Edit the message text or trigger value 4 Choose Accept or press ENTER Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 10 8 Creating Messages Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Adding Audio Print Display Alarm Relay and Message to PLC Opt
408. p Defining Communications 5 35 Choose Yes to continue with the network conversion or choose No to stop the conversion If you continue any invalid station numbers will be changed to a default value of 0 For details on configuring an application for DH see Defining Communications for a Data Highway Plus or ControlNet Application earlier in this chapter After converting the application to DH you may need to change the Terminal Network Address on the Terminal Communications tab of the Configure Communication Setup dialog Gur linm J The Terminal Network Address remains unchanged by the conversion Ensure this value is still correct for your application on the network you are switching to if not change it The range is 0 to 77 octal For example if the Terminal Network Address for your ControlNet application was 25 decimal it will be 25 octal for your DH application In the Network File Transfer tab the PanelView Location Routing Address will be set to the Terminal Network Address Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Chapter 6 Defining Tags This chapter describes e tags and the tag database the importance of organizing tags creating tags in the Tag Database editor using the Tag Usage Viewer e sharing a tag database importing and exporting a tag database Important Plan the tag database before creating tags Using naming conventions and organizing
409. path are displayed 4 Choose Finish to complete the export or type a new destination file name and or path and then choose Finish Note If you import a database that contains the Unsolicited_Msgs node into a ControlNet application you must delete the node before you download the application Otherwise PanelBuilder will report a validation error CSV File Column Ordering When you convert a PanelBuilder database to a comma separated variable csv file or when you create a spreadsheet in third party software it should consist of the following columns Column Description A Tag Type A D S T B orF Analog Digital String Structure Block Folder B Tag Name Any legal tag name C Tag Description Text describing the tag D Read Only T or F use Specifies whether the tag is editable in the database E Data Source D E R 1 M S Device DDE Remote 1 0 Memory System F Security Code asterisk or letters A P use A P used by RS View only G Alarmed T or F not yet supported use F H Data Logged T or F not yet supported use F Native Type D U I L F B P and 1 8 Default Unsigned Integer Integer Long Floating Point Byte Bit Position Binary and 1BCD 8BCD J Value Type Lor F use F if scale offset or initial analog value uses decimal digits otherwise use L K Min Analog inimum analog value use 0 L Max Analog aximum analog
410. ple if you scan every five seconds for a change of state that might occur once an hour the entire system is needlessly burdened Conversely if you scan too slowly the system can t monitor value changes that might occur between scans e scan period of zero means tags are scanned as quickly as possible You can set foreground scan periods to zero but never set background scan periods to zero For foreground periods use zero sparingly because this setting can result in so much traffic that overall system communication slows down Set background scan periods slower than foreground scan periods Even if a screen isn t displayed the tags associated with the screen are still scanned at the background scan rate So keep the background rates infrequent enough so as not to slow down overall communication on the highway A background period of 60 minutes is not too slow because the necessary tags will be put on scan at the foreground rate when a new screen is displayed Name Foreground Background Planning Applications 2 43 Recording Scan Class Information In the bottom part of the Communications worksheet define how you want to configure each scan class Name The scan class name you want to assign to a particular node By default scan classes are named A through You can change these letters to any name up to 20 characters long The name can include letters numbers and the under
411. pplication pvc or terminal pvd file Both bmp and dxf images are exported as bmp images You can export a Graphic Image to another PanelBuilder application or a non PanelBuilder program using one of the following two methods copy it and paste it into the new PanelBuilder application See Cutting Copying and Pasting later in this chapter export it to a file and import the new image file in the new application or in a non PanelBuilder program Note To use a PanelBuilder Graphic Image in a non PanelBuilder program import the image s file into the program as described in that program s documentation Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 9 32 Creating Objects To export new graphic images 1 Open the Image Library dialog box by choosing Bitmap Image or DXF Image from the Import Export Graphic submenu on the Edit menu Close Import Current bitmap AGITATR BMP Remove Help Monochrome Bitmap 2 Select an image and choose Export Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Save As BEI File name Folders agitau bmp c ab pb1400e images isa agitatr_ bmp agitatrl bmp blower bmp blowerl_ bmp comprsr bmp comprsil bmp conveyr bmp conveyrl bmp Save file as type Windows Bitmaps bmi cA Cancel c Cy ab CX pb1400e images Network Drives 3 In the Save As dialog box select a path and file name for the image file and c
412. r alone to establish meaning Use high contrast color combinations such as yellow on blue Usability On keypad screens place button labels near their associated function buttons On touch screens don t place important buttons where they ll be blocked by a pop up window The user can t press a covered button For details on where windows appear refer to Chapter 11 Configuring Alarms and Chapter 12 Configuring Terminal Setup Options Planning Applications 2 7 The Panel View 1000 and 1400e touch screen terminals use analog resistive touch screens This allows input objects to be any size minimum 40 by 40 pixels and to be placed anywhere on the screen The analog resistive touch screen provides greater flexibility in screen design compared to Panel View 1200 and 1200e terminals PanelView 1200 and 1200e terminals use a touch matrix which requires that all input objects align with a touch grid ATTENTION Do not press multiple touch screen locations at the same time In the unlikely event that two or more touches occur simultaneously in the same horizontal or vertical line an input object located half way between the two touches could be activated This is inherent in the analog resistive touch screen technology used in PanelView 1000e and 1400e terminals Ensure there is always a clear way to move between screens especially if the programmable controller doesn t control the screen changes Use a Screen Template to E
413. r its station address and the timeout value Recording Node Information For each node fill in Node Name Name assigned to the node The name can be up to 40 characters long and can include letters numbers the dash and the underscore character _ Spaces are not permitted Tip Use a name that will help you to identify your programmable controllers when you are assigning tags later in your application For example you could name your programmable controllers according to their locations or the machine or part of the process they will be controlling or monitoring Note In DH applications the node name Unsolicited_Msgs is reserved for system use in DH applications It cannot be assigned to a node by the user You cannot use this node name for ControlNet applications PLC Type The type of programmable controller For DH applications specify one of the following PLC 2 via DH DH Bridge PLC 3 via DH DH Bridge e PLC 5 which includes the PLC 5 10 PLC 5 12 PLC 5 15 and PLC 5 25 e PLC 5 Enhanced which includes the PLC 5 11 PLC 5 20 PLC 5 30 PLC 5 40 PLC 5 60 and PLC 5 80 SLC 5 which includes the fixed I O SLC 5 SLC 5 01 SLC 5 02 and SLC 5 03 OS300 Direct DH e SLC 5 Enhanced which includes the SLC 5 03 05301 and SLC 5 04 Direct DH For ControlNet applications specify PLC 5 Enhanced to use the PLC 5 20C and PLC 5 40C Station Address The address that identifies the p
414. r a wider variety of environments terminals and networks Windows NT Compatibility PanelBuilder 1400e Version 4 has been enhanced to run on a 32 bit operating system specifically Windows NT 4 0 However PanelBuilder 1400e a 16 bit application may still run on the 16 bit platforms Windows 3 1 or later and Windows 95 ControlNet Station Addressing With PanelBuilder Version 4 you can now assign the station addressing on ControlNet from 1 to 99 Previously you could only assign addresses above 63 through the network setup Ethernet Pass Through Network users now have the capabilities of downloading or uploading PanelBuilder 1400e applications over an Ethernet network to a PanelView on a Remote I O network With the installation of an Ethernet network card in your PC you can develop your PanelBuilder applications program on an Ethernet network and download or upload to your PanelView terminals operating on a Remote I O network The Ethernet network card utilizes the PLC 5E as a pass through device enabling your application to download to the PanelView terminal Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 2 Preface Terminology Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 CD ROM Installation PanelBuilder Version 4 can now be installed from a CD ROM This not only reduces the number of disks required but simplifies the installation of PanelBuilder 1400e However for those who want disk sets they are available upon request
415. r expressions to Word triggered Alarm Triggers 1 In the Configure Alarms dialog box select the Global Controls tab 2 Double click Alarm Triggers or click Alarm Triggers and choose Assign Exprn Expression The Alarm Control Expressions dialog box appears Note Choose Assign Expression even if you want to enter a tag 3 Click on a row to enter the tag or expression To assign a tag choose Assign Tag The Tag Browser dialog box appears From this dialog box you can choose an existing tag by double clicking it or create a new one by choosing New Tag If you choose New Tag the Tag Editor dialog box appears For details on using the Tag editor see Other Methods of Creating Tags in Chapter 6 Defining Tags To assign an expression choose Assign Exprn Expression The Expression editor appears For details on using the Expression editor see Chapter 7 Creating Expressions 4 To assign multiple tags or expressions up to 50 click on the next available row and enter the new Tag or Expression repeating step 3 If additional rows are needed choose Insert Row To delete a row choose Delete Row 5 Select OK to return to the Global Controls dialog box Configuring Alarms 11 15 Acknowledge to PLC and Acknowledge Control The Acknowledge to PLC and Acknowledge Control controls are used together to inform the PLC when an alarm has been acknowledged and to send the acknowledged alarm s trigger value to the
416. r window shows the list of components which can be used to construct an expression You can double click any of the headings to collapse or expand the list The list is categorized as follows Construct List Constructs which are used to create an expression Constructs are used to create a set of alternative courses of action when a particular value is found in the object Dimension List Data types which are used when you create variables for use in expressions If you want to create a variable for use in an expression you must declare its name but declaring a data type for the variable is optional Miscellaneous Commands which may be used each on their own line anywhere in an expression Comparison List Comparison operators which are used for comparing values Logical List Logical operators which are used to include or exclude values based on Boolean logic Arithmetic List Operators for performing arithmetic Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 7 22 Creating Expressions Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 WP THEH ELSE Cac Boni thus Fer c B heih rr to Leraren Liri Wh nile rad I 00 mem TERI ru copy i pari The right hand side of the Expression Editor window is di
417. r write You can define up to 64 block transfer files Note Each block transfer file occupies one byte of discrete output which reduces the amount of available discrete I O Reducing PLC Addressing Requirements You can reduce PLC address requirements by multiplexing Multiplexing means using one screen object for more than one purpose depending on the state of a variable or using one address for multiple objects on different screens Planning Applications 2 19 Normally you won t need to multiplex objects because the Panel View terminal provides plenty of separate I O addresses plus the capability for block transfers and multiple racks But if your application requires extra memory you can multiplex momentary push buttons numeric display data and other objects Important Multiplexing increases the complexity of PLC programs which can outweigh the benefits of address space saved Use multiplexing with caution Planning Addresses After designing the screens for your application you know the types and numbers of objects you will need At this point you can plan the object addresses The addresses used throughout the application are defined in the tag database Each entry in the database is called a tag which is simply a symbolic name for an address The tag database provides a way to define all addresses in one place The same address need only be defined once no matter how many objects use the address To assign an addre
418. res that require you to click a secondary button refer to it as the right mouse button Selection Conventions This word or phrase Means Choose Execute a command from a menu or from a button in a dialog box or Help window Choose also means to double click an icon Choose OK Either click the OK button with the mouse or press Enter on the keyboard Select Either highlight the object or piece of text you want your next action to affect or select a specific dialog box option Click Position the mouse pointer on the object area or field and Click the left button once Double click Position the mouse pointer on the object area or field and click the left button twice quickly Right click Click the right mouse button Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 P 8 Preface Selection Conventions in Dialog Boxes Dialog boxes contain various features that require different selection conventions In the following Windows NT example the Configure Communication Setup dialog box is used to illustrate common dialog box features and selection conventions All screen captures in this manual reflect the Windows NT user interface Significant differences are highlighted wherever they occur Click to close the dialog box without saving changes Click to save changes and close the dialog box Click to cancel changes and close the dialog box Click to open online Help for this dialog Comligure Terminal
419. resistive touch screens This allows input objects to be any size minimum 40 by 40 pixels and to be placed anywhere on the screen The analog resistive touch screen provides greater flexibility in screen design compared to PanelView 1200 and 1200e terminals Panel View 1200 and 1200 terminals use a touch matrix which requires that all input objects align with a touch grid ATTENTION Do not press multiple touch screen locations at the same time In the unlikely event that two or more touches occur simultaneously in the same horizontal or vertical line an input object located half way between the two touches could be activated This is inherent in the analog resistive touch screen technology used in Panel View 1400 terminals Screen Worksheet for 1000e Terminals Application File Name Screen Number Screen Name 8 72 88 152 168 232 248 312 328 392 408 472 488 552 568 632 20 65 105 385 Notes 1 You can use this worksheet to align buttons you draw on the screen to keypad terminal function keys 2 The PanelView 1000e touch screen terminals use analog resistive touch screens This allows input objects to be any size minimum 40 by 40 pixels and to be placed anywhere on the screen The analog resistive touch screen provides greater flexibility in screen design compared to PanelView 1200 and 1200e terminals PanelView 1200 and 1200e terminals use a touch matrix which requires that all input objects align with a touch grid
420. ressions in this manual Registering Your Copy of PanelBuilder 1400e Available Documentation Preface P 3 To register your software mail the registration card from the front of this manual to this address Rockwell Software Software Services 6680 Beta Drive Mayfield Village Ohio 44143 or fax the card to 1 440 646 7701 Your PanelBuilder software comes with several types of documentation to meet your different needs Getting Started with PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Publication Number 2711E 818 guides you through setting up PanelBuilder 1400e and introduces you to the basics It includes a tutorial to give you hands on experience in working with a PanelBuilder application The PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows User Manual Publication Number 2711E 819 explains PanelBuilder in more detail and provides step by step instructions for planning creating and working with applications The PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Reference Manual Publication Number 2711E 820 provides detailed reference information for application screen objects The PanelView 1200 1400e Transfer Utility User Manual Publication Number 2711E 6 8 provides detailed instructions for transferring application files using the Transfer Utility Version 4 that comes with PanelBuilder 1400e Version 4 Context sensitive online help provides a quick reference for procedures or commands
421. riable names are case insensitive and cannot be reserved keywords See Appendix F Reserved Keywords for a list of reserved keywords Creating Expressions 7 7 Note Assigning a data type to the variable is optional If you do not assign a specific data type the variable will be the Variant data type You can assign these data types to variables Boolean Byte Integer Long Single and Variant See Expression Data Types earlier in this chapter for more information about data types For example DIM variablel variable2 AS INTEGER declares variable as a variable of type Variant variable2 is declared as type Integer You can assign a value to a local variable The value can include any combination of keywords variables tags constants and operators that result in a number Use this syntax to assign a value to a local variable Variablename Value You can assign different values to the same variable at different places in the expression PanelView always uses the most recent assignment which supersedes earlier assignments 669 Important You also use the equal sign to perform the equality operation To avoid confusion between the two operations always place parentheses around the operands when you wish to perform the equality operation on a variable Otherwise PanelView may treat the operation as an assignment to the variable See Examples 2 and 3 later in this chapter for samples of how to decl
422. rksheets as you plan screens and objects Once you ve completed the screens and decided which objects you ll use you can plan the object addresses Addressing is discussed later in this chapter Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 2 6 Planning Applications Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Tips for Planning Application Screen Designs Practising good screen design principles ensures that your application will be easy to use When planning keep these important principles in mind Consistency Be consistent with your use of symbols and color Be consistent with button labels and button placement When you design several screens keep the same kinds of buttons in the same positions For example if you have a Start button in a certain position on one screen don t put a Stop button in the same position on the next screen Clarity Use easily recognizable symbols For example use the conventional symbols provided as Graphic Images to draw objects such as tanks and valves Don t overload the screen with too much information Use standard clear terminology and avoid abbreviations or acronyms that the user may not understand Use colors with recognizable meanings For example in North America red and green often signify stop and start keep color meanings consistent by assigning red only to Stop buttons and green only to Start buttons Note Because some people are color blind don t rely on colo
423. rm Message Window can display up to 20 single height or 10 double height messages Alarm Message Panel displays a single message up to 6 lines long at the top or bottom of the screen It can also display the message trigger value About Background Alarms Display of the Alarm Message Window is optional If the Alarm Message Window is disabled alarms will continue to be triggered in the background They will still cause audio alarms trip the alarm relay and send alarm messages to the printer PLC and Alarm History screen However the Alarm Message Window will not be displayed Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 11 30 Configuring Alarms Using the Alarm Message Window in the Terminal Single line Alarm Message Window top of screen Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Where the Alarm Message Window appears on the screen and how it appears depends on whether it s a Single line Multi line or Alarm Message Panel Single line Alarm Message Window The Single line Alarm Message Window displays the most recent alarm message only with the time and date of occurrence and the alarm state It can appear at the top or bottom of the terminal s screen depending on how you configure it in the Message Window tab of the Configure Alarms dialog box This window has no buttons and allows the current application screen s buttons to remain active for operator input Tip Because you won t be able to ca
424. rminal The address you specify depends on the type of network you are using e Ifthe PLC and the development computer are on the same ControlNet network specify the address of the PLC the terminal is connected to It must be a decimal number between 1 and 99 e Ifthe PLC and the development computer are on the same DH network the PanelView Location Routing Address you specify is the PLC s DH station address It will be an octal number between 0 and 77 Ifthe PLC and the development computer are on the same Ethernet network the PanelView Location Routing Address you specify is the PLC s Ethernet station address It will a number in the form of www xxx yyy zzz where www xxx yyy and zzz are each between 000 and 255 Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 5 6 Defining Communications Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 e Ifthe PLC and the development computer are on different bridged DH networks you must specify a remote station address for the programmable controller Specify both the PLC s station address and the bridge or bridges addresses If you specify a Panel View Location Routing Address on download of the application this address will be used as the default Panel View Location Routing Address in the Setup Download dialog This saves you from having to specify the terminal s location each time the application is downloaded You can change the default if you wish If you don t specify a Panel View Loc
425. rogrammable controller s location on the network Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 2 38 Planning Applications DH ControlNet DH and ControlNet Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 For DH applications if the node is on the same highway as the PanelView terminal it is a local node If the node is on a bridged highway it is a remote node For details on determining the station address see DH Addressing below For ControlNet applications valid station addresses are between and 99 decimal Note The PanelView terminal communicates with local ControlNet stations only No ControlNet bridge devices are currently available to support remote communication Important For versions 1 0 and 1 25 of ControlNet the PanelView Terminal Network Address should not be set to 1 Timeout The number of seconds the PanelView terminal should wait before reporting a communication error Three seconds is usually enough and is the default when a new node is created Enabled For DH and ControlNet applications if a node is enabled the terminal will communicate with the device at the node If the node is not enabled the terminal will not communicate with the device Instead the PanelView terminal stores values to be written to the device This allows system designers to test their applications without setting up communications and to avoid communication errors at the terminal during testing DH Addressing
426. rol name and choose Assign Exprn Expression This button is dimmed if you select a control to which only tags can be assigned The Expression editor appears For details on using the Expression editor see Chapter 7 Creating Expressions To unassign a tag or expression 1 Open the object s configuration dialog box using one of the methods described previously 2 Click the control name and choose Unassign If you unassign a tag the tag remains in the database but is no longer assigned to the option If you unassign an expression the expression is lost Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Creating Objects 9 63 Viewing Assigned Tags You can view the tags used in a screen by selecting Screen Tag Usage Viewer from the Screen menu or by selecting Tag Usage Viewer from the Application Window s Tools menu For details see Using the Tag Usage Viewer in Chapter 6 Defining Tags Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 What Are Messages ES Messages amp Alarm Messages e Information Messages E Local Messages Chapter 1 0 Creating Messages This chapter tells you about the different kinds of messages how messages are triggered creating and editing messages using formatting codes in your messages adding options to alarm messages importing and exporting messages validating and updating messages Messages keep the operator informed about the status of the operation when the application is running M
427. rollers except the fixed 1 0 SLC and the SLC 5 01 EM Empty Digital EU Enable Unloading Digital Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Addressing Syntax C 13 PID Mnemonics Mnemonic Instruction Type Submember Range ADDR Address of Master Loop 96 Analog 0 3 BIAS Output Bias 96 Analog CA Control Action Digital GE Cascaded Loop Digital Cr Cascaded Type Digital DATA Reserved Internal Use Analog 0 13 DB Deadband Analog DO Derivative Of Digital DVDB Deviation Alarm Deadband Analog DVN Deviation Alarm Analog DVNA Deviation High Alarm Digital DVP Deviation Alarm Analog DVPA Deviation Low Alarm Digital EN Enable Digital ERR Error Analog EWD Error Within Deadband Digital PID Initialized Digital KD Derivative Time Analog Kl Integral Gain Analog KP Proportional Gain Analog Input Range Maximum Analog AXO Output Limit High Analog AXS Setpoint Maximum Analog Input Range Minimum Analog NO Output Limit Low Analog NS Setpoint Minimum Analog 0 Mode Digital OLH Output Limit High Digital OLL Output Limit Low Digital OUT Output Analog PE PID Equation Digital PV Process Variable Analog PVDB PV Alarm Deadband Analog PVH PV Alarm High Analog PVHA PV High Alarm Digital PVL PV Alarm Low Analog PVLA PV Low Alarm Digital PVT PV Tracking Digital SO Set Output Analog SP Setpoi
428. ry 1998 2 34 Planning Applications Carrying Out Your Plan Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Using the Remote I O Tags and Rack Assignments worksheets as a reference define the following Block Transfer File Number Specify the file number B1 to B64 e Size Specify the number of words required 1 to 64 e Rack Specify a rack number e Word Assign the word that will contain the block transfer control byte e Byte Choose Hi for high control byte or Lo for low control byte e Usage Specify whether the control address is for a block transfer read or block transfer write e Access Specify full or listen only access as determined by the rack definition Assigning Pass Through The Pass Through option provides a way to transfer applications remotely to and from the PanelView terminal using the DH and Remote I O ControlNet and Remote I O or Ethernet and Remote T O networks You can assign the Pass Through address using PanelBuilder enabling you to transfer an application file without taking the PanelView terminal out of Run mode The Pass Through block transfer file uses a control byte in the output image table which cannot be shared with any other block transfer file or discrete tag The control byte must be defined on a rack that has full access Mark the Rack number Word and Byte on the Block Transfer File Worksheet If you are using an SLC 5 04 device also note the SLC Slot number in the Rack colum
429. ry 1998 D 4 Troubleshooting Validation Error Message Cause What to Do Number of visible states in scrolling object and cursor list must match The number of visible states does not match Change the number of visible states to match Object at position on screen has unassigned State values A state value is undefined Ensure that all state values for the object are assigned and unique A cursor list must exist if scrolling objects are used on the screen There is no cursor list on the screen Create a cursor list object or remove the scrolling object A cursor list and all the scrolling objects it controls must all be grouped together apart from other objects Cursor list object and its object lists must be in a single group Select the cursor list and all scrolling objects it controls and group them Cursor list can only be grouped with scrolling objects A non scrolling object is grouped with the cursor list Remove any non scrolling list objects from this group The group containing the cursor list cannot be embedded within another group The group with the cursor list and object lists is grouped with other objects Ungroup the scrolling objects from other objects before grouping them together Only one ASCII input object is permitted per screen More than one ASCII input objectis on the Screen Remove all but one ASCII input objects Only one cursor lis
430. s The Alarm Status screen displays active and inactive alarm states from the programmable controller the number of times a point has gone into alarm and the total amount of time a point has been in alarm The operator can choose to view all the alarm messages that were created in the Alarm Messages editor or only the active alarms or only the past alarms Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 11 40 Configuring Alarms Working with the Alarm The following sections explain how the operator can work with the Status Screen in the Alarm Status screen when the application is running Terminal The following figure shows an example of the Alarm Status screen Siman 07 27 49 120136 Aim Trigger Dey On Meseaqe Law wWTane Reset q725 81 AM 12711596 2 The Alarm Status Screen provides the following information about each alarm This field Contains this information Alm Trigger Alarm The alarm trigger value Trigger Qty Alarm Quantity How many times the alarm has gone into the alarm state This field can display a maximum number of 9999 alarms Acc Time Accumulated The total amount of time each alarm has been on or in alarm Time On Alarm State Whether alarms are active ON indicated by an asterisk or inactive OFF indicated by a blank Message The alarm message text associated with the alarm message number The quantity and accumulated t
431. s and to be placed anywhere on the screen The analog resistive touch screen provides greater flexibility in screen design compared to Panel View 1200 and 1200e terminals PanelView 1200 and 1200e terminals use a touch matrix which requires that all input objects align with a touch grid ATTENTION Do not press multiple touch screen locations at the same time In the unlikely event that two or more touches occur simultaneously in the same horizontal or vertical line an input object located half way between the two touches could be activated This is inherent in the analog resistive touch screen technology used in Panel View 1000 and 1400 terminals Important objects can overlap but cannot be positioned off screen Planning Applications 2 11 Screen Worksheet for 1400e Terminals Application File Name Screen Number Screen Name 15 65 95 145 175 225 255 305 335 385 415 465 495 545 575 625 20 F17 65 85 F18 130 150 F19 195 215 F20 260 280 F21 325 F10 Fil F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 Notes 1 You can use this worksheet to align buttons you draw on the screen to keypad terminal function keys 2 The PanelView 1400e touch screen terminals use analog resistive touch screens This allows input objects to be any size minimum 40 by 40 pixels and to be placed anywhere on the screen The analog resistive touch screen provides greater flexibility in screen design compared to PanelView 1200 an
432. s a maximum of 5000 tags Review your tags and remove any that are not being used Initial Value Offset or Scale factor is bad Ensure de scaled tag start value fits within address The analog tag initial value is too large to fit nto the specified address Check the tag values or change the address and or data type to include more bits The state value for the object s initial state is too large to fit into the specified address Refer to Chapter 6 Defining Tags The de scaled initial value or starting value for analog tags that have offset or scale factor 5 too large to fit into the specified address Refer to Chapter 6 Defining Tags Target Firmware Version Exceeded The object configuration you have defined is not compatible with the Target Firmware Version Reconfigure the application for compatibility with the current Target Firmware Version or raise the Target Firmware Version of the application See Appendix E Version Control for more information The image for this object is corrupt Please re import it Corrupted image file Re import the image file Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Validation Error Message Cause Troubleshooting D 5 What to Do The associated write tag must also be assigned if Optional Write Expressions are used There is no assigned write tag associated with the optional write expression used Assign the write tag asso
433. s codes without changing the application For information on assigning and changing access codes on the terminal refer to the PanelView 1000e 1200e and 1400e Operator Terminals User Manual Chapter 5 Configuring PanelView Operator Terminals Before closing your application screen you should ensure that there are no errors such as overlapped input objects or objects that are off screen gt Note Although you can close and save screens that contain validation errors you can t download the application file if the screens contain errors If you try to download with errors present the application s Validation Results window appears To validate a screen New Close Screen Settings Screen Security Screen Validate Screen Tag Usage Viewer F5 1 Choose Screen Validate from the Screen menu or press ro rit PanelBuilder checks your screen for errors When the validation is finished a Validation Results window appears listing any errors in the screen and providing the pixel coordinates for the Exit object causing the error If there are no errors the Validation Results window has a check mark 4 alidation Results for Screens SAMPLE 1 MAIN of x Total number of errors 2 Update Screens a total of 2 errors were found Tag Usage Viewer 4 MAIN 2 errors present 1 Normally Open Momentary Push Button at 357 24 part of th Pri 2 Di
434. s immediately above or below the first selected folder click a folder and Ctrl click other folders anywhere in the hierarchy 2 Press Enter The tags in the selected folders are displayed in the spreadsheet gt Defining Tags 6 9 Adding Tags to a Folder Once you ve created a folder you can add tags to it 1 Select a folder in the folder hierarchy The folder name is displayed in the Name field of the form 2 After the backslash V type the new tag name Note To add a tag to another folder without closing the current folder type the name of the tag with the full folder path Duplicating a Folder When you duplicate a folder the folder and any folders or tags within it are also duplicated Make sure that you do not exceed the 40 character limit for folder path and tag name when you duplicate nested folders To duplicate a folder and its tags 1 Select the folder in the hierarchy 2 Choose Duplicate Folder from the Edit menu Important Be sure to choose Duplicate Folder rather than Duplicate Duplicate only duplicates individual tags Duplicate Folder 3 Type a name for the new folder 4 Choose OK Deleting a Folder 1 Select one or more folders in the hierarchy 2 Choose Delete Folder from the Edit menu The folder and all folders and tags within it will be deleted Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 6 10 Defining Tags Using the Spreadsheet Viewer Insert Row Publication 27
435. s sent the procedure begins over with the first state s value being sent Creating Objects 9 11 Scales Scales consist of lines with tick marks used to provide an illustrative measurement scale beside Bar Graphs and Trend objects You can create vertical and horizontal scales Screen Print Button Screen Print Button allows the operator to print the application screen and pop up windows currently displayed on the terminal Screen Selectors Goto Screen Button is configured to change the screen selection to another application screen on the terminal When the operator presses this button the assigned screen appears Return to Previous Screen Button switches back to the previous screen Screen Keypad Enable Button pops up the Numeric Entry Scratchpad When the operator enters a screen number the screen with that number appears This object is available only for keypad applications Screen List Selector allows an operator to change to another screen by choosing a screen from a list Screen Select Keypad Large and Small enables the operator to change to another screen by entering the screen s number This object is available only for touch screen applications Scrolling List Scrolling List objects are like scrolling versions of Control List Selectors The number of states is not limited by the number of lines on the screen A Scrolling List consists of a Cursor List and any number or combination of Local Message Multi
436. s you can access The range of values is 0 to 27 1 where n is the number of bits For example the range of values for 16 bits is 0 to 65535 You can position a binary data address anywhere within a PLC word The binary data address can extend into the next word but cannot extend past the end of a rack assignment or block transfer file The remaining bits in that word on either side of the binary data address can be used for other tags with other data types The following table shows the relationship between binary states and bits This number of binary states Requires this many bits 1 2 3 4 5 8 9 16 17 32 33 64 65 128 co DD Oo A w N e 129 256 Planning Applications 2 25 This number of binary states Requires this many bits 257 512 9 513 1024 10 1025 2048 11 2049 4096 12 4097 8192 13 8193 16384 14 16385 32768 15 32769 65536 16 Bit Position This data type is a contiguous bit string The position of the least significant on bit in the bit string determines the value of the tag The number of bits required depends on the maximum number of states Use this formula to determine the number of bits an object requires Number of bits Maximum State Value Minimum State Value This data type can also be used for objects controlled by PLC outputs For example you could configure a Multistate Indicator to have 12 states with state values 0 to
437. sages 10 1 How Messages Are 10 2 Creating and Editing 10 3 Guidelines for Creating and Editing Messages 10 3 Using Formatting Codes in Your Messages 10 4 Version 2 or Later Applications 10 5 Creating New Message 10 6 Adding Audio Print Display Alarm Relay and Message to PLC Options to Alarm Messages 10 8 Importing Messages 10 9 Importing Messages Using the 10 9 Importing Existing Message Files 10 10 Guidelines for Importing Message Files 10 10 Formatofthe Message File 10 11 Expornmg Messages sesin epson EO dob tut Vance S ed 10 13 Validating Messages 10 13 Updating Messages PTT 10 14 Closing tne Messages Editor 10 15 Configuring Alarms Chapter 11 What Alarms 11 1 How Are Alarms Triggered 11 2 Alarm Indication Options 11 2 How Are Alarms Displayed 11 3 How Are Alarms Acknowledged 11 5 Configuring 20222 92859 ara
438. score character Spaces are not permitted Foreground The rate at which tags used in the current screen in the Alarm and Information windows in foreground and background trends and for the PLC I O control options are updated Specify the speed in seconds or in fractions of a second Background The rate at which tags used in all screens not displayed are updated Specify the speed in seconds or in fractions of a second Planning Addresses After defining the screens for your application you know the types and number of objects you will need With the node and scan class definitions complete you are ready to plan the object addresses For each screen use one or more Device Tags worksheets to record tag information for each dynamic object Also use the Device Tags worksheets to record information about Alarm and Information windows and PLC I O Control options These items are not specific to particular screens so use a separate worksheet for them Guidelines for Organizing Tags to Optimize DH Network Performance Group tags as closely together as possible consideration for optimizing network traffic relates to the addresses PLC data file addresses that are assigned to tags Panel View reads or writes data in packets A packet can contain up to 119 words of data depending on the type of PLC The data in a packet cannot cross data file boundaries For example the data cannot be from N7 and N10 only from one or
439. screen The default background color is black To change a screen s background color 1 Open the Screens folder and open the desired screen 2 Choose Screen Settings from the Screen menu The Screen Background Color dialog box appears 3 Select the color you want for your screen background from the Background Color drop down list Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 8 8 Creating Screens Assigning Security Access to Screens Screen New Ctrl N Close Ctrl F4 Screen Settings Screen Security Screen Validate F9 Screen Tag Usage Viewer F5 Exit Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Screen Background Color x Background Color Cancel Help 4 Choose OK The screen s background color changes to the color you selected All new screens you create will have the new color selected automatically You may want to prevent some operators from accessing certain application screens You can control operators access by assigning a security classification to these screens Up to sixteen operators can be given access to each screen Important You can t assign security to the Alarm History or Alarm Status screens since these must be available to every operator Although you can assign security to the Application Startup screen and to screens requested by the programmable controller any operator will be able to view these screens To assign security access
440. ser can silence and acknowledge alarms from the multi line Alarm Message Window AM DeLee Salely LE 15 Salely bar number Hoter 12 is mr circu The Alarm History screen provides a record of the last 128 alarms that have occurred and is maintained between power cycles on the PanelView terminal The user can silence and acknowledge alarms from this screen as well You can upload the alarm history file from the PanelView terminal to a development computer using the PanelView 1200 1400e Transfer Utility For more information see the PanelView 1400e Transfer Utility User Manual Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 11 4 Configuring Alarms The Alarm Status screen provides a list of all the alarm messages in the application with an indication of whether they are active or inactive The information displayed on the Alarm Status screen is retained across power cycles of the Panel View terminal Aarm tatus Ufa 1271 Alm Trigger Oty Ace Time in Message 5 AM 1201396 Post Detailed information about configuring each of these methods of displaying alarms is provided later in this chapter Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 How Are Alarms Acknowledged Configuring Alarms Use the System Terminal Setup editor to set up Remote Alarm Timing parameters See Chapter 12 for more details Use the System Alarms editor to co
441. sfers information to and from the PLC through a control byte in the discrete output space If you don t have much rack space you can create up to 64 block transfer files Block transfer files give you more input and output space but are not as fast as using discrete I O Each PanelView terminal can have up to 64 block transfer files up to 64 words in length Block transfer files can be defined as either read or write files You can choose the racks and modules that the block transfer control bytes will occupy and specify the size of the file Each block transfer file requires one byte 8 bits or 1 2 word of discrete output on the PLC to control it You must choose which byte in the PLC word will support each block transfer Once you ve assigned a block transfer file to a byte you cannot assign a discrete address or the Pass Through file to that output byte A single control byte can control both a block transfer read and a block transfer write Use block transfer file addresses for objects windows and PLC I O Control options Note If you are using floating point data in your application you need to define one or more block transfer files The PanelView terminal references these addresses according to block transfer file number B1 to B64 word number 0 to 63 bit number 0 to 15 Important SLC 5 02 and some other PLCs do not support block transfer file addressing For more information see the applicable programm
442. signing to objects 9 61 block 6 2 configuring 6 18 configuring type 6 13 converting 5 26 converting from Remote 1 0 to ControlNet 5 28 5 35 copying between applications 8 4 creating 6 1 6 23 other methods 6 23 data sources 6 2 6 20 data types in expressions 7 4 defined 6 1 described 2 19 digital 6 2 configuring 6 16 in expressions 7 4 duplicating 6 11 editing 6 11 grouping with folders 6 4 initial value 2 27 9 3 naming conventions 6 4 PanelBuilder 1400e 6 3 6 6 nesting folders 6 4 6 8 opening multiple folders 6 8 organizing 6 3 6 4 planning 2 19 read tags 6 2 recording the address 2 27 2 50 renaming 6 30 scanning 2 42 selecting in the tag database 6 6 string 6 2 configuring 6 17 types 2 23 2 47 6 2 updating values of 5 24 using the Tag Usage Viewer 6 25 viewing in a folder 6 8 write tags 6 2 Target firmware version 12 4 Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 1 16 Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 defined E 1 specifying 12 4 Technical support services 10 Templates 8 3 screen 2 7 Terminal setup options about 12 1 configuring 12 1 Terminals selecting type 12 2 types required 1 2 1 3 Testing applications 2 2 Text 9 6 9 12 9 21 changing appearance 9 50 creating 9 24 editing 9 25 extended characters 9 25 inner text 9 24 arranging 9 46 labels 9 34 sizes 9 50 underlining 9 50 Time and date in PanelView terminal dat
443. so print the Validation Results window Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 10 14 Creating Messages Updating Messages Update Messages Ctrl U Close Ctrl F4 Import Message File Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 While you are creating messages you should update save them from time to time When you close your message editor you are prompted to save your messages PanelBuilder automatically validates your messages before updating them To update messages 1 Choose Update Messages from the File menu from the toolbar or press CTRL U If there are no errors a message informs you that the messages have been updated If there is an error in your messages a dialog box informs you of the error 2 Follow the steps of the previous section for validating your messages 3 Update your messages again A message informs you when the messages are updated Your messages must be error free before you can update them or close the message editor Important If you close your application without saving it the changes you made to your messages will be discarded even though you updated them Save your application frequently For details on saving the application see Chapter 3 Working with Applications Creating Messages 10 15 Closing the Messages To close the editor Editor 1 Choose Close from the File menu or double click the control box of the editor Update Messages Ctrl U Close Ctrl
444. splay at 257 184 overlaps a button or a trend panel Prnt Tags errors found Print Setup Help Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 8 10 Creating Screens You can print the error report by choosing Print in the dialog box or you can leave this dialog box open while you re making corrections to your screen 2 Make all necessary corrections to your screen Consult PanelBuilder Validation Errors in Appendix D Troubleshooting to help correct errors in your application that were caught in the screen validation gt Tip With no objects selected move the pointer over the screen The coordinates of the pointer will be displayed in the status bar This will enable you to find problem objects quickly 3 When you ve finished making changes choose Update in the dialog box or press F9 to check whether you ve fixed the errors 4 When you ve fixed all errors choose Close Viewing the Tags Used in a To see which tags have been assigned to the various objects in a Screen screen use the Tag Usage Viewer for Screens The Viewer has search and filter functions so you can choose which tag information is displayed Tag Usage Viewer for Screens T14C7DHP 10 Tank PID OF x Spreadsheet Operations Search Parameters C Filter In Column Search Direction Down Column C Across All Rows _ lassceseiregiends ter vratiregtope Rods scen configurator _ screenPom Screen bject UsageDescrip 4 1
445. ss rack and block transfer file definitions needed by the tag exist Specifying Device as the Data Source Use the information on the Device Tags Worksheets to fill in the tag addresses 1 Choose Device Data Source Device DDE Memory Remote 1 0 Node Name Unsolicited Msgs Scan Class pL Address The screen defaults to Node Name Unsolicited Msgs and Scan Class A and you must make the changes as outlined in the next step Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 6 22 Defining Tags Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 2 The node is the programmable controller this tag addresses In the Node Name field do one of the following node name Double click in the Node Name field to open the Add Edit Node dialog box If the field is empty you can create a new node definition if the field contains the name of an existing node you can edit that node s definition Choose E to open a selection list and select a node name For information about configuring nodes see Chapter 5 Defining Communications Select a scan class For information about configuring scan classes see Chapter 5 Defining Communications In the Address field type the tag s physical memory location in the PLC Note For Device block tags the address is the starting address for the block The address must start on an element boundary sub element starting addresses are no
446. ss to an object assign a tag or assign an expression that manipulates the value of one or more read tags before displaying the result on the PanelView terminal For information about expressions see Chapter 7 Creating Expressions Using Worksheets to Plan Addresses Use the following worksheets to keep track of the objects and the amount of address space being used Appendix A contains sample worksheets Fill them in at the same time Remote I O Tags Worksheet Use the Remote I O Tags worksheet to record information about all dynamic objects Dynamic objects are those that communicate with the PLC For a list of dynamic objects see Chapter 9 Creating Objects Discrete I O Usage Worksheet Use this worksheet for discrete file addresses Fill it in as you fill in the Remote I O Tags worksheet to keep track of free and allocated PLC I O addresses Block Transfer File I O Usage Worksheet Use this worksheet for block transfer file addresses Fill it in as you fill in the Remote I O Tags worksheet to keep track of free and allocated PLC I O addresses Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 2 20 Planning Applications Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Once you have filled in the previous three worksheets use the next two worksheets to complete your address planning Rack Assignments Worksheet Use this worksheet to keep track of your rack assignments Block Transfer File Worksheet Use this worksheet to define
447. sses planning steps and guidelines in detail The later chapters of this manual provide instructions for creating and downloading the application The chapters are organized in the order you use them to create your application Follow these steps to build your application 1 2 Plan your application as described in this chapter Create the new application as described in Chapter 3 Working with Applications Then read Chapter 4 Working with Editors for more information about how to work in PanelBuilder A Configure the communications for the application This includes defining the nodes and scan classes for a DH or ControlNet application and the racks and block transfer files for a Remote I O application See Chapter 5 Defining Communications B Define all the tags and expressions you will need throughout the application See Chapter 6 Defining Tags and Chapter 7 Creating Expressions C Create the application screens and objects See Chapter 8 Creating Screens and Chapter 9 Creating Objects D Create the messages if applicable See Chapter 10 Creating Messages E Configure the Alarm screens and controls if applicable See Chapter 11 Configuring Alarms F Configure the options for how the application appears and functions at the PanelView terminal and how it interacts with the PLC See Chapter 12 Configuring Terminal Setup Options and Chapter 13 Configuring PLC I O Control Options Publication 2711E 81
448. st be in this format FFF nnnn ttt ttt CR this is a comment FFF alarm option alarm messages only A audio P print R relay Include A P or R only if you want the option to be Yes Display is automatically set to Yes and Message to PLC is set to No but you can edit these options once the file is imported nnnn trigger value any integer from 1 to 2 000 You can use 1 to 4 digits for the trigger value o start and end of message ttt message text 0 to 80 characters for alarm messages 1 to 144 characters for information messages 1 to 256 for local messages Messages that are longer than the maximum are still imported however they are detected as errors when the application is validated You ll have to change them to the required length Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 10 12 Creating Messages Update Messages Ctrl U Close Ctrl FA Import Message File Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 CR Carriage return record delimiter Press RETURN or ENTER on your keyboard comment character Note The message components such as trigger values and message text must be separated by spaces Do not use csv Comma Separated Variable files as PanelBuilder does not yet support them for importing message text The following illustration shows a sample alarm message text file created in Notepad in Microsoft Windows Tutorial amg Notepad Iof x File Edit Search
449. state Indicator and Numeric Data Display Object Lists The Cursor List can have up to 999 items The operator or programmable controller can use the Scrolling List to control and monitor operations or to make selections Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 9 12 Creating Objects Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Shapes Drawing Objects Arcs can appear in any size or shape You can configure the arc to appear hollow or solid and change the line style or width You can also connect them with line objects to form rounded corners Ellipses are closed circular shapes You can configure the ellipse as hollow or solid and change the line style or width Lines are used to illustrate and to separate sections of screens Lines can be drawn in any direction and are available in various widths and formats Panels are similar to rectangles except that you can assign a border You can also assign a hollow or solid fill Rectangles can surround other objects or simply illustrate You can configure the rectangle as hollow or solid and change its line style or width Wedges or pie shapes are partial ellipses They are similar to arcs except they are closed You can configure them to appear hollow or solid and assign any line style or width Symbols Symbols are like Multistate Indicator objects except that the same monochrome bitmap appears for each state Symbols can show up to 255 states with user configurable values and
450. sting later in this chapter To use a PanelBuilder graphic image in a non PanelBuilder program import the image s file into the program as described in that program s documentation Creating Graphic Images Only imported images are available for selection To use an image that is notin the Current images list import it as described on the next page Creating Objects 9 29 Graphic images are static objects used to illustrate screens objects functions and so on You can add graphic images to the screen background or add them to an object as object labels Graphic images can be monochrome or color bitmap drawings that you import into a screen For graphic images you can use bitmaps or AutoCAD graphics saved in the dxf format Graphic images can be used as labels inside buttons For example you can add a graphic image for each state so the image changes as the state changes For details see Adding Labels later in this chapter Note You can resize graphic images See Sizing Objects later in this chapter Note Not all types of dxf images can be used in PanelBuilder See the Readme file which accompanies your software for details about which versions of dxf images will work with PanelBuilder Note dxf images are converted to wmf images when they are imported into PanelBuilder All images are converted to bmp images when the pvd file is written and all images are exported as bmp images To create
451. t Note Text lines don t wrap around To create a second text line press ENTER press or click the I beam in a new position When you create text inside an object as its label it will not go beyond the boundaries of the object If the text doesn t fit resize the object or use a smaller font To create text 1 Choose the Text tool by doing one of the following choose Text from the Objects menu choose from the toolbox press CTRL T The pointer changes to an I beam 2 Position the I beam on an empty part of the screen or inside an object and click To move the I beam using the keyboard use the arrow keys When the I beam is in the desired position press any key Note If you start typing inside an object the text automatically becomes a label See Adding Labels later in this chapter 3 Type the text While the text tool is selected you can continue creating text Move the I beam to another spot in the drawing area click and type If you re using the keyboard press Esc and use the arrow keys to move the I beam Press any key and begin typing 4 When you re finished creating text deselect the text tool Creating Objects 9 25 You can assign different foreground and background colors font sizes and fill styles See Changing Object Appearance later in this chapter Editing Text 1 Choose the Text tool as described above or select a text string and double click or right click th
452. t N A applicable Screen List Selector Static Both Not N A applicable Screen Print Button Static Both Not N A applicable Screen Select Keypad Static Touch Not N A Screen applicable Scrolling List object Dynamic Retentive Cursor List Both if so Multistate Indicator Object List Read configured Local Message Object List Read Numeric Data Display Object Read List Set Bit Cursor Point Dynamic Keypad Write Yes Symbol Dynamic Both Read Non retentive Text Static Both Not N A applicable Time Display Dynamic Both Not N A applicable Trend Dynamic Both Read Non retentive Wedge Static Both Not N A applicable Objects Available in PanelBuilder Creating Objects 9 7 The following sections provide an overview of the different objects and lists all the objects that are available in PanelBuilder ASCII Display ASCII Display object displays a character string sent from the programmable controller The display is updated whenever the string changes ASCII Input ASCII Input object is an on screen keyboard that allows the operator to create a text string This text string is sent to the programmable controller Bar Graphs Bar graphs display changing conditions in the process such as temperature or fluid levels Both horizontal and vertical bar graphs are supported Control Selectors Control List Selector with Enter Key contains a vertical list of choices An operator can use the object s Up Cursor and Down Cursor
453. t once and easy information transfer between applications PanelBuilder is easy to learn and use and helps you develop complex applications quickly and efficiently PanelBuilder contains the following editors and dialog boxes to help you build and configure your applications Application SAMPLE OL x 1200e Keypad Remote Private Tags E PLC Communications Communication Setup 4 Nodes Scan Classes l RIO Racks LP RIO Block Transfer Files System B Terminal Setup Tag Database Alarms RH PLC 1 0 Control 8 Information Messaqe Window Alarm Messages Information Messages Local Messages Screens Communications Setup dialog box for configuring communications baud rate and network type between the terminal and programmable controller and for defining control for downloading applications over the communications network Node and Scan Class editors for specifying programmable controllers and the scan rates at which the application will communicate Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 1 2 Introduction to PanelBuilder What Are You Building Version Compatibility Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 RIO RIO Racks and RIO Block Transfer Files editors for configuring the racks block transfer file definitions and pass through control byte for Remote I O application file transfers Terminal Setup dialog box for specifying the startup screen application type
454. t address a dash and the end word and bit like this 011 01 11 04 For String tags specify the length of the string in characters For Block tags specify the number of bits up to 1024 If the tag uses a discrete I O start address the number of bits allowed is 1 to 128 Use a block transfer file for longer block lengths See Chapter 11 Configuring Alarms for information about how block tags work to trigger and acknowledge alarms Tag Start Value The start value is the tag initial value or the object initial state value if one exists Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 2 28 Planning Applications Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 The Discrete I O Usage Worksheet Complete the Discrete I O Usage Worksheet at the same time as you complete the Remote I O Tags Worksheet so you can keep track of free and allocated PLC I O addresses The Discrete I O Usage Worksheet shows the PLC I O image table Use one Discrete I O Usage Worksheet for each full or partial rack assignment marking the PLC control bit s used in the tags assigned to each object window or PLC I O Control option Discrete I O Usage Worksheet Application File Name Rack Number or Listen Only Access Circle One PLC Output Bit Numbers 17 16 15 14 13 12 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7 i 1 i i PLC Input Bit Numbers 17 16 15 14 13 12
455. t object is permitted per Screen More than one cursor list object is on the screen Remove all but one cursor list objects The text is longer than the maximum allowed The user specified LARGE or double wide font size of the Information Window does not permit a message that is greater than 35 characters long Reduce the font size using the Information Window Configurator to allow messages up to 70 characters long Tag entry not found The tag is notin the tag database Add the tag to the tag database or use another tag Nota device tag There is a problem with the tag Check the tag data source definition Nota RIO tag There is a problem with the tag Check the tag data source definition Cannot create tag There is a problem with the tag Check the tag definition Tag tag name does not exist The tag is notin the tag database Add the tag to the tag database Error creating configuration There is a problem with the PLC Communication setup Close the application and re open it Cannot create channel There is a problem with the PLC Communication setup Close the application and re open it Cannot create scan class There is a problem with the PLC Communication setup Close the application and re open it There are more than 5000 used tags You have reached the maximum of 5000 assigned tags The PanelView terminal only Support
456. t supported The address cannot cross PLC data file boundaries The address syntax depends on the programmable controller s addressing convention For detailed information about address syntax see Appendix C Addressing Syntax gt Other Methods of Creating Tags Defining Tags 6 23 Specifying Remote I O as the Data Source Use the information on the Remote I O Tags worksheets to fill in the tag addresses 1 Choose Remote I O 2 In the Address field type the address Note For analog tags the address length depends upon the data type assigned The default data type is Unsigned Integer with an address length of 16 bits When assigning a Binary or Bit Position data type unless an address length is specified the address length defaults to 1 bit Byte defaults to 8 bits Long Integer defaults to 32 bits and 1 to 8 BCD defaults to 4 to 32 bits When assigning a Floating Point data type you must use a block transfer address The address syntax depends on the type of address you are defining discrete or block transfer For detailed information about address syntax see Appendix C Addressing Syntax Source Type C Device DDE Memory Remote 0 Address If you need to create a large number of tags you can use third party spreadsheet such as Microsoft Excel to do so Then you can import the tags to the application using PanelBuilder s Database Import function You can also create tags as
457. t the button 15 22 Width Height State 0 Normally Open Momentary Push Button 2 Click a second time to select the button s panel A 15 22 Width Height 60 Panel 3 Click a third time to select the button s label a 38 43 Width 32 Height 20 Text Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 9 18 Creating Objects Deselecting Objects To deselect this Do this A selected object SHIFT Click the object or Press SHIFT SPACEBAR Several selected objects Hold down suirr and drag a selection box around the objects or SHIFT Click each object All selected objects Click in the drawing area away from any objects or Press ESC When you deselect an object the handles around the object disappear Zooming In and Out Next State Previous State Alt P Grid Settings Use the Zoom In and Zoom Out commands to draw edit or position objects more easily Zoom Zoom Out Y Show Color Palette Y Show Toolbox When you first open a screen it is in normal view Use Zoom In to see objects in more detail Use Zoom Out to see an overview of the entire screen including the function keys on a keypad application To zoom in do one of the following choose Zoom In from the View menu choose from the toolbar To zoom out do one of the following choose Zoom Out from the View menu choose from the toolbar If you re at
458. ta from a programmable logic controller on the DH or ControlNet network If you have not configured the node and scan class for the tag you can configure them from the Tag Database editor while you are defining a tag or you can configure them after you have finished creating tags If you are going to define them after the tag is created make sure one of the node scan class or address fields is blank so that when you choose Accept PanelBuilder will not validate the tag and expect a valid tag record complete with supporting node and scan class definitions See Relaxed Validation below Defining Tags 6 21 Remote Data Source A tag with Remote I O as its data source receives its data from a programmable logic controller linked directly to the Panel View terminal through the I O rack If you are using discrete addresses you must configure the Remote I O racks before you can assign an address to a tag If you are using block transfer files you must configure these in addition to the racks before you can assign an address to a tag Relaxed Validation When you configure the data source for a tag if you leave any of the fields in the Data Source form section blank the tag definition will be saved but not validated If all the fields are filled in the tag will be validated when you choose Accept and any errors must be corrected before the tag definition will be saved Validation will include ensuring that any node scan cla
459. tag addresses You can also use a line for each expression to plan which ones you will need to define when you create the object For information about expressions see Chapter 7 Creating Expressions Initial State Value Objects such as Multistate Push Buttons have a user configurable initial state whose value will supersede the tag s initial value when the application is first run Tag Recording Tag and Expression Information Analog Tag only Initial Range Name Scale Offset Data value 9 The tag database records all the addresses used throughout an Values application Instead of assigning an address directly to an object you enter the address as a tag definition in the database and then assign the tag or an expression that uses one or more tags to an object If the same address is used by more than one object you need only define it once in the database For information about expressions see Chapter 7 Creating Expressions Some objects require more than one control tag or expression For example a Maintained Push Button needs a Button Control tag and an Indicator State tag or expression Record all necessary tag names and addresses in the worksheet as well as information about the expressions For each expression fill in the name of the expression in the object for example Indicator State the name of the tag or tags the expression will read data from
460. tags with folders reduces the time required to build the tag database and edit it later See Chapter 2 Planning Applications What Are Tags Tags offer these advantages They let you associate a symbolic name that is the tag s name with a PLC address Tag names eliminate the need to duplicate PLC addresses Once you define a tag you can specify that tag anywhere you want to reference the address Youcan easily change all instances of an address by just editing the tag e If you are creating more than one application that will be using the same PLC addresses you can create one tag database and share it between the different applications Youcan share tag information with other PanelBuilder 1400e and RSView applications and import tags from other Allen Bradley and Rockwell Software programs A tag database can be directly shared by PanelBuilder 1400e and RSView However since each product has different feature sets product specific information is stored with each tag This product specific tag information does not affect how the other product functions but will show up as disabled options and fields in the Tag Database editor Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 6 2 Defining Tags Tag Types Data Sources Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 PanelBuilder uses the following types of tags This tag Stores this type of data type Analog Range of values depends on the data type integer or floatin
461. tart Windows Out of environment space Add the following line to your AUTOEXEC BAT file shell e 4096 Unable to open shared database Database cannot be located Use Repair Shared command to repair the link between the data file and application Database is damaged missing or cannot be repaired Use New Database command to remove the bad database Then use Import Export or Select Shared to re populate the database tags Current application is already using the database Choose a different database Out of memory Close all Windows applications or other PanelBuilder applications to free up memory 8 databases are already open Close one or more PanelBuilder applications Unable to Open a New Application or Tag Database Not enough disk space Delete all unnecessary files on the hard disk Exit Windows and delete any temporary files in the temporary directory Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Problem Troubleshooting Cause What to Do Virtual Memory Swap file not large enough Windows 3 1 Use Control Panel 386 Enhanced Settings to reconfigure the size and type of the swap file We recommend using Permanent if 32 bit access is supported by your hardware Windows 95 Choose the Performance tab from the System folder in the Control Panel and set the minimum size of the virtual memory swap file to 5 MB and the maximum size to 16
462. te tag database to shared 6 33 tags 5 26 Copying applications 3 10 with shared tag database 3 10 expressions 7 23 objects 9 36 screen contents 8 4 screens 8 3 Counter mnemonics C 12 Creating applications 2 1 3 1 arcs 9 33 block transfer files 5 12 expressions 7 1 extended characters 9 25 folders 6 7 graphic image 9 29 labels 9 34 lines 9 33 messages 10 3 10 6 objects 9 20 9 22 panels 9 33 reports 3 12 symbols 9 26 screens 8 1 tag folder 6 4 tags 6 1 text 9 24 wedges 9 33 Cursor retain on cancel 12 10 Cursor visibility configuring retain cursor on cancel 12 10 Cutting objects 9 36 D Data flow optimizing for ControlNet 5 24 Data Highway Plus See DH Data sources 6 2 6 20 and relaxed validation 6 21 device 6 2 6 20 6 21 and scan classes 5 24 Remote 1 0 6 23 remote 1 0 6 2 6 21 specifying 6 21 6 23 Data types 2 24 2 47 BCD 2 25 2 49 binary 2 24 2 48 bit position 2 25 2 48 byte 2 24 2 48 default 2 24 2 48 floating point 2 24 2 48 in expressions 7 3 long integer 2 24 2 48 Signed integer 2 24 2 48 unsigned integer 2 24 2 48 Date and time in PanelView terminal date and time to PLC controller data tags 13 6 PLC controlled date and time control tag 13 4 Date and time to PLC controller data tags 13 6 Date display 9 5 9 13 9 21 Declaring local variables 7 6 Decrement value button 9 5 9 9 9 21 Default data type
463. tely by shrinking it until it disappears To retrieve the row click between the two row numbers of the rows above and below the hidden row and drag downwards If you forget where the hidden row is close the editor and reopen it to restore all the rows Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 What Are Communications Chapter 5 Defining Communications This chapter describes how to define communications for these network types e Remote I O e Data Highway Plus e ControlNet It also describes how to change your application from one network type to another Note For information about defining communications for a Modbus Application see the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Modbus User Manual Catalog Number 2711E 6 12 The term communications refers to the process of exchanging information between the programmable controller and the application on the Panel View terminal In addition to installing the physical equipment that connects the Panel View terminal to the PLC you must define communications in PanelBuilder so that the application can send and receive information in the appropriate form when it is running on the PanelView terminal This chapter describes how to define the communication parameters in PanelBuilder The first section of this chapter describes defining communications for Remote I O applications The second section describes defining communications for DH and ControlNet applications
464. terminal An example of a parameter would be the push button time required for the PLC to register button presses You can also specify the default behavior of objects in the application To open the Configure Terminal Setup dialog box 1 Open the application you want to edit 2 Open the System folder and choose Terminal Setup or choose from the toolbar The Configure Terminal Setup dialog box appears with two tabs General and Timing Parameters For keypad applications the Configure Terminal Setup dialog box has a third tab the Object Setup tab Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 12 2 Configuring Terminal Setup Options Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Configure Terminal Setup Eg E Timing Parameters Object Setup Application Startup Screen Screen m Cancel Application Type 1000 Keypad Application File Comment Target Firmware Version General Parameters The General tab is where you specify the Application Startup screen and change the application type You also use this tab to define a comment to be stored with the file and specify the version of Panel View firmware on which you want the application to run The Application Startup Screen The Application Startup screen is the first screen displayed on the terminal when the application starts up In a new application the Application Startup screen is preset to be the Alarm History screen s
465. the Configurator column Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Defining Tags 6 27 lag Usage Viewer tor Application LTR hau i TES er 2 p gt Tip To see a list of tags associated with one particular screen open that screen and choose Tag Usage Viewer from the screen editor s Screen menu To filter the list of tags 1 Select the Filter In Column button 2 Choose the column you want to set the filter in from the drop down list in the In Column field 3 Specify the limiting filter in the Filter String field The filter is not case sensitive 4 Select the Filter button Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 6 28 Defining Tags Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Example Setting Filters To seta filter to view tags that have addresses in the output file only do this 1 Select the Filter in Column button 2 Choose Address from the drop down list in the In Column field 3 Type o inthe Filter String Field 4 Select the Filter button To seta filter to view tags associated with the Alarm window only do this 1 Choose Configurator from the drop down list in the In Column field 2 Type Alarms in the Filter String column 3 Select the Filter button All the tags associated with the Alarm window will be listed To remove a filter 1 Select the Filter In Column button 2 Select the Remove Filter button This removes not only the most recent filter but all the filters that ha
466. the Network File Transfer tab To open the Configure Communication Setup dialog box Open the PLC Communications folder and choose Communication Setup or choose from the toolbar IDE Communication Sebup Setting up Terminal Communications In the Terminal Communications tab you can set the baud rate and the terminal network address Setting the Baud Rate The length of the Remote I O cable between the terminal and programmable controller dictates the maximum baud rate For maximum speed select the highest baud rate that supports your cable length For a cable up to Select this baud rate 2 500 feet 230 4K 5 000 feet 115 2K 10 000 feet 57 6 Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 5 4 Defining Communications Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 To define the baud rate 1 In the Configure Communication Setup dialog box choose the Terminal Communications tab 2 In the Baud Rate drop down list choose the desired baud rate This is the baud rate you noted on the Rack Assignments worksheet Note Not all PLCs support all baud rates For a list of supported baud rates consult the User s Manual for your PLC Setting Up Network File Transfers You specify the Pass Through network type establish the Panel View Location Routing Address and define Network Download controls in the Network File Transfer tab II Lu Communication Setup Tigers Gonmunicgioss The
467. the messages trigger values and alarm notification options from the message editor and paste them into the text editor of your choice To export messages using the clipboard 1 Select the area of the spreadsheet you want to copy 2 Choose Copy from the Edit menu from the toolbar or press CTRL C 3 Open the text editor to which you want to copy the messages 4 Paste the messages into the text editor You can validate your messages anytime in any of the views to ensure that you have followed all the guidelines for creating and editing messages To validate your messages 1 Choose Validate in the Edit menu A Validation Results window appears If your message list contains errors such as duplicate trigger values you ll see them listed in the window If there are no errors in the message list a check mark appears pU IE Ii Fei aget bris argin were ena raf Bow The bigger vale conc be ere 3 AI mesage er ane bink P udi p pini reise pr meng 2 If there are errors listed go back to the screen or the message editor and correct the errors Tip You can leave the Validation Results window open on your desktop while you re making the necessary changes to the message list You may want to resize the window and move it slightly off screen When you ve made a correction choose Update in the Validation Results window This will check the changes you ve made You can al
468. the Messages editors and both for the Node Rack and Block editors The View menu option with a check mark is the selected view If both Spreadsheet and Form have check marks both views are selected If only one view is selected the displayed view is dimmed so that it cannot be deselected Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 4 4 Working with Editors View Spreadsheet Form Go to Spreadsheet Ctrl PgDn Go to Form Ctrl PgUp Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 To view both the spreadsheet and the form Ensure both the Form and Spreadsheet options in the View menu have check marks If an option doesn t have a check mark choose it Both the spreadsheet and the form appear To view only the spreadsheet If Form has a check mark and Spreadsheet doesn t you cannot deselect Form Choose Spreadsheet from the View menu Then choose Form to deselect it If both have check marks choose Form so that its check mark disappears The spreadsheet appears You can create or edit records in this area when you use the Messages editors To view only the form Ifthe Spreadsheet option has a check mark and Form doesn t you cannot deselect Spreadsheet Choose Form from the View menu Then choose Spreadsheet to deselect it If both have check marks choose Spreadsheet so that its check mark disappears The form for the currently selected record appears You can create or edit records in this area Mo
469. the Scale Offset and Data Type fields String ASCII string series of characters or whole words maximum of 82 characters Use a string tag only with the ASCII Input and ASCII Display objects and optionally for sending alarm messages to the PLC Block A contiguous bit string of up to 1024 bits A block tag is used strictly for defining the Alarm Triggers and Acknowledge to PLC controls These controls can monitor and acknowledge multiple simultaneously active alarm conditions For details see Chapter 11 Configuring Alarms Note If you assign a block tag in a DH or ControlNet application the application will be compatible with PanelView Version 02 00 00 or later It will not be compatible with earlier versions e Scale Analog Tag Only Specify a value with 1 being the default The scale and offset work together to modify any raw data that comes from or is written to a programmable controller for example to convert the raw data into engineering units Offset Analog Tag Only Specify a value with 0 being the default The scale and offset work together to modify any raw data that comes from or is written to a programmable controller When the PanelView terminal reads a value from the PLC it multiplies this value by the scale value and then adds the offset before it writes the value to the terminal s value table Similarly when the terminal sends data to the PLC it first subtracts the offset and then divides by
470. the appearance of the object for each state For example if State 0 of a Normally Closed Momentary Push Button appears black and displays the word for state 1 you might change the color to white and add the word Off Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 9 56 Creating Objects These are the variable state objects This object have this many Is each state s states appearance individually configurable Multistate Indicator 2 255 Yes Multistate Push Button 2 255 Yes Scrolling List s Multistate Indicator 2 255 Yes Object List Symbol 2 255 Yes The table shows that multistate objects can have a different appearance depending on which state is active You can individually configure the appearance of each state When you create a new object each state s default appearance is already assigned To view the default state appearances 1 Select the object The status bar shows which state is being displayed 2 Select the object state to view by doing one of the following Next State Previous State Alt P Grid Settings choose Next State or Previous State from the View menu press ALT N for next state or ALT P for previous state select State o from the toolbar by using the mouse or by pressing CTRL SHIFT S and choose a state Zoom In Zoom Out Y Show Color Palette v Show Toolbox The appearance of the object changes The status bar indic
471. the database or add the tag to the database Tag tag name is nota device tag In the tag database the device source is incorrect for the network type Check the tag definition Bad value in State List A state value is undefined Ensure that all the state values for the object are assigned and unique Tag tag name start value of value conflicts with another object s start value The object s initial state value for write tag conflicts with another object that uses the same write tag but with a different initial state value Check the initial state for both objects to ensure they are both the same Bitmap name at position on screen This image does not fit in the object for which it is being used as a label All labels must fit within their containing object Move or resize the object or the bitmap Bitmap name at position on screen The image for this object is not present The image has been removed from the application or was never imported Check that the specified bitmap has been imported correctly Object name at position on screen Part of the objectis off screen An object or some element is partly off screen Reposition the object so it is completely on screen Symbol name at position on screen The image for this symbol must be monochrome A color bitmap is being used Import a monochrome bitmap Publication 2711E 819 J anua
472. the folder name 3 Choose OK The new folder appears in the hierarchy window AlarmGlobal AlarmStatus C3 Screen 10 Screen 40 Screen 50 Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 6 8 Defining Tags Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Nesting Folders There are two ways to nest a folder within another Open the containing folder Then add a new folder by specifying the folder name The path of the containing folder will already be placed in the New Folder Name field With all folders closed add a new folder by typing its full path For example Screen_10 Push_Buttons Normally_Open would add the folder highlighted in the illustration below E Alarms E gt Screen 10 L amp Push Buttons Normally Closed im Normally Open Important maximum number of characters allowed in the folder path and tag name is 40 The backslash in the folder path counts as a character Be aware of this when you are nesting folders In the example above the folder path takes up 36 characters This leaves only 4 for the tag name including a backslash Opening a Folder When you open a folder its contents are displayed in the spreadsheet To open a folder either double click the folder select the folder and press Enter To open multiple folders 1 Use one of these methods to select the folders click a folder and drag the mouse up or down click a folder and Shift click other folder
473. the racks and partial racks you will use The method for planning your racks depends on these factors type of programmable controller size of application you will create rack space available When you create an application you assign tags to dynamic objects windows and PLC I O Control options These tags define the programmable controller addresses to use You can assign two kinds of addresses for a tag discrete I O addresses block transfer file addresses To maximize the efficiency of your application plan the addresses before you begin creating the application Note You can also assign read tags to expressions Read tags display output from the PLC You can use expressions to manipulate the value of the read tag and display the result on the PanelView terminal See Chapter 7 Creating Expressions for more information Planning Applications 2 17 Discrete I O Addresses Discrete I O addresses communicate directly with the PLC They provide faster updates than block transfer file addresses but require more rack space Therefore keep the following objects in discrete I O all push buttons all states or values that you want updated immediately Because there is only a limited number of I O points you might not be able to use discrete I O addresses for your entire application If you do not have enough rack space create block transfer files Block Transfer File Addresses A block transfer file tran
474. the same bitmap is read each time it is used in the application If you resize one or more of the copies a new bitmap is saved for each size of the image which can increase the size of your application significantly Where bitmaps must be used use monochrome rather than color bitmaps Where possible use a Symbol instead of a Multistate Indicator Avoid creating two or more tags for the same PLC address If you create two or more tags pointing to the same PLC address the terminal will scan that same address location more than once For objects that have more than one state Use state values that increment by one for each state Do not configure more states than you need If you need to minimize the size of the application file do not assign names to objects Names use one byte per character Avoid creating two or more node definitions for the same physical node Set the background scan rate as slow as possible Keep screens simple Minimize or avoid object overlap Try to ensure an object s State Values or Message Trigger Values can be accommodated by a byte or integer value as opposed to a long integer For more information about configuring objects see the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Reference Manual Using Worksheets to Help Plan Your Application Step 1 Document the Process Step 2 Design Application Screens and Objects Planning Applications 2 5 This manual comes with workshe
475. the scale value to convert the value back to raw data before it is written to the PLC With Scale 1 and Offset 0 the default values PLC data is not changed Note For PLC output from Analog and Digital tags you can create expressions to manipulate or convert the data as needed Data Type Analog Tag Only Unless you have specific reasons for doing so that is if you want a special manipulation of the data use the Default data type Note Not all PLCs accept all data types For the list of valid data types for the PLC you are using see your PLC s User Manual Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 2 48 Planning Applications Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 An example of special manipulation of the data is to treat the data in the integer file N7 0 as a 4 digit BCD In this case you would specify 4 BCD as the data type Important No matter what data type is assigned the tag s entire address is read when a tag value is retrieved from the programmable controller For example for a tag with the address N7 00 and byte data type the terminal will still look at all 16 bits in the 0 element of integer file 7 Ensure that any unused bits in the address are 0 to prevent invalid values from being read Note that writing to a tag will update all bits in the address not just those implied by the tag s data type You can use the following Default If you select Default the data type is dictated by the addr
476. time and date regardless of whether they were triggered from a single tag or multiple tags Starting Trigger Each block tag must be assigned a starting trigger value from 110 65 535 you can assign a maximum of 2000 alarms The starting trigger is the trigger value of the alarm that is to be triggered by the first bit of the block tag For example if a block tag is configured for 10 bits and a Starting Trigger value of 1 it can be used to trigger alarms with trigger values 1 to 10 If that same block tag has a Starting Trigger value of 3 it can be used to trigger alarms with trigger values 3 to 12 Important For Bit triggered alarms each message must be uniquely triggered by a single block tag That is different block tags cannot trigger the same alarm Example 2 Using Multiple Alarm Tags for Bit Trigger Operation on Remote 1 0 Assume the following alarm messages and block tags are defined in the application Trigger Value Message Text essage 1 essage 2 essage 3 essage 4 essage 5 essage 6 essage 7 OY A w N rmn essage 8 Configuring Alarms 11 11 Trigger Value Message Text 9 Message 9 10 Message 10 11 Message 11 12 Message 12 Block Tag Name Address Length Starting Trigger Messages Triggered Alarm_tag1 0 010 00 4 1 Messages 1104 Alarm_tag2 0 010 04 5 5 Messages 5 to 9 Alarm_tag3 0 011 00 3 10 Messages 10 to 12 If the bits in
477. time the tag was set to the alarm s trigger value If multiple alarms are writing to the same tag multiple alarms will increase their Quantity value but only the most recent alarm will continue to increase its Acc Time value Configuring Alarms 11 45 Using the Alarm Status Screen Buttons The Alarm Status screen has several buttons the operator can use to get information This button Does this Display Mode Allows the operator to choose one of three viewing modes all alarms All active alarms only Active or previous alarms Past Silence Alarms Silences the beeper and unlatches the alarm relay if either was triggered by an alarm message It performs the same function as the Silence button in the Alarm Message Window Reset Qty Time if enabled Allows the operator to reset the alarm count to 0 and the accumulated time in alarm to 00 00 00 User confirmation is required For bit triggered alarms after a reset an active alarm that has not been re triggered will continue to log accumulated time the alarm will be displayed with Qty 0 and a non zero accumulated time For word triggered alarms the accumulated time data is not displayed so the display shows Qty 0 only Page Up Page Down Displays the previous or following page of alarms Cursor Up Cursor Down Moves up or down one line through the list of alarms Print Prints outthe alarm status of all the alarms in the c
478. ting from DH to ControlNet converting from ControINet to Remote I O converting from ControlNet to DH Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 5 26 Defining Communications gt Note You can either convert the application only or the application and its tags If you convert the tags edit their addresses to ensure they are valid for the new network type gt Note For information about converting applications to and from Modbus see the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Modbus User Manual Catalog Number 2711E 6 12 Converting from Remote When you change an application from Remote I O to DH you will to DH have to define the necessary DH nodes and scan classes and change any tag addresses that are not valid for DH device tags For more information see Defining Communications for a Data Highway Plus or ControlNet Application earlier in this chapter To change the network type from Remote 1 0 to DH 1 Choose Change Network Type from the Tools menu 2 In the Target Network field choose DH 3 To convert the tags in the application select the Convert Tags check box If you don t want to convert tags in the application clear the check from the Convert Tags check box Ifyou don t convert the tags to DH format the tags data source remains Remote I O For any tags to be used in the DH application you will have to change the data source to Device and give them valid DH address
479. tion Setup Temas Garrano Ele Trango Profane Leconte iu Cob Tranier Hpcunri Transler nhs wind 7 Specifying the Panel View Location Routing Address ControlNet For ControINet applications because no ControlNet bridge devices are available the PanelView Location Routing Address can only be a local network address DH If you are going to transfer the application to the Panel View terminal over directly rather than using serial Upload Download cable you must specify the Panel View Location Routing Address so that PanelBuilder can locate the Panel View terminal By default the Panel View Location Routing Address defined in the Network File Transfer tab is used If the Panel View terminal and the development computer are on the same network the Panel View Location Routing Address will be the terminal s DH station number It will be an octal number between 0 and 77 If they are on different but connected DH networks you must also specify a local and remote bridge address The following table shows the syntax for a remote station address bridged by a 1785 KA Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Defining Communications 5 19 Station Address Valid Entries ll rrr ss local bridge address 0 77 octal rrr remote bridge address 0 376 octal 55 Station address on remote DH 0 77 octal or You c
480. tion keys and tags cannot be defaults 1 Create the object whose defaults you want to assign 2 Edit the object as you want You can change the line or border colors and size If the object can have several states you can configure the different states as defaults However you cannot add text as a default 3 Choose Set Object Defaults from the Edit menu Every new object of this type you create in this application will appear like the one you just created Configuring Objects Ctrl Z Ctrl Y Cut Ctrl ex Copy Ctrl C Paste Copy with Controls Select All Duplicate Ctrl D Delete Del Clear All Make Label Set Object Defaults Configure Screen Object Convert to Wallpaper Unlock Wallpaper Import Export Graphic Creating Objects 9 53 Important The defaults you assign will apply to all applications you create and to all applications you modify If you want to create applications that use the original defaults before you assign new defaults you should exit PanelBuilder and rename the defltgfx file in the PB1400e directory or copy it to another directory To use the PanelBuilder defaults again rename the file to defltgfx or copy the file back to the PB1400e directory before opening PanelBuilder 1400e You can configure all dynamic objects and some static objects in the object s configuration dialog box The configuration information differs from object t
481. to PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows 1 Windows NT Compatibility P 1 ControlNetStation Addressing P 1 EthernetPass Through 1 CD ROM Installation 2 RSLinx Communication 5 P 2 Ium ZA P 2 Registering Your Copy of PanelBuilder1400e P 3 Available Documentation 3 Whats inthe User Manual 4 TT 4 Chapter 1 Introduction to PanelBuilder P 4 Chapter 2 Planning 0 5 4 Chapter 3 Working with Applications P 4 Chapter 4 Working with Editors P 4 Chapter 5 Defining 5 P 4 Chapter 6 Defining Tags P 4 Chapter 7 Creating Expressions P 4 Chapter 8 Creating Screens P 5 Chapter 9 Creating Objects P 5 Chapter 10 Creating Messages P 5 Chapter 11 Configuring Alarms P 5 Chapter 12 Configuring Terminal Setup Options P 5 Chapter 15 Transferring Applications P 5 Who Should Read This Manual P 6 Related Publications
482. u can create expressions to manipulate or convert the data as needed Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 2 24 Planning Applications Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 gt Data Type Analog Tag Only The type of data that the PLC address will accept Note Not all PLCs accept all data types For the list of valid data types for the PLC you are using see your PLC s User Manual Specify one of the following Default The default data type is an unsigned integer Unsigned Integer An unsigned integer occupies one 16 bit word stored in binary format The range of raw data values is from 0 to 65535 Integer A signed integer occupies one 16 bit word stored in two s complement format The range of raw data values is from 32 768 to 432 767 Long Integer A long integer occupies two 16 bit words stored in two s complement format The range of raw data values is from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 Floating Point Single precision 32 bit floating point The range of data values is 3 402823E 38 to 1 175494 37 0 and 1 175494E 37 to 3 402823E 38 For Remote I O applications the tag must use a Block Transfer File address Byte The byte data type occupies 8 bits of unsigned data The range of raw data values is from 0 to 255 Binary When this data type is assigned the object s PLC address will be a contiguous bit string 1 to 16 bits long The number of bits you assign determines the range of value
483. u press the Ack button on the Alarm History screen when no alarms are waiting to be acknowledged all bits in the Acknowledge to PLC control tag are reset to 0 This lets you reset the digital and analog tags Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 11 16 Configuring Alarms You can use the Acknowledge to PLC control tag to clear alarms as follows Example 3 Logic for Clearing Alarms when Using Bit Acknowledge to PLC Type with Block Tags Rung Ack to Alarm Alarm PLC Ack Trigger Tag One Shot Tag 1 010 B3 0 010 05 00 0 00 i Rung 2 i Alarm Alarm Alarm Condition Condition Trigger i One Shot Tag i 1 000 B3 0 010 M 1 4 ONS __L 00 1 00 Comments Rung 1 When the Acknowledged alarm is received by the PLC the alarm is cleared Rung 2 The alarm trigger value is sent to the PanelView terminal on a false to true transition of an alarm condition gt Note The alarm condition must make another false to true transition to trigger another alarm message in the PanelView terminal The Ack Control Tag ONS one shot instruction in the first rung is used because the Ack to PLC tag remains on until that same alarm is triggered again It is importantto place the unlatch rung before the latch rung to ensure proper alarm message triggering if both the alarm acknowledgment and new alarm condition occur in the same PLC program scan Publication 2711E 819 J anu
484. uary 1998 gt Note The address can also be specified as a length or a range For length use the format F S ww bb ll where ll is the bit length For range use the format F S ww bb ww bb Examples 07 is an input address pointing to word 7 O 2 01 01 is an output address pointing to bit 1 of word 1 on slot 2 10 0 13 is an input address with a length specified O 28 0 28 15 is an output address with a range specified PanelBuilder Problems Problem Appendix D Troubleshooting This appendix contains information about problems you could encounter using the PanelBuilder software It also contains causes of and suggested responses to PanelBuilder Error and Validation Error Messages you could encounter For information about troubleshooting file transfers see the PanelView 1200 1400e Transfer Utility User Manual The following table identifies some of the problems you could encounter using PanelBuilder software Cause What to Do Program won t run SHARE EXE has not been installed For Windows 3 1 add the following line to your AUTOEXEC BAT file share exe F 5100 L 600 A copy of PanelBuilder is already running Use the instance of PanelBuilder that is already running Not enough Low Memory below 1 MB Close all other programs You may need to run the MS DOS memmaker utility to free up memory below 1 MB Program crashed or terminated abnormally previously Res
485. uary 1998 Creating a Block Transfer File You can have up to 64 input or output block transfer files numbered to B64 In the Block editor you can also define the Remote I O Pass Through control byte for application file transfer Fill in the information from the worksheet in the steps that follow To define a block transfer file 1 In the File area of the editor select the file number and size for the block transfer file 2 File Number Specify the block transfer file number a number between B1 and B64 File Size This refers to the number of words in the block transfer file The default is 64 You can assign any number up to 64 Access The access Full or Listen Only is determined by the access of the file s control byte This field is updated automatically when you define the control byte s address Note The terminal can only write to a Full Access Input block transfer file For each block transfer file you must define a control byte This byte uses space in the discrete output table only In the Control Byte area of the editor choose the rack number word and byte for the control byte and specify whether it will be used for a read or a write block transfer Important You cannot enter the same control byte for tags or for the Pass Through File control byte Rack Number The rack numbers available for each file depend on the racks you assigned earlier Specify which rack will contain the control
486. uation character _ Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 7 14 Creating Expressions Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 IF analog_input gt 0 AND analog_input lt 1000 _ THEN temperature analog_input 100 _ 1000 100 Use this calculation if analog value is between 0 amp 1000 ELSE IF analog_input gt 1000 AND analog input 4000 THEN temperature analog input 1000 200 3000 200 Use this calculation if analog value is betw 1000 amp 4000 ELSE temperature analog input 4000 100 95 400 Use this calculation if analog value is betw 4000 amp 4095 ENDIF ENDIF Note that the expression uses nested If Then Else constructs Nested constructs can be hard to read Nested If Then Else constructs can often be replaced by a Select Case construct Creating Expressions 7 15 Example 3 Using the Select Case Construct in Expressions This example restructures the expression in the previous example using the Select Case construct This expression converts the analog input temperature probe value to degrees Celsius The temperature probe produces the following output Analog Celsius 0 100 0 1000 200 0 4000 400 0 4095 500 0 DIM analog_input AS INTEGER analog input is the variable name for the analog input from the probe DIM temperature AS SINGLE Temperature is the variable name for the temperature in
487. ughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attention statements help you to identify a hazard avoid the hazard recognize the consequences Important Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product PanelBuilder PanelView Data Highway Plus DH ControlNet and SLC are trademarks and PLC PLC 2 and PLC 3 are registered trademarks of Allen Bradley Company Inc RSView and RSLinx are trademarks of Rockwell Software Inc IBM PC PS 2 VGA and PC DOS are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation Epson is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation Ethernet is a registered trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation Intel and Xerox Corporation Microsoft Windows MS and MS DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Mouse Systems is a trademark of MSC Technologies Inc AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk Inc Taylor and ProWORXPLUS are registered trademarks of Taylor Industrial Software Inc MODICON MODSOFT Quantum and Modbus are registered trademarks of AEG Schneider Automation Inc All other brand and product names are trademarks of their respective companies and are hereby acknowledged Table of Contents Preface Welcome
488. uilder please consult the manuals or the online Help first If you can t find the answer take advantage of our Technical Support Fax Back system available 24 hours a day 7 days a week at 1 440 646 5436 or browse through our technical support document library at http www ab com mem prodserv services technotes techmain html on the World Wide Web Alternatively contact Allen Bradley Technical Support 1 Allen Bradley Drive Mayfield Heights Ohio 44124 6118 or call 1 440 646 6800 or fax 1 440 646 6890 for technical support between 8 AM and 5 EST Monday to Friday Please have the serial number for your software ready when you call or include it on your fax You can find this number in three places e on the Software Registration card that was shipped with your software e on the screen that appears when you start PanelBuilder inthe main Help menu when you choose About PanelBuilder Components Chapter 1 Introduction to PanelBuilder PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows is a configuration environment based on Microsoft Windows Use PanelBuilder 1400e to develop operator interface applications for PanelView 1000e 1200e and 1400e operator terminals or PanelView 1200 Enhanced Series F or later terminals that have been enhanced to MC catalog numbers The Windows platform offers many advantages including a superior graphical interface the ability to work within several applications a
489. ules 2 40 Key conventions P 9 Keypad objects 9 1 Keywords reserved F 1 L Labels 9 29 9 34 Last chassis 2 16 5 10 Last Quantity Time Reset stamp See Alarm status resettime date stamp Latched push button 9 5 9 10 9 21 Limits in expressions 7 8 Lines 9 5 9 12 9 21 9 33 changing styles 9 48 ist indicator 9 5 9 8 9 21 ist objects 9 59 resizing 9 59 Listen Only access 2 16 Local message display 9 5 9 9 9 21 Local messages 10 2 Local station address 2 38 Local variables assigning values to 7 7 declaring 7 6 evaluation of 7 7 in expressions 7 6 naming 7 6 syntax 7 7 reserved keywords F 1 Logic 5 software importing a database 6 36 Logical operations in expressions 7 16 Long integer data type 2 24 2 48 r Maintained push button 9 5 9 10 9 21 Maximums components number of in expressions 7 8 Message control 11 28 Message handshake 11 28 Message to PLC 11 24 Messages about 10 1 alarm 10 1 creating 10 3 10 6 editing 10 3 editors 10 1 exporting 10 10 10 13 file format for importing 10 11 formatting codes in 10 4 importing 10 9 file format for 10 11 using clipboard 10 9 information 10 1 local 10 2 mnemonics 14 saving 10 14 trigger value 10 2 updating 10 14 validating 10 13 Mnemonics block transfer C 14 C 15 control C 12 counter C 12 message C 14 PID C 13 SFC status C 15 tables C 12 timer C 12 token data C 15 Module
490. unications Converting from DH to Remote I O Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Since Remote I O does not make use of a terminal network address this field contains the default terminal address which is 2 For a ControlNet network the terminal network address must be between 1 and 99 decimal Ensure the value is correct for your application Important For versions 1 0 and 1 25 of ControlNet the PanelView Terminal Network Address should not be set to 1 the Network File Transfer tab the Panel View Location Routing Address will be set to the Terminal Network Address For details on configuring an application for ControlNet networks see Defining Communications for a Data Highway Plus or ControlNet Application earlier in this chapter If you change an application from DH to Remote I O you will have to define the necessary Racks specify the Block Transfer File and Pass Through control bytes if needed and change any tag addresses that are not valid for Remote I O To change the network type from DH to Remote 1 0 1 2 3 Choose Change Network Type from the Tools menu In the Target Network field choose Remote I O To convert the tags in the application select the Convert Tags check box If you don t want to convert tags in the application clear the check from the Convert Tags check box Ifyou don t convert the tags to Remote I O format the tags data source remains Device and the
491. upport block transfers to a Remote I O device Block transfer file assignments apply only if you re using another Remote I O scanner device See your scanner s User Manual to determine whether it supports the use of block transfers Block Transfer File Worksheet Application File Name PLC Scanner Type Baud Rate 57 6K 10 000 Ft 115 2K 5 000 Ft 230 4K 2 500 Ft Notes 1 Block Transfers are optional Record the Block Transfer File number and size write in one of the rack numbers from the previous worksheet circle the appropriate Word and Byte circle Read or Write and Access used Use additional worksheets if necessary If the Block Transfer File is on a Listen Only rack the file can only have Listen Only access The Pass Through Block Transfer File must be defined on a Full Access rack For each block transfer file mark off the byte in the output image on the Discrete I O worksheet Block Transfer File Assignments Byte Block Number Pass Through 64 012325567 Le d dese JL deesse o orazasser d E egi T E deis dd deesse LLL desee dL deesse 11 Joraeaaser pT fo 234567 ___ 01234567 Hi Hi Hi Hi Hi Hi Hi Hi Hi Hi Hi Hi Hi Hi Hi Hi Lo Lo Lo Lo Lo Lo Lo Lo Lo Lo Lo Lo Lo Lo Lo Lo Listen Only Read i Fu is wa Read Publication 2711E 819 J anua
492. ur exact PLC I O address requirements until you ve defined all the objects windows and PLC I O Controlled Options However you do need to know the rack numbers available so you can plan the PLC addresses Object Initial Ref No Type State Value Planning Applications 2 21 The Remote I O Tags Worksheet For each application screen use one or more Remote I O Tags Worksheets to record tag information for each dynamic object The Remote I O Tags Worksheet is available in Appendix A Only a few objects require that you fill in all the columns Also use Remote I O Tags Worksheets to record information about Alarm and Information Message windows and PLC I O Control options These items are not specific to a particular screen so use a separate worksheet for them Remote I O Tags Worksheet Application File Name Screen Number Object Tag Address Ref 4 B Analog Tag T Initial a Start 2 2 Te ame Offset ata Val 0 Add Ne Value Seale Type Values No of characters Value Address formats Discrete O rrw bb Iis input is output rr is rack number w is start word bb is optional bit offset numbers are octal e g 011 12 Block Transfer Bff ww bb is block transfer ff followed by a space is file number ww is start word bb is optional bit offset numbers
493. urrently active screen mode User confirmation is required Alarm History Opens the Alarm History screen Exit Depending on how the Alarm Status screen was initially invoked this button returns the operator to the Alarm History screen the Alarm Message Window or the last user defined application screen Important Whether the alarm quantity and accumulated time counts are reset manually by the operator from the Alarm Status screen or automatically by the programmable controller depends on how the screen is configured Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 11 46 Configuring Alarms Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Resetting the Alarm Status Screen s QTY TIME The Alarm Status screen s quantity and time counts QTY TIME are reset when the PLC Controlled QTY TIME Reset tag or expression changes from 0 to non zero Alarm monitoring continues even though the tag value is non zero The operator can also reset the Alarm Status screen s QTY TIME depending on how the screen is configured Important When the Alarm Status screen is reset all the Alarm Quantity and Accumulated Time fields in the Alarm Status screen are reset to 0 The programmable controller can reset the Alarm Status screen only if the PLC Controlled QTY TIME Reset control is assigned The operator can reset the Alarm Status screen by pressing and confirming the Reset Qty Time button if enabled downloading or selecting a new appl
494. use separate hard wired operator interface devices that do not depend on solid state electronics For more details about safety standards refer to the inside cover of this manual The PanelView 1000e and 1400e touch screen terminals use analog resistive touch screens This allows input objects to be any size minimum 40 by 40 pixels and to be placed anywhere on the screen The analog resistive touch screen provides greater flexibility in screen design compared to PanelView 1200 and 1200e terminals PanelView 1200 and 1200e terminals use a touch matrix which requires that all input objects align with a touch grid RIO Planning Applications 2 3 ATTENTION Do not press multiple touch screen locations at the same time In the unlikely event that two or more touches occur simultaneously in the same horizontal or vertical line an input object located half way between the two touches could be activated This is inherent in the analog resistive touch screen technology used in Panel View 1000e and 1400 terminals Programming the Controller for Safety The Panel View terminal will shut down its communications under the following conditions terminal is switched to Configuration mode terminal loses AC power e terminal has a major fault e Remote I O DH or ControlNet link fails In these situations the PanelView terminal can no longer control or monitor programmable controller functions In a Remote I O application the host co
495. uttons have a user configurable initial state whose value will supersede the tag s initial value when the application is first run This is called the tag s Start Value Tag Start Value The start value is the tag initial value or the object initial state value if one exists For information about addressing syntax refer to Appendix C Addressing Syntax Object Initial Ref No Type State Value Recording Object Information For each object fill in the following e RefNo The object s unique identification number Usually you can start with 1 and increase by 1 for each object Start from 1 again for each screen so that adding an object to the first screen doesn t require that all other numbers change Type The type of object such as Interlocked Push Button Some objects use several tags or expressions See online Help or the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Reference Manual or look at the PanelBuilder objects themselves to plan which tags or expressions to use for each object Use one line in the Device Tags worksheet for each tag and use the Type column to describe the function of the additional tags Expressions are optionally used to read and manipulate the PLC output at the tag addresses You can also use a line for each expression to plan which ones you will need to define when you create the object For information about expressions see Chapter 7 Creating Expressions
496. ve been applied to the list of tags Searching for Text You can search for any specific text in the Tag Usage Viewer To search for text in the Tag Usage Viewer 1 Select the Search button 2 In the Find String field specify the text you are searching for The search is not case sensitive 3 Specify whether you want to search down a particular column or across all rows by choosing Down Column or Across All Rows in the Search Direction field Defining Tags 6 29 The Down Column option searches only in the currently selected column The Across All Rows option searches the entire list starting at the top left corner working its way across the row before moving on to the next row 4 Select the Search button PITT E Ine Applic TE TUTO WER i Ea ro Search Coinn Acmes All ows Tag 15 Bee Digital Tull JAM Hemarcarg H puilen Indicsrer Tag DIES i7 Bir Digita Pulj 4 Homspcarg Mob Pasi Tag DIES 1 17 1 Digital 1 eee 1 LOG ee Lad abe 1051 DIE3 1 fl B Bin kalog Full Screens Last H4 L EZ Tag DIES 1 4 15 Bin z Muli Ciel List Salaccar Camel Bind Amal Full Berxespal T G4 2765 Ciel Liar Seleccur 02 Ein 1 Full meen 32 2183 CAEL List Bel
497. vided into two parts The Expression section consists of a drop down list containing all the controls for the dialog from which the Expression editor was launched Below the control name is a text area where you enter and edit the expression The Results section consists of a message area where the results of Check Syntax are displayed The Go To button is active only when a syntax error is displayed and is used to go to the line in the expression at which the syntax error is found At the bottom of the Expression editor dialog is a status line which displays messages about any selections you make Entering and Formatting Expressions The Expression editor is a free form text edit area where you can enter expressions The number of the current line is displayed beneath the text area with a percentage indicator which displays the available memory space for the current expression You can create expressions of up to 2 048 characters with a maximum of 1 024 characters on a single line To select an expression component from the list double click an entry in the list If the component requires arguments the cursor flashes at the position where the first of the arguments is required Creating Expressions 7 23 You can indent lines of text by preceding the first character on the line with any number of spaces When you press Enter to start a new line the cursor is automatically moved to the position at which the first character of the pr
498. ving between the Spreadsheet and the Form When the spreadsheet and the form are open at the same time you can move from one to the other e If you re using the mouse click in any field of the spreadsheet or the form The cursor will appear and you ll be able to enter text e If you re using only the keyboard choose Go to Spreadsheet or Go to Form from the View menu or press CTRL PGDN or CTRL PGUP Help y Spreadsheet v Form Go to Tag Spreadsheet CtrltPgDn Go to Query Box Ctrl Q Go to Folder Hierarchy Ctrl H Go to Tag Form Ctrl PgUp Refresh Spreadsheet Font Restore Default Settings v Toolbar y Status Bar Application Window Working with Editors 4 5 Using Multiple Editors You can have multiple Messages editors open at one time to copy text from one editor to another or to view messages in different editors at the same time To open multiple Messages editors With one Messages editor open double click another Messages editor in the Application window You can also open the Tag Database and Node editors at the same time for DH and ControlNet applications For Remote I O applications you can open the Tag Database Rack and Block editors at the same time To do this use the Application Window To use the Application Window With one of the editors open click or choose Go to Project Manager from the View menu The Project Manager dialog box opens Pa
499. windows displayed on the terminal will be printed The programmable controller must maintain the set bit long enough to ensure that the terminal doesn t miss it Note You can also allow manual screen printing by adding a Screen Print Button to screens Refer to Chapter 9 Creating Objects for more information on creating buttons About Screen Prints from the Terminal Screen prints can be requested by the programmable controller or initiated manually by the operator pressing a Screen Print Button object If a PLC Controlled Screen Print is detected in the same Remote I O scan as a PLC Controlled Screen Change the screen will change before the new screen is printed Screen prints are depicted as they actually are but in gray scale rather than color Important A screen print captures the terminal screen image and prints a gray scale representation of the screen If you are using a PLC Controlled Screen Print option ensure that your screen saver is disabled Otherwise if the screen saver is displayed when the print request is received only the screen saver not the application screen and pop up windows will be printed PLC Controlled Date amp Time Control Assigning a digital tag to the PLC Controlled Date amp Time Control allows the programmable controller to obtain the time and date and to reset the terminal s internal clock to match The PLC Controlled Date amp Time Control defines the PLC address that triggers the ter
500. wn list Click the pointer to select revnna Cole Tui ni Tega Frama Varzien ns and ap the desired tab Click in the field and begin typing To assign an address Click an option to select it and then click Assign Tag Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Tranzisr Hipcunri Tranier Ue erred mnm Form Spreadsheet Editors Cell or field Rows or Records Working with Editors 4 3 The Nodes RIO Racks and RIO Block Transfer Files editors and the three Messages editors Information Messages Alarm Messages and Local Messages all have a form and a spreadsheet component Using the Spreadsheet and Form A spreadsheet is a grid of rows and columns Each intersection of a row and a column forms a cell Information Messages KC TUTOR Trigger Value Message Text Column Prev Form View S Spreadsheet View Before you begin working in the spreadsheet familiarize yourself with these terms Record Each row in the spreadsheet is called a record A record is one complete entry For example in the Node editor one record is one complete definition of a PLC controller The form area displays one record at a time Field Each cell in a row constitutes a field You can view information in the form in the spreadsheet or both at once The default view is the spreadsheet for
501. write tag Assigning Write Expressions later in this chapter describes how to create write expressions for these objects Note The Numeric Input Cursor Point s Raise and Lower keys are disabled if it is assigned a write expression PanelView evaluates an expression whenever the value of a tag that is referenced in the expression changes Multiple references to the same tag will have the same value Tag values are updated in a DH or ControlNet application based on the tag s assigned scan classes which will affect when PanelView evaluates its expressions PanelView evaluates the expression until it encounters an Exit statement or until it has evaluated the last statement of the expression Evaluation also stops if an Unreliable expression result or tag value is encountered After Panel View has finished evaluating the expression if the result is Reliable Panel View returns the evaluation result This result is displayed on screen Creating Expressions 7 3 If one of these conditions causes the result to be Unreliable a minor fault message is displayed division by 0 e a value in the expression is out of range of the expression s Long or Single data type the expression calculation results in an out of range value e a tag value is out of range the tag s address does not exist If the expression is assigned to a pen in the Trend object and the PLC communications are lost the expression s value will be
502. y third party software such as Microsoft Excel You can also create a database in Excel save it as a csv file and then import it into PanelBuilder Tip An exported PanelBuilder 1400e database can also be imported back into the application This means you can use the Database Export feature to backup or update the database When you import a database the tag definitions are copied into your current database If the database is private it remains private A shared database remains shared PanelBuilder supports the following import file formats e PanelBuilder csv exported by RS View and PanelBuilder e A Series csv exported by the A I Series software Logic 5 csv exported from a Logic 5 database see note below e PanelBuilder Tag Database an independent tag database e Taylor ProWORXPLUSQ database e MODSOFT database in flat text format Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 6 36 Defining Tags Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Note To import information from an Series database you must first export the database in text format using the A I software PanelBuilder imports this text file To import a Logic 5 database export it to a text file and import this into A I software You can then export the text file from A I as you would any other A I database and import it to PanelBuilder You can also import a PanelBuilder 900 database by exporting it in an A I text format and then importing this i
503. your worksheets contain all the information you need to create your application To create your application work through the remaining chapters in this manual as described in Steps for Building an Application at the beginning of this chapter Creating a New Application New Application Open Application Upload Download Exit Ctrl N Ctrl 0 Alt F4 Chapter 3 Working with Applications This chapter introduces you to the basics of working with applications It shows you how to e create new applications open existing applications convert applications created in PanelBuilder for DOS or PanelBuilder 1200 to PanelBuilder 1400e format save applications copy applications change the application name e create application reports close applications delete applications Important This chapter assumes you have a good working knowledge of the Microsoft Windows operating system For detailed information refer to your Microsoft Windows User s Guide if you use Windows 3 1 Introducing Microsoft Windows 95 if you use Windows 95 or Introducing Microsoft Windows NT Workstation if you use Windows NT To create a new application 1 Choose New Application from the File menu or from the toolbar or press CTRLIN The New Application dialog box appears New Application F3 Application Type 1000e Keypad 1000e Touch Screen Cancel 1200e Keypad 1200e Touch Screen 1400e K
504. your application via DH or ControINet networks using a Direct download or a Remote I O download you should define the network file transfer controls They allow you to control and monitor the download process and to communicate the status of the PanelView terminal to other devices Publication 2711E 819 anuary 1998 5 20 Defining Communications Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Important You must assign all three controls for the mechanism to work properly There are three network download controls You can assign tags only to these controls Transfer Inhibit When this control is set to non zero the terminal won t permit a download We recommend you assign a digital tag type The tag s PLC address will be read by the terminal Typically it will be set and cleared by the PLC Transfer Request This control is set to 1 by the terminal when it receives a download request The control is reset to 0 when the download starts If a file download is prevented by the Transfer Inhibit control this control will be set to 1 You can program the PLC to clear the Transfer Inhibit control when this control is set to 1 This will allow subsequent file transfers to proceed We recommend you assign a digital tag type The terminal will write to the tag s PLC address Transfer Status This control is set to 1 by the terminal when it receives the first download block transfer It remains set throughout the transfer and is
505. ypad applications Push Buttons Interlocked Push Buttons function as a group When one of the buttons in the group is pressed it cancels the other buttons and makes the selection All the buttons in the group are added individually All buttons use the same Button Control Tag but each button has its own control value The value at this tag identifies which button in the group is the currently selected option For example the operator can press an Interlocked Push Button to choose one motor speed out of several possibilities You can also use a single Interlocked Push Button to set a value in the programmable controller Latched Push Button changes state when pressed and remains in the changed state until unlatched by the programmable controller Maintained Push Button changes state when pressed and remains in the changed state when released Pressing the push button a second time changes the button back to its original state Momentary Push Button Normally Open or Closed changes state when pressed and changes back to its Initial State when released Multistate Push Button sends one of a series of user configured state values to the Button Control Tag each time the operator presses the button You configure how many states this button has to a maximum of 255 and assign a value to each state Each time the operator presses the button the value assigned to the next state is sent to the programmable controller When the last value i

2711E-819, PanelBuilder 1400e Software for Windows User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents